January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Contents
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights 47-1
47
Pushbuttons &
Indicating Lights
Description Page
Toggle Switches — E10 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-2
Toggle Switches — E10E Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-7
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled — All Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-13
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight — E22 and EM22 Series . . . . . . 47-28
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight — E30 Series. . . . . . . 47-99
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight — 10250T Series . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-115
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight — E34 Series . . . . . . . . 47-166
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight — HT800 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-195
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations — 10250T/E34 Series . . 47-215
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-243
HT800 Series
January 2010
47-2
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Toggle Switches
E10 Series
Contents
Description Page
Product Description . . . . . . . . . 47-2
Standards and
Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-2
Technical Data and
Specifications
Toggle Switches. . . . . . . . . . 47-2
Hesitation Switches. . . . . . . 47-2
Pushbutton Actuators . . . . . 47-2
Product Selection
Toggle Switches. . . . . . . . . . 47-3
Hesitation Switches. . . . . . . 47-4
Pushbutton Actuators . . . . . 47-4
Circuit Arrangements. . . . . . . . 47-4
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-5
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-6
Catalog Number
Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-6
Product Description
Cutler-Hammer® E10 switches from
Eaton’s electrical business are
intended for general purpose light
industrial use. Designed for retrofit
and OEM applications, the one-hole
mounted units feature a bright nickel
plated lever and a 0.468"-32 diameter
threaded bushing with a 0.068 x 0.035
inch (1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway for
anti-rotation. Mounting hardware, con-
sisting of one hexagonal locknut, one
knurled or hexagonal face nut, and #6-
32 x 3/16" (where applicable) binding
head terminal screw. All are furnished
unassembled in individually sealed
poly bags, packed 10 per carton.
Standards and Certifications
■UL Recognized — File No. 2702
■CSA — File No. LR40068
Technical Data and
Specifications
Toggle Switches
■AC Ratings:
6 – 20A, 125V AC
3 – 10A, 250V AC
Max. 3/4 hp @ 250V AC
■DC Ratings:
6 – 20A, 28V DC
■Electrical Life: 6,000 cycles make/
break at switch ampere rating
■Operation:
❑Slow make/slow break mechanism
with butt action for AC and low
voltage DC applications
❑Maintained and momentary
contacts
■Poles/Throws: 1 through 4, single
and double throw
■Mounting:
❑One hole with threaded 0.468"-32
bushing and 0.068 x 0.035 inch
(1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway that
serves as anti-rotational feature
■Lever Lengths: 0.563 inch (14.3 mm)
or 0.688 inch (17.5 mm), bright
nickel plated
■Terminals: Screw, 0.250 inch (6.4 mm)
spade and solder lug
Hesitation Switches
■Operation:
❑Slow make/slow break mechanism
with butt action for AC and low
voltage DC applications; main-
tained contacts; ideal for reversing
motor applications; patented
interlock mechanism prevents
operation of lever through center
position until manual pressure is
momentarily relieved.
■AC Ratings:
15A, 125V AC
10A, 250V AC
Max. 3/4 hp at 250V AC
■DC Ratings:
15A, 28V DC
■Poles/Throws: 2, 3 and 4, double
throw only
■Mounting:
❑One pole with threaded 0.468"-32
bushing and 0.068 x 0.049 inch
(1.7 x 1.2 mm) deep keyway
■Lever Length: 0.687 inch (17.4 mm),
stainless steel
■Terminals: Screw
Pushbutton Actuators
■AC Ratings:
6 – 15A, 125V AC (NO)
3 – 10A, 250V AC (NO)
Max. 1/3 hp @ 125/250V AC
■Operation:
❑Slow make/slow break mechanism
❑Normally open contacts
■Poles/Throws: Single, single and
double throw
■Mounting:
❑One hole with 0.468"-32 threaded
bushing and 0.068 x 0.035 inch
(1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway
❑Two bushing heights: 11/16 inch
(17.5 mm) and 11/32 inch (8.7 mm)
■Button Extensions: 17/32 inch
(13.5 mm) and 1/4 inch (6.4 mm),
bright nickel plated
■Terminals: Screw
Toggle
Switch
Pushbutton
Actuator
Hesitation
Switch
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-3
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Toggle Switches
E10 Series, Toggle Switches
Product Selection
Toggle Switches
Table 47-1. Toggle Switches — AC Rated — Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces
See Figure 47-1 Circuit Arrangements on Page 47-4.
( ) = Momentary contacts, spring return action.
Nominal AC Ratings Poles
and
Throw
Function — Circuit
with Lever In
Screw Terminal 0.250 Inch (6.4 mm)
Spade Terminal
Solder Lug
Amperes hp UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position —
Keyway
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
125V 250V 250V
1-Pole
2-Pole
3-Pole
4-Pole
1-Pole
6
15
20
3
10
10
—
3/4
3/4
1 P.S.T. ON None OFF E10T106AS
E10T115AS
E10E120AS
E10T106AP
E10T115AP
E10E120AP
E10T106AL
E10T115AL
E10E120AL
6
15
20
3
10
10
—
3/4
3/4
1 P.D.T. ON OFF ON E10T106DS
E10T115DS
E10E120DS
E10T106DP
E10T115DP
—
—
E10T115DL
—
6
15
20
3
10
10
—
3/4
3/4
1 P.D.T. ON None ON E10T106ES
E10T115ES
E10E120ES
—
E10T115EP
—
—
E10T115EL
—
— 10 1/2 1 P.S.T.
1 P.D.T.
1 P.D.T.
1 P.D.T.
OFF
ON
ON
(ON)
None
OFF
None
OFF
(ON)
(ON)
(ON)
(ON)
E10T115BS
E10T115FS
E10T115HS
E10T115GS
E10T115BP
E10T115FP
E10T115HP
E10T115GP
—
—
—
—
2-Pole
6
15
20
3
10
10
—
3/4
3/4
2 P.S.T. ON None OFF E10T206AS
E10T215AS
E10E220AS
E10T206AP
E10T215AP
E10E220AP
—
E10T215AL
E10E220AL
6
15
20
3
10
10
—
3/4
3/4
2. P.D.T. ON OFF ON E10T206DS
E10T215DS
E10E220DS
E10T206DP
E10T215DP
E10E220DP
—
E10T215DL
—
6
15
20
3
10
10
—
3/4
3/4
2 P
.D.T. ON None ON E10T206ES
E10T215ES
E10E220ES
—
E10T215EP
—
—
E10T215EL
—
15 10 1/2 2 P.S.T.
2 P.D.T.
2 P.D.T.
OFF
ON
(ON)
None
None
OFF
(ON)
(ON)
(ON)
E10T215BS
E10T215HS
E10T215GS
—
E10T215HP
E10T215GP
—
—
—
3-Pole
15 10 3/4 3 P.S.T.
3 P.D.T.
3 P.D.T.
ON
ON
ON
None
OFF
None
OFF
ON
ON
E10E315AS
E10E315DS
E10E315ES
E10E315AP
E10E315DP
E10E315EP
—
E10E315DL
E10E315EL
4-Pole
15 10 3/4 4 P.S.T.
4 P.D.T.
4 P.D.T.
ON
ON
ON
None
OFF
None
OFF
ON
ON
E10E415AS
E10E415DS
E10E415ES
—
—
—
E10E415AL
E10E415DL
E10E415EL
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-4
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Toggle Switches
E10 Series, Hesitation Switches and Actuators
Hesitation Switches
Table 47-2. Hesitation Switches — Special Purpose — Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces
See Figure 47-1 Circuit Arrangements below.
Note: Interlock mechanism prevents operation of lever through the center position until pressure is momentarily relieved.
Designed for control and protection of reversing motors.
Pushbutton Actuators
Table 47-3. Pushbutton Actuators — Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces
See Figure 47-1 Circuit Arrangements below.
Rated 1/4 hp at 125V, 1/2 hp at 250V.
Circuit Arrangements
Figure 47-1. Circuit Arrangements
Approximate Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
Nominal Ratings Operation Function — Circuit
with Lever In…
Poles
and
Throw
Screw Terminal
Amperes hp UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position —
Keyway
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
28V
DC
125V
AC
250V
AC
250V
AC
15 15 10 3/4 Maintained ON OFF ON 2 P.D.T.
3 P.D.T.
4 P.D.T.
E10E215SS
E10E315SS
E10E415SS
Approximate
Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
Nominal Ratings Poles
and
Throw
Contacts Bushing
Length
Inches (mm)
Dim. “A”
Button
Extension
Inches (mm)
Dim. “B”
Typical
Maximum
Operating
Force
Screw Terminal Spade Terminal
0.250 Inch (6.4 mm)
Amperes AC hp Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
125V 250V 125 –
250V
NO NC NO NC
6 — 3 — — 1 P.S.T. NO 0.69 (17.5)
0.34 (8.6)
0.53 (13.5)
0.25 (6.4)
0.9 lbs. E10P106RS
E10P106JS
E10P106RP
—
15 — 10 — 1/3 1 P.S.T. NO 0.69 (17.5)
0.34 (8.6)
0.53 (13.5)
0.25 (6.4)
0.9 lbs. E10P115RS
E10P115JS
E10P115RP
—
15 10 10 5 1/4 1 P.D.T. NO, NC 0.69 (17.5) 0.53 (13.5) 1.0 lbs. E10P115LS —
1.47
(37.3)
0.47-32
Thread
0.07 (1.8) x
0.05 (1.3)
Keyway
1.34
(34)
1.25
(31.8)
0.47
(11.9)
0.69
(17.5)
1.13
(28.7)
0.47-32
Thread
0.04 (1) x 0.07 (1.8)
Keyway
1.13
(28.7)
A
B
0.63
(16)
SPST
DPST
SPDT
DPDT
4PST
3PDT
4PDT
3PST
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-5
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Toggle Switches
E10 Series, Accessories
Accessories
Table 47-4. Accessories — Minimum Order Quantity 100 Pieces
Description Material/Notes Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Approximate Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
Hexagon Locknut Zinc-Chromate Treated Steel E10TA101
Knurled Face Nut Zinc-Chromate Treated Steel E10TA102
Internal Tooth Lockwasher Cadmium Plated Steel E10TA103
Terminal Screws #6-32 x 3/16" Binding Head E10TA201
Spade Terminal Adapter — 0.250 inch (6.4 mm) Assembles to Screw Terminals E10TA202
ON-OFF Indicating Plate — Vertical Orientation Burnished Nickel Finish Steel E10TA301
OFF-ON Indicating Plate — Horizontal Orientation Burnished Nickel Finish Steel E10TA302
Flip-Up Guard
for Toggle Switches
E10TA104
Fixed Shroud for
Toggle Switches
E10TA105
0.63
(16)
0.08
(2)
0.63
(16)
0.07
(1.8)
0.63
(16)
0.06
(1.5)
0.03
(.8)
1.0
(25.4)
ON
OFF
O
N
O
F
F
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-6
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Toggle Switches
E10 Series — Catalog Number Structure
Dimensions
Table 47-5. Toggle Switch — Approximate Dimensions
Note: Spade terminal adapters are used on 6 ampere, 20 ampere and momentary screw terminal switches, adding 0.42 (10.7) to dimension C.
Catalog Number Structure
Table 47-6. E10 Catalog Numbering System — Not to be used for ordering purposes
( ) = Momentary contacts, spring return action.
No.
of
Poles
Operation Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Bushing
Length
A
Lever
Length
B
Screw Terminals Spade Terminals Solder Lug
CDECDECDE
1 Momentary
& Maintained
0.47
(11.9)
0.56
(14.2)
1.00
(25.4)
1.17
(29.7)
0.63
(16.0)
1.13
(28.7)
1.13
(28.7)
0.63
(16.0)
1.00
(25.4)
1.13
(28.7)
0.63
(16.0)
2 Maintained 0.47
(11.9)
0.56
(14.2)
1.06
(26.9)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
1.19
(30.2)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
1.06
(26.9)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
Momentary 0.47
(11.9)
0.56
(14.2)
1.25
(31.8)
1.31
(33.3)
1.25
(31.8)
3 Maintained 0.47
(11.9)
0.69
(17.5)
1.27
(32.3)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
1.37
(34.8)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
1.23
(31.2)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
4 Maintained 0.47
(11.9)
0.69
(17.5)
1.20
(30.5)
1.30
(33.0)
1.40
(35.6)
1.30
(33.0)
1.34
(34.0)
1.40
(35.6)
1.23
(31.2)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
D
E
C
A
B
E 1 0 T 1 0 6 A S = E 1 0 T 1 0 6 A S
Series
Lever Length
T =
E =
0.563 inch (14.3 mm) Lever
0.688 inch (17.5 mm) Lever
Poles
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
1 Pole
2 Pole
3 Pole
4 Pole
Ratings — 125V
06 =
15 =
20 =
6 Amperes
15 Amperes
20 Amperes
Function
A =
B =
D =
E =
F =
G =
H =
ON - None - OFF
OFF - None - (ON)
ON - OFF - ON
ON - None - ON
ON - OFF - (ON)
(ON) - OFF - (ON)
ON - None - (ON)
Complete Cat. No.
0.563 inch (14.3 mm)
1-Pole
6 Amperes
ON - None - OFF
Screw Terminal
Termination
S =
L =
P =
Screw
Solder Lug
Spade
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-7
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches
Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series
Contents
Description Page
Environmentally Sealed Toggle
Switches
Molded-In Screw Terminal
E10E Series . . . . . . . . . . . 47-7
Econoswitch E10E Series . 47-9
Switch Guard . . . . . . . . . . . 47-12
Features
■Completely sealed against dust,
moisture and other contaminants
■One-hole mounted bushing for easy
installation
■Multi-circuits offered
■2- and 3-position with maintained
and momentary action
■Molded-in terminal inserts and
terminals numbers
■1- and 2-pole circuitry
Options
Note: Contact your local Eaton Sales Repre-
sentative for more information.
■Non-UL Recognized devices
❑Alternate toggle levers
❑Locking toggle levers
❑Rocker buttons
■Special mounting hardware
■Mounting hardware furnished
assembled
■Terminal screws furnished
assembled
■Special circuits
■Panel seal, part number 32-341
■Spade terminal adapters available
Standards and Certifications
■UL — File number E15346; Guide
card number is WOYR2
■CSA — LR40068, class number 6241
Technical Data and
Specifications
■Watertight seal per MIL-STD-108E
and designed to meet IP68
■Thermoset molding materials meet
flame retardant requirements
■Temperature Range: -50° to 150°F
(-46° to 66°C)
■Life: 20,000 operations at rated load;
40,000 operations mechanical life;
6,000 operations at hp ratings per
UL and CSA requirements
■Bushings: 15/32" – 32 thread
Product Selection
Table 47-7. Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series Toggle Switch Product Selection
One-Pole and Two-Pole
Molded-In Screw Terminal
Nominal AC Ratings Circuit with Lever Position Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Amperes 1-Phase hp 3-Phase
hp
Up Center Down (Keyway)
125V 250V 125V 250V 125/250V
One-Pole
18 9 1/4 1/2 — ON
ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
ON
OFF
ON
E10E118DM
E10E118AM
E10E118EM
Two-Pole
18 9 1/2 1 — ON
ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
ON
OFF
ON
E10E218DM
E10E218AM
E10E218EM
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-8
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches
Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series
Dimensions
Figure 47-2. One-Pole Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series Toggle
Switches — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 47-3. Toggle Switch Panel Cutout Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 47-4. Two-Pole Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series —
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
0.432
(10.97) 0.076
(1.93)
Keyway
1.18
(29.9)
Max.
0.250
(6.35)
#6-32 Terminal Screw
with Internal Tooth
Lockwasher (SEMS)
0.635
(16.13)
Max.
0.380
(9.65)
Typ.
1.270 (32.26) Max.
15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder
123
16.5°
33°
0.240 (6.10)
Dia.
0.690
(17.53)
0.470
(11.94)
15/32 Dia. Bushing
0.375
(9.52) 0.130
(3.30) 0.062
(1.57)
0.480 (12.19)
Dia. Hole
Locking Ring Keyway
0.445
(11.30)
0.480 (12.19)
Dia. Hole
0.690
(17.53)
0.470
(11.94)
1.100
(27.94)
Max.
0.130
(3.30)
0.250
(6.35)
0.130
(3.30)
0.380
(9.65)
0.910
(23.11)
Max.
1.370
(34.80)
Max.
0.076
(1.93)
Keyway
#6-32 Terminal Screw
with Internal Tooth
Lockwasher (SEMS)
15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder
123
456
0.432
(10.97)
16.5°
33°
0.240 (6.10)
Dia.
0.380
(9.65)
Typ.
1.340 (34.04) Max.
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-9
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches
Econoswitch E10E Series
Features
■Environmentally sealed
■1- and 2-pole circuitry
■One-hole mounting for easy installa-
tion
■Multi-circuits
■2- and 3-position with maintained
and momentary action
■Three types of termination offered
as standard
Product Selection
Momentary contact.
One-Pole and Two-Pole Econoswitch
E10E Series Toggle Switches
Table 47-8. Econoswitch E10E Series Toggle Switch Product Selection
Type of
Operation
Current Ratings — Amperes Circuit with Lever
Position
Screw Terminals Solder Lug
Terminals
Spade Terminals
28V DC 115V AC, 60 or 400 Hz
Up Center
Down
(Keyway)
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Lamp
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
Lamp
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
One-Pole
Maintained
Maintained
Maintained
Momentary
Momentary
5
5
5
4
4
20
20
20
15
15
15
15
15
10
10
3
3
3
2
2
15
15
15
15
15
10
10
10
7
7
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
NONE
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
E10E118DS
E10E118AS
E10E118ES
E10E118GS
E10E118BS
E10E118DL
E10E118AL
E10E118EL
E10E118GL
E10E118BL
E10E118DP
E10E118AP
E10E118EP
E10E118GP
E10E118BP
Two-Pole
Maintained
Maintained
Maintained
Momentary
Momentary
7
7
7
5
5
20
20
20
18
18
15
15
15
10
10
4
4
4
2
2
15
15
15
11
11
15
15
15
8
8
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
NONE
NONE
OFF
NONE
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
E10E218DS
E10E218AS
E10E218ES
E10E218GS
E10E218BS
E10E218DL
E10E218AL
E10E218EL
E10E218GL
E10E218BL
E10E218DP
E10E218AP
E10E218EP
E10E218GP
E10E218BP
Standards and Certifications
■UL — File number E15346; Guide
card number is WOYR2
■CSA — LR40068, class number 6241
Table 47-9. UL and CSA Nominal Ratings
Technical Data and Specifications
■Watertight seal per MIL-STD-108E
and designed to meet IP68
■Three standard types of terminals:
Screws — 6-32 UNC-22A
Solder lug — 0.125 (3.17) dia. hole
Spade — 0.250 (6.35) x 0.032 (0.81)
thick
■Life: 50,000 operations at rated load;
100,000 operations mechanical life
■Temperature Range: -50° to 150°F
(-46° to 66°C)
Catalog
Number
Amperes 1-Phase hp 3-Phase hp
125V AC 250V AC 125V AC 250V AC 125/250V AC
E10E118xx
E10E218xx
18
18
9
9
1/4
1/2
1/2
1
—
—
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-10
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches
Econoswitch E10E Series
Dimensions
Figure 47-5. Toggle Switch Panel Cutout Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 47-6. One-Pole Econoswitch E10E Series Toggle Switches — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
15/32 Dia. Bushing
0.375
(9.52) 0.130
(3.30) 0.062
(1.57)
0.480 (12.19)
Dia. Hole
Locking Ring Keyway
0.445
(11.30)
0.480 (12.19)
Dia. Hole
#6-32 UNC-2A
Terminal Screw,
SEMS 0.125 (3.17)
Dia. Hole
0.250 x 0.032
(6.35) x (0.81)
Thick
15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder
0.240 (6.10)
Dia.
0.432
(10.97)
0.076
(1.93)
Keyway
2
132
132
13
Screw Terminal Solder Lug Spade Terminal
0.690
(17.53)
0.470
(11.94)
1.30
(33.0)
Max.
1.28
(32.5)
Max.
1.51
(38.4)
Max.
0.594
(15.09)
1.25 (31.75)
33°
16.5°
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-11
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches
Econoswitch E10E Series
Figure 47-7. Two-Pole Econoswitch E10E Series Toggle Switches — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
0.432
(10.97)
0.076
(1.93)
Keyway
33°
0.125 (3.17)
Dia. Hole
0.250 x 0.032
(6.35) x (0.81)
Thick
1.55
(39.4)
Max.
Screw Terminal Solder Lug Spade Terminal
0.89
(22.6)
1.32 (33.5)
#6-32 UNC-2A
Terminal Screw,
SEMS
15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder
0.240 (6.10)
Dia. 16.5°
0.690
(17.53)
0.468
(11.89)
1.34
(34.1)
Max.
1.32
(33.5)
Max.
January 2010
47-12
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches
Switch Guard
Features
■For use with 2-position switch
■Cover closure transfers switch
toggle lever to OFF position
■One-hole mounted mounting style
■Cover is molded out of red
thermoset molding material
■Guard cover is spring-loaded to
either close or lock in open position
■Prevents accidental operation at
switches
Product Selection
Table 47-10. Switch Guard Product Selection
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Switch Guard E10TA104
Switch Guard
Dimensions
Figure 47-8. Switch Guard— Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder
Rivet
Switch
(Ref.)
Red-Molded
Plastic
Closed
Steel
Open
0.240 (6.10)
Dia.
33°
0.840
(21.34)
0.468
(11.89)
0.688
(17.48)
Max.
0.062
(1.57)
0.031
(0.79)
1.062
(26.97)
1.547 (39.29)
Rad.
0.475
(12.07)
Dia.
0.688
(17.48)
1.093
(27.76)
Max.
0.032
(0.81)
1.635 (41.53) Max.
1.830 (46.48) Max.
0.750
(19.05)
Max.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-13
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
Product Family Overview
Contents
Description Page
Assembled Control
Stations
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-13
E22 Control Stations . . . . . 47-14
General Purpose
Control Stations. . . . . . . . 47-16
Special Purpose
Control Stations. . . . . . . . 47-18
Heavy-Duty
Control Stations. . . . . . . . 47-19
10250T Control Stations . . 47-20
10250T Class I Division 2
Control Stations. . . . . . . . 47-21
E34 Class I Division 2
Corrosion Resistant
Control Stations. . . . . . . . 47-22
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-23
Custom Assembled
Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-24
Renewal Parts. . . . . . . . . . . 47-26
Features
E22 Control Stations
Cat. No. E22AS204
■22.5 mm operators
■Industrial grade
■Impact resistant polycarbonate
enclosures
■Compact wall mount
■Optional yellow covers
■Popular with OEMs
■UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
General Purpose Control Stations
Cat. No. 10250H5200
■Construction grade
■General purpose wall mount
■Popular with contractors
■UL (NEMA) Type 1
Special Purpose Control Stations
Cat. No. 10250H364
■Standard grade
■Polyester enclosure
■UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 13
Heavy-Duty Control Stations
Cat. No. 10250H1913
■Industrial grade
■Extra heavy-duty
■Polyester enclosure
■Booted buttons
■Outdoor installation
■UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X,
12, 13
10250T Control Stations
Cat. No. 10250T3525
■30.5 mm operators
■Industrial grade
■Zinc die cast enclosure
■Popular with industrial end users
■UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
Class I Division 2 Control Stations
Cat. No. E34EX7023P
■Available with 10250T or E34 30.5 mm
operators
■Zinc die cast, polyester or stainless
steel enclosures
■Factory-sealed contact blocks
■Popular with industrial end users
■UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
■NEC Class I Division 2 Groups B,
C and D
January 2010
47-14
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
E22 Series, 22.5 mm Pushbutton Stations
Assembled E-Stop Stations
Product Description
■Safety-yellow cover and light gray
base enclosures
■Polycarbonate enclosures
■Single 21 mm diameter hole for
cable entry
Table 47-11. Product Selection — Emergency Stop Stations — UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
Compliant with EN418 Safety of Machinery Standard.
Non-compliant with EN418 requirements.
Emergency Stop Station
Operator Contact Symbol Button Type/Color Legend
Marking
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Round Yellow Nameplate
E22AT111
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Safety Yellow Guard
E22AT112
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMO
Safety Yellow Cover
E22AT113
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMO
Safety Yellow Guard
E22AT114
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Round Yellow Nameplate
E22AT111C
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Safety Yellow Guard
E22AT112C
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMO
Safety Yellow Cover
E22AT113C
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMO
Safety Yellow Guard
E22AT114C
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Round Yellow Nameplate
E22AT111E
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Safety Yellow Guard
E22AT112E
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMO
Safety Yellow Cover
E22AT113E
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMO
Safety Yellow Guard
E22AT114E
40 mm Mushroom,
Momentary Action/Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Yellow Cover
E22ASB105
40 mm Latch in
Twist-to-Release/Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Yellow Cover
E22ASB106
Cat. No. E22AT111
1NC
Cat. No. E22AT111C
1NO
1NC
Cat. No. E22AT111E
1NO
1NO
Cat. No. E22ASB106
1NC
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-23
Custom Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-24 – 47-25
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-15
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
E22 Series, 22.5 mm Pushbutton Stations
Assembled E22 Pushbutton
Stations
Product Description
■E22 Series black bezel pushbuttons
■Light gray polycarbonate enclosures
■Single 21 mm diameter hole for
cable entry
Note: For Custom Stations, see Pages 47-24
– 47-25.
Table 47-12. Product Selection — Assembled Control Stations — UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
E-Stop Control Station
Operator Contact Symbol Button Type/Color Legend
Marking
Catalog Number
Chrome Bezels
Catalog Number
Black Bezels
Price
U.S. $
One Pushbutton Extended/Red STOP E22AS109 E22ASB109
Flush/Green START E22AS108 E22ASB108
Two Pushbuttons Flush/Green
Extended/Red
START
STOP
E22AS204 E22ASB204
Flush/Green
Mushroom/Red
START
STOP
E22AS205 E22ASB205
Flush/Green Latch-In
Twist-to-Release/Red
START
STOP
E22AS206 E22ASB206
Three Pushbuttons Flush/Black
Extended/Red
Flush/Black
FOR
STOP
REV
E22AS304 E22ASB304
Flush/Black
Extended/Red
Flush/Black
CLOSE
STOP
OPEN
E22AS305 E22ASB305
Flush/Black
Extended/Red
Flush/Black
UP
STOP
DOWN
E22AS306 E22ASB306
Cat. No. E22ASB109
1NC
1NO
Cat. No. E22AS204
1NO
1NC
Cat. No. E22AS304
1NO
1NC
1NO
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-23
Custom Stations . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-24 – 47-25
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-16
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
10250H Series, General Purpose Stations
General Purpose Type N Control Stations
Table 47-13. Product Selection — Type N Control Stations – UL (NEMA) Type 1
Round button.
2.38 (60.5) for neon indicating light.
Enclosure
Type
Contact
Symbol
Button Type/Color Legends Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Approximate Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
One Element
Single Button with
Padlock Attachment
Accessory
Flush/Green START 10250H5100
Flush/Red STOP 10250H5101
Extended/Red STOP 10250H5104
Palm Operated/Black None 10250H89
Selector
Switch
3-Position Selector
Switch/Black Knob
RUN/OFF/AUTO 10250H289
Two Element
Two Button Station Flush/Red START/STOP 10250H5200
Flush/Green
Extended/Red
START/STOP 10250H5207
Flush/Black (All) RAISE/LOWER
FOR/REV
OPEN/CLOSE
UP/DOWN
HIGH/LOW
FAST/SLOW
10250H5201
10250H5202
10250H5203
10250H5204
10250H5205
10250H5208
Three Element
Three Button Stations Flush/Black (All) FOR/REV/STOP
UP/DOWN/STOP
RAISE/LOWER/STOP
OPEN/CLOSE/STOP
FAST/SLOW/STOP
10250H5300
10250H5301
10250H5302
10250H5303
10250H5304
Three Button with
Indicating Light
110/220V Neon Indicating Light
Clear — Flush/Green; Flush/Red
Red — Flush/Green; Flush/Red
Amber — Flush/Green; Flush/Red
START/STOP
10250H5310
10250ED853
10250ED853-2
3.25
(82.6)
4.00
(101.6)
2.25
(57.2)
1.50
(38.1)
2.25
(57.2)
3.25
(82.6)
4.00
(101.6)
2.25
(57.2)
1.50
(38.1)
2.25
(57.2)
5.00
(
127
.0)
6.00
(152.4)
2.25
(57.2)
1.50
(38.1)
2.25
(57.2)
Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-26
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-17
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-17
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
10250H Series, General Purpose Stations
General Purpose Type N Open Type Assemblies
Table 47-14. Product Selection — Type N — Open Type Construction (No Cover)
No legend on buttons. Specify any standard legend.
Table 47-15. Accessories for Type N Control Stations
Table 47-16. Maximum Ampere Ratings for Type N Control Stations
Enclosure
Type
Contact
Symbol
Button Type/Color Legends Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
One Element
Selector Switch 3-Position Selector
Switch/Black Knob
RUN/OFF/AUTO 10250H2538
Two Element
Two Button Station Flush/Green START/STOP 10250H2747
Mechanically Inter-
locked Pushbuttons
Flush/Black (All)
Mech. Interlocked
None 10250H2544
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Padlock Attachment — For field assembly on square button type (except extended button types) 10250H5110
Voltage AC DC
110V 220V 440V 550V 120V 240V 600V
Make and Emergency Interrupt Capacity 30 15 7.5 6 1.0 0.5 0.1
Normal Load Break 3 1.5 0.75 0.6 1.0 0.5 0.1
Continuous Current 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-26
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-18
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
10250H Series, Special Purpose Stations
Special Purpose Control Stations
Table 47-17. Product Selection — Special Purpose Control Stations — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 13
Type Feature Symbol Legends Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
One
Element
Push-
button
Flush START 10250H2738
STOP 10250H658
With Lock Hasp STOP 10250H665
Two
Element
Push-
button
Flush START/STOP 10250H364
With Lock Hasp START/STOP 10250H671
Buttons
Interlocked
FAST/SLOW
FOR/REV
UP/DOWN
OPN/CLOSE
10250ED664
10250H2740
10250H2741
10250H2742
Cat. No. 10250H364
Two Element
Pushbutton Station
One Element
Pushbutton Station
3.13
(79.5)
0.75 (19.1)
Pipe Tap
2.25
(57.2)
3.38
(85.9)
6.25
(158.8)
5.50
(139.7)
Ship Wt.
2.5 Lb (1.1 kg)
Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-26
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-19
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
10250H Series, Heavy-Duty Stations
Heavy-Duty Type H Control Stations
Product Description
■10250T Series operators
■Dark brown polyester enclosure
■Protective rubber gaskets provide
NEMA 3S rating on pushbuttons
■Top and bottom 3/4-inch NPT conduit
entrances
■Includes alternate legend plates and
spare mounting screws
Table 47-18. Product Selection — Type H Control Stations — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Table 47-19. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 47-20. Maximum Ampere Ratings
Type of
Element
Feature Circuit Assembled
Legend
Plate
Unassembled
Alternate
Legend Plates
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
One Element
Pushbuttons Without
Padlock Hasp
1NO-1NC JOG START
STOP
RUN
10250H1881
With
Padlock Hasp
1NC STOP — 10250H4239
Knob Selector
Switch
2-Position
3-Position
1NO-1NC
1NO-1NC
OFF/ON
MAN/OFF/AUTO
—
—
10250H4526
10250H4527
Two Element
Pushbuttons Standard 1NO-2NC START/STOP — 10250H1884
2NO-2NC RAISE/LOWER FORWARD
REVERSE
OPEN
CLOSE
10250H1885
Standard and
Standard w/
Padlock Hasp
1NO-2NC START/STOP — 10250H4240
Three Element
Pushbuttons Standard
2 Standard and
Standard w/
Padlock Hasp
2NO-3NC
2NO-3NC
FOR/REV/STOP
FOR/REV/STOP
START
JOG
RAISE
LOWER
OPEN
CLOSE
FAST
SLOW
10250H1890
10250H4241
Indicating
Light and
Push-
buttons
120V Light-Red Lens
and 2 Plain
1NO-2NC MOTOR
RUNNING
START/STOP
—10250H1913
NEMA
Type
No. of
Elements
Dimensions
Wide High Deep
3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 13 1 and 2
3
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
8.25 (209.6)
10.75 (273.1)
4.50 (114.3)
4.25 (108.0)
Description Volts AC 50/60 Hz Volts DC
120 240 480 600 125 250
Make and Emerg. Inter. Capacity
Normal Load Break
Continuous Amperes
Voltamperes —
Make and Emerg. Inter. Cap.
Normal Load Break
60
6
10
7200
720
30
3
10
7200
720
15
1.5
10
7200
720
12
1.2
10
7200
720
1.1
1.1
10
138
138
0.55
0.55
10
138
138
Cat. No.
10250H1913
Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-27
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-20
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
10250T Series, 30.5 mm Pushbutton Stations
10250T Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations
Product Description
■10250T Series operators
■ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc enclosures
■Surface or flush mounting
■Single 3/4-inch NPT conduit entrance
on one and two element stations
■Single 1-inch NPT conduit entrance
on three element stations
Table 47-21. Product Selection — Complete Assembled Stations — UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
Breaking glass closes contact.
Stop buttons are red — all others are black.
Uses deep cover instead of shallow cover.
Switch component is 10250TA67.
NEMA 4 – 13, if properly mounted on a flat
surface. Consists of front plate, legend,
operator and contact blocks.
Lock is 10250TA2.
Table 47-22. Break Glass Kit
Number of
Elements
Type of
Elements
Features Contact
Block(s)
Legend Surface Mounting Flush Mounting
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Break Glass
Station
Break Glass
Station Gray Enclosure
Red Enclosure
NC (Logic
Level)
EMERG. OFF
EMERG. OFF
10250TGS
10250TGR
—
—
One Element Pushbutton Standard NO-NC
NC
NO-NC
START
STOP
None
10250T3516
10250T3518
10250T3540
10250T3573
10250T3575
10250T3597
Mushroom
Head
NO-NC
NC
START
STOP
10250T3517
10250T3519
10250T3574
10250T3576
With Lock Hasp NC STOP 10250T3520 10250T3577
Selector
Switch
2-Position
Black Knob
NO-NC OFF/ON 10250T3523 10250T3580
3-Position
Black Knob
2NO MAN/OFF/AUTO 10250T3524 10250T3581
Push-Pull
3-Position
Momentary
Red Button
2NC START/STOP 10250T3545 10250T3602
Two Element Pushbuttons Standard 1NO-2NC
2NO-2NC
2NO-2NC
START/STOP
RAISE/LOWER
None
10250T3525
10250T3672
10250T3541
10250T3582
10250T3673
10250T3598
With Lock
Hasp 1NO-2NC START/STOP 10250T3542 10250T3599
Standard and
Mushroom Head
1NO-2NC START/STOP 10250T3526 10250T3583
Standard with
Maintained
Contact
NO-NC
Plus NC
START/STOP 10250T3528 10250T3585
Three Element Pushbuttons Standard 2NO-3NC
2NO-3NC
2NO-3NC
2NO-3NC
FOR, REV, STOP
UP, DOWN, STOP
OPEN, CLOSE, STOP
None, None, STOP
10250T3532
10250T3615
10250T3614
10250T3543
10250T3589
—
—
10250T3600
2 Standard and
with Lock Hasp
2NO-3NC None, None, STOP 10250T3544 10250T3601
Indicating Light
(Transformer Type)
and Pushbuttons
Red Lens — 120V
Red Lens — 240V
Red Lens — 480V
Red Lens — 600V
1NO-2NC MOTOR RUN,
START/STOP
10250T3536
10250T3537
10250T3538
10250T3539
10250T3593
10250T3594
10250T3595
10250T3596
Break Glass Operator
Shown Assembled to
Contact Block (Contact
Block Supplied
Separately)
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Operator with Hammer
and 5 Glass Discs
Glass Discs Only (5)
10250TBG
10250TGL
Custom Stations. . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-24 – 47-25
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-157 – 47-158
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-21
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
10250T Series, Class I Division 2 Stations
Class I Division 2 10250T Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations
Product Description
■10250T Series operators
■Factory sealed contact blocks
■Die-cast, polyester or stainless steel
enclosures
■Approved for NEC Class I Division 2,
Groups B, C and D or Class I Zone 2
Group IIB plus Hydrogen type haz-
ardous locations
Table 47-23. Product Selection — Complete 10250T Assembled Stations — UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13; NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Operator Contact Symbol Button Type/Color Legend Marking Die Cast
Enclosure
Polyester Molded
Enclosure
Stainless Steel
Enclosure
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
One Pushbutton Flush/Green START 10250T7003 10250T7003P 10250T7003S
Extended/Red STOP 10250T7005 10250T7005P 10250T7005S
Alum. Jumbo
Mushroom/Red
EMER. STOP
(Engraved Button)
10250T7007 10250T7007P 10250T7007S
Flush/Black No Legend 10250T7009 10250T7009P 10250T7009S
Two Pushbuttons Flush/Green
Extended/Red
START
STOP
10250T7023 10250T7023P 10250T7023S
Flush/Black
Flush/Black
No Legend
No Legend
10250T7025 10250T7025P 10250T7025S
One Pilot Light
Two Pushbuttons
120V AC Red
Flush/Green
Extended/Red
No Legend
START
STOP
10250T7033 10250T7033P 10250T7033S
120V AC Red
Flush/Black
Flush/Black
No Legend 10250T7035 10250T7035P 10250T7035S
3-Position
Selector Switch
Maintained
Knob/Black
HAND/OFF/AUTO 10250T7011 10250T7011P 10250T7011S
Maintained
Knob/Black
No Legend 10250T7013 10250T7013P 10250T7013S
One Pushbutton
Maintained
Push-Pull
w/Jumbo
Mushroom/Red
EMER. STOP
(Engraved Button)
10250T7019 10250T7019P 10250T7019S
Die Cast Enclosure with
One Pushbutton —
Aluminum Jumbo
Mushroom Red-Engraved
EMER. STOP
Catalog Number
10250T7007
Polyester Enclosure
with Two Pushbuttons
— Flush Green
and Extended Red
Catalog Number
10250T7023P
Stainless Steel
Enclosure with
One Red Pilot and
Two Pushbuttons —
Flush Green and
Extended Red
Catalog Number
10250T7033S
1NO
1NC
Each Button
1NC
1NO
Each Button
1NC
1NO
2NC
2NO
Pull
O
X
Push
X
O
1NO
1NC
Custom Stations . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-24 – 47-25
Enclosure Dimensions . . . . Page 47-23
Operator Dimensions . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-22
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
E34 Series, Class I Division 2 Corrosion Resistant Stations
Class I Division 2 E34 Corrosion Resistant 30.5 mm Control Stations
Product Description
■E34 Series operators
■Factory sealed contact blocks
■Die-cast, polyester or stainless steel
enclosures
■Approved for NEC Class I Division 2
Groups B, C and D or Class I Zone 2
Group IIB plus Hydrogen type haz-
ardous locations
Table 47-24. Product Selection — Complete E34 Assembled Stations — UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13; NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page 47-21.
Polyester Enclosure with
Two Pushbuttons —
Flush Green and
Extended Red, Catalog
Number E34EX7023P
Operator Contact Symbol Button Type/Color Legend Marking Die Cast
Enclosure
Polyester Molded
Enclosure
Stainless Steel
Enclosure
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
One Pushbutton Flush/Green START E34EX7003 E34EX7003P E34EX7003S
Extended/Red STOP E34EX7005 E34EX7005P E34EX7005S
Alum. Jumbo
Mushroom/Red
EMER. STOP
(Engraved Button)
E34EX7007 E34EX7007P E34EX7007S
Flush/Black No Legend E34EX7009 E34EX7009P E34EX7009S
Two Pushbuttons Flush/Green
Extended/Red
START
STOP
E34EX7023 E34EX7023P E34EX7023S
Flush/Black
Flush/Black
No Legend
No Legend
E34EX7025 E34EX7025P E34EX7025S
3-Position
Selector Switch
Maintained
Knob/Black
HAND/OFF/AUTO E34EX7011 E34EX7011P E34EX7011S
Maintained
Knob/Black
No Legend E34EX7013 E34EX7013P E34EX7013S
One Pushbutton
Maintained
Push-Pull w/Jumbo
Mushroom/Red
EMER. STOP
(Engraved Button)
E34EX7019 E34EX7019P E34EX7019S
1NO
1NC
Each Button
1NC
1NO
2NC
2NO
Pull
O
X
Push
X
O
1NO
1NC
Custom Pushbutton
Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-24 – 47-25
Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . Page 47-23
Operator Dimensions . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-23
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
E22/10250T/E34 Series, Dimensions
Dimensions
E22
Figure 47-9. One-Element — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 47-10. Two-Element — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 47-11. Three-Element — Approximate Dimensions in Inches
(mm)
Table 47-25. E22 One-Element, Two-Element and Three-Element
Approximate Dimensions
10250T and E34
Table 47-26. Approximate Enclosure Dimensions
No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.
Figure 47-12. Approximate Enclosure Dimensions
4-0.17 (4.2)
Mtg. Holes
0.87
(22)
0.83 (21)
Cable Entry
Bottom View
Side View
2.36
(60)
A
2.75
(70)
2.99
(76)
1.81
(46)
2.24
(57)
Top View
4-0.17 (4.2)
Mtg. Holes
0.87
(22)
0.83 (21)
Cable Entry
Bottom View
Side View
2.36
(60)
A
3.15
(80)
4.72
(120)
4.25
(108)
1.97
(50)
Top View
4-0.17 (4.2)
Mtg. Holes
0.87
(22)
0.83 (21)
Cable Entry
Bottom View
Side View
2.36
(60)
A
3.15
(80)
6.3
(160)
5.82
(148)
1.97
(50)
Top View
Catalog
Number
Dimension A
in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Dimension A
in Inches (mm)
E22ASB105
E22ASB106
E22ASB108
E22ASB109
E22ASB204
E22ASB205
E22ASB206
0.87 (22.0)
0.87 (22.0)
0.57 (14.4)
0.65 (16.4)
0.65 (16.4)
0.87 (22.0)
0.87 (22.0)
E22ASB304
E22ASB305
E22ASB306
E22AT111
E22AT112
E22AT113
0.65 (16.4)
0.65 (16.4)
0.65 (16.4)
1.32 (33.5)
1.32 (33.5)
1.32 (33.5)
Number
of
Elements
Surface Mounting Conduit
Entrance
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
DE
Cast
1
2
3
4
3.88
(98.6)
3.88
(98.6)
3.88
(98.6)
3.88
(98.6)
4.0
(101.6)
5.88
(149.4)
7.75
(196.9)
9.63
(244.6)
3.0
(76.3)
3.0
(76.3)
3.0
(76.3)
3.0
(76.3)
2.69
(68.3)
2.69
(68.3)
2.69
(68.3)
2.69
(68.3)
3.25
(82.6)
5.13
(130.3)
7.0
(177.8)
8.88
(225.6)
3/4
3/4
1
1
Polyester
1
2
3
4
3.81
(96.8)
3.81
(96.8)
3.81
(96.8)
3.81
(96.8)
6.63
(168.4)
6.63
(168.4)
8.88
(225.6)
11.13
(282.7)
3.38
(85.9)
3.38
(85.9)
3.38
(85.9)
3.38
(85.9)
2.94
(74.7)
2.94
(74.7)
2.94
(74.7)
2.94
(74.7)
4.88
(124.0)
4.88
(124.0)
7.13
(181.1)
9.38
(238.3)
Stainless Steel
1
2
3
4
3.00
(76.2)
3.50
(88.9)
3.50
(88.9)
3.50
(88.9)
3.50
(88.9)
6.75
(171.5)
9.00
(228.6)
11.25
(285.8)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
1.50
(38.1)
1.50
(38.1)
1.50
(38.1)
4.25
(108.0)
7.50
(190.5)
9.00
(228.6)
12.00
(304.8)
A
Surface
DC
B
E
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester
January 2010
47-24
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
E22/10250T/E34 Series, Custom Assembled Stations — Specification Form
Custom Assembled Stations
Specification Form
Ordering Instructions
Step 1) Copy this ordering guide
from catalog.
Step 2) Specify 10250T, E22 or E34
pushbutton lines in the corre-
sponding box on the following
page.
Step 3) Check back of panel dimen-
sions — specify single or
double depth enclosure in the
corresponding box on the
following page.
Step 4) Specify enclosure Catalog
Number and price in the
corresponding box on the
following page. Enclosures
can be found on Pages 47-87
– 47-88 and Pages 47-153 –
47-154. For pricing, reference
the most recent PAD or
VISTA-line.
Step 5) Specify Catalog Numbers for
desired operator, legend
plate, light unit, accessory
and contact block(s) for each
location in the enclosure in
the corresponding box on the
following page. (See position
locations below.)
Figure 47-13. Position Locations
Step 6) For non-standard legends,
specify legend desired, letter
size and location on the lay-
out sketches on the following
page. For limitations see
Page 47-84 and Page 47-152.
For pricing, use the blank leg-
end Catalog Number and
“STAMP” Suffix
(Ex.: 10250TS36STAMP) and
reference the most recent
PAD or VISTA-line.
Example: 10250TS36
Special Legend for Position #_______
Step 7) Fax Sheet 2 of this form to
Eaton’s TRC, Technical
Resource Center, at
828-651-0549 to the attention
of — Custom Stations Order
or email to TRC@eaton.com.
Within a few days you will
receive a confirmation fax
with the custom station part
number and price.
Step 8) Place your order over the
VISTA System.
For Selector and Roto-Push
Operators
10250T or E34
For single contact blocks or 1NO-1NC
contact blocks, the mounting position
of contacts must be specified. For
example: If a 1NO-1NC contact block
is required, specify if NO is to be
mounted in Top A position or Bottom
B position.
E22
For each contact block, specify if it
is to be mounted in the left or right
position. For example: If an E22B1
contact block is selected, specify if it is
to be mounted on the left or right side
of the mounting adapter as viewed
from back of operator.
10250T Pages 47-115 – 47-165
E22 Pages 47-28 – 47-98
E34 Pages 47-166 – 47-189
10250T
& E34
Class I Div. 2
Pages 47-215 – 47-242
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 1
Position 2
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 4
Position 1
LETTER SIZE
3/32"
1/8" ✔
3/16"
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-25
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
E22/10250T/E34 Series, Custom Assembled Stations — Specification Form
FACTORY USE ONLY
Part Number
Product Code
Suffix
Date
Engineer
Step 3) ✔
Single Depth Enclosure
Double Depth Enclosure
Step 4)
Enclosure Catalog Number Price
Step 2)
10250T ❏ STD ❏ Class I Division 2
E22 ❏ STD
E34 ❏ STD ❏ Class I Division 2
Step 5)
Position Operator Price
U.S. $
Light Unit Price
U.S. $
Contact
Block
Price
U.S. $
A/L B/R Contact
Block
Price
U.S. $
A/L B/R Total
Price
1
2
3
4
Total:
Step 6) Non-standard Legends
Special Legend for Position #_______ Special Legend for Position #_______ Special Legend for Position #_______
LETTER SIZE ✔
3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
3/16 inch (4.8 mm)
LETTER SIZE ✔
3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
3/16 inch (4.8 mm)
LETTER SIZE ✔
3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
3/16 inch (4.8 mm)
Position Legend Plate Price
U.S. $
Lens or Caps Price
U.S. $
Accessory Price
U.S. $
Total
Price
1
2
3
4
To — Eaton’s TRC, Custom Station Order
(828) 651-0549 FAX, or email to TRC@eaton.com
From — Customer Name __________________________________________
Customer Contact _________________________________________
Phone Number ____________________________________________
Fax Number ______________________________________________
Email Address ____________________________________________
10% Adder
for Assembled Stations
January 2010
47-26
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
10250H Series, Renewal Parts
Renewal Parts
Figure 47-14. Type N Renewal Parts
Table 47-27. Assembled Stations — Type N Renewal Parts
Item
No.
Description No.
Req.
Part
Number
Price
U.S. $
Type N — Square Buttons
1 Cover
2 Element
Single Element — Top Button
Single Element — Bottom Button
1
49-3524
49-3524-2
49-3524-3
2 Cover Screw 2 11-2168
3 Pushbutton Support Bracket 1 79-6649
4 Pushbutton Support Bracket Screw 1 11-2090
5 Pushbutton Spring 2 69-2571
6 Disc (when used — 2 element
assembly)
216-1960
7 Pushbutton — Top Position
START/Green
RAISE/Black
FORWARD/Black
OPEN/Black
UP/Black
Blank/Green
1
53-1169-3
53-1169-66
53-1169-7
53-1169-9
53-1169-11
53-1169
8 Pushbutton — Bottom Position
STOP/Red
Extended STOP/Red
REVERSE/Black
CLOSE/Black
DOWN/Black
LOWER/Black
Blank/Red
1
53-1202-2
53-1202-5
53-1169-8
53-1169-10
53-1169-12
53-1169-6
53-1202
9 Pushbutton Element
1NO-1NC
2NO
1NO
1NC
1
86-2588
86-2588-2
86-2588-3
86-2588-4
10 Cover 1 49-3464
11 Pushbutton Support Bracket 1 79-6650
12 Pushbutton — Top Position
FORWARD/Black
UP/Black
RAISE/Black
OPEN/Black
FAST/Black
1
53-1170-7
53-1170-4
53-1170-5
53-1170-9
53-1170-6
Item
No.
Description No.
Req.
Part
Number
Price
U.S. $
Type N — Square Buttons (Continued)
13 Pushbutton Middle Position
REVERSE/Black
DOWN/Black
LOWER/Black
CLOSE/Black
SLOW/Black
1
53-1169-15
53-1169-18
53-1169-16
53-1169-17
53-1169-13
14 Pushbutton — Bottom Position
STOP/Red
1
53-1201-2
15 Pushbutton Element
2NO-3NC
1
86-2593
16 Cover 1 49-3524-4
17 Lens
Clear
Red
Amber
1
28-494
28-887-2
28-887-3
18 Shield 1 73-1337
19 Shield Screws 4 11-2012
20 Lamp (Neon NE48) 1 28-494
21 Lamp Receptacle 1 28-902
22 Lamp Receptacle Screw 1 911-330F1
23 Pilot Light Terminal Base 1 86-2586
24 Lens
Clear
Red
Amber
1
28-887
28-887-2
28-887-3
25 Pushbutton Support Bracket 1 79-6650-2
26 Pushbutton Element
1NO-1NC
186-2594
Type N — Round Buttons
Similar
to 27
Pushbutton Assembly and
Element for:
10250H289
10250H364
10250H685
10250H665
10250H671
10250H2738
10250H2740
10250H2741
10250H2742
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10250H2538
86-353
86-353-8
86-353-8
86-353
86-353-3
86-356
86-356
86-356
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-27
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
10250H Series, Renewal Parts
Figure 47-15. Type H Renewal Parts
Table 47-28. Assembled Stations — Type H Renewal Parts
1
Pushbutton Indicating Light
2
3
5
4
6
3
4
5
9
78
12
7
12 1
Selector Switch
2
11
10
10
5
4
7
Item
No.
Description No.
Req.
Part Number Price
U.S. $
Type H — Assembled Stations
1 Screw 2 11-4654
2 Screw 2 11-5719
3 Base 1 17-16560
4 Contact Blocks See Page 47-116
5 10250T Operator See Pages 47-119 – 47-147
6 Mounting Plate 1 17-19524
Item
No.
Description No.
Req.
Part Number Price
U.S. $
Type H — Assembled Stations (Continued)
7 Screw 4 11-953
8 Diaphragm 1 32-253-2
9 Mounting Plate 1 17-19522
10 Gasket 1 32-254
11 Base 1 17-16561
12 Mounting Plate 1 17-19523
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-28
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series
Contents
Description Page
Product Description . . . . . . . . . 47-29
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-29
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-29
Contact Block Operation . . . . . 47-29
Standards and
Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-29
Technical Data and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-29
Product Selection
Pushbutton Units. . . . . . . . . 47-31
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-33
Illuminated Momentary
Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . 47-34
Illuminated Pushbuttons. . . 47-36
Push-Push Units . . . . . . . . . 47-37
Push-Push . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-39
Maintained Emergency
Stop Pushbutton Units . . . 47-41
Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . 47-42
Twist-to-Release. . . . . . . . . . 47-43
Indicating Light Units . . . . . 47-44
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . 47-47
Description Page
Product Selection (Continued)
Push-Pull Units. . . . . . . . . . 47-48
Push-Pulls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-49
Selector Switch Units . . . . 47-51
Selector Switches . . . . . . . 47-55
Illuminated Selector
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-58
Selector Switch
Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-60
Rotary Cam Selector
Switch Units. . . . . . . . . . . 47-62
Specialty Operators . . . . . . 47-64
Double Headed
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . 47-65
Joystick Units . . . . . . . . . . . 47-67
Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-68
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . 47-69
Light Units and Lamps . . . 47-70
Replacement LEDs and
Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-72
Description Page
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-74
5-Way Mounting
Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-77
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . 47-78
Options
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . 47-79
Printed Legends . . . . . . . . . 47-85
Selector Switch Legends . . 47-86
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-87
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-89
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-94
Ordering Complete Devices
Ordering Complete Devices
Using Single Composite
Cat. Number . . . . . . . . . . . 47-95
Ordering Rotary Cam
Selector Switches . . . . . . 47-95
Catalog Number
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-97
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-98
Bezel,
Choice of
Chrome or
Matte Black
Variety of
Operators
Legend Plates,
Three Styles
Available
Panel
Optional
Anti-Rotation
Ring
#E22LRP
3-Way
Mounting Adapter
#E22BA1
Sealing Washer
Snap-On Fingerproof Shroud Provides
IP2X Fingerproof Protection Against
Electrical Contact
Octagonal Mounting Nut
Which Eliminates Spacer Washers and
Set Screws #15-1438.
Tightening Torque: 15 lb-in (1.7 Nm)
T3-1/4 Bayonet
Base Lamps Used
Throughout
Terminal Clamps Are
Shipped Open, Ready to Wire
Light Units
and Contact Blocks
Secured to
Mounting Adapter
Without Tools
E22 Series
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-29
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Technical Data and Specifications
Product Description
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer® 22.5 mm
Industrial Heavy-Duty Pushbutton line
offers a wide array of functional,
smartly styled illuminated and non-
illuminated pushbuttons, selector
switches, push-pulls, alternate action
and twist-to-release operators. The
complete line also includes trans-
former, full voltage, resistor, LED or
neon light units.
E22 operators are available with either a
traditional chrome or matte black front-
of-panel appearance. The space-saving
design and modular construction of the
E22 line makes on-the-job assembly
fast and simplifies the stocking of both
components and complete devices.
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer EM22 Metal
Series is a rugged line of metal con-
struction 22.5 mm pushbutton devices.
They are an extension of the industri-
ally proven E22 Heavy-Duty Double
Insulated 22.5 mm pushbutton family.
EM22 operators are heavy-duty zinc
die-cast construction plated with a
corrosion resistant chromate finish.
Operators are complete with a very dura-
ble chrome plated metal bezel. Indicating
light units in the EM22 Series feature
smartly styled round lenses that enhance
their appearance and brightness.
All EM22 operators are compatible
with existing E22 contact blocks, light
units, accessories and enclosures.
EM22 metal operators and indicating
lights are grounded when mounted to
metal panels through the toothed
mounting nut. They are not grounded
when mounted to plastic panels.
Features
E22 Operators:
■Heavy-duty oiltight construction
■Chrome metal or black nylon bezels
■Snap-lock contact block mounting
EM22 Operators:
■Heavy-duty zinc die-cast
construction
■Metal mounting nut doubles as
grounding and anti-rotation device
■Chrome-plated metal bezel (matte
black not available)
Common E22 & EM22 Features:
■Reliability nibs on contact blocks
■Plain or notched hole mounting
■Direct opening action
normally closed contacts
■Fingerproof terminals
Benefits
Plastic Devices
■Modular construction makes assem-
bly fast and simplifies stocking of
components and complete devices
■Reliability nibs provide positive con-
tact through light, medium or heavy
loads
■Chrome finish and plastic construc-
tion are corrosion resistant
Metal Devices
■EM22 is backwards compatible with
E22 operators
■Metal mounting nut cuts through
painted surfaces to provide proper
grounding
■Hands-free front of panel mounting
reduces installation cost
■Mounting flexibility reduces installa-
tion cost, time and inventory
■Stands up well in corrosive
environments
■E22 and EM22 compatibility lowers
parts count and inventory
requirements
Contact Block Operation
Linear make and break. All normally
closed (NC) contacts are Direct Opening
Action, i.e., NC contacts are physically
forced open by direct linkage with the
pushbutton operator in the unlikely
event of contact weld.
The contact block contacts are provided
with “Reliability Nibs.” The precisely
shaped point of the nib, coined on the
silver contact alloy, penetrates dust,
film oxide layers and other contami-
nants. This improves contact reliability
even under dry circuit and fine dust
conditions.
Logic level contact blocks are available
for low power switching — minimum
1 mA @ 5V DC.
Standards and Certifications
■CE EN 60947-5-1
■UL 508 — File No. E131568
■CSA — File No. LR68551
Additional Certifications for
Trigger Action E-Stop Devices
■UL Listed E-Stop Device — File No.
E217948
■Machinery Safety Directive — EN418
■Semiconductor Manufacturing
Equipment — SEMI S2-0200
■DEMKO Third Party Certification —
Certificate Nos. 129648-01 and
129648-02
Technical Data and
Specifications
Ingress Protection
■UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12
and 13
■IEC IP65
Note: Ratings apply when mounted in
enclosures with the same ratings.
Mechanical Endurance Ratings
■Frequency of operation
❑Pushbuttons – 6,000 operations/hr
❑Push-Pulls – 3,000 operations/hr.
❑Push-Push – 1,800 cycles/hr.
❑Selector Switches – 3,000
operations/hr.
❑Trigger-Action E-Stop – 360
cycles/hr.
❑Twist-to-Release – 1,200 cycles/hr
■Mechanical Life
❑Contact Blocks – 3 million
operations
❑Pushbuttons – 5 million opera-
tions
❑Push-Pulls – 300,000 operations
❑Push-Push – 300,000 operations
❑Selector Switches – 500,000
operations
❑Trigger-Action E-Stop – 100,000
operations
❑Twist-to-Release – 300,000
operations
❑Joysticks — 500,000 operations
■Vibration (IEC 68-2 [BS 2011])
❑Vibration – 5g/0.7 mm peak to
peak, 10 sweeps, 10 – 500 Hz
❑Shock – 30g, 18 ms
❑Bump – 25g, 6 ms for 1,000 cycle
January 2010
47-30
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Technical Data and Specifications
Environmental Conditions
■Operating temperature:
-4° to +140°F (-20° to +60°C)
■Storage temperature:
-40° to +176°F (-40° to +80°C)
■Altitude: Up to 6562 feet (2000m)
■Pollution degree (IEC 947-1): 3
■Humidity: Maximum 95% RH @ 60°C
Terminal Markings
All rear of panel devices are marked with the circuit configu-
ration per CENELEC 50013 standards.
Table 47-29. Contact Blocks
Table 47-30. Lights Units
■E22CB1, E22CB11, E22CB1E, E22B1 and E22B11 contact
blocks are marked with Direct Opening Action (DOA) Sym-
bol “ “ per IEC 60947-5-1, Annex K and NEMA ICS 5, Part
6. For Mechanical Operating Parameters, see Page 47-69.
■E22CB1, E22CB11 and E22CB1E contact blocks will be
marked as Suitable for Isolation per IEC 60947-5-1.
Contact Block Terminal Clamps
■Clamp type: Self-lifting
■Screw type: Plus/minus, captive
■Wire range: 18 to 12 AWG (0.75 to 4.0 mm2)
■Fingerproof protection: IP2X
■Tightening torque: 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Electrical Ratings
Table 47-31. Contact Block
Ratings do not apply to rotary cam switches, see Ratings Page 47-95.
■A600, Q600 per UL 508
■AC15, DC13 per IEC 60947-5-1
Logic level contact blocks are UL A600, Q600 and IEC AC15,
DC13 rated and also have a minimum rating of 1 mA @ 5V DC.
■Impulse withstand voltage (Uimp): 4 kV
Short Circuit Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
■Rated conditional short circuit current: 1 kA
■Fuse type: GE Power Controls TIA 10, Red Spot Type
gG, 10A, 660V AC, 460V DC, BS88-2, IEC 60269-2-1
Electrical Life
■AC15 durability
❑120V, 6A – 1 x 106 operations
■DC13 durability
❑24V, 4A – 0.15 x 106 operations
❑660V, 0.1A – 0.5 x 106 operations
Material
■Housing, bezel, mounting rings: Glass filled nylon
■Metal bezels: Chrome plated brass
■Internal seal: Nitrile rubber
■Panel gasket: Nitrile rubber
■Illuminated lenses: Polycarbonate
■Buttons: Polyester or polycarbonate
■Contacts: Silver
■Terminals: Brass
Circuit Configuration Description Plunger
Color
1NC Red
1NO Green
1NO-1NC White
2NO Green
1NO
Early Make
Black
1NC
Late Break
Gray
Circuit Configuration Description
Full Voltage
Resistor
Transformer
21
43
43
21
43
4A 3A
43
21
X1 X2
X1 X2
X2 X1
Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designations A600 and Q600
Description A600 (AC) Volts Q600 (DC) Volts
120 240 480 600 125 250 440 600
Make and emergency
interrupting capacity
(Amp)
60 30 15 12 0.55 0.27 0.1 0.1
Normal load break (Amp) 6 3 1.5 1.2 0.55 0.27 0.1 0.1
Thermal current (Amp) 10 10 10 10 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-31
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Pushbutton Units
Product Selection
Pushbutton Units
■Non-illuminated
■Plastic or Metal Operators
■Black or Chrome Bezel
■Flush, Extended or Mushroom Head
Operators
Description
Listed below are commonly ordered
complete pushbutton devices including
operator and contact block(s). These
devices are shipped as unassembled
components overpacked in a single
bag. For instructions on how to order
devices not listed below using a single
composite Catalog Number, refer to
Page 47-95.
Table 47-32. Pushbutton Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Button
Color
Contact Block Circuit
NO NC Price
U.S. $
NO-NC 2NO 2NC Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Plastic Operators — Black Bezel
Flush — Momentary
Black
Red
Green
E22PB1A
E22PB2A
E22PB3A
E22PB1B
E22PB2B
E22PB3B
E22PB1C
E22PB2C
E22PB3C
E22PB1D
E22PB2D
E22PB3D
E22PB1E
E22PB2E
E22PB3E
Extended — Momentary
Black
Red
Green
E22EB1A
E22EB2A
E22EB3A
E22EB1B
E22EB2B
E22EB3B
E22EB1C
E22EB2C
E22EB3C
E22EB1D
E22EB2D
E22EB3D
E22EB1E
E22EB2E
E22EB3E
40 mm Mushroom — Momentary
Black
Red
Green
E22LB1A
E22LB2A
E22LB3A
E22LB1B
E22LB2B
E22LB3B
E22LB1C
E22LB2C
E22LB3C
E22LB1D
E22LB2D
E22LB3D
E22LB1E
E22LB2E
E22LB3E
40 mm Twist-to-Release Mushroom — Latching
Black
Red
Green
E22LLB1A
E22LLB2A
E22LLB3A
E22LLB1B
E22LLB2B
E22LLB3B
E22LLB1C
E22LLB2C
E22LLB3C
E22LLB1D
E22LLB2D
E22LLB3D
E22LLB1E
E22LLB2E
E22LLB3E
50 mm Jumbo Mushroom — Momentary
Black
Red
Green
E22JPB1A
E22JPB2A
E22JPB3A
E22JPB1B
E22JPB2B
E22JPB3B
E22JPB1C
E22JPB2C
E22JPB3C
E22JPB1D
E22JPB2D
E22JPB3D
E22JPB1E
E22JPB2E
E22JPB3E
50 mm Jumbo Mushroom — Maintained
Red
EMERGENCY
STOP (Metal)
E22JLB2N8A E22JLB2N8B E22JLB2N8C E22JLB2N8D E22JLB2N8E
Plastic Operators — Chrome Bezel
Flush — Momentary
Black
Red
Green
E22P1A
E22P2A
E22P3A
E22P1B
E22P2B
E22P3B
E22P1C
E22P2C
E22P3C
E22P1D
E22P2D
E22P3D
E22P1E
E22P2E
E22P3E
Extended — Momentary
Black
Red
Green
E22E1A
E22E2A
E22E3A
E22E1B
E22E2B
E22E3B
E22E1C
E22E2C
E22E3C
E22E1D
E22E2D
E22E3D
E22E1E
E22E2E
E22E3E
40 mm Mushroom — Momentary
Black
Red
Green
E22L1A
E22L2A
E22L3A
E22L1B
E22L2B
E22L3B
E22L1C
E22L2C
E22L3C
E22L1D
E22L2D
E22L3D
E22L1E
E22L2E
E22L3E
40 mm Twist-to-Release Mushroom — Latching
Black
Red
Green
E22LL1A
E22LL2A
E22LL3A
E22LL1B
E22LL2B
E22LL3B
E22LL1C
E22LL2C
E22LL3C
E22LL1D
E22LL2D
E22LL3D
E22LL1E
E22LL2E
E22LL3E
50 mm Jumbo Mushroom — Momentary
Black
Red
Green
E22JP1A
E22JP2A
E22JP3A
E22JP1B
E22JP2B
E22JP3B
E22JP1C
E22JP2C
E22JP3C
E22JP1D
E22JP2D
E22JP3D
E22JP1E
E22JP2E
E22JP3E
50 mm Jumbo Mushroom — Maintained
Red
EMERGENCY
STOP (Metal)
E22JL2N8A E22JL2N8B E22JL2N8C E22JL2N8D E22JL2N8E
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-32
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Pushbutton Units
Table 47-32. Pushbutton Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 (Continued)
See Page 47-95 for ordering other complete devices not shown.
Button
Color
Contact Block Circuit
NO NC Price
U.S. $
NO-NC 2NO 2NC Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Metal Operators — Chrome Bezel
Flush — Momentary
Black
Red
Green
EM22P1A
EM22P2A
EM22P3A
EM22P2B
EM22P1C
EM22P2C
EM22P3C
EM22P1D
EM22P3D
EM22P2E
Extended — Momentary
Red EM22E2A EM22E2B EM22E2C EM22E2E
40 mm Mushroom — Momentary
Red EM22L2A EM22L2B EM22L2C EM22L2E
40 mm Twist-to-Release Mushroom — Latching
Red EM22LL2A EM22LL2B EM22LL2C EM22LL2E
50 mm Jumbo Mushroom — Momentary
Red EM22JP2A EM22JP2B EM22JP2C EM22JP2D EM22JP2E
50 mm Jumbo Mushroom — Maintained
Red
EMERGENCY
STOP (Metal)
EM22JL2N8A EM22JL2N8B EM22JL2N8C EM22JL2N8D EM22JL2N8E
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-86
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-33
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Pushbutton Components
Pushbutton Components
Table 47-33. Momentary Contact Pushbuttons, Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Ordering Example — A complete Pushbutton Unit consists of the following:
Will Accept Maximum of 3 Contact Blocks (6 Circuits)
When Used with Supplied 3-Way Adapter and Optional
Operator Plug.
Color E22 Series —
Plastic Operators
EM22 Series —
Metal Operators
Black Bezel Chrome Bezel Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E22 Black E22 Chrome EM22 Chrome 25 mm Diameter Flush Button
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
E22PB1
E22PB2
E22PB3
E22PB4
E22PB5
E22PB6
E22PB7
E22PB8
E22P1
E22P2
E22P3
E22P4
E22P5
E22P6
E22P7
E22P8
EM22P1
EM22P2
EM22P3
EM22P4
EM22P5
EM22P6
EM22P7
EM22P8
25 mm Diameter Extended Button
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
E22EB1
E22EB2
E22EB3
E22EB4
E22EB5
E22EB6
E22EB7
E22EB8
E22E1
E22E2
E22E3
E22E4
E22E5
E22E6
E22E7
E22E8
EM22E1
EM22E2
EM22E3
EM22E4
EM22E5
EM22E6
EM22E7
EM22E8
25 mm Diameter with Full Shroud
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E22PF1
E22PF2
E22PF3
E22PF4
E22PF5
E22PF6
E22PF7
E22PF8
EM22PF1
EM22PF2
EM22PF3
EM22PF4
EM22PF5
EM22PF6
EM22PF7
EM22PF8
28 mm Dia. Mushroom Head Button
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
E22MB1
E22MB2
E22MB3
E22MB4
E22MB6
E22M1
E22M2
E22M3
E22M4
E22M6
EM22M1
EM22M2
EM22M3
EM22M4
EM22M6
40 mm Dia. Mushroom Head Button
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
E22LB1
E22LB2
E22LB3
E22LB4
E22LB6
E22L1
E22L2
E22L3
E22L4
E22L6
EM22L1
EM22L2
EM22L3
EM22L4
EM22L6
50 mm Dia. Mushroom Head Button — Plastic
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Red (Metal)
E22JPB1
E22JPB2
E22JPB3
E22JPB4
E22JPB6
E22JB2
E22JP1
E22JP2
E22JP3
E22JP4
E22JP6
E22J2
EM22JP1
EM22JP2
EM22JP3
EM22JP4
EM22JP6
EM22J2
Red (Metal) Engraved EMERGENCY STOP
E22JB2N8 E22J2N8 EM22J2N8
Contact
Blocks
See Page 47-69
Mounting Adapter
E22BA1 (Supplied
with Operator).
For 5-Way Adapter,
See Page 47-77
Legend Plate or
Print Option
See Pages
47-79 – 47-85
Operator Plug
E22BA2 Required
if 3rd Contact
Block Is Used.
See Page 47-75
Operator
See Above
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-34
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Illuminated Pushbutton Units
Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units
■Plastic or Metal Operators
■Black or Chrome Bezel
■Extended Pushbuttons
■Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer Light Units
■Plastic Lenses
■Metal Operators available with LED
Table 47-34. Plastic Illuminated Extended Pushbutton Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Description Button
Color
NO NC Price
U.S. $
NO-NC 2NO 2NC Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Plastic Operators — Black Bezel
24V AC/DC Full Voltage
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22TB2X4A
E22TB3X4A
E22TB5X4A
E22TB6X4A
E22TB9X4A
E22TB0X4A
E22TB2X4B
E22TB3X4B
E22TB5X4B
E22TB6X4B
E22TB9X4B
E22TB0X4B
E22TB2X4C
E22TB3X4C
E22TB5X4C
E22TB6X4C
E22TB9X4C
E22TB0X4C
E22TB2X4D
E22TB3X4D
E22TB5X4D
E22TB6X4D
E22TB9X4D
E22TB0X4D
E22TB2X4E
E22TB3X4E
E22TB5X4E
E22TB6X4E
E22TB9X4E
E22TB0X4E
120V AC/DC Resistor Unit
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22TB2X10A
E22TB3X10A
E22TB5X10A
E22TB6X10A
E22TB9X10A
E22TB0X10A
E22TB2X10B
E22TB3X10B
E22TB5X10B
E22TB6X10B
E22TB9X10B
E22TB0X10B
E22TB2X10C
E22TB3X10C
E22TB5X10C
E22TB6X10C
E22TB9X10C
E22TB0X10C
E22TB2X10D
E22TB3X10D
E22TB5X10D
E22TB6X10D
E22TB9X10D
E22TB0X10D
E22TB2X10E
E22TB3X10E
E22TB5X10E
E22TB6X10E
E22TB9X10E
E22TB0X10E
120V Transformer AC — 50/60 Hz
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22TB2X11A
E22TB3X11A
E22TB5X11A
E22TB6X11A
E22TB9X11A
E22TB0X11A
E22TB2X11B
E22TB3X11B
E22TB5X11B
E22TB6X11B
E22TB9X11B
E22TB0X11B
E22TB2X11C
E22TB3X11C
E22TB5X11C
E22TB6X11C
E22TB9X11C
E22TB0X11C
E22TB2X11D
E22TB3X11D
E22TB5X11D
E22TB6X11D
E22TB9X11D
E22TB0X11D
E22TB2X11E
E22TB3X11E
E22TB5X11E
E22TB6X11E
E22TB9X11E
E22TB0X11E
Plastic Operators — Chrome Bezel
24V AC/DC Full Voltage
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22T2X4A
E22T3X4A
E22T5X4A
E22T6X4A
E22T9X4A
E22T0X4A
E22T2X4B
E22T3X4B
E22T5X4B
E22T6X4B
E22T9X4B
E22T0X4B
E22T2X4C
E22T3X4C
E22T5X4C
E22T6X4C
E22T9X4C
E22T0X4C
E22T2X4D
E22T3X4D
E22T5X4D
E22T6X4D
E22T9X4D
E22T0X4D
E22T2X4E
E22T3X4E
E22T5X4E
E22T6X4E
E22T9X4E
E22T0X4E
120V AC/DC Resistor Unit
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22T2X10A
E22T3X10A
E22T5X10A
E22T6X10A
E22T9X10A
E22T0X10A
E22T2X10B
E22T3X10B
E22T5X10B
E22T6X10B
E22T9X10B
E22T0X10B
E22T2X10C
E22T3X10C
E22T5X10C
E22T6X10C
E22T9X10C
E22T0X10C
E22T2X10D
E22T3X10D
E22T5X10D
E22T6X10D
E22T9X10D
E22T0X10D
E22T2X10E
E22T3X10E
E22T5X10E
E22T6X10E
E22T9X10E
E22T0X10E
120V Transformer AC — 50/60 Hz
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22T2X11A
E22T3X11A
E22T5X11A
E22T6X11A
E22T9X11A
E22T0X11A
E22T2X11B
E22T3X11B
E22T5X11B
E22T6X11B
E22T9X11B
E22T0X11B
E22T2X11C
E22T3X11C
E22T5X11C
E22T6X11C
E22T9X11C
E22T0X11C
E22T2X11D
E22T3X11D
E22T5X11D
E22T6X11D
E22T9X11D
E22T0X11D
E22T2X11E
E22T3X11E
E22T5X11E
E22T6X11E
E22T9X11E
E22T0X11E
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-35
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Illuminated Pushbutton Units
Table 47-35. Metal Illuminated Pushbutton Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Button
Color
NO Contact Block NC Contact Block
Incandescent LED Incandescent LED
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Metal Operators — Chrome Bezel
24V AC/DC Full Voltage
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
EM22T2X4A
EM22T3X4A
EM22T5X4A
EM22T6X4A
EM22T9X4A
EM22T0X4A
EM22T2X40A
EM22T3X41A
EM22T5X90A
EM22T6X52A
EM22T9X95A
EM22T0X90A
EM22T2X4B
EM22T3X4B
EM22T5X4B
EM22T6X4B
EM22T9X4B
EM22T0X4B
EM22T2X40B
EM22T3X41B
EM22T5X90B
EM22T6X52B
EM22T9X95B
EM22T0X90B
120V AC Full Voltage
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
—
—
—
—
—
—
EM22T2X43A
EM22T3X44A
EM22T5X92A
EM22T6X61A
EM22T9X96A
EM22T0X92A
—
—
—
—
—
—
EM22T2X43B
EM22T3X44B
EM22T5X92B
EM22T6X61B
EM22T9X96B
EM22T0X92B
120V AC/DC Resistor Unit
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
EM22T2X10A
EM22T3X10A
EM22T5X10A
EM22T6X10A
EM22T9X10A
EM22T0X10A
—
—
—
—
—
—
EM22T2X10B
EM22T3X10B
EM22T5X10B
EM22T6X10B
EM22T9X10B
EM22T0X10B
—
—
—
—
—
—
120V AC Transformer — 50/60 Hz
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
EM22T2X11A
EM22T3X11A
EM22T5X11A
EM22T6X11A
EM22T9X11A
EM22T0X11A
EM22T2X433A
EM22T3X444A
EM22T5X922A
EM22T6X611A
EM22T9X966A
EM22T0X922A
EM22T2X11B
EM22T3X11B
EM22T5X11B
EM22T6X11B
EM22T9X11B
EM22T0X11B
EM22T2X433B
EM22T3X444B
EM22T5X922B
EM22T6X611B
EM22T9X966B
EM22T0X922B
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-86
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-36
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Pushbutton Components
Illuminated Pushbutton Components
Table 47-36. Illuminated Pushbutton and PresTest Indicating Light Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
If a Flush Lens type is required instead of Extended, substitute N for T in listed Catalog Number.
Example: E22NX2 — Red flush illuminated pushbutton with full shroud. Chrome version only.
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Will Accept Maximum of 2 Contact Blocks
(4 Circuits) When Used with Supplied
3-Way Adapter
Color E22 Series —
Plastic Operators
EM22 Series —
Metal Operators
Black Bezel Chrome Bezel Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E22 Black E22 Chrome EM22 Chrome 25 mm Diameter Flush Lens
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22NB2
E22NB3
E22NB4
E22NB5
E22NB6
E22NB9
E22NB0
E22N2
E22N3
E22N4
E22N5
E22N6
E22N9
E22N0
EM22N2
EM22N3
EM22N4
EM22N5
EM22N6
EM22N9
EM22N0
25 mm Diameter Extended Lens
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22TB2
E22TB3
E22TB4
E22TB5
E22TB6
E22TB9
E22TB0
E22T2
E22T3
E22T4
E22T5
E22T6
E22T9
E22T0
EM22T2
EM22T3
EM22T4
EM22T5
EM22T6
EM22T9
EM22T0
25 mm Dia. Extended Lens with Shroud
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E22TX2
E22TX3
E22TX4
E22TX5
E22TX6
E22TX9
E22TX0
EM22TX2
EM22TX3
EM22TX4
EM22TX5
EM22TX6
EM22TX9
EM22TX0
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-70 – 47-71
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-37
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Push-Push Units
Alternate-Action (Push-Push) Pushbutton Units
■Non-illuminated or Illuminated
■Plastic or Metal Operators
■Black or Chrome Bezel
■Flush or Extended Operators
Description
Listed below are commonly ordered
complete pushbutton devices including
operator and contact block(s). These
devices are shipped as unassembled
components overpacked in a single
bag. For instructions on how to order
devices not listed below using a single
composite Catalog Number, refer to
Page 47-95.
Table 47-37. E22 and EM22 Series Non-illuminated Flush and Extended Alternate-Action Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Note: In order to comply with NFPA 79 and IEC 60204-1 requirements:
The colors black, white or gray shall be used for Push-Push operators which act alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons.
Push-Push operators shall only be used for functions which can not result in a hazardous condition.
IEC 60204-1 recommends that Push-Push operators acting alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons be marked with the printed
legend N124.
Button
Color
Contact Block Circuit
NO NC Price
U.S. $
NO-NC 2NO 2NC Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
E22 Series — Plastic Operators – Black Bezel
Flush
Black
White
Gray
E22PPB1A
E22PPB5A
E22PPB7A
E22PPB1B
E22PPB5B
E22PPB7B
E22PPB1C
E22PPB5C
E22PPB7C
E22PPB1D
E22PPB5D
E22PPB7D
E22PPB1E
E22PPB5E
E22PPB7E
Extended
Black
White
Gray
E22EPB1A
E22EPB5A
E22EPB7A
E22EPB1B
E22EPB5B
E22EPB7B
E22EPB1C
E22EPB5C
E22EPB7C
E22EPB1D
E22EPB5D
E22EPB7D
E22EPB1E
E22EPB5E
E22EPB7E
E22 Series — Plastic Operators – Chrome Bezel
Flush
Black
White
Gray
E22PP1A
E22PP5A
E22PP7A
E22PP1B
E22PP5B
E22PP7B
E22PP1C
E22PP5C
E22PP7C
E22PP1D
E22PP5D
E22PP7D
E22PP1E
E22PP5E
E22PP7E
Extended
Black
White
Gray
E22EP1A
E22EP5A
E22EP7A
E22EP1B
E22EP5B
E22EP7B
E22EP1C
E22EP5C
E22EP7C
E22EP1D
E22EP5D
E22EP7D
E22EP1E
E22EP5E
E22EP7E
EM22 Series — Metal Operators – Chrome Bezel
Flush
Black
White
Gray
EM22PP1A
EM22PP5A
EM22PP7A
EM22PP1B
EM22PP5B
EM22PP7B
EM22PP1C
EM22PP5C
EM22PP7C
EM22PP1D
EM22PP5D
EM22PP7D
EM22PP1E
EM22PP5E
EM22PP7E
Extended
Black
White
Gray
EM22EP1A
EM22EP5A
EM22EP7A
EM22EP1B
EM22EP5B
EM22EP7B
EM22EP1C
EM22EP5C
EM22EP7C
EM22EP1D
EM22EP5D
EM22EP7D
EM22EP1E
EM22EP5E
EM22EP7E
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-38
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Push-Push Units
Table 47-38. Illuminated Bezel Flush Assembled Push-Push Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Note: In order to comply with NFPA 79 and IEC 60204-1 requirements:
The colors black, white or gray shall be used for Push-Push operators which act alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons.
White shall be used for illuminated Push-Push operators.
Push-Push operators shall only be used for functions which can not result in a hazardous condition.
IEC 60204-1 recommends that Push-Push operators acting alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons be marked with the printed
legend N124.
Button
Color
Contact Block Circuit
NO NC Price
U.S. $
NO-NC 2NO 2NC Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Plastic Operators — Chrome Bezel
24V AC/DC Full Voltage, Flush, Illuminated Bezel
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22TP2X4A
E22TP3X4A
E22TP5X4A
E22TP6X4A
E22TP9X4A
E22TP0X4A
E22TP2X4B
E22TP3X4B
E22TP5X4B
E22TP6X4B
E22TP9X4B
E22TP0X4B
E22TP2X4C
E22TP3X4C
E22TP5X4C
E22TP6X4C
E22TP9X4C
E22TP0X4C
E22TP2X4D
E22TP3X4D
E22TP5X4D
E22TP6X4D
E22TP9X4D
E22TP0X4D
E22TP2X4E
E22TP3X4E
E22TP5X4E
E22TP6X4E
E22TP9X4E
E22TP0X4E
120V AC/DC Resistor, Flush, Illuminated Bezel
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22TP2X10A
E22TP3X10A
E22TP5X10A
E22TP6X10A
E22TP9X10A
E22TP0X10A
E22TP2X10B
E22TP3X10B
E22TP5X10B
E22TP6X10B
E22TP9X10B
E22TP0X10B
E22TP2X10C
E22TP3X10C
E22TP5X10C
E22TP6X10C
E22TP9X10C
E22TP0X10C
E22TP2X10D
E22TP3X10D
E22TP5X10D
E22TP6X10D
E22TP9X10D
E22TP0X10D
E22TP2X10E
E22TP3X10E
E22TP5X10E
E22TP6X10E
E22TP9X10E
E22TP0X10E
120V AC Transformer — 50/60 Hz, Flush, Illuminated Bezel
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22TP2X11A
E22TP3X11A
E22TP5X11A
E22TP6X11A
E22TP9X11A
E22TP0X11A
E22TP2X11B
E22TP3X11B
E22TP5X11B
E22TP6X11B
E22TP9X11B
E22TP0X11B
E22TP2X11C
E22TP3X11C
E22TP5X11C
E22TP6X11C
E22TP9X11C
E22TP0X11C
E22TP2X11D
E22TP3X11D
E22TP5X11D
E22TP6X11D
E22TP9X11D
E22TP0X11D
E22TP2X11E
E22TP3X11E
E22TP5X11E
E22TP6X11E
E22TP9X11E
E22TP0X11E
Metal Operators — Chrome Bezel
24V AC/DC Full Voltage Unit, Flush, Illuminated Bezel
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
EM22TP2X4A
EM22TP3X4A
EM22TP5X4A
EM22TP6X4A
EM22TP9X4A
EM22TP0X4A
EM22TP2X4B
EM22TP3X4B
EM22TP5X4B
EM22TP6X4B
EM22TP9X4B
EM22TP0X4B
EM22TP2X4C
EM22TP3X4C
EM22TP5X4C
EM22TP6X4C
EM22TP9X4C
EM22TP0X4C
EM22TP2X4D
EM22TP3X4D
EM22TP5X4D
EM22TP6X4D
EM22TP9X4D
EM22TP0X4D
EM22TP2X4E
EM22TP3X4E
EM22TP5X4E
EM22TP6X4E
EM22TP9X4E
EM22TP0X4E
120V AC/DC Resistor Unit, Flush, Illuminated Bezel
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
EM22TP2X10A
EM22TP3X10A
EM22TP5X10A
EM22TP6X10A
EM22TP9X10A
EM22TP0X10A
EM22TP2X10B
EM22TP3X10B
EM22TP5X10B
EM22TP6X10B
EM22TP9X10B
EM22TP0X10B
EM22TP2X10C
EM22TP3X10C
EM22TP5X10C
EM22TP6X10C
EM22TP9X10C
EM22TP0X10C
EM22TP2X10D
EM22TP3X10D
EM22TP5X10D
EM22TP6X10D
EM22TP9X10D
EM22TP0X10D
EM22TP2X10E
EM22TP3X10E
EM22TP5X10E
EM22TP6X10E
EM22TP9X10E
EM22TP0X10E
120V AC Transformer Unit, Flush, Illuminated Bezel
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
EM22TP2X11A
EM22TP3X11A
EM22TP5X11A
EM22TP6X11A
EM22TP9X11A
EM22TP0X11A
EM22TP2X11B
EM22TP3X11B
EM22TP5X11B
EM22TP6X11B
EM22TP9X11B
EM22TP0X11B
EM22TP2X11C
EM22TP3X11C
EM22TP5X11C
EM22TP6X11C
EM22TP9X11C
EM22TP0X11C
EM22TP2X11D
EM22TP3X11D
EM22TP5X11D
EM22TP6X11D
EM22TP9X11D
EM22TP0X11D
EM22TP2X11E
EM22TP3X11E
EM22TP5X11E
EM22TP6X11E
EM22TP9X11E
EM22TP0X11E
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-39
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Push-Push Components
Alternate Action (Push-Push) Components
Non-illuminated and Illuminated Push-Push Operators
Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks when used with supplied 3-way adapter, 5-way mounting adapters are not to be used.
Table 47-39. Push-Push Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Note: In order to comply with NFPA 79 and IEC 60204-1 requirements:
The colors black, white or gray shall be used for Push-Push operators which act alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons.
White shall be used for illuminated Push-Push operators.
Push-Push operators shall only be used for functions which cannot result in a hazardous condition.
IEC 60204-1 recommends that Push-Push operators acting alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons be marked with the IEC symbol
for Push-Push pushbuttons. To order with legend, add Suffix N124 to operator Catalog Number. Example: E22PPB1N124
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
E22 Series — Plastic Operators EM22 Series — Metal Operators
Black Bezel Chrome Bezel Chrome Bezel
Flush, Non-illuminated
Color Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Black
White
Gray
E22PPB1
E22PPB5
E22PPB7
E22PP1
E22PP5
E22PP7
EM22PP1
EM22PP5
EM22PP7
Extended, Non-illuminated
Color Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Black
White
Gray
E22EPB1
E22EPB5
E22EPB7
E22EP1
E22EP5
E22EP7
EM22EP1
EM22EP5
EM22EP7
Flush, Illuminated
Color Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
White
Clear
Red
Green
Blue
Amber
E22NPB5
E22NPB0
E22NPB2
E22NPB3
E22NPB6
E22NPB9
E22NP5
E22NP0
E22NP2
E22NP3
E22NP6
E22NP9
EM22NP5
EM22NP0
EM22NP2
EM22NP3
EM22NP6
EM22NP9
Flush, Illuminated with Lens Guard
Color Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
White
Clear
Red
Green
Blue
Amber
—
—
—
—
—
—
E22TP5
E22TP0
E22TP2
E22TP3
E22TP6
E22TP9
EM22TP5
EM22TP0
EM22TP2
EM22TP3
EM22TP6
EM22TP9
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Light Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-70 – 47-71
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-40
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Push-Push Components
Alternate Action (Push-Push) Components (Continued)
Contact Block Selection/Application
Non-illuminated Push-Push operators will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (singles or duals). 5-way mounting adapters are
not suitable with Push-Push operators. Illuminated Push-Push operators will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (singles or
duals) and one light unit.
Table 47-40. Push-Push Operators
X = Closed Circuit
O = Open Circuit
Note: Add Contact Block Suffix Code from tables above to operator
Catalog Number to order as a complete device. Example: E22EP1B =
chrome bezel, Black button Push-Push with 1NC contact block.
Contact Block Required Circuit Circuit Operation
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Push-ON Push-OFF
B E22B1 1NC O X
A E22B2 1NO X O
W E22B11 1NO-1NC X
O
O
X
V E22B20 2NO X
X
O
O
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-70 – 47-71
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-41
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 Series, Complete Devices — Maintained Emergency Stop Pushbutton Units
Trigger Action Emergency Stop Pushbutton Units — EN 418 Compliant
The European Machinery Safety Direc-
tive EN 418 requires all emergency
OFF devices to be self-latching types
and to have positive (direct) opening
operation. Devices have to be manually
reset. Actuators shall be mushroom
head type and colored RED. The back-
ground immediately around the device
actuator should be colored YELLOW.
See Page 47-42 for yellow guard.
The new E22 trigger action operators
in conjunction with yellow nameplates
and DOA (Direct Opening Action) con-
tact blocks are fully compliant with this
safety directive.
Features
■Safety interlock against inadvertent
operation
■Stop command and latching occur
simultaneously
■Contacts cannot be “teased” open
■Direct Opening Action (DOA) contact
blocks
■Resetable by rotation of actuator
Periodic Inspection
Industrial control equipment should
be periodically inspected. Eaton
recommends inspection of Emergency
Stop devices for proper mechanical
operation after every 500 hours of
elapsed time. See National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
Standard No. ICS 1.3, Preventive
Maintenance of Industrial Control and
Systems Equipment, for guidelines in
setting up a maintenance program.
Table 47-41. Trigger Action Emergency OFF Switch Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Third party certified by DEMKO. For specification drawing, request A70-8530 from the Cutler-Hammer TRC — call 1-800-809-2772.
Third party certified by DEMKO and GS3 to SEMI S2-0200 specifications. For specification drawing, request A70-8508 from the Cutler-Hammer TRC —
call 1-800-809-2772.
EMO (Emergency Machine OFF) marking per SEMI S2 requirement.
Table 47-42. Two-Position Push-Pull Emergency Stop Pushbutton Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
IEC Symbol for Emergency Stop.
Direct Opening Action (DOA) for IEC 60947-5-1 (Annex K) and NEMA ICS 5 (Part 6) Compliance
Table 47-43. Mechanical Operating Parameters of Operators with E22CB1 and E22CB11 (NC Contacts Only)
Action Color Legend/
Engraving
Contact Block Circuit
1NC 2NC 1NC-1NO 2NC-1NO
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
40 mm Trigger Action Twist-to-Release
Red (Red) E22LTA2QB E22LTA2QE E22LTA2QW E22LTA2QWB
40 mm Trigger Action Twist-to-Release EMO (Emergency Machine OFF)
Red (White)
E22LTA2N123QB E22LTA2N123QE E22LTA2N123QW E22LTA2N123QWB
Action Color Legend/
Engraving
Contact Block Circuit
1NC 2NC 1NC-1NO
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
40 mm Mushroom
Red None E22LPB2B E22LPB2E E22LPB2C
Red E22LPB2N125B E22LPB2N125E E22LPB2N125C
DOA Operating
Parameters
Latching Trigger Action E-Stop 2-Position Push-Pull
E-Stop + E22CB1 E-Stop + E22CB11 2-Pos. Push-Pull + E22CB1 2-Pos. Push-Pull + E22CB11
Min. Travel to Open Contact — Inches (mm) 0.24 (6.1) 0.24 (6.1) 0.08 (2.1) 0.08 (2.1)
Min. Force to Open Contact — lb (N) 5.00 (22.24) 5.00 (22.24) 0 0
Total Travel — Inches (mm) 0.29 (7.4) 0.29 (7.4) 0.23 (5.8) 0.23 (5.8)
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-42
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Emergency Stop Components
Emergency Stop Components
Table 47-44. Standard Emergency Stop and Emergency OFF Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Compliant with EN418 Machinery Safety Directive.
Yellow field — red letters.
Maximum of 3 contact blocks allowable (6 circuits) when optional operator plug is used.
Table 47-45. EN418 Compliant Safety Yellow Guard
Periodic Inspection
Industrial control equipment should
be periodically inspected. Eaton
recommends inspection of Emergency
Stop devices for proper mechanical
operation after every 500 hours of
elapsed time. See National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
Standard No. ICS 1.3, Preventive
Maintenance of Industrial Control and
Systems Equipment, for guidelines in
setting up a maintenance program.
All Shown with
Chrome Bezel
Action Color Button Diameter/
Material
Legend/
Engraving
Plastic — Black Bezel Plastic — Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Maximum of 2 Contact Blocks (4 Circuits) When Used with Supplied 3-Way Adapter (Unless Otherwise Noted)
Maintained
Trigger Action
Twist-to-Release
Red 40 mm/Plastic E22LTA2 —
Maintained
Trigger Action
Twist-to-Release
Red 40 mm/Plastic EMO E22LTA2N123 —
Momentary Red 40 mm/Plastic E22LB2 E22L2
50 mm/Plastic E22JPB2 E22JP2
50 mm/Alum. E22JB2 E22J2
EMERG. STOP E22JB2N8 E22J2N8
Maintained —
2-Position Push-Pull
Red 40 mm/Plastic E22LPB2 E22LP2
Maintained —
2-Position Push-Pull
Red 50 mm/Plastic E22JPLB2 E22JPL2
50 mm/Alum. E22JLB2 E22JL2
EMERG. STOP E22JLB2N8 E22JL2N8
Maintained —
2-Position Push-Pull
Red 40 mm/Plastic E22EDB2 E22ED2
EMERG. STOP E22EDB2N8 E22ED2N8
EMERG. STOP E22EDB2N796 E22ED2N796
Maintained —
2-Position Push-Pull
Red 40 mm/Plastic
Illuminated
E22GDB2 E22GD2
EMERG. STOP E22GDB2N8 E22GD2N8
EMERG. STOP E22GDB2N796 E22GD2N796
Maintained —
Twist-to-Release
Red 40 mm/Plastic E22LLB2 E22LL2
E22LLB2N886 E22LL2N886
Maintained — Key Release Red 40 mm/Plastic E22GB2 E22G2
Description Color Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Mushroom Guard for 40 mm Trigger
Action Switch — To be used with E22LTA2
and E22LTA2N123 operators.
Safety
Yellow
E22MGTA
(White)
(White)
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
5-Way Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-77
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-43
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Twist-to-Release, Push-Pull and Key Release Components
Twist-to-Release, Push-Pull and Key Release Components
Table 47-46. Maintained Contact Mushroom Head Operators, Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
For legend plates, use oversize plates, Catalog Numbers E22VA1, VA2 or VA8 listed on Page 47-74.
To order a different key and lock assembly, add suffix B1, C1, D1, E1 or F1 to the end of the Catalog Number.
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Will Accept Maximum of 2 Contact Blocks (4 Circuits)
When Used with Supplied 3-Way Adapter.
E22 Series —
Plastic Operators
EM22 Series —
Metal Operators
Color Black Bezel Chrome Bezel Color Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E22 Black E22 Chrome EM22 Chrome Twist-to-Release — 28 mm Diameter Button
(Push to Latch — Twist to Release)
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
E22MLB1
E22MLB2
E22MLB3
E22MLB4
E22MLB6
E22ML1
E22ML2
E22ML3
E22ML4
E22ML6
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
EM22ML1
EM22ML2
EM22ML3
EM22ML4
EM22ML6
Twist-to-Release — 40 mm Diameter Button
(Push to Latch — Twist to Release)
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
E22LLB1
E22LLB2
E22LLB3
E22LLB4
E22LLB6
E22LL1
E22LL2
E22LL3
E22LL4
E22LL6
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
EM22LL1
EM22LL2
EM22LL3
EM22LL4
EM22LL6
Push-Pull — 40 mm Diameter Button (Push to Latch — Pull to Release)
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
E22LPB1
E22LPB2
E22LPB3
E22LPB4
E22LPB6
E22LP1
E22LP2
E22LP3
E22LP4
E22LP6
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
EM22LP1
EM22LP2
EM22LP3
EM22LP4
EM22LP6
Push-Pull — 50 mm Diameter Button (Push to Latch — Pull to Release)
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Red (Metal)
E22JPLB1
E22JPLB2
E22JPLB3
E22JPLB4
E22JPLB6
E22JLB2
E22JPL1
E22JPL2
E22JPL3
E22JPL4
E22JPL6
E22JL2
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Red (Metal)
EM22JPL1
EM22JPL2
EM22JPL3
EM22JPL4
EM22JPL6
EM22JL2
Red (Metal) EMERGENCY STOP
E22JLB2N8 E22JL2N8 EM22JL2N8
Key Release — 40 mm Diameter Button (Push to Latch — Turn Key to Release)
Black
Red
Green
E22GB1
E22GB2
E22GB3
E22G1
E22G2
E22G3
Black
Red
Green
EM22G1
EM22G2
EM22G3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-44
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Indicating Light Units, Modular
Indicating Light Units — Modular
■Standard and PresTest Types
■Plastic or Metal Operators
■Full Voltage LED Light Units or
■Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer
Incandescent Light Units
■Plastic Lenses
PresTest — This device incorporates a
press-to-test feature whereby depressing
the lens disconnects the light from the
source being monitored and connects
the lamp to a continuously energized
circuit for immediate test for a faulty
lamp.
Table 47-47. Indicating and PresTest Light Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Color Indicating Light PresTest
LED Incandescent Incandescent
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Plastic Operators
24V AC/DC Full Voltage
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22H2X40
E22H3X41
E22H5X90
E22H6X52
E22H9X95
E22H0X90
E22H2X4
E22H3X4
E22H5X4
E22H6X4
E22H9X4
E22H0X4
E22T2X20
E22T3X20
E22T5X20
E22T6X20
E22T9X20
E22T0X20
120V AC Full Voltage 120V AC/DC Resistor
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22H2X43
E22H3X44
E22H5X92
E22H6X61
E22H9X96
E22H0X92
E22H2X10
E22H3X10
E22H5X10
E22H6X10
E22H9X10
E22H0X10
E22T2X26
E22T3X26
E22T5X26
E22T6X26
E22T9X26
E22T0X26
120V AC Transformer
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
—
—
—
—
—
—
E22H2X11
E22H3X11
E22H5X11
E22H6X11
E22H9X11
E22H0X11
E22T2X27
E22T3X27
E22T5X27
E22T6X27
E22T9X27
E22T0X27
Metal Operators
24V AC/DC Full Voltage
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
EM22H2X40
EM22H3X41
EM22H5X90
EM22H6X52
EM22H9X95
EM22H0X90
EM22H2X4
EM22H3X4
EM22H5X4
EM22H6X4
EM22H9X4
EM22H0X4
EM22T2X20
EM22T3X20
EM22T5X20
EM22T6X20
EM22T9X20
EM22T0X20
120V AC Full Voltage 120V AC/DC Resistor Unit
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
EM22H2X43
EM22H3X44
EM22H5X92
EM22H6X61
EM22H9X96
EM22H0X92
EM22H2X8
EM22H3X8
EM22H5X8
EM22H6X8
EM22H9X8
EM22H0X8
EM22T2X26
EM22T3X26
EM22T5X26
EM22T6X26
EM22T9X26
EM22T0X26
120V AC Transformer — 50/60 Hz
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
EM22H2X433
EM22H3X444
EM22H5X922
EM22H6X611
EM22H9X966
EM22H0X922
EM22H2X11
EM22H3X11
EM22H5X11
EM22H6X11
EM22H9X11
EM22H0X11
EM22T2X27
EM22T3X27
EM22T5X27
EM22T6X27
EM22T9X27
EM22T0X27
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-45
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Indicating Light Units, One-Piece LED
Indicating Light Units — One-Piece LED
■One-Piece Body Style
■Plastic Operators
■Full Voltage LEDs
■Cluster-Style Integrated LED (non-removable) or
■Standard Bayonet Base LED
■Plastic Lenses
Table 47-48. Cluster LED Type Indicating Lights — Non-removable LEDs — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Published theoretical lamp lives are based on ideal laboratory conditions and should be used for comparison only. Actual life may be shorter due to
application conditions.
Table 47-49. Standard LED Type Indicating Lights — Replaceable bayonet base LEDs — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Published theoretical lamp lives are based on ideal laboratory conditions and should be used for comparison only. Actual life may be shorter due to
application conditions.
Product Description Supply
Voltage
LED Color Lamp Life Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Includes
permanently
attached lens
and board
mounted,
cluster style
LEDs
24V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
100,000 E22HL2X4
E22HL3X4
E22HL9X4
48V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
100,000 E22HL2X6
E22HL3X6
E22HL9X6
110/120V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
100,000 E22HL2X8
E22HL3X8
E22HL9X8
Product Description Supply
Voltage
Color Lamp Life Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Includes lens
and T 3-1/4
bayonet base
LED
12V AC/DC Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
100,000 E22HV0X89
E22HV2X37
E22HV3X38
E22HV4X39
E22HV5X89
E22HV6X51
E22HV9X94
24V AC/DC Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
E22HV0X90
E22HV2X40
E22HV3X41
E22HV4X42
E22HV5X90
E22HV6X52
E22HV9X95
48V AC/DC Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
E22HV0X91
E22HV2X53
E22HV3X54
E22HV4X55
E22HV5X91
E22HV6X56
E22HV9X87
60V AC/DC Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
E22HV0X97
E22HV2X57
E22HV3X58
E22HV4X59
E22HV5X97
E22HV6X60
E22HV9X98
120V AC Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
E22HV0X92
E22HV2X43
E22HV3X44
E22HV4X45
E22HV5X92
E22HV6X61
E22HV9X96
Non-removable LED
1.88
(47.7)
0.58
(14.8)
Ø1.16
(29.5)
1.88
(47.7)
0.58
(14.8)
Ø1.16
(29.5)
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-46
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 Series, Complete Devices — Indicating Light Units, One-Piece Incandescent
Indicating Light Units — One-Piece Incandescent
■One-Piece Body Style
■Plastic Operators
■Full Voltage and Resistor Type
■Bayonet Base Incandescent Lamp
■Standard or Insert (with Printed
Legends) Plastic Lenses
Table 47-50. Incandescent Standard Lens Type Indicating Lights — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Published theoretical lamp lives are based on ideal laboratory conditions and should be used for comparison only. Actual life may be shorter due to
application conditions.
Incandescent — Insert Lens with Printed Legends
Insert version indicating lights allow printed legends to be placed directly on the inside of the lens.
To specify lens insert with printed legends, add Suffix Code from table on Page 47-85 to the end of the catalog number.
Table 47-51. Incandescent Insert Lens Type Indicating Lights — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Published theoretical lamp lives are based on ideal laboratory conditions and should be used for comparison only. Actual life may be shorter due to
application conditions.
Product Description Supply
Voltage
Color Lamp Life Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Includes lens and
T 3-1/4 bayonet
base lamp
12V AC/DC
#756 Lamp
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
15,000 E22HV0X3
E22HV2X3
E22HV3X3
E22HV4X3
E22HV5X3
E22HV6X3
E22HV9X3
24V AC/DC
#1819
Lamp
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
2,500 E22HV0X4
E22HV2X4
E22HV3X4
E22HV4X4
E22HV5X4
E22HV6X4
E22HV9X4
110/120V
AC/DC
W1121
Lamp
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
1,000 E22HV0X8
E22HV2X8
E22HV3X8
E22HV4X8
E22HV5X8
E22HV6X8
E22HV9X8
220/240V
AC Resistor
W1121
Lamp
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
1,000 E22HR0X8
E22HR2X8
E22HR3X8
E22HR4X8
E22HR5X8
E22HR6X8
E22HR9X8
Product Description Supply
Voltage
Color Lamp Life Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Includes lens and
T 3-1/4 bayonet
base lamp
12V AC/DC
#756 Lamp
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
15,000 E22HVA0X3
E22HVA2X3
E22HVA3X3
E22HVA4X3
E22HVA5X3
E22HVA6X3
E22HVA9X3
24V AC/DC
#1819
Lamp
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
2,500 E22HVA0X4
E22HVA2X4
E22HVA3X4
E22HVA4X4
E22HVA5X4
E22HVA6X4
E22HVA9X4
110/120V
AC/DC
W1121
Lamp
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
1,000 E22HVA0X8
E22HVA2X8
E22HVA3X8
E22HVA4X8
E22HVA5X8
E22HVA6X8
E22HVA9X8
1.88
(47.7)
0.58
(14.8)
Ø1.16
(29.5)
Lens Insert
with Printed Legend
See Page 47-85.
1.88
(47.7)
0.58
(14.8)
Ø1.16
(29.5)
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Indicating Light Components
Indicating Light Components
Table 47-52. Indicating Lights — Without Light Unit — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Table 47-53. E22 Monoblock — Full Voltage Indicating Lights without Lamps — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
For LED/incandescent lamps, see Page 47-70 – 47-71.
For standard legends for diffuser, see Page 47-85.
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Color E22 Series — Plastic Operators EM22 Series — Metal Operators
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E22 EM22 25 mm Dia. Standard Lens
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22H2
E22H3
E22H4
E22H5
E22H6
E22H9
E22H0
EM22H2
EM22H3
EM22H4
EM22H5
EM22H6
EM22H9
EM22H0
25 mm Dia. Lens — Insert Version
(To Order with Printed Legend Insert, see Page 47-85.)
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22A2
E22A3
E22A4
E22A5
E22A6
E22A9
E22A0
EM22A2
EM22A3
EM22A4
EM22A5
EM22A6
EM22A9
EM22A0
Chrome Bezel 25 mm Dia. Glass Lens — Rated 4 – 13 Only
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22F2
E22F3
E22F4
E22F5
E22F6
E22F9
E22F0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Description Color Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Description Color Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Optically Enhanced Style Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
E22HV0
E22HV2
E22HV3
E22HV4
E22HV5
E22HV6
E22HV9
Diffuser Style (Catalog Numbers are
without legends)
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
E22HVA0
E22HVA2
E22HVA3
E22HVA4
E22HVA5
E22HVA6
E22HVA9
Lens Insert
with Printed Legend
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-48
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Push-Pull Units
Push-Pull Units
■Plastic or Metal Operators
■Black or Chrome Bezel
■Two- and Three-Position
■Illuminated and Non-illuminated
■Incandescent Bayonet Base Lamps
■Transformer or Resistor Light Units
Table 47-54. Two-Position Push-Pull Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
Table 47-55. Three-Position Push-Pull Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
Operator Position Non-illuminated Illuminated – Tall Incandescent Bulb
Pull Push Button
Color
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Lens
Color
120V AC Transformer 120V AC/DC Resistor
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Plastic Operators — Black Bezel
XO
Black
Red
Green
Red (Alum) —
EMERG. STOP
E22EDB1B
E22EDB2B
E22EDB3B
E22EDB2N8B
Red
Green
Amber
Red (Alum) —
EMERG. STOP
E22GDB2X11B
E22GDB3X11B
E22GDB9X11B
E22GDB2N8X11B
E22GDB2X10B
E22GDB3X10B
E22GDB9X10B
E22GDB2N8X10B
Plastic Operators — Chrome Bezel
XO
Black
Red
Green
Red (Alum) —
EMERG. STOP
E22ED1B
E22ED2B
E22ED3B
E22ED2N8B
Red
Green
Amber
Red (Alum) —
EMERG. STOP
E22GD2X11B
E22GD3X11B
E22GD9X11B
E22GD2N8X11B
E22GD2X10B
E22GD3X10B
E22GD9X10B
E22GD2N8X10B
Metal Operators — Chrome Bezel
XO
Red
Red – EMERG.
STOP
EM22ED2B
EM22ED2N8B
Red
Red – EMERG.
STOP
EM22GD2X11B
EM22GD2N8X11B
EM22GD2X10B
EM22GD2N8X10B
Operator Position Non-illuminated Illuminated – Tall Incandescent Bulb
Pull Intermediate Push Button
Color
Catalog
Number Price
U.S. $
Lens
Color
120V AC
Transformer
120V AC/DC Resistor
Catalog
Number Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number Price
U.S. $
Plastic Operators — Black Bezel
Momentary Push, Momentary Pull with 1NC and 1LONC Contact Blocks
X
X
X
O
O
O
Black
Red
Green
E22FDB1S
E22FDB2S
E22FDB3S
Red
Green
Amber
E22HDB2X11S
E22HDB3X11S
E22HDB9X11S
E22HDB2X10S
E22HDB3X10S
E22HDB9X10S
Momentary Push, Momentary Pull with 1NC and 1ECNO Contact Blocks
X
O
O
O
O
X
Black
Red
Green
E22FDB1T
E22FDB2T
E22FDB3T
Red
Green
Amber
E22HDB2X11T
E22HDB3X11T
E22HDB9X11T
E22HDB2X10T
E22HDB3X10T
E22HDB9X10T
Plastic Operators — Chrome Bezel
Momentary Push, Momentary Pull with 1NC and 1LONC Contact Blocks
X
X
X
O
O
O
Black
Red
Green
E22FD1S
E22FD2S
E22FD3S
Red
Green
Amber
E22HD2X11S
E22HD3X11S
E22HD9X11S
E22HD2X10S
E22HD3X10S
E22HD9X10S
Momentary Push, Momentary Pull with 1NC and 1ECNO Contact Blocks
X
O
O
O
O
X
Black
Red
Green
E22FD1T
E22FD2T
E22FD3T
Red
Green
Amber
E22HD2X11T
E22HD3X11T
E22HD9X11T
E22HD2X10T
E22HD3X10T
E22HD9X10T
Metal Operators — Chrome Bezel
3-Position Momentary Push and Pull — 1NC and 1LONO Contact Block
X
O
O
O
O
X
Red EM22FD2T Red EM22HD2X11T EM22HD2X10T
3-Position Momentary Push and Pull — 1NC and IECNC Contact Block
X
X
X
O
O
O
Red EM22FD2S Red EM22HD2X11S EM22HD2X10S
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-49
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Push-Pull Components
Push-Pull Components — Non-illuminated Operators
Table 47-56. Non-illuminated Push-Pull Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
These operators can be supplied with EMERGENCY STOP marking (decal) on face ring. To order, add Suffix N8 to operator Catalog Number.
Example: E22ED2N8. With Yellow field, Red letters, add N796.
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Contact Block Selection/Application
Push-Pull operators will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks
(4 circuits, 2-position/2 circuits, 3-position). 5-way mounting
adapters can only be used on 2-position Push-Pulls and are
not suitable with 3-position Push-Pulls. See Page 47-77.
Table 47-57. 2-Position Push-Pull
X = Closed Circuit O = Open Circuit
Table 47-58. 3-Position Push-Pull — E22B2, E22B11 and E22B20 Cannot
Be Used
X = Closed Circuit O = Open Circuit
Note: Add Contact Block Suffix Code from tables above to operator
Catalog Number to order as a complete device.
Example: E22ED1B = 2-position chrome bezel, Black button Push-Pull
with 1NC contact block.
E22 Series — Plastic Operators EM22 Series — Metal Operators
Color Black Bezel Chrome Bezel Color Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E22 Black E22 Chrome EM22 Chrome 2-Position — 40 mm Dia. Button (Maintained)
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
E22EDB1
E22EDB2
E22EDB3
E22EDB4
E22EDB5
E22EDB6
E22EDB7
E22EDB8
E22ED1
E22ED2
E22ED3
E22ED4
E22ED5
E22ED6
E22ED7
E22ED8
Red
Green
EM22ED2
EM22ED3
3-Position — 40 mm Dia. Button (Spring Return to Center)
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
E22FDB1
E22FDB2
E22FDB3
E22FDB4
E22FDB5
E22FDB6
E22FDB7
E22FDB8
E22FD1
E22FD2
E22FD3
E22FD4
E22FD5
E22FD6
E22FD7
E22FD8
Red
Green
EM22FD2
EM22FD3
3-Position — 40 mm Dia. Push-Pull Pushbutton (Spring Return to Center from Pulled Position)
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
E22FDMB1
E22FDMB2
E22FDMB3
E22FDMB4
E22FDMB5
E22FDMB6
E22FDMB7
E22FDMB8
E22FDM1
E22FDM2
E22FDM3
E22FDM4
E22FDM5
E22FDM6
E22FDM7
E22FDM8
Red
Green
EM22FDM2
EM22FDM3
Contact Block Required Circuit Maintained Circuit Operation
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Pulled Pushed
B E22B1 1NC X O
A E22B2 1NO O X
W E22B11 1NO-1NC X
O
O
X
V E22B20 2NO O
O
X
X
Contact Block Required Circuit Maintained Circuit Operation
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Pulled Center Pushed
S E22B1 and
E22B4
1NC
1NC
X
X
O
X
O
O
T E22B1 and
E22B5
1NC
1NO
X
O
O
O
O
X
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-70 – 47-73
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-50
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Push-Pull Components
Push-Pull Components — Illuminated Operators
Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks when used with supplied 3-way adapter. 5-way mounting adapters are not to be used with
3-position operators, see Page 47-77.
Table 47-59. Illuminated Push-Pull Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
These operators can be supplied with EMERGENCY STOP marking (decal) on face ring. To order, add Suffix N8 to operator Catalog Number.
Example: E22ED2N8. With Yellow field, Red letters, add N796.
All illuminated Push-Pull operators require tall incandescent bulbs or tall LEDs from Table 47-103 or Table 47-104 (Page 47-73).
29.5 mm Diameter Button — For Both Non-illuminated and Illuminated Push-Pull Operators
For Push-Pull operator with 29.5 mm
diameter button, replace 5th digit (D)
of the listed Catalog Number with letter
H. Example: E22EH1, black, non-
illuminated 2-position push-pull opera-
tor with 29.5 mm diameter button.
Note: Add Suffix Codes from the tables on
Page 47-69 (Contact Blocks) and Pages 47-
70 – 47-71 (Light Units) to operator Catalog
Number to order as a complete device.
Example: E22GD2X4B = 2-position chrome
bezel, Red button lens, 24V light unit Push-
Pull with 1NC contact block.
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
E22 Series — Plastic Operators EM22 Series — Metal Operators
Color Black Bezel Chrome Bezel Color Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E22 Black E22 Chrome EM22 Chrome 2-Position — 40 mm Diameter Lens (Maintained)
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22GDB2
E22GDB3
E22GDB4
E22GDB5
E22GDB6
E22GDB9
E22GBD0
E22GD2
E22GD3
E22GD4
E22GD5
E22GD6
E22GD9
E22GD0
Red
Green
Amber
EM22GD2
EM22GD3
EM22GD9
3-Position — 40 mm Diameter Lens (Spring Return to Center)
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22HDB2
E22HDB3
E22HDB4
E22HDB5
E22HDB6
E22HDB9
E22HDB0
E22HD2
E22HD3
E22HD4
E22HD5
E22HD6
E22HD9
E22HD0
Red
Green
Amber
EM22HD2
EM22HD3
EM22HD9
3-Position — 40 mm Dia. Push-Pull Pushbutton (Spring Return to Center from Pulled Position)
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22HDMB2
E22HDMB3
E22HDMB4
E22HDMB5
E22HDMB6
E22HDMB9
E22HDMB0
E22HDM2
E22HDM3
E22HDM4
E22HDM5
E22HDM6
E22HDM9
E22HDM0
Red
Green
Amber
EM22HDM2
EM22HDM3
EM22HDM9
29.5 mm Diameter Button Operator
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-70 – 47-73
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-51
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Selector Switches
Selector Switch Units
■Plastic Operators
■Black or Chrome Bezel
■Two-Position
■45° Throw
■Knob or Lever
■Non-illuminated
Table 47-60. Two-Position Selector Switch Units — 45° Throw — Cam 2 — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order with an alternate color, replace underlined digit (1) of listed Catalog Number with Code Number from table below.
Example: 2-position operator with Red knob, E22XBF2A
45°45°
Operator
Action
Operator
Type
Operator Position
Cam — 2
O X X O
O X
O X
X O
O X
X O
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Plastic Operator — Black Bezel
Knob
Lever
E22XBF1A
E22VBF1A
E22XBF1C
E22VBF1C
E22XBF1WW
E22VBF1WW
Knob
Lever
E22XB51A
E22VB51A
E22XB51C
E22VB51C
E22XB51WW
E22VB51WW
Knob
Lever
E22XBE1A
E22VBE1A
E22XBE1C
E22VBE1C
E22XBE1WW
E22VBE1WW
Knob
Lever
E22XB61A
E22VB61A
E22XB61C
E22VB61C
E22XB61WW
E22VB61WW
Plastic Operator — Chrome Bezel
Knob
Lever
E22XF1A
E22VF1A
E22XF1C
E22VF1C
E22XF1WW
E22VF1WW
Knob
Lever
E22X51A
E22V51A
E22X51C
E22V51C
E22X51WW
E22V51WW
Knob
Lever
E22XE1A
E22VE1A
E22XE1C
E22XE1C
E22XE1WW
E22VE1WW
Knob
Lever
E22X61A
E22V61A
E22X61C
E22X61C
E22X61WW
E22V61WW
Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code
Black 1Red 2Green 3Yellow 4White 5Blue 6Gray 7Orange 8
M
M
MM
S
M
MS
M
M
MM
S
M
MS
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-86
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-52
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Selector Switches
Selector Switch Units (Continued)
■Plastic or Metal Operators
■Black or Chrome Bezel
■Two-Position
■60° Throw
■Knob or Lever
■Non-illuminated
Table 47-61. Two-Position Selector Switch Units — 60° Throw — Cam 2 — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order with an alternate color, replace underlined digit (1) of listed Catalog Number with Code Number from table below.
Example: 2-position operator with Red knob, E22XBF62A
60°60°
Operator
Action
Operator
Type
Operator Position
Cam — 2
O X X O
O X
O X
O X
O X
X O
O X
X O
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Plastic Operator — Black Bezel
Knob
Lever
E22XBF61A
E22VBF61A
E22XBF61C
E22VBF61C
—
—
E22XBF61WW
E22VBF61WW
Knob
Lever
E22XB561A
E22VB561A
E22XB561C
E22VB561C
—
—
E22XB561WW
E22VB561WW
Knob
Lever
E22XBE61A
E22VBE61A
E22XBE61C
E22VBE61C
—
—
E22XBE61WW
E22VBE61WW
Knob
Lever
E22XB661A
E22VB661A
E22XB661C
E22VB661C
—
—
E22XB661WW
E22VB661WW
Plastic Operator — Chrome Bezel
Knob
Lever
E22XF61A
E22VF61A
E22XF61C
E22VF61C
—
—
E22XF61WW
E22VF61WW
Knob
Lever
E22X561A
E22V561A
E22X561C
E22V561C
—
—
E22X561WW
E22V561WW
Knob
Lever
E22XE61A
E22VE61A
E22XE61C
E22VE61C
—
—
E22XE61WW
E22VE61WW
Knob
Lever
E22X661A
E22V661A
E22X661C
E22V661C
—
—
E22X661WW
E22V661WW
Metal Operator — Chrome Bezel
Knob
Lever
EM22X561A
EM22V561A
EM22X561C
EM22V561C
EM22X561D
EM22V561D
EM22X561WW
EM22V561WW
Knob
Lever
EM22X661A
EM22V661A
EM22X661C
EM22V661C
EM22X661D
EM22V661D
EM22X661WW
EM22V661WW
Knob
Lever
EM22XF61A
EM22VF61A
EM22XF61C
EM22VF61C
EM22XF61D
EM22VF61D
EM22XF61WW
EM22VF61WW
Knob
Lever
EM22XE61A
EM22VE61A
EM22XE61C
EM22VE61C
EM22XE61D
EM22VE61D
EM22XE61WW
EM22VE61WW
Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code
Black 1Red 2Green 3Yellow 4White 5Blue 6Gray 7Orange 8
M
M
MM
S
M
MS
M
M
MM
S
M
MS
M M
MS
M
M
S
M
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-86
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-53
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Selector Switches
Selector Switch Units (Continued)
■Plastic Operators
■Black or Chrome Bezel
■Three-Position
■45° Throw
■Knob or Lever
■Non-illuminated
Table 47-62. Three-Position Selector Switch Units — 45° Throw — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order with an alternate color, replace underlined digit (1) of listed Catalog Number with Code Number from table below.
Example: 3-position operator with Red knob, E22XBG2D
45°45°
Operator
Action
Operator
Type
Operator Position — Circuit
Cam 1 Cam 2 Cam 3
X O O
O O X
X O X
O O X
X O O
O X O
O O X
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Plastic Operator — Black Bezel
Knob
Lever
E22XBG1D
E22VBG1D
E22XBH1D
E22VBH1D
E22XBG1RR
E22VBG1RR
Knob
Lever
E22XBN1D
E22VBN1D
E22XBP1D
E22VBP1D
E22XBN1RR
E22VBN1RR
Knob
Lever
E22XBL1D
E22VBL1D
E22XBM1D
E22VBM1D
E22XBL1RR
E22VBL1RR
Knob
Lever
E22XBJ1D
E22VBJ1D
E22XBK1D
E22VBK1D
E22XBJ1RR
E22VBJ1RR
Plastic Operator — Chrome Bezel
Knob
Lever
E22XG1D
E22VG1D
E22XH1D
E22VH1D
E22XG1RR
E22VG1RR
Knob
Lever
E22XN1D
E22VN1D
E22XP1D
E22VP1D
E22XN1RR
E22VN1RR
Knob
Lever
E22XL1D
E22VL1D
E22XM1D
E22VM1D
E22XL1RR
E22VL1RR
Knob
Lever
E22XJ1D
E22VJ1D
E22XK1D
E22VK1D
E22XJ1RR
E22VJ1RR
Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code
Black 1Red 2Green 3Yellow 4White 5Blue 6Gray 7Orange 8
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-86
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-54
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Selector Switches
Selector Switch Units (Continued)
■Plastic or Metal Operators
■Black or Chrome Bezel
■Three-Position
■60° Throw
■Knob or Lever
■Non-illuminated
Table 47-63. Three-Position Selector Switch Units — 60° Throw — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order with an alternate color, replace underlined digit (1) of listed Catalog Number with Code Number from table below.
Example: 3-position operator with Red knob, E22XBG62D
60°60°
Operator
Action
Operator
Type
Operator Position
Cam 1 Cam 2 Cam 3
X O O
O O X
X O X
O O X
X O O
O X O
O O X
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Plastic Operator — Black Bezel
Knob
Lever
E22XBG61D
E22VBG61D
E22XBH61D
E22VBH61D
E22XBG61RR
E22VBG61RR
Knob
Lever
E22XBN61D
E22VBN61D
E22XBP61D
E22VBP61D
E22XBN61RR
E22VBN61RR
Knob
Lever
E22XBL61D
E22VBL61D
E22XBM61D
E22VBM61D
E22XBL61RR
E22VBL61RR
Knob
Lever
E22XBJ61D
E22VBJ61D
E22XBK61D
E22VBK61D
E22XBJ61RR
E22VBJ61RR
Plastic Operator — Chrome Bezel
Knob
Lever
E22XG61D
E22VG61D
E22XH61D
E22VH61D
E22XG61RR
E22VG61RR
Knob
Lever
E22XN61D
E22VN61D
E22XP61D
E22VP61D
E22XN61RR
E22VN61RR
Knob
Lever
E22XL61D
E22VL61D
E22XM61D
E22VM61D
E22XL61RR
E22VL61RR
Knob
Lever
E22XJ61D
E22VJ61D
E22XK61D
E22VK61D
E22XJ61RR
E22VJ61RR
Metal Operator — Chrome Bezel
Knob
Lever
EM22XG61D
EM22VG61D
EM22XH61D
EM22VH61D
EM22XG61RR
EM22VG61RR
Knob
Lever
EM22XN61D
EM22VN61D
EM22XP61D
EM22VP61D
EM22XN61RR
EM22VN61RR
Knob
Lever
EM22XL61D
EM22VL61D
EM22XM61D
EM22VM61D
EM22XL61RR
EM22VL61RR
Knob
Lever
EM22XJ61D
EM22VJ61D
EM22XK61D
EM22VK61D
EM22XJ61RR
EM22VJ61RR
Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code
Black 1Red 2Green 3Yellow 4White 5Blue 6Gray 7Orange 8
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-86
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-55
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Selector Switch Components
Selector Switches
45° Throw Non-illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches — Plastic
Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (4 circuits) with supplied 3-way mounting adapter.
Optional 5-way adapter will accept a maximum of 5 contact blocks (10 circuits). See Page 47-77.
Table 47-64. 45° Throw Non-illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Black levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit (underlined) in the listed
Catalog Number using Code Number from following table. Example: E22VE2 — Two-Position Selector Switch with Red Lever.
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Ordering Example — A complete Non-illuminated Selector Switch consists of the following:
Operating Mode
M = Maintained
S = Momentary
Cam
Code
Plastic — Black Bezel Plastic — Chrome Bezel
Left Center Right Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Black Bezel, Lever Chrome Bezel, Lever 2-Position — 45° Throw — Black Lever
—
M
M
—
M
M
2
2
E22VBF1
E22VB51
E22VF1
E22V51
—
M
M
—
S
S
2
2
E22VBE1
E22VB61
E22VE1
E22V61
3-Position — 45° Throw — Black Lever
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22VBG1
E22VBH1
E22VG1
E22VH1
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22VBJ1
E22VBK1
E22VJ1
E22VK1
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22VBL1
E22VBM1
E22VL1
E22VM1
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22VBN1
E22VBP1
E22VN1
E22VP1
Black Bezel, Lever Chrome Bezel, Lever 2-Position — 45° Throw — Black Knob
—
M
M
—
M
M
2
2
E22XBF1
E22XB51
E22XF1
E22X51
—
M
M
—
S
S
2
2
E22XBE1
E22XB61
E22XE1
E22X61
3-Position — 45° Throw — Black Knob
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22XBG1
E22XBH1
E22XG1
E22XH1
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22XBJ1
E22XBK1
E22XJ1
E22XK1
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22XBL1
E22XBM1
E22XL1
E22XM1
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22XBN1
E22XBP1
E22XN1
E22XP1
Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code
Black 1Red 2Green 3Yellow 4White 5Blue 6Gray 7Orange 8
Contact Blocks
See Page 47-69
Mounting Adapter
(Supplied with Operator).
For 5-Way Adapter,
See Page 47-77
Legend Plate
See Page 47-86
Operator
See Above
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-56
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Selector Switch Components
Selector Switches (Continued)
60° Throw Non-illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches
Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (4 circuits) with supplied 3-way mounting adapter.
Optional 5-way adapter will accept a maximum of 5 contact blocks (10 circuits). See Page 47-77.
Table 47-65. 60° Throw Non-illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Black levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit (underlined) in the listed
Catalog Number using Code Number from following table. Example: E22VE62 — Two-Position Selector Switch with Red Lever.
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Ordering Example — A complete Non-illuminated Selector Switch consists of the following:
Operating Mode
M = Maintained
S = Momentary
Cam
Code
E22 Series —
Plastic Operators
EM22 Series —
Metal Operators
Black Bezel Chrome Bezel Chrome Bezel
Left Center Right Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E22 Black Bezel, E22 Chrome Bezel, EM22 Black
Lever Lever Lever
2-Position — 60° Throw — Black Lever
—
M
M
—
M
M
2
2
E22VBF61
E22VB561
E22VF61
E22V561
EM22VF61
EM22V561
—
M
M
—
S
S
2
2
E22VBE61
E22VB661
E22VE61
E22V661
EM22VE61
EM22V661
3-Position — 60° Throw — Black Lever
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22VBG61
E22VBH61
E22VG61
E22VH61
EM22VG61
EM22VH61
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22VBJ61
E22VBK61
E22VJ61
E22VK61
EM22VJ61
EM22VK61
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22VBL61
E22VBM61
E22VL61
E22VM61
EM22VL61
EM22VM61
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22VBN61
E22VBP61
E22VN61
E22VP61
EM22VN61
EM22VP61
E22 Black Bezel, E22 Chrome Bezel, EM22 Black
Knob Knob Knob
2-Position — 60° Throw — Black Knob
—
M
M
—
M
M
2
2
E22XBF61
E22XB561
E22XF61
E22X561
EM22XF61
EM22X561
—
M
M
—
S
S
2
2
E22XBE61
E22XB661
E22XE61
E22X661
EM22XE61
EM22X661
3-Position — 60° Throw — Black Knob
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22XBG61
E22XBH61
E22XG61
E22XH61
EM22XG61
EM22XH61
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22XBJ61
E22XBK61
E22XJ61
E22XK61
EM22XJ61
EM22XK61
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22XBL61
E22XBM61
E22XL61
E22XM61
EM22XL61
EM22XM61
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22XBN61
E22XBP61
E22XN61
E22XP61
EM22XN61
EM22XP61
Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code
Black 1Red 2Green 3Yellow 4White 5Blue 6Gray 7Orange 8
Contact Blocks
See Page 47-69
Mounting Adapter
(Supplied with Operator).
For 5-Way Adapter,
See Page 47-77
Legend Plate
See Page 47-86
Operator
See Above
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-57
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Key Operated Selector Switch Components
Selector Switches (Continued)
Key Operated Selector Switches
Note: Key removal from maintained positions only — will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (4 circuits) with
supplied 3-way mounting adapter. Optional 5-way adapter will accept a maximum of 5 contact blocks (10 circuits).
Table 47-66. Key Operated Selector Switches — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
To order operator with other than standard key removal position(s), select allowable option from table below and change last (underlined)
digit of listed Catalog Number using Suffix Code shown. Example: E22KG66 — Three-Position Selector Switch with key removable from Left and
Center positions.
To order a different key and lock assembly, add suffix B1, C1, D1, E1 or F1 to the end of the Catalog Number.
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Table 47-67. Key Removal Options Table 47-68. Spare Keys
Operating Mode
M = Maintained
S = Momentary
Cam
Code
E22 Series —
Plastic Operators
EM22 Series —
Metal Operators
Allowable
Key
Removal
Positions
Black Bezel Chrome Bezel Chrome Bezel
Left Center Right 45° Price
U.S. $
45° Price
U.S. $
60° Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2-Position
M
M
—
—
M
S
2
2
E22KB53
E22KB62
E22K53
E22K62
—
—
1, 2
—
—
—
M
M
M
S
2
2
E22KBF5
E22KBE4
E22KF5
E22KE4
EM22KF65
EM22KE64
1, 4
—
3-Position
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22KBG7
E22KBH7
E22KG7
E22KH7
EM22KG67
EM22KH67
1 – 6
1 – 6
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22KBJ5
E22KBK5
E22KJ5
E22KK5
EM22KJ65
EM22KK65
1, 4
1, 4
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22KBL4
E22KBM4
E22KL4
E22KM4
EM22KL64
EM22KM64
—
—
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22KBN6
E22KBP6
E22KN6
E22KP6
EM22KN66
EM22KP66
2, 4
2, 4
Plastic
Black
Bezel
Plastic
Chrome
Bezel
Metal
Chrome
Bezel
Key Removal
Position
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Position
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Position
Code
Suffix
Right Only
Left Only
Right and Left
1
2
3
Center Only
Right and Center
Left and Center
4
5
6
Right, Left and
Center
7
Description Reference Number
Stamped on Key
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Standard Lock 92239 E22KS2
Master Key For 95000 Series Locks E22KM95
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-58
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Selector Switch Components
Illuminated Selector Switches
45° Throw Illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches — Plastic
Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (4 circuits) with supplied 3-way mounting adapter.
Optional 5-way adapter will accept a maximum of 4 contact blocks (8 circuits).
Table 47-69. 45° Throw Illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Red levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit (underlined) in the listed
Catalog Number using Code Number from following table. Example: E22WF3 — Two-Position Selector Switch with Green Lever.
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Ordering Example — A complete Illuminated Selector Switch consists of the following:
Operating Mode
M = Maintained
S = Momentary
Cam
Code
E22 Series — Plastic Operators
Black Bezel Chrome Bezel
Left Center Right Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Black Bezel Chrome Bezel 2-Position — 45° Throw — Red Lever
—
M
M
—
M
M
2
2
E22WBF2
E22WB52
E22WF2
E22W52
—
M
M
—
S
S
2
2
E22WBE2
E22WB62
E22WE2
E22W62
3-Position — 45° Throw — Red Lever
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22WBG2
E22WBH2
E22WG2
E22WH2
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22WBJ2
E22WBK2
E22WJ2
E22WK2
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22WBL2
E22WBM2
E22WL2
E22WM2
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22WBN2
E22WBP2
E22WN2
E22WP2
Black Bezel Chrome Bezel 2-Position — 45° Throw — Red Knob
—
M
M
—
M
M
2
2
E22SBF2
E22SB52
E22SF2
E22S52
—
M
M
—
S
S
2
2
E22SBE2
E22SB62
E22SE2
E22S62
3-Position — 45° Throw — Red Knob
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22SBG2
E22SBH2
E22SG2
E22SH2
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22SBJ2
E22SBK2
E22SJ2
E22SK2
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22SBL2
E22SBM2
E22SL2
E22SM2
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22SBN2
E22SBP2
E22SN2
E22SP2
Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code
Red 2Green 3Yellow 4White 5Blue 6Amber 9Clear 0
Contact
Blocks
See
Page 47-69
Mounting Adapter
(Supplied with
Operator). For
5-Way Adapter,
See Page 47-77
Legend Plate
See Page 47-86
Light Unit with Tall
Incandescent
Bulb/LED
See Pages
47-70 – 47-71
Operator
See Above
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-59
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Selector Switch Components
Illuminated Selector Switches (Continued)
60° Throw Illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches
Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (4 circuits) with standard mounting adapter supplied.
Optional 5-way adapter will accept a maximum of 4 contact blocks (8 circuits).
Table 47-70. 60° Throw Illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Red levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit (underlined) in the listed
Catalog Number using Code Number from following table. Example: E22WF63 — Two-Position Selector Switch with Green Lever.
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Ordering Example — A complete Illuminated Selector Switch consists of the following:
Operating Mode
M = Maintained
S = Momentary
Cam
Code
E22 Series —
Plastic Operators
E2M2 Series —
Metal Operators
Black Bezel Chrome Bezel Chrome Bezel
Left Center Right Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E22 Black E22 Chrome EM22 Chrome
Bezel Bezel Bezel
2-Position — 60° Throw — Red Lever
—
M
M
—
M
M
2
2
E22WBF62
E22WB562
E22WF62
E22W562
EM22WF62
EM22W562
—
M
M
—
S
S
2
2
E22WBE62
E22WB662
E22WE62
E22W662
EM22WE62
EM22W662
3-Position — 60° Throw — Red Lever
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22WBG62
E22WBH62
E22WG62
E22WH62
EM22WG62
EM22WH62
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22WBJ62
E22WBK62
E22WJ62
E22WK62
EM22WJ62
EM22WK62
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22WBL62
E22WBM62
E22WL62
E22WM62
EM22WL62
EM22WM62
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22WBN62
E22WBP62
E22WN62
E22WP62
EM22WN62
EM22WP62
2-Position — 60° Throw — Red Knob
—
M
M
—
M
M
2
2
E22SBF62
E22SB562
E22SF62
E22S562
EM22SF62
EM22S562
—
M
M
—
S
S
2
2
E22SBE62
E22SB662
E22SE62
E22S662
EM22SE62
EM22S662
3-Position — 60° Throw — Red Knob
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22SBG62
E22SBH62
E22SG62
E22SH62
EM22SG62
EM22SH62
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22SBJ62
E22SBK62
E22SJ62
E22SK62
EM22SJ62
EM22SK62
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22SBL62
E22SBM62
E22SL62
E22SM62
EM22SL62
EM22SM62
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22SBN62
E22SBP62
E22SN62
E22SP62
EM22SN62
EM22SP62
Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code
Red 2Green 3Yellow 4White 5Blue 6Amber 9Clear 0
Contact
Blocks
See
Page 47-69
Mounting Adapter
(Supplied with
Operator). For
5-Way Adapter,
See Page 47-77
Legend Plate
See Page 47-86
Light Unit with Tall
Incandescent
Bulb/LED
See Pages
47-70 – 47-71
Operator
See Above
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-60
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Selector Switch Selection
Selector Switch Selection
Cam and Contact Block Selection — For 2- and 3-Position Selector Switches
1. Develop a line circuit diagram
required for each application. Then,
by using the symbols “X” for contact
closed and “O” for contact open,
determine the contact state required
in each selector switch position.
2. Visually locate the closure
sequence in one of the 2- or 3-
Position Selector Switch Combina-
tion tables on Pages 47-60 – 47-61.
3. Find the contact block(s), their Suffix
Code letter(s) and their mounting
location(s) required for that circuit
configuration, by referring to the
table next to the “X O” closure
sequence that was selected.
Note: Contact Blocks must be mounted in
position indicated. Selector switches will
not accept a contact block in position 3 of
the mounting adapter. If more circuits and/or
different circuit arrangements are required,
see Rotary Cam Selector Switches listed on
Pages 47-62 – 47-63 and 47-95 – 47-96.
Example: HAND-OFF-AUTO function,
two circuits are required —
Circuit #1 — X O O
This can be achieved using Cam 1 with
an E22B2 contact block mounted in the
left (1-) position.
Circuit #2 — O O X
This can be achieved using Cam 1 with
an E22B2 block mounted in the right
(2-) position.
Order a 3-Position Selector Switch
with Cam #1 —
Example: E22VG1, along with 2 E22B2
Contact Blocks.
Figure 47-16. Contact Block Mounting
2
3
1
1- 2- 3- Contact Block Mounting
Position Numbers Molded in
3-Way Mounting Adapter
1- 3- 2-
4
2
3
1
5
5- 1- 3- 2- 4- Contact Block
Mounting Position Numbers
Molded in 5-Way Mounting
Adapter, See Accessories for
5-Way Adapter — Page 47-72
4-
2-
3-
1-
5-
Cam and Contact Block Selection
Table 47-71. 2-Position Switches
Circuit Cam Catalog Number of
Contact Block(s)/
Mounting Position
Code
Suffix
1 & 5 2 & 4
OX2 E22B2 or E22B2 A
XO2 E22B1 or E22B1 B
O
X
X
O
2E22B11 — W
O
X
X
O
2E22B2 E22B1 C
O
O
X
X
2E22B20 — V
O
O
X
X
2E22B2 E22B2 D
X
X
O
O
2E22B1 E22B1 E
O
O
O
X
X
X
2E22B20 E22B2 VA
X
O
X
O
X
O
2E22B1 E22B11 WB
X
O
O
O
X
X
2E22B1 E22B20 VB
O
X
O
X
O
X
2E22B11 E22B2 WA
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
2E22B20 E22B20 VV
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
O
2E22B20 E22B11 VW
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
2E22B11 E22B11 WW
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-61
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Selector Switch Selection
Cam and Contact Block Selection (Continued)
Table 47-72. 3-Position Switches Table 47-72. 3-Position Switches (Continued) Table 47-72. 3-Position Switches (Continued)
Circuit Cam Catalog Number
of Contact Block(s)
Mounting Position
Code
Suffix
1 & 5 2 & 4
XOO1 E22B2 — A
OOX1 — E22B2 A
OXX1 E22B1 — B
XXO1 — E22B1 B
XOX2 E22B2 — A
OXO2 E22B1 — B
OOX2 — E22B2 A
XXO2 — E22B1 B
X
O
O
O
O
X
1E22B2 E22B2 D
X
X
O
X
O
O
1E22B2 E22B1 C
O
O
X
O
X
X
1E22B1 E22B2 C
O
X
X
X
X
O
1E22B1 E22B1 E
X
O
O
X
O
X
1E22B11 — W
X
X
O
O
O
O
1E22B20 — V
O
X
O
X
X
O
1— E22B11 W
O
O
O
O
X
X
1— E22B20 V
X
O
O
X
O
O
1E22B11 E22B1 PP
X
O
O
O
X
X
2E22B2 E22B2 D
X
X
O
X
X
O
2E22B2 E22B1 C
O
O
X
O
O
X
2E22B1 E22B2 C
O
X
X
X
O
O
2E22B1 E22B1 E
X
O
O
X
X
O
2E22B11 — W
X
X
O
O
X
X
2E22B20 — V
O
X
O
X
X
O
2E22B11 — W
O
O
O
O
X
X
2— E22B20 V
Circuit Cam Catalog Number
of Contact Block(s)
Mounting Position
Code
Suffix
1 & 5 2 & 4
X
O
X
O
O
X
O
X
O
1E22B2 E22B11 WA
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
1E22B2 E22B20 VA
O
O
X
X
O
X
X
X
O
1E22B1 E22B11 WB
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
X
X
1E22B1 E22B20 VB
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
X
1E22B11 E22B2 WA
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
1E22B20 E22B2 VA
X
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
1E22B11 E22B1 WB
X
X
X
O
O
X
O
O
O
1E22B20 E22B1 VB
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
1E22B11 E22B11 RR
X
O
X
O
O
X
X
X
O
2E22B2 E22B11 WA
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
2E22B2 E22B20 VA
O
O
X
X
O
X
O
X
O
2E22B1 E22B11 WB
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
2E22B1 E22B20 VB
X
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
X
2E22B11 E22B2 WA
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
2E22B20 E22B2 VA
Circuit Cam Catalog Number
of Contact Block(s)
Mounting Position
Code
Suffix
1 & 5 2 & 4
X
O
X
O
X
X
X
O
O
2E22B11 E22B1 WB
X
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
O
2E22B20 E22B1 VB
X
O
O
X
O
X
O
X
O
X
X
O
1E22B11 E22B11 WW
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
X
1E22B11 E22B20 VW
X
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
1E22B20 E22B11 VW
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
1E22B20 E22B20 VV
X
O
O
X
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
2E22B11 E22B11 WW
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
X
X
2E22B11 E22B20 VW
X
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
O
2E22B20 E22B11 VW
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
2E22B20 E22B20 VV
January 2010
47-62
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Rotary Cam Selector Switch Units
Rotary Cam Selector Switch Units
■Plastic Operator
■Black or Chrome Bezel
■Four- to Six-Position
■Knob, Lever or Key Version
■Non-illuminated
Table 47-73. Four- to Six-Position Selector Switch Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Black levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit in the listed Catalog Number
using Code Number from following table. Example: E22LDN2 — four-position selector switch with Red knob.
Key removable in all maintained positions (no alternates).
Contact block rating, see Page
47-95. Includes contact blocks.
Components overpacked in a
single carton.
Terminal
Numbers
Contact Sequence
O = Circuit Open;
X = Circuit Closed
Switch Position
(45° Throw
Between Each
Position —
Except as Noted)
Operator
Type
Black Bezel Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Four-Position Maintained
01234 (60° Throw)
1 - 2
5 - 6
7 - 8
3 - 4
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
Lever
Knob
E22JDBN1
E22LDBN1
E22JDN1
E22LDN1
1 - 2
5 - 6
3 - 4
7 - 8
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB4W1
E22LDB4W1
E22KDB4W8
E22JD4W1
E22LD4W1
E22KD4W8
1 - 2
5 - 6
3 - 4
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB4Y1
E22LDB4Y1
E22KDB4Y8
E22JD4Y1
E22LD4Y1
E22KD4Y8
Five-Position Maintained
012345
1 - 2
5 - 6
9 - 10
7 - 8
3 - 4
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB5W1
E22LDB5W1
E22KDB5W8
E22JD5W1
E22LD5W1
E22KD5W8
1 - 2
5 - 6
3 - 4
7 - 8
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB5Y1
E22LDB5Y1
E22KDB5Y8
E22JD5Y1
E22LD5Y1
E22KD5Y8
Six-Position Maintained
0123456
1 - 2
5 - 6
9 - 10
11 - 12
3 - 4
7 - 8
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB6W1
E22LDB6W1
E22KDB6W8
E22JD6W1
E22LD6W1
E22KD6W8
1 - 2
5 - 6
7 - 8
9 - 10
3 - 4
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB6Y1
E22LDB6Y1
E22KDB6Y8
E22JD6Y1
E22LD6Y1
E22KD6Y8
Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code
Black 1Red 2Green 3Yellow 4White 5Blue 6Gray 7Orange 8
Top View
12
56
910
Bottom View
43
87
1211
Terminal Locations
14
23
1
24
3
0
13
2
15
24
3
04
13
2
15
24
6
3
04
13
5
2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Contact Block Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-95
Custom Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-96
Legend Plates and Dimensions . . . . Page 47-86
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-63
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Rotary Cam Selector Switch Units
Rotary Cam Selector Switch Units (Continued)
■Plastic Operators
■Black or Chrome Bezel
■Seven- and Eight-Position
■Knob, Lever or Key Version
■Non-illuminated
Table 47-74. Seven- and Eight-Position Selector Switch Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Black levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit in the listed Catalog Number
using Code Number from following table. Example: E22LDN2 — four-position selector switch with Red knob.
Key removable in all maintained positions (no alternates).
Contact block ratings,
see Page 47-95. Includes
contact blocks.
Components overpacked
in a single carton.
Terminal
Numbers
Contact Sequence
O = Circuit Open;
X = Circuit Closed
Switch Position
(45° Lever Throw
Between Each
Position)
Operator
Type
Black Bezel Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Seven-Position Maintained
01234567
1 - 2
5 - 6
9 - 10
13 - 14
3 - 4
7 - 8
11 - 12
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB7W1
E22LDB7W1
E22KDB7W8
E22JD7W1
E22LD7W1
E22KD7W8
1 - 2
5 - 6
9 - 10
11 - 12
3 - 4
7 - 8
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB7Y1
E22LDB7Y1
E22KDB7Y8
E22JD7Y1
E22LD7Y1
E22KD7Y8
Eight-Position Maintained
012345678
1 - 2
5 - 6
9 - 10
13 - 14
3 - 4
7 - 8
11 - 12
15 - 16
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB8W1
E22LDB8W1
E22KDB8W8
E22JD8W1
E22LD8W1
E22KD8W8
1 - 2
5 - 6
9 - 10
13 - 14
3 - 4
7 - 8
11 - 12
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB8Y1
E22LDB8Y1
E22KDB8Y8
E22JD8Y1
E22LD8Y1
E22KD8Y8
15
24
6
3
7
04
13
5
2
6
15
24
6
8
3
7
04
13
5
7
2
6
Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code Color Code
Black 1Red 2Green 3Yellow 4White 5Blue 6Gray 7Orange 8
Contact Block Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-95
Custom Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-96
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-64
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Specialty Operators
Specialty Operators
Table 47-75. Potentiometers with Knob Operator — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Potentiometers are not IP1X or IP2X rated.
Table 47-76. Potentiometer Legend Plate
Table 47-77. Flush Pushbutton Operators with Mechanical Push Rod — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Table 47-78. Wobble Stick Operator — UL (NEMA) 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Ohms 0.5 Watt Max./120V Max. 2 Watt Max./120V Max.
E22 Plastic —
Black Bezel
E22 Plastic —
Chrome Bezel
EM22 Metal —
Chrome Bezel
E22 Plastic —
Black Bezel
E22 Plastic —
Chrome Bezel
EM22 Metal —
Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Order Legend
Plate from
Below
1,000
2,500
5,000
E22PXB1C1
E22PXB1C2
E22PXB1C5
E22PX1C1
E22PX1C2
E22PX1C5
EM22PX1C1
EM22PX1C2
EM22PX1C5
E22PXB1F1
E22PXB1F2
E22PXB1F5
E22PX1F1
E22PX1F2
E22PX1F5
EM22PX1F1
EM22PX1F2
EM22PX1F5
10,000
25,000
50,000
E22PXB1C10
E22PXB1C25
E22PXB1C50
E22PX1C10
E22PX1C25
E22PX1C50
EM22PX1C10
EM22PX1C25
EM22PX1C50
E22PXB1F10
E22PXB1F25
E22PXB1F50
E22PX1F10
E22PX1F25
E22PX1F50
EM22PX1F10
EM22PX1F25
EM22PX1F50
Operator
Only
E22PXB1C0 E22PX1C0 EM22PX1C0 E22PXB1F0 E22PX1F0 EM22PX1F0
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Potentiometer
Legend Plate
E22NJP99
Description Color Plastic —
Black Bezel
Plastic —
Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
25 mm Diameter Flush Pushbutton
Operators supplied with Mechanical Push Rod —
Suitable for external mechanical reset of overload relays.
Push rod must be cut to desired length.
Gray
Blue
Red
Blue (RESET)
E22PB7L
E22PB6L
E22PB2L
E22PB6N29L
E22P7L
E22P6L
E22P2L
E22P6N29L
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E22 Series — Plastic Wobble Stick — Allows activation of
controls by pushing stick in any direction.
E22WS
EM22 Series — Metal Wobble Stick — Allows activation of
controls by pushing stick in any direction.
EM22WS
010
456
19
37
28
E22 Series
EM22 Series
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-65
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Double Headed Pushbutton Components
Double Headed Pushbuttons
Table 47-79. Illuminated and Non-illuminated Double Headed Pushbuttons — UL (NEMA) Type 1; IP40
For lens colors other than clear, replace the 0 above with the appropriate Color Code from Table 47-83 on Page 47-66.
For light units other than 120V transformer, replace the X11 code above with the appropriate Suffix from Table 47-81 on Page 47-66.
Table 47-80. Illuminated and Non-illuminated Double Headed Pushbuttons — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13; IP65
For lens colors other than clear, replace the 0 above with the appropriate Color Code from Table 47-83 on Page 47-66.
For light units other than 120V transformer, replace the X11 code above with the appropriate Suffix from Table 47-81 on Page 47-66.
IP65 or UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 versions include protective silicon boot E22DBB.
Note: Add Contact Block Suffix from table on Page 47-98 to operator Catalog Number to order as a complete device. Example: E22DB1A11B =
non-illuminated double headed pushbutton, unmarked, IP40 with 1NC contact block.
Description Operator Colors Marking Plastic — Black Bezel Dimensions
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Non-illuminated
Double Headed
Pushbutton
Green — Red Unmarked E22DB1A11
Green — Red I E22DB1A21
Non-illuminated Double Headed
Pushbutton with 1NO and 1NC
Contact Block
Green — Red Unmarked E22DB1A11C
Green — Red I E22DB1A21C
Illuminated Double Headed
Pushbutton with Clear Lens Green — Red Unmarked E22DB1A10
Green — Red I E22DB1A20
Illuminated Double Headed
Pushbutton with Clear Lens,
and 120V Transformer Light
Unit
Green — Red Unmarked E22DB1A10X11
Green — Red I E22DB1A20X11
Illuminated Double Headed
Pushbutton with Clear Lens,
120V Transformer Light Unit
and 1NO and 1NC Contact Block
Green — Red Unmarked E22DB1A10X11C
Green — Red I E22DB1A20X11C
Description Operator Colors Marking Plastic — Black Bezel Dimensions
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Non-illuminated
Double Headed
Pushbutton
Green — Red Unmarked E22DB1B11
Green — Red O E22DB1B21
Non-illuminated Double Headed
Pushbutton with 1NO and 1NC
Contact Block
Green — Red Unmarked E22DB1B11C
Green — Red O E22DB1B21C
Illuminated Double Headed
Pushbutton with Clear Lens Green — Red Unmarked E22DB1B10
Green — Red O E22DB1B20
Illuminated Double Headed
Pushbutton with Clear Lens,
and 120V Transformer Light Unit
Green — Red Unmarked E22DB1B10X11
Green — Red O E22DB1B20X11
Illuminated Double Headed
Pushbutton with Clear Lens,
120V Transformer Light Unit
and 1NO and 1NC Contact Block
Green — Red Unmarked E22DB1B10X11C
Green — Red O E22DB1B20X11C
C
A
B
Clear
Boot
C
A
B
Clear
Boot
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-66
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Double Headed Pushbutton Components
Double Headed Pushbuttons (Continued)
Table 47-81. Light Unit
Additional light units — See Pages 47-70 – 47-71.
Table 47-82. Light Unit Specifications
Table 47-83. Lens Color Table 47-84. Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Description Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Direct Voltage Unit AC/DC
Without Lamp
Without Lamp
With 6V Lamp
With 12V Lamp
With 24V Lamp
With 48V Lamp
With 60V Lamp
X1
X1
X2
X3
X4
X6
X7
E22D
E22DE
E22D6
E22D12
E22D24
E22D50
E22D60
Resistor Type Unit AC/DC
120V/60 Hz X10 E22R2
Transformer Unit AC Only
120V/60 Hz
240V/60 Hz
480V/60 Hz
X11
X12
X14
E22TL1
E22TL2
E22TL4
Silicon Boot for IP65 Ingress Protection — E22DBB
Catalog Number Function Bulb Type Max. Voltage
E22D Indicating Light Incandescent, LED or Neon 250V
Illuminated Operator Incandescent 60V
E22DE Illuminated Operator LED or Neon 120V
Lens Color Color Code
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
0
2
3
4
5
6
9
With Boot Without Boot
Dimension A 1.19 (30.2) 1.11 (28.2)
Dimension B 2.28 (57.9) 2.20 (55.9)
Dimension C 0.68 (17.3) 0.48 (12.2)
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-67
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Joystick Units
Joystick Complete Devices
Momentary and Maintained Joystick Switches
Table 47-85. Joystick Switches — UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Note: Dimensions are listed on
Page 47-89.
Table 47-86. Visual Aid Plates
Table 47-87. Contact Sequence for Two-Position Joystick
Table 47-88. Contact Sequence for Four-Position Joystick
Position Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
2-Position Momentary Joystick Switch
Momentary Joystick Switch with Center Lock
EM22JS2Y2X
EM22JS2Y4X
Maintained Joystick Switch
Maintained Joystick Switch with Center Lock
EM22JS2Y3X
EM22JS2Y5X
4-Position Momentary Joystick Switch
Momentary Joystick Switch with Center Lock
EM22JS4Y2X
EM22JS4Y4X
Maintained Joystick Switch
Maintained Joystick Switch with Center Lock
EM22JS4Y3X
EM22JS4Y5X
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
70 mm Diameter Oval — Black (Blank) E22VA20
70 mm Diameter Oval — Black with 2 Arrows E22VA21
70 mm Diameter Round — Black (Blank) E22VA30
70 mm Diameter Round — Black with 2 Arrows E22VA31
70 mm Diameter Round — Black with 4 Arrows E22VA32
Contact Blocks Joystick Operator Position
(X = Closed, O = Open)
Circuit Location Term No. Up Center Down
NO Top 14 – 13 O O X
NO Bottom 24 – 23 X O O
Contact Blocks Joystick Operator Position
(X = Closed, O = Open)
Circuit Position Location Term No. Up Left Center Down Right
NO Front Top 14 – 13 O O O X O
NO Front Bottom 24 – 23 O O O O X
NO Back Top 34 – 33 X O O O O
NO Back Bottom 44 – 43 O X O O O
24
14
23
13
24
14
23
13
44
34
43
33
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-68
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
EM22 Series — Joystick Components
EM22 Series, Joystick Components
Momentary and Maintained Joystick Operators
Table 47-89. Joystick Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Note: Dimensions are listed on
Page 47-89
. For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Contact Block Selection/Application
Table 47-90. Joystick Operators
Table 47-91. Contact Sequence for Two-Position Joystick
Table 47-92. Contact Sequence for Four-Position Joystick
Position Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
2-Position Momentary Joystick Operator
Momentary Joystick Operator with Center Lock
EM22JS2Y2
EM22JS2Y4
Maintained Joystick Operator
Maintained Joystick Operator with Center Lock
EM22JS2Y3
EM22JS2Y5
4-Position Momentary Joystick Operator
Momentary Joystick Operator with Center Lock
EM22JS4Y2
EM22JS4Y4
Maintained Joystick Operator
Maintained Joystick Operator with Center Lock
EM22JS4Y3
EM22JS4Y5
Position Description Circuit Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
2-Position Joystick Contact Block Assembly 2NO EM22JS2Y1
4-Position Joystick Contact Block Assembly 4NO EM22JS4Y1
Contact Blocks Joystick Operator Position
(X = Closed, O = Open)
Circuit Location Term No. Up Center Down
NO Top 14 – 13 O O X
NO Bottom 24 – 23 X O O
Contact Blocks Joystick Operator Position
(X = Closed, O = Open)
Circuit Position Location Term No. Up Left Center Down Right
NO Front Top 14 – 13 O O O X O
NO Front Bottom 24 – 23 O O O O X
NO Back Top 34 – 33 X O O O O
NO Back Bottom 44 – 43 O X O O O
Standard
with Center Lock
24
14
23
13
24
14
23
13
44
34
43
33
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-69
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Contact Blocks
Contact Blocks
Table 47-93. Contact Blocks
Add Suffix to operator Catalog Number to order as a complete device. Example E22PB1B = Flush Black pushbutton with 1NC contact block.
E22B4 contact block not available for use with 5-way mounting adapter.
For low voltage applications.
Marked with Direct Opening Action (DOA) Symbol per IEC 60947-5-1 (Annex K) and NEMA ICS 5 (Part 6).
For use with Trigger Action Emergency Stop (E22LTA2) Operators.
Direct Opening Action (DOA) for IEC 60947-5-1 (Annex K) and NEMA ICS 5 (Part 6) Compliance
Table 47-94. Mechanical Operating Parameters of Operators with E22B1 and E22B11 (NC Contacts Only)
Description Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1NC
1NO
1NO Early Make
1NC Late Break
1NC (Logic)
1NO (Logic)
1NC Added Spring Pressure
B
A
—
—
—
—
—
E22B1
E22B2
E22B3
E22B4
E22B1E
E22B2E
E22BR1
1NO-1NC
2NO
W
V
E22B11
E22B20
1 Self Monitoring 1NC — E22CB1M
DOA
Operating
Parameters
Latching Trigger
Action E-Stop
Pushbuttons 2-Position
Push-Pull
3-Position
Push-Pull
Key, Lever and Knob
Selector Switches
E-Stop
+
E22B1
E-Stop
+
E22B11
25 mm
+
E22B1
25 mm
+
E22B11
Mush-
room
+
E22B1
Mush-
room
+
E22B11
2-Pos.
Push-
Pull +
E22B1
2-Pos.
Push-
Pull +
E22B11
Push
+
E22B1
Push
+
E22B11
Pull
+
E22B1
Pull
+
E22B11
Spring
Return
+
E22B1
Spring
Return
+
E22B11
Main-
tained
+
E22B1
Main-
tained
+
E22B11
Min. Travel
to Open
Contact —
Inches (mm)
0.24
(6.1)
0.24
(6.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
Min. Force
to Open
Contact —
lb (N)
5.00
(22.24)
5.00
(22.24)
0.74
(3.27)
0.90
(4.00)
0.84
(3.74)
1.00
(4.45)
0
0
0
0
2.09
(9.31)
2.25
(10.02)
3.01
(13.37)
3.17
(14.08)
0.29
(1.29)
0.45
(2.00)
0.30
(1.34)
0.46
(2.05)
Total
Travel —
Inches (mm)
0.29
(7.4)
0.29
(7.4)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
1.26
(32)
Single
Circuit
0.39
(10)
1.42
(36)
1.89
(48)
Dual
Circuit
0.39
(10)
1.57
(40)
1.89
(48) 0.39
(10)
1.57
(40)
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-70
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Components
Light Units and Lamps
E22 light units consist of two versions
— standard size LED lamps and tall LED
lamps. Select the standard LED light
units for all indicating lights, illuminated
pushbuttons, push-push (alternate
action) or double-headed pushbutton
operators. Select the tall LED light units
for all illuminated selector switches and
push-pull operators.
LED Light Units
Table 47-95. LED Light Units — Includes a T3-1/4 (BA9) Bayonet Base LED
Select standard or tall LED based on Table 47-96.
Table 47-96. LED and Bulb Type Selection Chart
Type Supply
Voltage
LED Color Suffix
Code
Standard LED Tall LED Price
US $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Full Voltage Unit without Lamp — X1 E22DE E22DE
6V – 12V
AC/DC
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Orange
X37
X38
X39
X51
X89
X94
E22DL612R
E22DL612G
E22DL612Y
E22DL612B
E22DL612W
E22DL612O
E22DLT612R
E22DLT612G
E22DLT612Y
E22DLT612B
E22DLT612W
E22DLT612O
24V
AC/DC
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Orange
X40
X41
X42
X52
X90
X95
E22DL24R
E22DL24G
E22DL24Y
E22DL24B
E22DL24W
E22DL24O
E22DLT24R
E22DLT24G
E22DLT24Y
E22DLT24B
E22DLT24W
E22DLT24O
48V
AC/DC
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Orange
X53
X54
X55
X56
X91
X87
E22DL48R
E22DL48G
E22DL48Y
E22DL48B
E22DL48W
E22DL48O
E22DLT48R
E22DLT48G
E22DLT48Y
E22DLT48B
E22DLT48W
E22DLT48O
60V
AC/DC
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Orange
X57
X58
X59
X60
X97
X98
E22DL60R
E22DL60G
E22DL60Y
E22DL60B
E22DL60W
E22DL60O
E22DLT60R
E22DLT60G
E22DLT60Y
E22DLT60B
E22DLT60W
E22DLT60O
120V
AC/DC
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Orange
X43
X44
X45
X61
X92
X96
E22DL120R
E22DL120G
E22DL120Y
E22DL120B
E22DL120W
E22DL120O
E22DLT120R
E22DLT120G
E22DLT120Y
E22DLT120B
E22DLT120W
E22DLT120O
Transformer
AC Only
120V Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Orange
—
—
—
—
—
—
E22TL1LR
E22TL1LG
E22TL1LY
E22TL1LB
E22TL1LW
E22TL1LO
E22TL1TLR
E22TL1TLG
E22TL1TLY
E22TL1TLB
E22TL1TLW
E22TL1TLO
240V Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Orange
—
—
—
—
—
—
E22TL2LR
E22TL2LG
E22TL2LY
E22TL2LB
E22TL2LW
E22TL2LO
E22TL2TLR
E22TL2TLG
E22TL2TLY
E22TL2TLB
E22TL2TLW
E22TL2TLO
480V Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Orange
—
—
—
—
—
—
E22TL4LR
E22TL4LG
E22TL4LY
E22TL4LB
E22TL4LW
E22TL4LO
E22TL4TLR
E22TL4TLG
E22TL4TLY
E22TL4TLB
E22TL4TLW
E22TL4TLO
Illuminated Operator Type Standard LED or Bulb Tall LED or Bulb
Double-Headed Pushbuttons ✓—
Indicating Lights ✓—
Pushbuttons ✓—
Push-Pull Operators —✓
Push-Push Pushbuttons ✓—
Selector Switches —✓
Tall LED Light Unit
Standard LED Light Unit
Transformer Light Unit
with Tall LED
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-71
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Components
Light Units and Lamps (Continued)
E22 light units consist of two versions
— with standard bulb or with tall bulbs.
Select the standard bulb light units for
all indicating lights, illuminated push-
buttons, push-push (alternate action) or
double-headed pushbutton operators.
Select the tall bulb light units for all illu-
minated selector switches and push-
pull operators.
Caution: Please note that 120V full voltage
light units (E22D120) are only suitable for
indicating light operators and will overheat in
other operators.
Incandescent Light Units
Table 47-97. Incandescent Light Units — Includes a T3-1/4 (BA9) Bayonet Base Lamp (except when noted)
Select standard or tall bulb based on Table 47-98.
E22D120 light units are suitable for indicating light operators only.
Table 47-98. LED and Bulb Type Selection Chart
Table 47-99. PresTest Units — Includes Pre-wired 1NO-1NC Contact Blocks
Select standard or tall bulb based on Table 47-98.
Table 47-100. Master Packed Contact Blocks and Light Units
Type Supply Voltage
50/60 Hz
Lamp
Voltage
Suffix
Code
Standard Bulb Tall Bulb Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Full Voltage
AC/DC
Unit without Lamp
6
12
24
48
60
120
—
6
12
24
48
60
120
X1
X2
X3
X4
X6
X7
X8
E22D
E22D6
E22D12
E22D24
E22D50
E22D60
E22D120
E22D
E22DT6
E22DT12
E22DT24
E22DT50
E22DT60
—
Resistor
AC/DC
120 60 X10 E22R2 E22RT2
Transformer
AC Only
120
240
380/415
480
6
6
6
6
X11
X12
X13
X14
E22TL1
E22TL2
E22TL3
E22TL4
E22TL1T
E22TL2T
E22TL3T
E22TL4T
Illuminated Operator Type Standard LED or Bulb Tall LED or Bulb
Double-Headed Pushbuttons ✓—
Indicating Lights ✓—
Pushbuttons ✓—
Push-Pull Operators —✓
Push-Push Pushbuttons ✓—
Selector Switches —✓
Type Supply Voltage
50/60 Hz
Lamp
Voltage
Light
Suffix
Code
Standard Bulb Tall Bulb Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Full Voltage
AC/DC
Unit without Lamp
24
—
24
X17
X20
E22D0C
E22D24C
E22D0C
E22DT24C
Resistor
AC/DC
120 60 X26 E22R2C E22RT2C
Transformer
AC Only
120
240
380/415
480
6
6
6
6
X27
X28
X29
X30
E22TL1C
E22TL2C
E22TL3C
E22TL4C
E22TLT1C
E22TLT2C
E22TLT3C
E22TLT4C
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Contact Blocks or Light Units Master Packed in Quantities of 100 Only —
Contact Block 1NC (Available singly in Catalog as E22B1)
Contact Block 1NO (Available singly in Catalog as E22B2)
Light Unit without Lamp Full Voltage (Available singly in Catalog as E22D)
Light Unit Resistor Type 120V 60 Hz (Available singly in Catalog as E22R2)
Light Unit Transformer Type 120V 60 Hz (Available singly in Catalog as E22TL1)
E22AA6
E22AA7
E22AA12
E22AA24
E22AA11
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-72
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Components
Replacement LEDs and Bulbs — Standard Size
Table 47-101. Replacement LEDs for Indicating Lights, Illuminated Pushbuttons, Illuminated Push-Push Operators and Double-Headed Pushbuttons
Table 47-102. Replacement Bulbs — T3-1/4 (BA9) Bayonet Base Type for Indicating Lights, Illuminated Pushbuttons, Illuminated Push-Push
Operators and Double-Headed Pushbuttons
Neon bulbs are suitable for use in indicating lights only. Not to be used with any operator.
Note: See Page 47-73 for Replacement LEDs and bulbs for Push-Pulls and selector switches.
Voltage Color Continuous Flashing
AC/DC Price
U.S. $
AC DC Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
6V – 12V Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED612RN
E22LED612ON
E22LED612YN
E22LED612GN
E22LED612BN
E22LED612WN
E22LED006RAF
E22LED006OAF
E22LED006YAF
E22LED006GAF
E22LED006BAF
E22LED006WAF
E22LED006RDF
E22LED006ODF
E22LED006YDF
E22LED006GDF
E22LED006BDF
E22LED006WDF
24V Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED024RN
E22LED024ON
E22LED024YN
E22LED024GN
E22LED024BN
E22LED024WN
E22LED024RAF
E22LED024OAF
E22LED024YAF
E22LED024GAF
E22LED024BAF
E22LED024WAF
E22LED024RDF
E22LED024ODF
E22LED024YDF
E22LED024GDF
E22LED024BDF
E22LED024WDF
48V Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED048RN
E22LED048ON
E22LED048YN
E22LED048GN
E22LED048BN
E22LED048WN
E22LED048RAF
E22LED048OAF
E22LED048YAF
E22LED048GAF
E22LED048BAF
E22LED048WAF
E22LED048RDF
E22LED048ODF
E22LED048YDF
E22LED048GDF
E22LED048BDF
E22LED048WDF
60V Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED060RN
E22LED060ON
E22LED060YN
E22LED060GN
E22LED060BN
E22LED060WN
E22LED060RAF
E22LED060OAF
E22LED060YAF
E22LED060GAF
E22LED060BAF
E22LED060WAF
E22LED060RDF
E22LED060ODF
E22LED060YDF
E22LED060GDF
E22LED060BDF
E22LED060WDF
120V Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED120RN
E22LED120ON
E22LED120YN
E22LED120GN
E22LED120BN
E22LED120WN
E22LED120RAF
E22LED120OAF
E22LED120YAF
E22LED120GAF
E22LED120BAF
E22LED120WAF
E22LED120RDF
E22LED120ODF
E22LED120YDF
E22LED120GDF
E22LED120BDF
E22LED120WDF
Description Mfg. Part Number Operating Voltage (V)/
Wattage (W)
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
#755
#756
#1819
W1225
W1226
W1121
6V (0.9W)
12V (1.2W)
24V (1.2W)
48/50V (1.0W)
60V (1.2W)
120V (2.4W)
28-2202
28-5184
28-2468-24
28-2468-19
28-2468-20
28-2468-7
Neon NE51H-R22
NE51H-R68
120 (0.3W)
240 (0.6W)
28-3754
28-3755
Standard
LED Lamp
Standard Incandescent Bulb
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-73
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Components
Replacement LEDs and Bulbs — Tall Size
Table 47-103. Replacement Tall LEDs for Illuminated Selector Switches and Push-Pull Operators ONLY
Table 47-104. Replacement Tall Bulbs — T3-1/4 (BA9) Bayonet Base Type for Illuminated
Selector Switches and Push-Pull Operators ONLY
Note: See Page 47-72 for Replacement LEDs and bulbs for indicating lights and pushbutton
switches.
Voltage Color Continuous Flashing
AC/DC Price
U.S. $
AC DC Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
6V – 12V Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LEDT612RN
E22LEDT612ON
E22LEDT612YN
E22LEDT612GN
E22LEDT612BN
E22LEDT612WN
E22LEDT006RAF
E22LEDT006OAF
E22LEDT006YAF
E22LEDT006GAF
E22LEDT006BAF
E22LEDT006WAF
E22LEDT006RDF
E22LEDT006ODF
E22LEDT006YDF
E22LEDT006GDF
E22LEDT006BDF
E22LEDT006WDF
24V Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LEDT024RN
E22LEDT024ON
E22LEDT024YN
E22LEDT024GN
E22LEDT024BN
E22LEDT024WN
E22LEDT024RAF
E22LEDT024OAF
E22LEDT024YAF
E22LEDT024GAF
E22LEDT024BAF
E22LEDT024WAF
E22LEDT024RDF
E22LEDT024ODF
E22LEDT024YDF
E22LEDT024GDF
E22LEDT024BDF
E22LEDT024WDF
48V Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LEDT048RN
E22LEDT048ON
E22LEDT048YN
E22LEDT048GN
E22LEDT048BN
E22LEDT048WN
E22LEDT048RAF
E22LEDT048OAF
E22LEDT048YAF
E22LEDT048GAF
E22LEDT048BAF
E22LEDT048WAF
E22LEDT048RDF
E22LEDT048ODF
E22LEDT048YDF
E22LEDT048GDF
E22LEDT048BDF
E22LEDT048WDF
60V Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LEDT060RN
E22LEDT060ON
E22LEDT060YN
E22LEDT060GN
E22LEDT060BN
E22LEDT060WN
E22LEDT060RAF
E22LEDT060OAF
E22LEDT060YAF
E22LEDT060GAF
E22LEDT060BAF
E22LEDT060WAF
E22LEDT060RDF
E22LEDT060ODF
E22LEDT060YDF
E22LEDT060GDF
E22LEDT060BDF
E22LEDT060WDF
120V Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LEDT120RN
E22LEDT120ON
E22LEDT120YN
E22LEDT120GN
E22LEDT120BN
E22LEDT120WN
E22LEDT120RAF
E22LEDT120OAF
E22LEDT120YAF
E22LEDT120GAF
E22LEDT120BAF
E22LEDT120WAF
E22LEDT120RDF
E22LEDT120ODF
E22LEDT120YDF
E22LEDT120GDF
E22LEDT120BDF
E22LEDT120WDF
Description Operating Voltage (V)/
Wattage (W)
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
6V (1.0W)
12V (1.2W)
24V (1.2W)
32V (1.2W)
48V (1.0W)
60V (1.2W)
120V (2.2W)
28-6731
28-6731-2
28-6731-3
28-6731-7
28-6731-4
28-6731-5
28-6731-6
Tall LED Lamp
Tall Incandescent Bulb
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-74
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
EM22 and E22 Series, Accessories
Accessories
Table 47-105. EM22 and E22 Series Accessories
Yellow plates comply with EN418 Machine Safety Standard background requirements for E-Stops.
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions
Inches (mm)
Octagonal Wrench — For easy tightening of
back-of-panel mounting nut on E22 (plastic)
operators
E22CW
Octagonal Wrench — For easy tightening of
back-of-panel mounting nut on EM22 (metal)
operators
E22CWM
Bulb Removal Tool — To facilitate bulb removal
from front of panel on all illuminated operators
E22BA3
Hole Cutting Tool — For 22.5 mm Diameter
mounting hole.
Maximum Thickness:
Steel — 16 SWG (1.63 mm)
Aluminum — 14 SWG (2.03 mm)
E22BA5
Hole Plug — Forms oil- and watertight seal for
unused panel holes — UL Listed Type
4-4X-13
Black Nylon
Stainless Steel
E22BHP
E22BA8
Protective Boot — Silicon Rubber. For use with
25 mm Diameter Flush and Extended pushbut-
ton operators only —
Clear
Red
Green
Black
E22BCM
E22BRM
E22BGM
E22BBM
Oversize Yellow Legend Plates —
1.77" (45 mm) Blank
1.77" (45 mm) Printed EMERGENCY STOP
2.56" (65 mm) Printed EMERGENCY STOP
2.56" (65 mm) Printed EMERGENCY OFF
2.56" (65 mm) Printed EMO
2.76" (70 mm) Blank
2.76" (70 mm) Printed EMERGENCY STOP
2.76" (70 mm) Printed EMERGENCY OFF
2.76" (70 mm) Printed EMO
E22VA2
E22VA9
E22VA7
E22VA6
E22VA3
E22VA1
E22VA8
E22VA4
E22VA5
Mounting Adapter — Supplied as standard with
E22 operators. Provides contact block and light
unit mounting.
E22BA1
Mounting Adapter with Barrier — Supplied as
standard with E22 Trigger Action Emergency
Stop Operators. Provides contact block unit
mounting only.
E22BA7
Auto Latch Mounting Adapter — Supplied as
standard with EM22 operators. Provides contact
block and light unit mounting.
E22BA1A
4.92
(125)
1.57 (40)
5.50
(140)
1.57 (40)
2.44 (62)
0.39 (10)
0.55 (14)
1.10
(28)
0.71
(18)
1.18
(30)
0.71
(18)
1.81
(46)
0.71
(18)
1.81
(46)
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-75
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
EM22 and E22 Series, Accessories
Table 47-105. EM22 and E22 Series Accessories (Continued)
5-Way mounting adapters cannot be used with 3-position Push-Pull operators, Cam #2 3-position selector switches, trigger action E-Stops or E22B4/
E22BF4 contact blocks.
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions
Inch (mm)
Mounting Adapter with Barrier — Supplied
as standard with EM22 Trigger Action
Emergency Stop Operators. Provides con-
tact block unit mounting only.
E22BA7A
5-Way Mounting Adapter — Provides
contact block and light unit mounting for up
to 10 circuits. The standard 3-way mounting
adapter E22BA1 allows up to 6 circuits.
For non-illuminated PBs and 2-position
selector switches
For illuminated PBs and 2-position selector
switches
For non-illuminated 3-position selector
switches with Cam #1
For illuminated 3-position selector switches
with Cam #1
Additional information – See Page 47-77
E22BA11
E22BA11L
E22BA12
E22BA12L
Operator Plug — Must be inserted into rear
of momentary action pushbutton and mush-
room head operators when 3rd Contact
Block is installed in center position. Not to be
used with maintained action or illuminated
operators — minimum order quantity 10
pieces. To assemble, push plug into the rear
of the operator. On mushroom operators,
cut down the plug to 15.2 mm [0.62"] prior to
assembly. Plug is notched to indicate cut
down length.
E22BA2
Adapter Kit — Enables a 22.5 mm operator
to be mounted in a 30.5 mm mounting hole
— panel thickness from 1/16 to 7/32 inch
(1.6 to 5.6 mm).
E22ARK
Locating Ring — Provides additional anti-
rotation features when using optional panel
mounting hole notch — minimum order
quantity 10 pieces (metal)
E22LRM
Padlockable Transparent Cover — Suitable
for use with 25 mm Flush and Extended
Pushbutton operators only
E22PCM
Padlockable Transparent Cover — Suitable
for use with 25 mm Extended Pushbutton
operators only. Enables NC circuit to be held
open.
E22PCPM
Padlockable Transparent Cover — Suitable
for use with 28 mm Mushroom operators,
Knob and Key Selector switches
E22BA9
Quick Connect Terminals — For easy instal-
lation of wired connections. 300V clearance.
Minimum order quantity 10 pieces.
E22AT
1.02
(26)
1.97
(50)
1.81
(46)
LOCK
0.87
(22)
0.41
(10.5)
0.93 (23.7) 1.25 (31.8)
1.1 (27.9) 1.25 (31.8)
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-76
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
EM22 and E22 Series, Accessories
Table 47-105. EM22 and E22 Series Accessories (Continued)
E22BF4 contact block not available for use with 5-way mounting adapters.
For devices not listed, contact your Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-833-3927.
For use with 28 mm and 40 mm diameter mushroom pushbutton operators.
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
Contact Blocks with Quick Connect Terminal
Assembled — 300V clearance —
1NC
1NO
1NO Early Make
1NC Late Break
1NO-1NC
2NO
E22BF1
E22BF2
E22BF3
E22BF4
E22BF11
E22BF20
Light Units with Quick Connect Terminals
Assembled — 300V clearance —
Transformer Type AC Only —
120/110V, 60/50 Hz
Resistor/Diode AC
120/110V
Full Voltage AC/DC
24V
Without Bulb
E22TLF1
E22RF2
E22DF24
E22DF
Mechanical Push Rod — For use with all
non-illuminated pushbutton and momentary
mushroom head operators. Suitable for
external mechanical reset of overload
relays. Must be cut to proper length.
Uncut — 4.72 inches (119.9 mm) long E22MRL
Mushroom Shroud — Protects against
inadvertent operation.
Chrome shroud (cut-away type for use with
push/pull pushbuttons)
Black shroud (cut-away type for use with
push/pull pushbuttons)
E22MSP
E22MBSP
Mushroom Shroud — Protects against
inadvertent operation.
Chrome shroud (cut-away type)
Black shroud (cut-away type)
E22MS
E22MBFS
Mushroom Shroud — Protects against
inadvertent operation.
Chrome shroud (full type)
Black shroud (full type)
E22MSF
E22MBFSF
Mushroom Guard — For 40 mm Trigger
Action Switch — To be used with E22LTA2
and E22LTA2N123 operators.
E22MGTA
1.26
(32)
Single
Circuit
0.39
(10)
1.42
(36)
2.17
(55) 0.39
(10)
1.54
(39)
1.26
(32)
Full Voltage &
Resistor Types
Transformer
Type
0.39
(10)
1.42
(36)
0.98 to 4.72
(25 to 120)
1.0
(25.4)
0.43
(11)
0.98
(25)
1.85
(47)
0.98
(25)
1.85
(47)
0.98
(25)
1.85
(47)
0.26
(6.5)
3.00
(76.2)
1.71
(43.5)
1.60
(40.6)
1.73
(44)
0.20
(5)
Dia.
0.89
(22.5)
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-77
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
January 2010
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Accessories
5-Way Mounting Adapter
Table 47-106. Minimum Spacing — Inches (mm)
Table 47-107. 5-Way Mounting Adapter
Cannot be used with 3-position Push-Pull operators, Cam #2 3-position selector switches,
push-push operators, trigger action pushbutton or E22B4/E22BF4 contact blocks. See Table 47-108.
Table 47-108. 5-Way Mounting Adapter Selection Chart
Four single circuit contact blocks maximum.
Size/Type of Operator Dimension A Dimension B
Mounting Adapter Type(s)
Two
3-Way
One 3-Way &
One 5-Way
Two
5-Way
All Types up to 1.18 in. (30 mm) Dia.
Including Knob and Key Operated Selector
Switches — except those listed below
1.18 (30) 1.58 (40) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50)
Lever Operated Selector Switch Operators and
1.18 – 1.57 in. (30 – 40 mm) Diameter Operators
1.77 (45) 1.77 (45) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50)
1.97 in. (50 mm) Diameter Operators 2.16 (55) 2.16 (55) 2.16 (55) 2.16 (55)
Large Yellow Round Legend Plate —
2.76 in. (70 mm) Diameter
2.95 (75) 2.95 (75) 2.95 (75) 2.95 (75)
Pushbutton Operators fitted with Rubber Boots or
Padlockable Cover
1.38 (35) 1.58 (40) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50)
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
5-Way Mounting Adapter — Provides contact
block and light unit mounting for up to 10
circuits. The standard 3-way mounting adapter
E22BA1 allows up to 6 circuits.
For non-illuminated PBs, 2-position
selector switches and 2-position Push-Pulls
For illuminated PBs, 2-position selector
switches and 2-position Push-Pulls
For non-illuminated 3-position selector
switches with Cam #1
For illuminated 3-position selector switches
with Cam #1
E22BA11
E22BA11L
E22BA12
E22BA12L
Front of Panel Devices Back of Panel Options
Non-illuminated Illuminated
E22BA11 E22BA12 E22BA11L E22BA12L
Flush and Extended Pushbuttons
28, 40, 50 mm Mushroom (Momentary)
50 mm Mushroom Latch (Pull-to-Release)
40 mm Mushroom Latch (Key Release)
28 and 40 mm Mushroom Latch (Twist-to-Release)
29.5 and 40 mm 2-Position Push-Pull
29.5 and 40 mm 3-Position Push-Pull
Double Headed Pushbutton
2-Position Selector Switch — Cam 2
3-Position Selector Switch — Cam 1
3-Position Selector Switch — Cam 2
Trigger Action Pushbutton
Push-Push Operator
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
—
—
✓
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✓
—
—
—
✓
—
✓
—
—
✓
—
—
✓
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✓
—
—
—
Bezel, Choice of
Chrome or
Matte Black
Variety of
Operators
Legend Plates,
Three Styles
Available
Panel Optional
Anti-Rotation
Ring #E22LRP
Octagonal Mounting Nut
Which Eliminates Spacer
Washers and Set Screws #15-1438.
Tightening Torque: 15 lb-in (1.7 Nm)
Light Units
and Contact Blocks
Secured to
Mounting Adapter
Without Tools
5-Way Mounting Adapter
The E22 5-way mounting adapter listed
below allows up to 5 single circuit or
up to 5 double circuit contact blocks
(10 total circuits) to be mounted
behind a single operator.
Slightly more spacing (approximately
0.79 in. [20 mm]) is required for this
mounting adapter as indicated in the
Minimum Spacing table below.
For selector switch applications, the
cam and contact blocks selection must
be determined using the procedure
and selection tables listed on Pages
47-60 – 47-61.
Figure 47-17. Minimum Spacing in Inches (mm)
Figure 47-18. Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
B
0.89 (22.5)
+0.02 (0.4)
Diameter
A
0.96 (24.3)
+0.02 (0.4)
-0 (0)
0.13 (3.2)
+_0.01 (0.2)
Notch Mounting
Hole as Shown
1.02
(26)
1.97
(50)
1.81
(46)
LOCK
January 2010
47-78
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Accessories and Replacement Parts
Accessories (Continued)
Table 47-109. E22 Series Accessories (Continued)
Replacement Parts
Table 47-110. Replacement Lenses — Indicating Lights
Plastic indicating light lens with insert suitable for printed legends. For
replacement Indicating Light Legend Inserts, order E22AL5. Minimum
order quantity 10 pieces.
Table 47-111. Replacement Caps — Push-Pull
Table 47-112. Replacement Selector Switch Levers and Knobs
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Octagonal Mounting Nut 15-1438
Molded Black Bezel — For
converting chrome bezel to
black bezel — Suitable for
Knob, Lever and Key Selector
Switches
E22AZB
Chrome Bezel — Suitable for
Knob, Lever and Key Selector
Switches
28-6028
Lenses with
Octagonal Bezel for
25 mm Diameter
Flush Illuminated
Pushbutton — 10 per
package, minimum
order 10.
Red
Green
Blue
Clear
Amber
White
Yellow
E22ADR
E22ADG
E22ADV
E22ADC
E22ADA
E22ADW
E22ADY
Lenses with
Octagonal Bezel
for 25 mm Diameter
Extended Illuminated
Pushbuttons — 10 per
package, minimum
order 10.
Red
Green
Blue
Clear
Amber
White
Yellow
E22AER
E22AEG
E22AEV
E22AEC
E22AEA
E22AEW
E22AEY
Color Caps with
Octagonal Bezel for
Standard Non-
illuminated 25 mm
Diameter Flush Push-
buttons — 10 per
package, minimum
order 10.
Red
Green
Blue
White
Yellow
Black
Gray
Orange
E22ABR
E22ABG
E22ABV
E22ABW
E22ABY
E22ABB
E22ABE
E22ABN
Color Caps with
Octagonal Bezel for
Standard Non-
illuminated 25 mm
Diameter Extended
Pushbuttons — 10 per
package, minimum
order 10.
Red
Green
Blue
White
Yellow
Black
Gray
Orange
E22ACR
E22ACG
E22ACV
E22ACW
E22ACY
E22ACB
E22ACE
E22ACN
Color Standard
Indicating Light
For Use with
Insert
Glass
Lens
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
E22AE0
E22AE2
E22AE3
E22AE4
E22AE5
E22AG0
E22AG2
E22AG3
E22AG4
E22AG5
E22AC0
E22AC2
E22AC3
E22AC4
E22AC5
Blue
Amber
E22AE6
E22AE9
E22AG6
E22AG9
E22AC6
E22AC9
Flush 25 mm Dia.
Ext. 25 mm Dia.
S
td. Flush Button
2
5 mm Dia.
S
td. Ext. Button
2
5 mm Dia.
Description 1.16 Inches (29.5 mm) 1.57 Inches (40 mm)
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Non-illuminated
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
E22AHS1
E22AHS2
E22AHS3
E22AHS4
E22AHS5
E22AH1
E22AH2
E22AH3
E22AH4
E22AH5
Blue
Gray
Amber
Red
EMERGENCY
STOP
E22AHS6
E22AHS7
E22AHS8
—
E22AH6
E22AH7
E22AH8
E22AH2N8
Illuminated
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
E22AFS0
E22AFS2
E22AFS3
E22AFS4
E22AFS5
E22AF0
E22AF2
E22AF3
E22AF4
E22AF5
Blue
Amber
Red
EMERGENCY
STOP
E22AFS6
E22AFS9
—
E22AF6
E22AF9
E22AF2N8
Color Levers Knobs Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Non-illuminated — 45° Throw
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
E22AV1
E22AV2
E22AV3
E22AV4
E22AV5
E22AV6
E22AV7
E22AV8
E22AV21
E22AV22
E22AV23
E22AV24
E22AV25
E22AV26
E22AV27
E22AV28
E22AX1
E22AX2
E22AX3
E22AX4
E22AX5
E22AX6
E22AX7
E22AX8
E22AX21
E22AX22
E22AX23
E22AX24
E22AX25
E22AX26
E22AX27
E22AX28
Illuminated — 45° Throw
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
E22AW0
E22AW2
E22AW3
E22AW4
E22AW5
E22AW6
E22AW9
E22AW20
E22AW22
E22AW23
E22AW24
E22AW25
E22AW26
E22AW29
E22AR0
E22AR2
E22AR3
E22AR4
E22AR5
E22AR6
E22AR9
E22AR20
E22AR22
E22AR23
E22AR24
E22AR25
E22AR26
E22AR29
Non-illuminated — 60° Throw
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
53-4122-36
53-4122-31
53-4122-32
53-4122-34
53-4122-35
53-4122-33
53-4122-37
53-4122-38
53-4183-36
53-4183-31
53-4183-32
53-4183-34
53-4183-35
53-4183-33
53-4183-37
53-4183-38
53-4185-36
53-4185-31
53-4185-32
53-4185-34
53-4185-35
53-4185-33
53-4185-37
53-4185-38
53-4184-36
53-4184-31
53-4184-32
53-4184-34
53-4184-35
53-4184-33
53-4184-37
53-4184-38
Illuminated — 60° Throw
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
53-4122-26
53-4122-21
53-4122-22
53-4122-24
53-4122-25
53-4122-23
53-4122-27
53-4183-26
53-4183-21
53-4183-22
53-4183-24
53-4183-25
53-4183-23
53-4183-27
53-4185-26
53-4185-21
53-4185-22
53-4185-24
53-4185-25
53-4185-23
53-4185-27
53-4184-26
53-4184-21
53-4184-22
53-4184-24
53-4184-25
53-4184-23
53-4184-27
Four- to Eight-Position Selector Switches — Non-illuminated
Black 53-2617-16 53-2620-16
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-79
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates with Standard Markings
Options
Legend Plates
Engraved Legend Plates with Standard Markings — 1/8" High Character Size
Aluminum — Aluminum legend plates
have a plastisol backing to help prevent
rotation of the operator when installed
in an unnotched hole. Operators
installed with aluminum legend plates
and legend plates with clip-in inserts
maintain their UL Listed Type 4-4X-13
rating.
Plastic — Both the laminated plastic leg-
end plates and legend plates with clip-in
inserts offer the choice of four back-
ground colors. Either side of the legend
plate or insert can be field engraved.
Figure 47-19. Color Diagram and Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 47-113. Engraved Legend Plates
To order Jumbo Legend Plates replace the 5th character with an L. For example E22NL87 is an aluminum, Jumbo Legend Plate marked “FASTER”.
To order self-adhesive legend plates replace the 5th character with a C. For example E22NC87 is a Self-Adhesive Legend Plate marked “FASTER”.
Nameplate Type Standard Aluminum
with Plastisol Backing
NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
and Self-Adhesives used
on Enclosures
Standard Plastic,
NEMA 1 Only
Letter Color
Background Color
Field Color
Black
Silver
Black
Black
Silver
Red
White
Black
Black
White
Red
Red
Black
White
White
Black
Silver
Silver
Pushbutton
Price U.S $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Price U.S $. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(No Engraving)
CLAMP
CLOSE
DOWN
EMERG. STOP
E22NS36
E22NS90
E22NS11
E22NS12
—
E22NS37
—
—
—
E22NS13
E22NSP77
E22NSP90
E22NSP11
E22NSP12
—
E22NSP77
E22NSP90R
E22NSP11R
E22NSP12R
E22NSP13R
E22NSP76
E22NSP90W
E22NSP11W
E22NSP12W
—
E22NSP76
E22NSP90S
E22NSP11S
E22NSP12S
—
FAST
FASTER
FEEDER OFF
FEEDER ON
FOR
E22NS14
E22NS87
E22NS95
E22NS94
E22NS4
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP14
E22NSP87
E22NSP95
E22NSP94
E22NSP4
E22NSP14R
E22NSP87R
E22NSP95R
E22NSP94R
E22NSP4R
E22NSP14W
E22NSP87W
E22NSP95W
E22NSP94W
E22NSP4W
E22NSP14S
E22NSP87S
E22NSP95S
E22NSP94S
E22NSP4S
FORWARD
HIGH
IN
INCH
JOG
E22NS15
E22NS16
E22NS17
E22NS18
E22NS19
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP15
E22NSP16
E22NSP17
E22NSP18
E22NSP19
E22NSP15R
E22NSP16R
E22NSP17R
E22NSP18R
E22NSP19R
E22NSP15W
E22NSP16W
E22NSP17W
E22NSP18W
E22NSP19W
E22NSP15S
E22NSP16S
E22NSP17S
E22NSP18S
E22NSP19S
Letter Color
Background Color
Field Color
Split Field Color
1.17
(30)
1.77
(45)
0.79
(20)
0.79
(20)
1.57
(40)
1.77
(45)
Standard Aluminum Jumbo Aluminum Standard Self-
Adhesive Plastic
Standard
Aluminum
Jumbo
Plastic
Push-Pull
Aluminum
Standard Size
Aluminum
Jumbo Size
Reversible
Plastic
Standard Size
Reversible
Plastic
Self-Adhesive
Plastic
Standard Size Plastic
with Clip-In Insert
Push-Pull
Operators
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-80
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates with Standard Markings
Table 47-113. Engraved Legend Plates (Continued)
To order Jumbo Legend Plates replace the 5th character with an L. For example E22NL87 is an aluminum, Jumbo Legend Plate marked “FASTER”.
To order self-adhesive legend plates replace the 5th character with a C. For example E22NC87 is a Self-Adhesive Legend Plate marked “FASTER”.
Center to Right Throw — 45° or 60° travel. Left to Right Throw — 45° or 60° travel.
Nameplate Type Standard Aluminum
with Plastisol Backing
NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
and Self-Adhesives used
on Enclosures
Standard Plastic,
NEMA 1 Only
Letter Color
Background Color
Field Color
Black
Silver
Black
Black
Silver
Red
White
Black
Black
White
Red
Red
Black
White
White
Black
Silver
Silver
Pushbutton (Cont.)
Price U.S $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Price U.S $. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JOG FOR
JOG REV
LEFT
LOW
LOWER
E22NS96
E22NS21
E22NS10
E22NS22
E22NS23
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP96
E22NSP21
E22NSP10
E22NSP22
E22NSP23
E22NSP96R
E22NSP21R
E22NSP10R
E22NSP22R
E22NSP23R
E22NSP96W
E22NSP21W
E22NSP10W
E22NSP22W
E22NSP23W
E22NSP96S
E22NSP21S
E22NSP10S
E22NSP22S
E22NSP23S
LUBE FAIL
MOTOR RUN
MOTOR RUNNING
MOTOR STOP
MOTOR STOPPED
E22NS92
E22NS81
E22NS56
E22NS82
E22NS57
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP92
E22NSP81
E22NSP56
E22NSP82
E22NSP57
E22NSP92R
E22NSP81R
E22NSP56R
E22NSP82R
E22NSP57R
E22NSP92W
E22NSP81W
E22NSP56W
E22NSP82W
E22NSP57W
E22NSP92S
E22NSP81S
E22NSP56S
E22NSP82S
E22NSP57S
O
OFF
ON
I
OPEN
—
—
E22NS25
E22NS65
E22NS26
E22NS64
E22NS24
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP25
E22NSP65
E22NSP26
E22NSP64R
E22NSP24R
E22NSP25R
E22NSP65R
E22NSP26R
—
—
E22NSP25W
E22NSP65W
E22NSP26W
—
—
E22NSP25S
E22NSP65S
E22NSP26S
OUT
OVERLOAD TRIPPED
OVERLOAD RESET
POWER ON
RAISE
E22NS27
E22NS98
E22NS100
E22NS80
E22NS28
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP27
E22NSP98
E22NSP100
E22NSP80
E22NSP28
E22NSP27R
E22NSP98R
E22NSP100R
E22NSP80R
E22NSP28R
E22NSP27W
E22NSP98W
E22NSP100W
E22NSP80W
E22NSP28W
E22NSP27S
E22NSP98S
E22NSP100S
E22NSP80S
E22NSP28S
READY
RESET
REV
REVERSE
RIGHT
E22NS86
E22NS29
E22NS5
E22NS30
E22NS79
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP86
E22NSP29
E22NSP5
E22NSP30
E22NSP79
E22NSP86R
E22NSP29R
E22NSP5R
E22NSP30R
E22NSP79R
E22NSP86W
E22NSP29W
E22NSP5W
E22NSP30W
E22NSP79W
E22NSP86S
E22NSP29S
E22NSP5S
E22NSP30S
E22NSP79S
RUN
SAFE
SLOW
SLOWER
START
E22NS31
E22NS85
E22NS32
E22NS88
E22NS33
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP31
E22NSP85
E22NSP32
E22NSP88
E22NSP33
E22NSP31R
E22NSP85R
E22NSP32R
E22NSP88R
E22NSP33R
E22NSP31W
E22NSP85W
E22NSP32W
E22NSP88W
E22NSP33W
E22NSP31S
E22NSP85S
E22NSP32S
E22NSP88S
E22NSP33S
STOP
SUPPLY ON
TEST
TRANSFER
TRIP
—
E22NS61
E22NS83
E22NS93
E22NS84
E22NS34
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP61
E22NSP83
E22NSP93
E22NSP84
E22NSP34R
E22NSP61R
E22NSP83R
E22NSP93R
E22NSP84R
—
E22NSP61W
E22NSP83W
E22NSP93W
E22NSP84W
—
E22NSP61S
E22NSP83S
E22NSP93S
E22NSP84S
UNCLAMP
UP
E22NS91
E22NS35
—
—
E22NSP91
E22NSP35
E22NSP91R
E22NSP35R
E22NSP91W
E22NSP35W
E22NSP91S
E22NSP35S
2-Position Selector Switch
INCH/REVERSE
FOR/REV
FOR/REV
HAND/AUTO
HAND/AUTO
E22NS59
E22NS101
E22NS38
E22NS102
E22NS39
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP59
E22NSP101
E22NSP38
E22NSP102
E22NSP39
E22NSP59R
E22NSP101R
E22NSP38R
E22NSP102R
E22NSP39R
E22NSP59W
E22NSP101W
E22NSP38W
E22NSP102W
E22NSP39W
E22NSP59S
E22NSP101S
E22NSP38S
E22NSP102S
E22NSP39S
HIGH/LOW
HIGH/LOW
INCH/RUN
INCH/RUN
JOG/RUN
E22NS103
E22NS40
E22NS114
E22NS60
E22NS104
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP103
E22NSP40
E22NSP114
E22NSP60
E22NSP104
E22NSP103R
E22NSP40R
E22NSP114R
E22NSP60R
E22NSP104R
E22NSP103W
E22NSP40W
E22NSP114W
E22NSP60W
E22NSP104W
E22NSP103S
E22NSP40S
E22NSP114S
E22NSP60S
E22NSP104S
JOG/ RUN
LEFT/RIGHT
LEFT/RIGHT
LOC/REM
LOC/REMOTE
E22NS41
E22NS117
E22NS66
E22NS116
E22NS63
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP41
E22NSP117
E22NSP66
E22NSP116
E22NSP63
E22NSP41R
E22NSP117R
E22NSP66R
E22NSP116R
E22NSP63R
E22NSP41W
E22NSP117W
E22NSP66W
E22NSP116W
E22NSP63W
E22NSP41S
E22NSP117S
E22NSP66S
E22NSP116S
E22NSP63S
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-81
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates with Standard Markings
Table 47-113. Engraved Legend Plates (Continued)
To order Jumbo Legend Plates replace the 5th character with an L. For example E22NL87 is an aluminum, Jumbo Legend Plate marked “FASTER”.
To order self-adhesive legend plates replace the 5th character with a C. For example E22NC87 is a Self-Adhesive Legend Plate marked “FASTER”.
Field Color is Split, green on the left side, red on the right side.
Center to Right Throw — 45° or 60° travel. Left to Right Throw — 45° or 60° travel.
Nameplate Type Standard Aluminum
with Plastisol Backing
NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
and Self-Adhesives used
on Enclosures
Standard Plastic,
NEMA 1 Only
Letter Color
Background Color
Field Color
Black
Silver
Black
Black
Silver
Red
White
Black
Black
White
Red
Red
Black
White
White
Black
Silver
Silver
2-Position Selector Switch (Cont.)
Price U.S $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Price U.S $. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAN/AUTO
MAN/AUTO
O/I
O/I
OFF/ON
E22NS118
E22NS67
E22NS120
E22NS122
E22NS105
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP118
E22NSP67
E22NSP120
E22NSP122
E22NSP105
E22NSP118R
E22NSP67R
E22NSP120R
E22NSP122R
E22NSP105R
E22NSP118W
E22NSP67W
E22NSP120W
E22NSP122W
E22NSP105W
E22NSP118S
E22NSP67S
E22NSP120S
E22NSP122S
E22NSP105S
OFF/ON
OPEN/CLOSE
OPEN/CLOSE
RUN/JOG
RUN/JOG
E22NS42
E22NS106
E22NS43
E22NS107
E22NS44
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP42
E22NSP106
E22NSP43
E22NSP107
E22NSP44
E22NSP42R
E22NSP106R
E22NSP43R
E22NSP107R
E22NSP44R
E22NSP42W
E22NSP106W
E22NSP43W
E22NSP107W
E22NSP44W
E22NSP42S
E22NSP106S
E22NSP43S
E22NSP107S
E22NSP44S
SAFE/RUN
SAFE/RUN
SEQ/TEST
SEQ/TEST
START/JOG
E22NS108
E22NS45
E22NS115
E22NS62
E22NS109
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP108
E22NSP45
E22NSP115
E22NSP62
E22NSP109
E22NSP108R
E22NSP45R
E22NSP115R
E22NSP62R
E22NSP109R
E22NSP108W
E22NSP45W
E22NSP115W
E22NSP62W
E22NSP109W
E22NSP108S
E22NSP45S
E22NSP115S
E22NSP62S
E22NSP109S
START/JOG
START/STOP
START/STOP
STOP/RESET
STOP/RESET
E22NS46
E22NS110
E22NS47
—
—
—
—
—
E22NS112
E22NS58
E22NSP46
E22NSP110
E22NSP47
—
—
E22NSP46R
E22NSP110R
E22NSP47R
E22NSP112R
E22NSP58R
E22NSP46W
E22NSP110W
E22NSP47W
—
—
E22NSP46S
E22NSP110S
E22NSP47S
—
—
UP/DOWN
UP/DOWN
E22NS111
E22NS48
—
—
E22NSP111
E22NSP48
E22NSP111R
E22NSP48R
E22NSP111W
E22NSP48W
E22NSP111S
E22NSP48S
3-Position Selector Switch
AUTO/OFF/HAND
FOR/OFF/REV
FOR/SAFE/REV
HAND/OFF/AUTO
I/O/II
E22NS49
E22NS50
E22NS69
E22NS51
E22NS121
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP49
E22NSP50
E22NSP69
E22NSP51
E22NSP121
E22NSP49R
E22NSP50R
E22NSP69R
E22NSP51R
E22NSP121R
E22NSP49W
E22NSP50W
E22NSP69W
E22NSP51W
E22NSP121W
E22NSP49S
E22NSP50S
E22NSP69S
E22NSP51S
E22NSP121S
MAN/OFF/AUTO
ON/STOP/SAFE
OPEN/OFF/CLOSE
RUN/SAFE/JOG
UP/OFF/DOWN
E22NS68
—
E22NS53
E22NS70
E22NS54
—
E22NS71
—
—
—
E22NSP68
—
E22NSP53
E22NSP70
E22NSP54
E22NSP68R
E22NSP71R
E22NSP53R
E22NSP70R
E22NSP54R
E22NSP68W
—
E22NSP53W
E22NSP70W
E22NSP54W
E22NSP68S
—
E22NSP53S
E22NSP70S
E22NSP54S
Push-Pulls Only
Pull-ON Push-OFF
Pull-START Push-STOP
—
—
E22NS73
E22NS75
E22NSP73
E22NSP75
E22NSP73R
E22NSP75R
E22NSP73W
E22NSP75W
E22NSP73S
E22NSP75S
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-82
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates and Legend Plate Carriers
Figure 47-20. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 47-114. Legend Plates and Legend Plate Carriers
One carrier required for each clip-in insert.
1.1
(27.5) 0.44
(11.2)
Standard
Nameplate Type Plastic with Clip-In
Insert without Carrier
NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Legend Plate Price U.S. $… Legend Plate Carrier Price U.S. $…
Letter Color
Background Color
Field Color
White
Black
Black
White
Red
Red
Black
White
White
Black
Silver
Silver
Pushbutton
Legend Plate Carrier E22ND
(No Engraving)
CLAMP
CLOSE
DOWN
EMERG. STOP
E22ND77
E22ND90
E22ND11
E22ND12
—
E22ND77
E22ND90R
E22ND11R
E22ND12R
E22ND13R
E22ND76
E22ND90W
E22ND11W
E22ND12W
—
E22ND76
E22ND90S
E22ND11S
E22ND12S
—
FAST
FASTER
FEED OFF
FEEDER ON
FOR
E22ND14
E22ND87
E22ND95
E22ND94
E22ND4
E22ND14R
E22ND87R
E22ND95R
E22ND94R
E22ND4R
E22ND14W
E22ND87W
E22ND95W
E22ND94W
E22ND4W
E22ND14S
E22ND87S
E22ND95S
E22ND94S
E22ND4S
FORWARD
HIGH
IN
INCH
JOG
E22ND15
E22ND16
E22ND17
E22ND18
E22ND19
E22ND15R
E22ND16R
E22ND17R
E22ND18R
E22ND19R
E22ND15W
E22ND16W
E22ND17W
E22ND18W
E22ND19W
E22ND15S
E22ND16S
E22ND17S
E22ND18S
E22ND19S
JOG FOR
JOG REV
LEFT
LOW
LOWER
E22ND96
E22ND21
E22ND10
E22ND22
E22ND23
E22ND96R
E22ND21R
E22ND10R
E22ND22R
E22ND23R
E22ND96W
E22ND21W
E22ND10W
E22ND22W
E22ND23W
E22ND96S
E22ND21S
E22ND10S
E22ND22S
E22ND23S
LUBE FAIL
MOTOR RUN
MOTOR RUNNING
MOTOR STOP
MOTOR STOPPED
E22ND92
E22ND81
E22ND56
E22ND82
E22ND57
E22ND92R
E22ND81R
E22ND56R
E22ND82R
E22ND57R
E22ND92W
E22ND81W
E22ND56W
E22ND82W
E22ND57W
E22ND92S
E22ND81S
E22ND56S
E22ND82S
E22ND57S
O
OFF
ON
I
OPEN
—
—
E22ND25
E22ND65
E22ND26
E22ND64R
E22ND24R
E22ND25R
E22ND65R
E22ND26R
—
—
E22ND25W
E22ND65W
E22ND26W
—
—
E22ND25S
E22ND65S
E22ND26S
OUT
OVERLOAD TRIPPED
OVERLOAD RESET
POWER ON
RAISE
E22ND27
E22ND98
E22ND100
E22ND80
E22ND28
E22ND27R
E22ND98R
E22ND100R
E22ND80R
E22ND28R
E22ND27W
E22ND98W
E22ND100W
E22ND80W
E22ND28W
E22ND27S
E22ND98S
E22ND100S
E22ND80S
E22ND28S
READY
RESET
REV
REVERSE
RIGHT
E22ND86
E22ND29
E22ND5
E22ND30
E22ND79
E22ND86R
E22ND29R
E22ND5R
E22ND30R
E22ND79R
E22ND86W
E22ND29W
E22ND5W
E22ND30W
E22ND79W
E22ND86S
E22ND29S
E22ND5S
E22ND30S
E22ND79S
RUN
SAFE
SLOW
SLOWER
START
E22ND31
E22ND85
E22ND32
E22ND88
E22ND33
E22ND31R
E22ND85R
E22ND32R
E22ND88R
E22ND33R
E22ND31W
E22ND85W
E22ND32W
E22ND88W
E22ND33W
E22ND31S
E22ND85S
E22ND32S
E22ND88S
E22ND33S
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-83
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates and Legend Plate Carriers
Table 47-114. Legend Plates and Legend Plate Carriers (Continued)
Center to Right Throw — 45° or 60° travel. Left to Right Throw — 45° or 60° travel.
Nameplate Type Plastic with Clip-In
Insert without Carrier
NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Legend Plate Price U.S. $… Legend Plate Carrier Price U.S. $…
Letter Color
Background Color
Field Color
White
Black
Black
White
Red
Red
Black
White
White
Black
Silver
Silver
Pushbutton (Cont.)
STOP
SUPPLY ON
TEST
TRANSFER
TRIP
—
E22ND61
E22ND83
E22ND93
E22ND84
E22ND34R
E22ND61R
E22ND83R
E22ND93R
E22ND84R
—
E22ND61W
E22ND83W
E22ND93W
E22ND84W
—
E22ND61S
E22ND83S
E22ND93S
E22ND84S
UNCLAMP
UP
E22ND91
E22ND35
E22ND91R
E22ND35R
E22ND91W
E22ND35W
E22ND91S
E22ND35S
2-Position Selector Switch
INCH/REVERSE
FOR/REV
FOR/REV
HAND/AUTO
HAND/AUTO
E22ND59
E22ND101
E22ND38
E22ND102
E22ND39
E22ND59R
E22ND101R
E22ND38R
E22ND102R
E22ND39R
E22ND59W
E22ND101W
E22ND38W
E22ND102W
E22ND39W
E22ND59S
E22ND101S
E22ND38S
E22ND102S
E22ND39S
HIGH/LOW
HIGH/LOW
INCH/RUN
INCH/RUN
JOG/RUN
E22ND103
E22ND40
E22ND114
E22ND60
E22ND104
E22ND103R
E22ND40R
E22ND114R
E22ND60R
E22ND104R
E22ND103W
E22ND40W
E22ND114W
E22ND60W
E22ND104W
E22ND103S
E22ND40S
E22ND114S
E22ND60S
E22ND104S
JOG/RUN
LEFT/RIGHT
LEFT/RIGHT
LOC/REM
LOC/REMOTE
E22ND41
E22ND117
E22ND66
E22ND116
E22ND63
E22ND41R
E22ND117R
E22ND66R
E22ND116R
E22ND63R
E22ND41W
E22ND117W
E22ND66W
E22ND116W
E22ND63W
E22ND41S
E22ND117S
E22ND66S
E22ND116S
E22ND63S
MAN/AUTO
MAN/AUTO
O/I
O/I
OFF/ON
E22ND118
E22ND67
E22ND120
E22ND122
E22ND105
E22ND118R
E22ND67R
E22ND120R
E22ND122R
E22ND105R
E22ND118W
E22ND67W
E22ND120W
E22ND122W
E22ND105W
E22ND118S
E22ND67S
E22ND120S
E22ND122S
E22ND105S
OFF/ON
OPEN/CLOSE
OPEN/CLOSE
RUN/JOG
RUN/JOG
E22ND42
E22ND106
E22ND43
E22ND107
E22ND44
E22ND42R
E22ND106R
E22ND43R
E22ND107R
E22ND44R
E22ND42W
E22ND106W
E22ND43W
E22ND107W
E22ND44W
E22ND42S
E22ND106S
E22ND43S
E22ND107S
E22ND44S
SAFE/RUN
SAFE/RUN
SEQ/TEST
SEQ/TEST
START/JOG
E22ND108
E22ND45
E22ND115
E22ND62
E22ND109
E22ND108R
E22ND45R
E22ND115R
E22ND62R
E22ND109R
E22ND108W
E22ND45W
E22ND115W
E22ND62W
E22ND109W
E22ND108S
E22ND45S
E22ND115S
E22ND62S
E22ND109S
START/JOG
START/STOP
START/STOP
STOP/RESET
STOP/RESET
E22ND46
E22ND110
E22ND47
—
—
E22ND46R
E22ND110R
E22ND47R
E22ND112R
E22ND58R
E22ND46W
E22ND110W
E22ND47W
—
—
E22ND46S
E22ND110S
E22ND47S
—
—
UP/DOWN
UP/DOWN
E22ND111
E22ND48
E22ND111R
E22ND48R
E22ND111W
E22ND48W
E22ND111S
E22ND48S
3-Position Selector Switch
AUTO/OFF/HAND
FOR/OFF/REV
FOR/SAFE/REV
HAND/OFF/AUTO
I/O/II
E22ND49
E22ND50
E22ND69
E22ND51
E22ND121
E22ND49R
E22ND50R
E22ND69R
E22ND51R
E22ND121R
E22ND49W
E22ND50W
E22ND69W
E22ND51W
E22ND121W
E22ND49S
E22ND50S
E22ND69S
E22ND51S
E22ND121S
MAN/OFF/AUTO
ON/STOP/SAFE
OPEN/OFF/CLOSE
RUN/SAFE/JOG
UP/OFF/DOWN
E22ND68
—
E22ND53
E22ND70
E22ND54
E22ND68R
E22ND71R
E22ND53R
E22ND70R
E22ND54R
E22ND68W
—
E22ND53W
E22ND70W
E22ND54W
E22ND68S
—
E22ND53S
E22ND70S
E22ND54S
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-84
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates with Non-standard Markings
Legend Plates with Non-standard Markings
When Ordering Specify
■Catalog Number of Blank Legend
Plate from previous page plus suffix
“STAMP”, and describe special
engraving in Block Letters.
■Insert the following in Order Notes:
❑Character Size — 3/32, 1/8 or
3/16 inch (2.4, 3.2 or 4.8 mm)
❑Field Color of Plastic Legend
Plates or Insert types.
❑Line location by Number(s)
(1 – 17) and legend desired
Note: If legends are required in line locations
not specified, drawing must be supplied
with order.
Figure 47-21. Aluminum and Plastic Legend Plates
Figure 47-22. Enclosure Legend Plates —
Self-Adhesive
Table 47-115. Ordering Examples
Figure 47-23. Insert Type Plates
Table 47-116. Type of Legend Plate
(Used on Selector Switch)
Table 47-117. Legend Characters Available
Figure 47-24. How to Use Illustrations
Figure 47-25. Selector Switch Legend Plates
3/16 inch (4.8 mm) High Characters
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) High Characters
3/32 inch (2.4 mm) High Characters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Max. 8
Characters
per Line
Standard
Size Plate
Max. 11
Characters
per Line
Jumbo
Size Plate
Max. 8
Characters
per Line
Standard
Size Plate
Max. 11
Characters
per Line
Jumbo
Size Plate
Line Location Number
Line Location Number
Line Location Number
Max. 11
Characters
per Line
Standard
Size Plate
Max. 15
Characters
per Line
Jumbo
Size Plate
Character Size
(Height) Inches
Max. Number
of Characters
1/8 Inch (3.2 mm) 6
3/16 Inch (4.8 mm) 5
3/32 Inch (2.4 mm) 8
Line Location
Number
20
21
22 25
24
23
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Aluminum
Letter Size:
1/8 in. (3.2 mm)
Location:
5 — POWER
6 — HOUSE
7 — PUMP
E22NS36STAMP
Plastic
Letter Size:
3/16 in. (4.8 mm)
Field Color: White
Location:
8 — FEEDER
9 — OPEN
E22NLP76STAMP
Description Character Size (Height)
3/32 Inch
(2.4 mm)
1/8 Inch
(3.2 mm)
3/16 Inch
(4.8 mm)
Aluminum
or Plastic
Standard Size
Jumbo Size
Insert Type:
Standard Size
5
7
5
3
5
3
3
5
—
3/32 inch (2.4 mm) High Characters
Line Location Number
Max. 10
Characters
per Line
Standard
Size Plate
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) High Characters
Line Location Number
Max. 8
Characters
per Line
Standard
Size Plate
3/16 inch (4.8 mm) High Characters
Line Location Number Max. 8
Characters
per Line
Standard
Size Plate
10
11
10
11
12
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
/-.,1234567890
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
11115
Maximum Allowable Number
of Characters per Line
Line Location Number
for Ordering
Maximum
Number of
Characters
per Line for
Standard
Size Legend
Plate
Maximum
Number of
Characters
per Line for
Jumbo
Size Legend
Plate
3-Position
Selector Switches
4-Position
Selector Switches
2-Position
Selector Switches
Center to Right
Throw
2-Position
Selector Switches
Left to Right
Throw
Line Location
Number
Line Location
Number
Line Location
Number
Line Location
Number
17R
15C 15L 15R
15C
16L 17R 16L 17R
15L 15R
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-85
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Printed Legends
Printed Legends
For Indicating Lights, Illuminated and
Non-illuminated Pushbuttons, and
1.10, 1.57 and 1.97" (28, 40 and 50 mm)
(Plastic) Diameter Mushroom Head
Operators.
How To Order:
Select legend required from listing
below and add Suffix Code Number to
Catalog Number of operator. Example:
E22A2N25 — Red indicating light with
insert printed “ON.”
Price Adder:
U.S. $ —
Table 47-118. Printed Legends
Additional legends and symbols are listed in Table 47-113 on Pages 47-79 – 47-81 — to order as printed legend, add prefix N to listed Code Number and
follow instructions on how to order above. A one-time set-up charge will apply to all orders for non-listed, special legends.
Cat. No. E22A6N5 Cat. No. E22EB2N35
Legend Suffix Code
Number
Legend Suffix Code
Number
Legend Suffix Code
Number
N4 N29 (Emergency Stop) N125
N5 N31 (Start) N887
N6 N33 (Stop) N888
N7 N34 (Jog) N889
N11 N35 (Reset) N890
N18 (Off) N64 N892
N19 (On) N65 N893
N24 N80 N894
N25 N86 N895
N26 (Push-Push) N124 N896
FOR RESET
REV RUN
START
STOP
CLOSE UP
INCH O
JOG l
OFF POWER ON
ON READY
OPEN l
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-86
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates for Four- to Eight-Position Selector Switch
Legend Plates for Selector
Switches
Blank Plastic Legend Plates — Reversible
Legend plates without text. Black one
side, red reverse side. White text.
Table 47-119. Blank and Custom Legend
Plates
Custom Engraved Legend Plates have
the Suffix STAMP added to the Catalog
Number.
Non-standard Legends
To order custom engraved legend
plates, specify field color, add suffix
“STAMP” to Blank Plate Catalog
Number and specify desired engraving
for each position.
Example: E22NGP36STAMP,
OFF - PUMP 1 - PUMP 2 -
PUMP 3 - PUMP 4, Black field.
Figure 47-26. Approximate Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
Table 47-120. Selector Switch Dimensions
Size
Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Blank
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
E22NJP36
E22NGP36
Custom Engraved
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
E22NJP36STAMP
E22NGP36STAMP
Number of
Circuits
Dimension A
Inches (mm)
1 – 2
3 – 4
5 – 6
7 – 8
2.83 (72)
3.31 (84)
3.78 (96)
4.25 (108)
0.79 (20)
0.98
(25)
A
Lever Operator
0.79 (20)
0.98
(25)
A
Knob Operator
1.69 (43)
to Remove
Key
0.79
(20)
A
Key Operator
Legend Plates with Standard Text
Legend plates have a black background with white lettering.
Table 47-121. Legend Plates with Standard Text
Size
Inches (mm)
Switch
Positions
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
E22NJP215
E22NGP215
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
E22NJP216
E22NGP216
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
E22NJP217
E22NGP217
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
E22NJP218
E22NGP218
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
E22NJP219
E22NGP219
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
E22NJP210
E22NGP210
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
E22NJP211
E22NGP211
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
E22NJP212
E22NGP212
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
E22NJP213
E22NGP213
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
E22NJP214
E22NGP214
1
24
3
15
24
3
15
24
6
3
15
24
6
3
7
15
24
6
8
3
7
0
13
2
04
13
2
04
13
5
2
04
13
5
2
6
04
13
5
7
2
6
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-87
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Enclosures
Enclosures
These totally insulated, NEMA 4, 4X,
12, 13 rated polycarbonate enclosures
are available in 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 and 9 hole
configurations in single or double
depth.
Note: For mounting dimensions and limita-
tions see Pages 47-88 and 47-94.
Table 47-122. Enclosures — UL (NEMA) 4, 4X, 12, 13
Yellow covers comply with background requirements for EN418 Safety of Machinery Standard.
Cover Holes, Centerlines and
Legend Plate Selection
Usable Depth
Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Will Accommodate 2.65 Inch
(65 mm) Legend Plates Listed
on Page 47-74
2.5 (64)
3.4 (87)
E22CSP1
E22CDP1
With Conduit Opening in Rear
of Enclosure
E22CDP1R
With Safety Yellow Cover 2.2 (57)
3.15 (80)
E22CSP1Y
E22CDP1Y
With Conduit Opening in Rear
of Enclosure
E22CDP1RY
1.42 inch (36 mm)
Will Accommodate
Self-Adhesive Legend Plates
Listed on Pages 47-79 – 47-81
2.2 (57)
3.15 (80)
E22CSP2
E22CDP2
1.42 inch (36 mm)
Will Accommodate
Self-Adhesive Legend Plates
Listed on Pages 47-79 – 47-81
2.2 (57)
3.15 (80)
E22CSP3
E22CDP3
1.18 inch (30 mm)
Will Accommodate
Self-Adhesive Legend Plates
Listed on Pages 47-79 – 47-81
2.2 (57)
3.15 (80)
E22CSP4
E22CDP4
Vertical 1.38 inch (35 mm)
Horizontal 1.89 inch (48 mm)
Will Accommodate Aluminum
& Plastic Legend Plates
Listed on Pages 47-79 – 47-81
3.15 (80) E22CDP6
Vertical 1.97 inch (50 mm)
Horizontal 1.38 inch (35 mm)
Will Accommodate Aluminum
& Plastic Legend Plates
Listed on Pages 47-79 – 47-81
3.15 (80) E22CDP9
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-88
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Enclosures
Table 47-123. Enclosure Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 47-27. Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Enclosure Component Application Table
Use the table below to determine which operators will or will not fit in a specific
enclosure. For example, a 50 mm mushroom head pushbutton operator will only
fit in a 1-hole Cutler-Hammer enclosure.
Table 47-124. Enclosure Component Application
When installed next to standard-sized operator only.
When installed in the bottom position only.
With conduit entrance at bottom.
With components mounted horizontally.
With components mounted vertically.
No. of
Elements
Outside Dimension Mounting
ABCDEF
1
2
3 or 4
6
9
2.68 (68)
3.15 (80)
3.15 (80)
4.72 (120)
4.72 (120)
2.96 (75)
4.72 (120)
6.30 (160)
4.80 (122)
7.87 (200)
2.36 (60)
2.36 (60)
2.36 (60)
—
—
3.54 (90)
3.54 (90)
3.54 (90)
3.35 (85)
3.54 (90)
2.24 (57)
1.97 (50)
1.97 (50)
3.54 (90)
3.54 (90)
1.81 (46)
4.09 (108)
5.82 (148)
4.33 (110)
7.40 (188)
Number of Holes in Enclosure
12
3 4 6 9
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons
1.14 inch (29 mm)
1.57 inch (40 mm)
1.97 inch (50 mm)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Push-Pull Operators
1.14 inch (29 mm)
1.57 inch (40 mm)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Selector Switch Operators
Knob
Lever — Vertical
Lever — Horizontal
Key
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Illuminated Operators
With Transformer
5-Way Adapter
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Over-Sized Yellow Legend Plate
45 mm
70 mm
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
1 – 4 Element 0.87 (22)
6 & 9 Element 1.26 (32)
A
E
B
F
D
Double Depth
C Single Depth
Conduit Entry
1 – 4 Element 0.83 (21)
6 & 9 Element 1.02 (26)
4 Mounting Holes
1.65 (42)
Operator Mounting Dimensions
■Front of Panel — See Product
Selection — Components
■Rear of Panel — See Page 47-94
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-89
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series — Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions
Note: Approximate dimensions in Inches (mm). For Rear of Panel Extensions. See Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Non-illuminated Pushbutton
Components
Figure 47-28. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia. Flush
Button
Figure 47-29. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia.
Extended Button
Figure 47-30. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia. with
Full Shroud
Figure 47-31. E22/EM22 Series 28 mm Dia.
Mushroom Head Button
Figure 47-32. E22/EM22 Series 40 mm Dia.
Mushroom Head Button
Figure 47-33. E22/EM22 Series 50 mm Dia.
Mushroom Head Button
Illuminated Pushbutton
Components
Figure 47-34. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia. Flush
Lens
Figure 47-35. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia.
Extended Lens
Figure 47-36. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia.
Extended Lens with Shroud
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
1.16
(29.5)
0.63 (16)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
1.16
(29.5)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 2.2 oz. (0.06 kg)
1.16
(29.5)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.4 oz. (0.04 kg)
1.1
(28)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
1.57
(40)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.6 oz. (0.05 kg)
1.97
(50)
1.02 (26)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
0.63 (16)
1.16
(29.5)
Ship. Wt. 1.6 oz. (0.05 kg)
1.16
(29.5)
0.79 (20)
Ship. Wt. 2.2 oz. (0.06 kg)
1.16
(29.5)
1.1 (28)
January 2010
47-90
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series — Dimensions
Alternate Action (Push-Push)
Components
Figure 47-37. E22 Series Non-illuminated Flush
Operator
Figure 47-38. E22 Series Non-illuminated
Extended Operator
Figure 47-39. E22 Series Illuminated Flush
Operator
Figure 47-40. EM22 Series Non-illuminated Flush
Operator
Figure 47-41. EM22 Series Non-illuminated
Extended Operator
Figure 47-42. EM22 Series Illuminated Flush
Operator
0.60 (15.2)
1.60 (40.6)
1.16
(29.5)
0.94
(23.9) 1.16
(29.5)
1.83 (46.4)
0.83 (21.0)
1.06
(26.9) 1.16
(29.5)
1.83 (46.4)
0.83 (21.0)
1.16
(29.5)
1.60 (40.6)
0.59 (15)
1.16
(29.5)
0.94
(23.9)
0.82 (20.8)
0.94 (23.9)
1.06
(26.9) 1.16
(29.5)
1.83 (46.4)
0.82 (20.8)
Table 47-125. Minimum Spacing in Inches (mm)
Horizontal spacing for one 3-way mounting adapter.
Figure 47-43. Push-Push Nameplate Dimensions
Twist-to-Release, Push-Pull and Key Release Components
Figure 47-44. E22/EM22 Series 28 mm Diameter
Twist-to-Release Button
Figure 47-45. E22/EM22 Series 40 mm Dia.
Twist-to-Release Button
Figure 47-46. E22/EM22 Series 40 mm Dia.
Push-Pull Button
Figure 47-47. E22/EM22 Series 50 mm Dia.
Push-Pull Button
Size/Type of Operator Dimensions
A B
Push-Push Operators up to 1.18 (30) Dia. Including Knob and Key
Operated Selector Switches — except those listed below
3-way adapter 1.18 (30) 1.97 (50)
Pushbutton Operators fitted with Rubber Boots or
Padlockable Cover
3-way adapter 1.38 (35) 1.97 (50)
B0.96 (24.3)
+0.02 (0.4)
-0 (0)
0.13 (3.2)
+_0.01 (0.2)
0.89 (22.5)
+0.02 (0.4)
Diameter
A
Notch Mounting
Hole as Shown
0.89 (22.5)
Dia.
Standard 1.17 (29.8)
Jumbo 1.57 (40.0)
0.05
(1.3)
1.18
(30.0) 1.79
(45.5)
Ship. Wt. 1.4 oz. (0.04 kg)
1.1
(28)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
1.57
(40)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
1.57
(40)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.6 oz. (0.05 kg)
1.97
(50)
1.02 (26)
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-91
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series — Dimensions
Figure 47-48. E22/EM22 Series 40 mm Dia. Key
Release Button
Indicating Light Components
Figure 47-49. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia.
Standard Lens
Figure 47-50. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia. Lens
Insert Version
Figure 47-51. E22 Series 25 mm Dia. Glass Lens
Ship. Wt. 2.2 oz. (0.06 kg)
1.57 (40)
to Remove Key
1.57
(40)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 0.8 oz. (0.02 kg)
1.16
(29.5)
0.63 (16)
Ship. Wt. 0.8 oz. (0.02 kg)
1.16
(29.5)
0.63 (16)
Ship. Wt. 1.7 oz. (0.05 kg)
0.91 (23)
1.16
(29.5)
Push-Pull Components —
Non-illuminated Operators
Figure 47-52. E22/EM22 Series 2-Position 40 mm
Dia. Button (Maintained)
Figure 47-53. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position 40 mm
Dia. Button (Spring Return to Center)
Figure 47-54. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position 40 mm
Dia. Push-Pull Pushbutton (Spring Return to
Center from Pulled Position)
Push-Pull Components —
Illuminated Operators
Figure 47-55. E22/EM22 Series 2-Position 40 mm
Dia. Lens (Maintained)
Figure 47-56. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position 40
mm Dia. Lens (Spring Return to Center)
Figure 47-57. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position 40 mm
Dia. Push-Pull Pushbutton (Spring Return to
Center from Pulled Position)
Non-illuminated Selector
Switches
Figure 47-58. E22 Series 2-Position — 45° Throw
— Lever
Figure 47-59. E22 Series 3-Position — 45° Throw
— Lever
Figure 47-60. E22 Series 2-Position — 45° Throw
— Knob
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
1.57
(40)
1.3 (33)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
1.57
(40)
1.3 (33)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
1.57
(40)
1.3 (33)
1.3 (33)
1.57
(40)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
1.3 (33)
1.57
(40)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
1.3 (33)
1.57
(40)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
0.87 (22)
0.98
(25)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
0.87 (22)
0.98
(25)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
0.79
(20)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
January 2010
47-92
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series — Dimensions
Figure 47-61. E22 Series 3-Position — 45°
Throw — Knob
Figure 47-62. E22/EM22 Series 2-Position —
60° Throw — Lever
Figure 47-63. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position —
60° Throw — Lever
Figure 47-64. E22/EM22 Series 2-Position —
60° Throw — Knob
Figure 47-65. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position —
60° Throw — Knob
Figure 47-66. E22/EM22 Series Key Operated
Illuminated Selector Switches
Figure 47-67. E22 Series 2-Position — 45° Throw
— Lever
Figure 47-68. E22 Series 3-Position — 45° Throw
— Knob
Figure 47-69. E22 Series 2-Position — 60° Throw
— Lever
Figure 47-70. E22 Series 3-Position — 60° Throw
— Knob
Figure 47-71. EM22 Series — 60° Throw —
Lever
Figure 47-72. EM22 Series — 60° Throw — Knob
Rotary Cam Selector Switch
Figure 47-73. Rotary Cam Selector Switch
For each additional (1- or 2-pole) block add
0.47" (12 mm).
0.79
(20)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
0.87 (22)
0.98
(25)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
0.87 (22)
0.98
(25)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
0.79
(20)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
0.79
(20)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
0.79
(20)
Ship. Wt. 2.7 oz. (0.08 kg)
1.57 (40)
to Remove
Key
Ship. Wt. 1.6 oz. (0.05 kg)
0.98
(25)
0.87 (22)
0.79
(20)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.6 oz. (0.05 kg)
0.98
(25)
0.87 (22)
0.79
(20)
0.87 (22)
0.87 (22)
0.98
(25)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
0.79
(20)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
0.98
(25)
0.95
(24)
2.79
(71)
1- or 2-Pole
Block
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-93
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series — Dimensions
Specialty Operators
Figure 47-74. Potentiometer with Knob Operator
Figure 47-75. Flush Pushbutton Operator with
Mechanical Push Rod
Figure 47-76. Wobble Stick Operator
Joystick
Figure 47-77. Joystick Mounting —
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 47-126. Minimum Panel Spacing
Between 4-Position Joystick and Adjacent
Operators in Inches (mm) Figure 47-78. Joystick Nameplate Dimensions —
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 47-79. Joystick Operator Dimensions — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1.0
(25.4)
2.6 (66)
1.0
(25.4)
1.1 – 4.9
(28 – 125)
0.25
(6.4)
1.28
(32.5)
2.58
(65.5)
Size and Type of Adjacent
Operator
AB
All types except those listed
below
2.56
(65)
2.56
(65)
Lever selector switches and
40 mm dia. operators
2.76
(70)
3.15
(80)
50 mm dia. operators 2.95
(75)
2.95
(75)
40 mm dia. emergency stop
pushbutton
3.15
(80)
3.15
(80)
Operators with rubber boots
or padlockable covers
2.76
(70)
3.35
(85)
40 mm dia. emergency stop
pushbutton with 70 mm
rectangular guard
3.15
(80)
3.54
(90)
Double head pushbutton 2.76
(70)
3.35
(85)
Four-position joystick
operator
3.94
(100)
3.94
(100)
Four-Position
Joystick Operator
A
0.89 +0.02/ -0
(22.5 +0.4/ -0)
B
Legend
Plate
Adjacent
Operator
Adjacent
Operator
1.73 (44.0)
With Flats
0.04
(1.0)
0.89 (22.5)
Dia.
2.76 (70.0)
Dia.
6.14
(156.0)
3.35
(85.1)
1.17
(29.8)
1.17
(29.8)
3.26
(82.9)
30°
30°
6.41
(162.8)
2.17 (55.1)
One
Contact Block
3.00 (76.2)
Two
Contact Blocks
2.17 (55.1)
One
Contact Block
3.00 (76.2)
Two
Contact Blocks
30°
30°
Joystick with Center Lock Joystick without Center Lock
January 2010
47-94
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series — Dimensions
Mounting
■Panel thickness — Inches (mm)
❑Nominal: 0.27 (6.8)
– Legend plates, aluminum or
plastic: 0.05 (1.3)
– Locating ring: 0.06 (1.5)
– Large yellow round legend
plate: 0.04 (1.0)
– Padlockable cover: 0.06 (1.6)
– Rubber boot: 0.05 (1.3)
❑Minimum: 0.04 (1.0)
Note: Installation of certain accessories will
increase the total (overall) panel thickness
by the amount shown. The total panel thick-
ness with all accessories installed cannot
exceed the maximum allowable nominal
dimension of 0.27 inch (6.8 mm).
Table 47-127. Minimum Spacing in Inches (mm)
Horizontal spacing for one 3-way and one 5-way mounting adapter.
Horizontal spacing for two 5-way mounting adapters.
Figure 47-80. Minimum Spacing in Inches (mm)
Figure 47-81. Rear of Panel Extensions
Table 47-128. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Size/Type of Operator Dimensions
A A B
All Types up to 1.18 (30) Dia. Including Knob and Key
Operated Selector Switches — except those listed below
3-way adapter
5-way adapter
1.18 (30)
1.58 (40)
—
1.97 (50)
1.97 (50)
1.97 (50)
Lever Operated Selector Switch Operators
and 1.18 – 1.57 (30 – 40) Dia. Operators
1.77 (45) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50)
1.97 (50) Dia. Operators 2.16 (55) 2.16 (55) 2.16 (55)
Large Yellow Round Legend Plate — 2.76 (70) Dia. 2.95 (75) 2.95 (75) 2.95 (75)
Pushbutton Operators fitted with Rubber Boots or
Padlockable Cover
3-way adapter
5-way adapter
1.38 (35)
1.58 (40)
—
1.97 (50)
1.97 (50)
1.97 (50)
A BCD E
Single Circuit
Block — Full
Voltage and
Resistor Units
Dual
Circuit,
Contact
Block
Trans-
former
Light
Unit
Trans. Light
Unit and Single
Circuit
Contact Block
Trans. Light
Unit and Dual
Circuit
Contact Block
Pushbuttons All Types and Push-Pull
2.0 (51) 2.6 (66) 2.91 (74) 3.7 (94) 4.3 (110)
Key, Lever and Knob Selector Switches
2.22 (57) 2.83 (72) 3.15 (80) 3.9 (99) 4.5 (115)
B0.96 (24.3)
+0.02 (0.4)
-0 (0)
0.13 (3.2)
+_0.01 (0.2)
0.89 (22.5)
+0.02 (0.4)
Diameter
A
Notch Mounting
Hole as Shown
A
B
C
D
E
Contact
Block/
Light Unit
Contact
Block
Added
to
Trans.
Unit
Dual
Block
Added
to
Trans.
Unit
Trans.
Light
Unit
Dual
Circuit
Contact
Block
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-95
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Ordering Examples
Ordering Complete Devices
Ordering Complete Devices Using Single Composite Catalog Number
All Type E22 and EM22 Pushbuttons
and Indicating Lights can be ordered
as complete devices, with Light Units
and/or Contact Blocks, using a single
composite Catalog Number. The com-
ponents including operator, Light Unit
and/or Contact Blocks are shipped
unassembled in an overpack bag. To
order, select the required operator
from the component listing on previ-
ous pages in this catalog and add
Suffix Codes to the Catalog Number
as listed on Page 47-98.
For illuminated operators, add Light
Unit Suffix Code first, then the Contact
Block Suffix (if required). For non-
illuminated operators, simply add
Contact Block Suffix Code to operator
Catalog Number.
Ordering Example
Illuminated extended red pushbutton
operator with 120V Transformer Type
Light Unit and two contact blocks
(1NO-1NC) is shown in Table 47-129.
Table 47-129. Catalog Numbering System
Example: Individually packaged components shipped in an overpack bag with single composite Catalog Number.
Ordering Rotary Cam Selector Switches
Custom Switch Ordering Instructions
To order a custom assembled Rotary
Cam Selector Switch, construct a Cata-
log Number from Table 47-133 using
the adjacent example and the number-
ing guide at the bottom for reference.
Switches will accept up to 12 Poles in
any sequence. List the Code Letter or
Numbers for the Circuit Combinations
in the assembly sequence required —
the first circuit designated will be
assembled directly behind the operator
and the remaining Circuit Combinations
will be assembled in the order listed.
Specifications
■Rated 10A @ 300V AC
■Contacts: silver with gold plating
■DOL – motor rating: 120V 1/3 hp
■Mechanical Life: 5,000,000 operations
■IP65
■Wiring terminals rated IP2X
■Wiring terminals accept one or two
20 – 14 AWG (0.5 – 2.5 mm2) solid or
stranded conductors. Torque wiring
terminals to 5 lb-in (0.6 Nm).
■Rated insulation voltage (Ui) is 440V.
■Rated impulse withstand voltage
(Uimp) is 4kV.
Approvals
■UL 508
■CSA C22.2 No. 14
■IEC 408
Table 47-130. Key Removal Code
From maintained position only.
Table 47-131. Maintained
Table 47-132. Spring Return
Illuminated
Pushbutton
Operator
Contact
Blocks
1NO-1NC
Transformer
Light Unit
E 2 2 T 2 X 1 1 C
Operator
Cat. No. E22T2
from Page 47-36
Light Unit
Suffix Code X11
from Table on Page 47-98
Contact Blocks
Suffix Code C
from Table on Page 47-98
=Composite
Cat. No. E22T2X11C
Key Removal Position Code
Right
Left
Right & Left
Center
Right & Center
1
2
3
4
5
Left & Center
All Positions
6
7
Circuit
Combinations
Lever/Knob Key
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
Up to 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Circuit
Combinations
Lever/Knob Key
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
Up to 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-92
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
January 2010
47-96
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Ordering Examples
Ordering Example — Custom Order — Approx. 2 – 3 Weeks Delivery
Black levers and knobs are standard. For alternate color, insert Code Letter as sixth
digit from left — Red “R”, Green “G”, Yellow “Y”, White “W”, Blue “V” —
Example: E22YCR20AABBB
Table 47-133. Selection Table
Example: Three-Position Key Operated Selector Switch
with Chrome Bezel, having 5 poles assembled in order
as follows:
Key to be removable from center position only.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
X
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
Operator Type Operator Mode Circuit Combinations
(Select Maximum of 12)
Code
Letter
Description Code
Number
Description Code
Letter
Circuit
Black Bezel Two-Position Selector Switch
E
F
G
Lever Operated
Knob Operated
Key Operated
2-Position
Maintained
Left Center Right
20 Center
to Right
A
B
—
—
X
O
O
X
25 Left
to Right
A
B
X
O
—
—
O
X
Chrome Bezel Three-Position Selector Switch
B
C
D
Lever Operated
Knob Operated
Key Operated
30 3-Position
Maintained
Left Center Right
31
32
Spring Return
from Right
and Left
Spring Return
Left to Center
C
D
E
F
G
H
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
O
Four-Position Selector Switch
40 4-Position
Maintained
12 3 4
J
K
L
M
N
X
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
P
R
S
T
V
O
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
O
X
O
X
O
X
O
W
4
5
6
X
O
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
—
Base Catalog
Number
Operator
Type
Operator
Mode
Circuit
Combinations
Key
Removal Code
Complete
Catalog Number
E22Y D 30 D C D G C -4 = E22YD30DCDGC-4
Operator Operator Circuit Combinations Key Removal Code
Type Mode Maximum of 12 Poles from Table 47-130
(if Required)
E22Y
Base
Number
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-97
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Composite Catalog Number Structure
Catalog Number Structure
Table 47-134. E22 Catalog Numbering System
For use with indicating lights only.
Will have tall lamp/LED for selector switch and push-pull operators. Standard size lamp and LED for all other operators.
E 2 2 P 2 N 2 9 X 4 C
Operator Code
(1 to 3 Alphas)
Code Description
Non-illuminated,
Momentary Pushbutton
P
E
M
L
JP
J
25 mm Flush Button
25 mm Extended Button
28 mm Mushroom Button
40 mm Mushroom Button
P50 mm Mushroom
(Plastic) Button
50 mm Mushroom
(Aluminum) Button
Non-illuminated, Maintained
(Latching) Pushbutton
ML
LL
LTA
JPL
JL
G
LTG
28 mm Twist-to-Release
40 mm Twist-to-Release
40 mm Trigger Action
50 mm Latch-In/Pull-to-
Release (Plastic)
50 mm Latch-In/Pull-to-
Release (Aluminum)
40 mm Key Release Button
40 mm Keyed Trigger
Action
Non-illuminated,
Push-Pull Pushbutton
EH
FH
ED
FD
29.5 mm, 2-Position
Maintained
29.5 mm, 3-Position
Spring Return Center
40 mm, 2-Position
Maintained
40 mm, 3-Position
Spring Return Center
Non-illuminated,
Push-Push Pushbutton
PP
EP
25 mm Flush Button
25 mm Extended Button
Non-illuminated,
Selector Switches
(Alpha + Digits)
X _ _ _
V _ _ _
K _ _ _
Knob, 2- and 3-Position
Lever, 2- and 3-Position
Key, 2- and 3-Position
Bezel Code
(1 Alpha)
Code Description
(Blank)
B
F
X
Chrome
Black (E22 Only)
Full Shroud for
Pushbutton
Full Shroud for
Illuminated Pushbutton
Color Code – Non-illuminated Operators
(1 Digit)
Code Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
Color Code – Illuminated Operators
(1 to 2 Digits)
Code Description
0
2
22
3
33
4
5
6
66
9
Clear
Red
Red (LED)
Green
Green (LED)
Yellow
White
Blue
Blue (LED)
Amber
Legend Code
(N + Digits)
Code Description
(Blank)
N _ _ _
No Legend
Contact Code Alphas
Single
Blocks
Dual &
Singles
Circuit
Configuration
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
S
—
—
DD
EE
CC
CE
DAB
DDA
EEB
DEB
DAE
DDB
EEA
—
—
W
V
—
WA or VB
WB
VA
—
—
—
PP
RR
VV
—
WW
WE
VW
VVA
—
WWB
VWB
VVB
WEB
1NO
1NC
1NO/1NC
2NO
2NC
2NO/1NC
1NO/2NC
3NO
3NC
1NO/1NC Overlapping
1NO/1NC 3-Position Push-Pull
1NO/2NC for Selector Switch
2NO/2NC for Selector Switch
4NO
4NC
2NO/2NC
1NO/3NC
3NO/1NC
5NO
5NC
2NO/3NC
3NO/2NC
4NO/1NC
1NO/4NC
Dual &
Single
Circuit
Configuration
Dual &
Single
Circuit
Configuration
VVV
—
WWW
VWW
VVW
VVVA
—
WWWA
WWWB
WWWE
VWWA
VVVB
—
VVVV
—
WWWW
WWWF
VWWW
VVWW
—
VVVW
6NO
6NC
3NO/3NC
4NO/2NC
5NO/1NC
7NO
7NC
4NO/3NC
3NO/4NC
2NO/5NC
5NO/2NC
6NO/1NC
1NO/6NC
8NO
8NC
4NO/4NC
3NO/5NC
5NO/3NC
6NO/2NC
2NO/6NC
7NO/1NC
—
VVVVA
—
WWWWA
WWWWB
VWWWA
—
VVWWA
—
VVVVB
—
VVVVV
—
WWWWW
—
VVWWW
—
VVVWW
—
VVVVW
—
1NO/7NC
9NO
9NC
5NO/4NC
4NO/5NC
6NO/3NC
3NO/6NC
7NO/2NC
2NO/7NC
8NO/1NC
1NO/8NC
10NO
10NC
5NO/5NC
6NO/4NC
7NO/3NC
3NO/7NC
8NO/2NC
2NO/8NC
9NO/1NC
1NO/9NC
Light Source Code
(X + Digits)
Code Description Code Description Code Description
X2
X3
X4
X6
X7
X8
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
X20
X26
X27
X28
Direct Voltage w/6V Lamp
Direct Voltage w/12V Lamp
Direct Voltage w/24V Lamp
Direct Voltage w/48V Lamp
Direct Voltage w/60V Lamp
Direct Voltage w/120V Lamp
120V Resistor w/60V Lamp
120V Transformer w/6V Lamp
240V Transformer w/6V Lamp
415V Transformer w/6V Lamp
480V Transformer w/6V Lamp
PresTest 24V Direct, Prewired
1NO/1NC
PresTest 120V Resistor,
Prewired 1NO/1NC
PresTest 120V Transformer,
Prewired 1NO/1NC
PresTest 220V Transformer,
Prewired 1NO/1NC
X29
X30
X37
X38
X39
X40
X41
X42
X43
X44
X45
X51
X52
X53
X54
PresTest 380V
Transformer,
Prewired 1NO/1NC
PresTest 440V
Transformer,
Prewired 1NO/1NC
6-12V Red LED
6-12V Green LED
6-12V Yellow LED
24V Red LED
24V Green LED
24V Yellow LED
120V Red LED
120V Green LED
120V Yellow LED
6-12V Blue LED
24V Blue LED
48V Red LED
48V Green LED
X55
X56
X57
X58
X59
X60
X61
X87
X89
X90
X91
X92
X94
X95
X96
X97
X98
48V Yellow LED
48V Blue LED
60V Red LED
60V Green LED
60V Yellow LED
60V Blue LED
120V Blue LED
48V Orange LED
6-12V White LED
24V White LED
48V White LED
120V White LED
6-12V Orange LED
24V Orange LED
120V Orange LED
60V White LED
60V Orange LED
Additional Units Available
For Illuminated Devices
Use These Operator Codes
PLUS Use Code From Adjacent Chart
Illuminated, Momentary Pushbuttons
N
T
25 mm Flush Button
25 mm Extended Button
Illuminated, Push-Pull Pushbuttons
GH
HH
GD
HD
29.5 mm, 2-Position Maintained
29.5 mm, 3-Position Spring
Return Center
40 mm, 2-Position Maintained
40 mm, 3-Position Spring Return Center
Illuminated, Push-Push Pushbuttons
NP
TP
25 mm Flush Button
25 mm Extended Button
Illuminated, Selector Switches
(Alpha + Digits)
S _ _ _
W _ _ _
Knob, 2- and 3-Position
Lever, 2- and 3-Position
Indicating Lights
H
A
F
25 mm Standard Lens
25 mm Printable Lens
25 mm Glass Lens
Code Series
E22
EM22
Plastic Operator
Metal Operator
January 2010
47-98
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
E22 and EM22 Series, Suffix Codes
Suffix Codes
Table 47-135. Contact Blocks
Can not be used with illuminated devices, push-pulls, twist-to-release
operators or selector switches. Operator plug E22BA2 must be installed.
E22B4 contact block not available for use with 5-way mounting adapter.
Can not be used with illuminated push-push devices. Operator plug
E22BA2P must be installed with non-illuminated devices.
Can not be used on push-push devices.
Table 47-136. Light Units — Standard Size for all Operators Excluding
Selector Switches and Push-Pull Units
Resistor unit is not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer
or full voltage LED style.
LED compatible.
Table 47-137. Light Units — For Selector Switch and Push-Pull
Operators Only
Resistor unit is not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer
or full voltage LED style.
LED compatible.
Description Suffix Code Component
Reference
Cat. No.
Single or
Combination
of Single
Circuit
Blocks
Dual or
Combination
of Dual with
Single Circuit
Blocks
Standard Contact Blocks for All Operators
Except 3-Position Push-Pull and Special Function
1NO
1NC
1NO-1NC
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NO
2NC
1NO-1NC
overlapping
A
B
C
—
D
—
E
K
—
—
—
W
—
V
—
—
E22B2
E22B1
E22B2 + B1
E22B11
E22B2 + B2
E22B20
E22B1 + B1
E22B3 + B4
2NO-1NC
2NO-1NC
2NO-1NC
2NC-1NO
2NC-1NO
3NO
3NO
3NC
F
—
—
G
—
H
—
J
—
WA
VB
—
WB
—
VA
—
E22B2 + B2 + B1
E22B11 + B2
E22B20 + B1
E22B1 + B1 + B2
E22B11 + B1
E22B2 + B2 + B2
E22B20 + B2
E22B1 + B1 + B1
1NO-3NC
2NO-2NC
3NO-1NC
4NO
—
—
—
—
WE
WW
VW
VV
E22B11 + B1 + B1
E22B11 + B11
E22B20 + B11
E22B20 + B20
Special Function Block Combination: For Use with 3-Position Push-Pulls
1NO-1NC
Late Break
1NO-1NO
S
T
—
—
E22B1 + B4
E22B1 + B5
Special Function Block Combination: For Use on Selector Switches
(supplied with external jumper)
1NO-2NC
2NO-2NC
—
—
PP
RR
E22B12
E22B11 + B11
Special Function Block Combination: For Use on Trigger-Action
Emergency Stop Pushbuttons
1NC QB — E22CB1
2NC QE — E22CB1 + CB1
1NC-1NO QC — E22CB11
2NC-1NO QG — E22CB1 + CB1 + B2
Description Suffix
Code
Component
Reference
Cat. No.
Direct Voltage Light Unit AC/DC —
Without Lamp
With 6V Lamp
With 12V Lamp
With 24V Lamp
X1
X2
X3
X4
E22D
E22D6
E22D12
E22D24
With 48V Lamp
With 60V Lamp
X6
X7
E22D50
E22D60
Direct Voltage Light Unit AC/DC —
For Indicating Lights Only
With 120V Lamp
X8 E22D120
Resistor Type Light Unit AC/DC —
120V/60 Hz X10 E22R2
Transformer Type Light Unit AC only —
120V/60 Hz
240V/60 Hz
480V/60 Hz
X11
X12
X14
E22TL1
E22TL2
E22TL4
Neon Light Unit AC only —
120V with Lamp
240V with Lamp
X15
X16
E22DN120
E22DN240
PresTest Light Unit —
Prewired with 1NO-1NC
Contact Blocks — Transformer
Type 120V/60 Hz X27 E22TL1C
Direct Voltage without Lamp
Direct Voltage with 24V Lamp
Resistor Type — 120V
X17
X20
X26
E22D0C
E22D24C
E22R2C
LED Light Units — Direct Voltage See Page 47-70
Description Suffix
Code
Component
Reference
Cat. No.
Direct Voltage Light Unit AC/DC —
Without Tall Lamp
With 6V Tall Lamp
With 12V Tall Lamp
With 24V Tall Lamp
X1
X2
X3
X4
E22DE
E22DT6
E22DT12
E22DT24
With 48V Tall Lamp
With 60V Tall Lamp
X6
X7
E22DT50
E22DT60
Direct Voltage Light Unit AC/DC —
For Indicating Lights Only
With 120V Lamp
X8 E22D120
Resistor Type Light Unit AC/DC —
120V Tall Bulb/60 Hz X10 E22RT2
Transformer Type Light Unit AC only —
120V Tall Bulb/60 Hz
240V Tall Bulb/60 Hz
480V Tall Bulb/60 Hz
X11
X12
X14
E22TL1T
E22TL2T
E22TL4T
PresTest Light Unit —
Prewired with 1NO-1NC
Contact Blocks — Transformer
Type 120V Tall Bulb/60 Hz X27 E22TLT1C
Direct Voltage without Tall Lamp
Direct Voltage with 24V Tall Lamp
Resistor Type — 120V Tall Lamp
X17
X20
X26
E22DT0C
E22DT24C
E22RT2C
LED Light Units — Direct Voltage See Page 47-70
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-99
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
E30 Series
Contents
Description Page
Product Description . . . . . . . . 47-99
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-99
Standards and
Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-99
Technical Data and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-100
Product Selection —
Operators
Square Multifunction
Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-101
Square Multifunction
Operators and
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . 47-102
Product Selection —
Operator Components
Operating Buttons
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-105
Operating Buttons and
Lens Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-106
Operator Lens Only . . . . . . 47-107
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . 47-108
Options
Markings and
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . 47-109
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-112
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . 47-113
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-114
Product Description
The E30 industrial pushbutton and
indicating light line from Eaton’s
electrical business features a wide
selection of square, multifunction
operators which conveniently mount
in a standard 30.5 mm [1-13/64 inches]
diameter panel hole. Up to six input
and indicating functions can be
grouped into a single operating head,
saving valuable panel space. Attractive
square operator styling, coupled with
custom legending of colored buttons
and lenses and many special function
accessories, makes E30 components
ideally suited for use on control con-
soles and for a variety of industrial
OEM applications.
Features
Type E30 control units consist of a
basic operator with one or more but-
tons and lenses and contact block
selection dependent on the specific
operator configuration.
■Pushbutton operators will accom-
modate up to four single depth
stackable contact blocks behind
each operating button, up to eight
circuits maximum.
■Indicating lights are supplied
complete with either a transformer
light unit up to 600V AC supply line
voltage or full voltage light unit up
to 120V AC/DC supply line voltage.
■Combination pushbutton with indi-
cating light operators are supplied
complete with a transformer or full
voltage unit. Contact blocks must be
ordered separately, up to four circuits
maximum.
Die Cast Construction
Each operator has high pressure type
seals to prevent the passage of oil and
other contaminants through the opera-
tor into the contact structure or panel
interior. Each operator uses a Buna N
cork gasket between the mounting
flange on the operator and the panel to
maintain oiltightness.
Standards and Certifications
■UL Listed — File No. E131568
■CSA Certified — File No. LR68551
Ingress Protection
■Single and Dual Indicating Lights
❑UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4,
4X, 12, 13
■All Other Operators
❑UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X,
12, 13
Transformer or
Full Voltage Light
Element — Supplied
with Operator
Locking Ring — Supplied with
Operator — Serves as Mount
for Light Element and
Contact Blocks
Retaining Nut
Secures Operator
to Panel
Lower Contact
Block Operating
Plunger
Buttons and Lenses
Supplied Blank or
with Custom Legend(s)
Multifunction
Operator Upper Contact Block
Operating Plunger
Gasket
Quarter Turn Screw —
Mounts Locking Ring to Operator
Single Circuit
Contact Block
Two Circuit
Contact Block
E30 Series
January 2010
47-100
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
E30 Series, Technical Data and Specifications
Technical Data and
Specifications
Climate Conditions
■Operating: -20° to 150°F (-29° to 65°C)
Terminals
Light Units
■Terminals are saddle clamp type
for 2 stranded or solid wires up to
12 AWG (4.0 mm2)
■Torque — 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Contact Block
■Terminals are saddle clamp type
for 2 stranded or solid wires up to
12 AWG (4.0 mm2)
■Torque — 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Material
■Operator is a zinc base die casting
with a copper-nickel-chrome plated
finish. Withstands the 200 hr. salt
spray test in accordance with MIL
Spec. QQ-M-151A and NEMA 4X
testing. All internal parts, including
shafts, washers and springs, are
made of stainless steel. The buttons
and lenses are made of colorfast,
wear resistant, molded acetal resin.
The contact blocks are made of
molded, heat resistant, mineral
filled phenolic. The contact block
plungers are molded of nylon filled
phenolic. The contacts are silver.
Electrical Ratings
Table 47-138. Contact Block
■UL A600/P300 nominal connect 10A
■1NO, 1NC, 2NO, 2NC, 1NO-1NC, early
make, late break and overlapping
configurations
■Mechanical positive drive operation
on NC contacts
■Palladium alloy contact for logic level
or highly corrosive environments
Reliability Nibs
These nibs combine a scrubbing action
with high pressure density when the
contacts are closed. They push through
particles and films found on contact
surfaces in industrial environments.
The reliability nibs self-adjust to the
application — dry circuit, normal or
heavy-duty.
Figure 47-82. Reliability Nibs
Maximum Ratings for Logic Level and
Hostile Atmosphere Applications
■Maximum amperes: 0.5A
■Maximum volts: 120V AC/DC
Light Unit
■Bulbs — average life:
❑Transformer type: 20,000 hrs.
❑Resistor/direct voltage type:
2,500 hrs. min. @ rated voltage
❑LED: 60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designation A600 and P300
Description A600 (AC) P300 (DC)
120V 240V 480V 600V 24/28V 125V 250V
Make and Emergency
Interrupting Capacity (Amps)
60 30 15 12 5.73 1.1 0.55
Normal Load Break (Amps) 6 3 1.5 1.2 5.73 1.1 0.55
Continuous Amperes 10 5
Heavy-Duty
Dry Circuit
Medium Duty
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-101
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
E30 Series, Operators
Product Selection — Operators
When Ordering a Complete E30 Control Unit Specify
■Catalog Number of Operator
■Catalog Number of Button(s)
■Catalog Number of Contact Block(s)
■Catalog Number of Accessories (if required)
Ordering Example:
E30AB
E30KB130 “START”
E30KB231 “STOP”
E30KLA1 1NO
E30KLA2 1NC
Square Multifunction Operators
Table 47-139. Single Button Operator/without Button — Order Buttons Separately — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Table 47-140. Two Button Operator/without Buttons — Order Buttons Separately — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Limited to two single circuit, one double circuit 600V or two 120V (E30KLA9) contact blocks behind each button.
Buttons are interlocked so that one of the two is maintained at all times.
Depressing the other button releases the maintained button and maintains the depressed button.
Table 47-141. Two Button Operator with Long (OFF) Release Bar — Includes OFF Bar/Button — Order Other Buttons Separately —
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operators are supplied as standard with red extended bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch. For other colors or markings, contact your nearest
Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of standard red release bar, order E30KR100.
Limited to two single circuit, one double circuit 600V or two 120V (E30KLA9) contact blocks behind each button.
Operation Special Features Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Button
Type
Momentary — E30AA
Operation Special Features Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Button
Type
Top Button Bottom Button
Momentary Momentary — E30AB
Momentary Momentary With Mechanical
Interlock
E30AC
Maintained
(All Contacts)
Release
(All Contacts)
E30AD
Maintained
(All Contacts)
Release
(All Contacts)
With Mechanical
Interlock
E30AP
Operation Special Features Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Button
Type
Top Button Bottom Button
Maintained Maintained — E30AF
Maintained Maintained With Mechanical
Interlock
E30AG
Maintained Momentary With Mechanical
Interlock
E30AH
Maintained
(All Contacts)
Maintained
(Bottom Contacts Only)
Top Button Operates
Both Top and
Bottom Contacts
E30AK
Single Button
Operator shown
with Extended
Button
B
utton
T
ype
Required
Order from Table
on Page 47-105
Two Button
Operator shown with
Extended Buttons
Button Types
Required
Order from Table
on Page 47-105
Two Button
Operator shown with
Long Release Bar
Order from Table
on Page 47-105
B
utton
T
ypes
Required
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-112
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-105
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-108
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-114
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-102
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
E30 Series, Operators & Indicating Lights
Square Multifunction Operators and Indicating Lights
Table 47-142. Two Button Operator with (OFF) Release — Includes OFF Bar/Button(s) — Order Other Buttons Separately —
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operators are supplied as standard with red extended release bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch. For other colors or markings, contact your nearest
Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of standard red release bar, order E30KR101.
Table 47-143. Single Indicating Light Unit/without Lens — Order Lenses Separately — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149 on Page 47-104.
Table 47-144. Dual Indicating Light Unit/without Lenses — Order Lenses Separately — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149 on Page 47-104.
Operation Special Features Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Button
Type
Top Button Bottom Button
Maintained Momentary Release Bar for
Top Button
E30AL
Maintained Maintained Individual Release
Bars for Each Button
E30AN
Maintained
with Interlock
Maintained
with Interlock
Individual Release
Bars for Each Button
E30AM
Type of Light Element Lens
Type
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Voltage Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
120 6PSB E30BA 24
120
24PSB
120PSB
E30BJ
E30BM
Type of Light Element Lens
Type
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Voltage Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
120 6PSB E30CA 24
120
24PSB
120PSB
E30CJ
E30CM
Two Button
Operator shown
with Release Bar
for Top Button
Button Types Required
Order from Table
on Page 47-105
Two Button
Operator shown
with Individual
Release Bars for
Each Button
Button Types Required
Order from Table
on Page 47-105
Single Indicating
Light Unit shown
with Lens
Lens Type Required
Order from Table
on Page 47-106
Dual Indicating
Light Unit shown
with Lens
Order from Table
on Page 47-107
Lens Type Required
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-112
Buttons and Lens. . . . . . . . . Pages 47-105 – 47-107
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-108
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-114
Replacement Lamps and
Lamp Receptacles . . . . . Page 47-113
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-103
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
E30 Series, Operators & Indicating Lights
Square Multifunction Operators and Indicating Lights (Continued)
Table 47-145. Single Button Operator with Indicating Light/without Button or Lens — Order Button and Lenses Separately —
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149 on Page 47-104.
Table 47-146. Single Button Operator with (OFF) Release Bar and Indicating Light — Includes OFF Bar/Button — Order Other Button and Lens
Separately — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
These operators are supplied as standard with red extended release bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch. For other colors or markings, contact
your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of standard red release bar,
order E30KR101.
Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149 on Page 47-104.
Table 47-147. Two Button Operator with Indicating Light/without Buttons or Lens — Order Buttons and Lenses Separately —
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149 on Page 47-104.
Operation
(Bottom
Button)
Type of Light Element Button/Lens
Type
Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC) Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Voltage Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Momentary 120 6PSB E30DA 24
120
24PSB
120PSB
E30DX3
E30DF
Operation
(Bottom
Button)
Type of Light Element Button/Lens
Type
Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC) Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Voltage Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Maintained 120 6PSB E30DG 24
120
24PSB
120PSB
E30DX13
E30DM
Button
Operation
Type of Light Element Button/Lens
Type
Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC) Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Voltage Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Momentary 120 6PSB E30EA 24
120
24PSB
120PSB
E30EX3
E30EF
Momentary
with
Interlock
120 6PSB E30EG 24
120
24PSB
120PSB
E30EX13
E30EM
Single Button
Operator and
Indicating Light
shown with
Button & Lens
Order from Tables on
Pages 47-105 and
47-107
Button and Lens
Types Required
Single Button
Operator with
Release Bar and
Indicating Light
shown with
Button & Lens
Button and Lens
Types Required
Order from Tables on
Pages 47-105 and
47-107
Two Button
Operator with
Indicating Light
shown with
Button & Lens
Button and Lens
Types Required
Order from Tables on
Pages 47-106 – 47-107
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-112
Buttons and Lens . . . . . . . Pages 47-105 – 47-107
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . Page 47-108
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-114
Replacement lamps and
Lamp Receptacles . . . . Page 47-113
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-104
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
E30 Series, Operators & Indicating Lights
Square Multifunction Operators and Indicating Lights (Continued)
Table 47-148. Two Button Operator with Dual Indicating Lights/without Buttons and Lenses — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149.
Table 47-149. Replacement Lamps — Incandescent and LED
E30 blue LED bulbs may not provide sufficient intensity for some applications.
Button
Operation
Type of Light Element Button/Lens
Type
Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC) Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage Lamp
No.
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Voltage Lamp
No.
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Momentary 120 6PSB E30JA 24
120
24PSB
120PSB
E30JX3
E30JF
Lamp
Voltage
Incandescent Lamps LED Lamps Price
U.S. $
Manufacturers
Part Number
Base
Style
Eaton’s Cutler-
Hammer
Part Number
Price
U.S. $
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Part Number
Red Green Yellow Blue
6
12
24
28
6PSB
12PSB
24PSB
28PSB
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
28-1022
28-1025
28-1026
28-1027
35-1523
35-1523-11
35-1523-4
35-1523-4
35-1523-2
35-1523-12
35-1523-5
35-1523-5
35-1523-3
35-1523-13
35-1523-6
35-1523-6
35-1523-17
35-1523-18
35-1523-19
35-1523-19
48
120
48PSB
120PSB
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
28-1028
28-1029
35-1523-14
35-1523-7
35-1523-15
35-1523-8
35-1523-16
35-1523-9
35-1523-20
35-1523-21
Two Button
Operator with
Dual Indicating
Lights shown
with Button &
Lens Order from Tables on
Pages 47-106 – 47-107
Button and
Lens Types
Required
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-112
Buttons and Lens. . . . . . . . Pages 47-105 – 47-107
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . Page 47-108
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-114
Replacement Lamps and
Lamp Receptacles . . . . Page 47-113
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-105
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
E30 Series, Components — Operating Buttons
Product Selection — Operator Components
Operating Buttons Only
Table 47-150. Type A Buttons with Standard Markings
Table 47-151. Type B Buttons with Standard Markings
Table 47-152. Type C Buttons with Standard Markings
Color Marking Extended Button Short Button Color Marking Extended Button Short Button Button
Application
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Black
Black
Red
Red
Red
Blank
START
Blank
EMERG. STOP
OFF
E30KA100
—
E30KA200
E30KA204
E30KA218
E30KA150
E30KA180
E30KA250
—
E30KA268
Green
Yellow
White
Gray
Brown
START
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
E30KA330
E30KA400
E30KA500
E30KA600
E30KA700
E30KA380
E30KA450
E30KA550
E30KA650
E30KA750
Red
Green
STOP
Blank
E30KA231
E30KA300
E30KA281
E30KA350
Orange
Blue
Blank
Blank
E30KA800
E30KA900
E30KA850
E30KA950
Color Marking Extended Button Short Button Color Marking Extended Button Short Button Button
Application
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Blank
AUTO
CLOSE
DOWN
FAST
E30KB100
E30KB101
E30KB102
E30KB103
E30KB105
E30KB150
E30KB151
E30KB152
E30KB153
E30KB155
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
REVERSE
RUN
SLOW
START
TEST
E30KB125
E30KB126
E30KB128
E30KB130
E30KB132
E30KB175
E30KB176
E30KB178
E30KB180
E30KB182
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
FORWARD
HIGH
IN
INCH
JOG
E30KB107
E30KB109
E30KB110
E30KB111
E30KB112
E30KB157
E30KB159
E30KB160
E30KB161
E30KB162
Black
Red
Red
Red
Red
UP
Blank
EMER. STOP
OFF
STOP
E30KB134
E30KB200
E30KB204
E30KB218
E30KB231
E30KB184
E30KB250
—
E30KB268
E30KB281
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
JOG FOR.
JOG REV.
LOW
LOWER
MAN
E30KB113
E30KB114
E30KB115
E30KB116
E30KB117
E30KB163
E30KB164
E30KB165
E30KB166
E30KB167
Green
Green
Yellow
White
White
Blank
START
Blank
Blank
AUTO
E30KB300
E30KB330
E30KB400
E30KB500
E30KB501
E30KB350
E30KB380
E30KB450
E30KB550
—
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
ON
OPEN
OUT
RAISE
RESET
E30KB119
E30KB120
E30KB121
E30KB122
E30KB124
E30KB169
E30KB170
E30KB171
E30KB172
E30KB174
White
Gray
Brown
Orange
Blue
HAND
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
E30KB508
E30KB600
E30KB700
E30KB800
E30KB900
—
E30KB650
E30KB750
E30KB850
E30KB950
Color Marking Extended Button Short Button Color Marking Extended Button Short Button Button
Application
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Blank
AUTO
CLOSE
DOWN
FAST
E30KC100
E30KC101
E30KC102
E30KC103
E30KC105
E30KC150
E30KC151
E30KC152
E30KC153
E30KC155
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
RESET
REVERSE
RUN
SLOW
START
E30KC124
E30KC125
E30KC126
E30KC128
E30KC130
E30KC174
E30KC175
E30KC176
E30KC178
E30KC180
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
FORWARD
HAND
HIGH
IN
INCH
E30KC107
E30KC108
E30KC109
E30KC110
E30KC111
E30KC157
E30KC158
E30KC159
E30KC160
E30KC161
Black
Black
Red
Red
Red
TEST
UP
Blank
OFF
STOP
E30KC132
E30KC134
E30KC200
E30KC218
E30KC231
E30KC182
E30KC184
E30KC250
—
E30KC281
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
JOG
JOG FOR.
JOG REV.
LOW
LOWER
E30KC112
E30KC113
E30KC114
E30KC115
E30KC116
E30KC162
E30KC163
E30KC164
E30KC165
E30KC166
Green
Green
Yellow
White
Gray
Blank
START
Blank
Blank
Blank
E30KC300
E30KC330
E30KC400
E30KC500
E30KC600
E30KC350
E30KC380
E30KC450
E30KC550
E30KC650
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
MAN
ON
OPEN
OUT
RAISE
E30KC117
E30KC119
E30KC120
E30KC121
E30KC122
E30KC167
E30KC169
E30KC170
E30KC171
E30KC172
Brown
Orange
Blue
Blank
Blank
Blank
E30KC700
E30KC800
E30KC900
E30KC750
E30KC850
E30KC950
Type A
Extended
Button for Use
with Operator
E30AA, Legend
Characters
3/16 Inch
(4.8 mm) High
Type B
Extended
Button for Use
with Operators
E30AB thru AE,
AL and DA thru
DF, Legend
Characters
3/16 Inch
(4.8 mm) High
Type C
Extended
Button for Use
with Operators
E30AF thru
AK, AL thru AM
and DG thru
DM, Legend
Characters
1/8 Inch
(3.2 mm) High
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-112
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . Page 47-108
Blank Lens/Buttons
with Non-standard
Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-109 – 47-111
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-114
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-106
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
E30 Series, Components — Operating Buttons & Lenses
Operating Buttons and Lens Only
Standard Color Buttons and Lens Marking
BLACK LETTERING on — White, Amber, Yellow and Clear.
WHITE LETTERING on — Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray.
For lenses with special markings or with standard markings but in a different color, refer to instructions on Pages 47-109 – 47-111.
Table 47-153. Type E Buttons with Standard Markings
Table 47-154. Type F Lenses with Standard Markings
Color Marking Extended Button Color Marking Extended Button Button
Application
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Blank
CLOSE
DOWN
FAST
FORWARD
E30KE100
E30KE102
E30KE103
E30KE105
E30KE107
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
RESET
REVERSE
RUN
SLOW
START
E30KE124
E30KE125
E30KE126
E30KE128
E30KE130
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
HIGH
IN
INCH
JOG
JOG FOR.
E30KE109
E30KE110
E30KE111
E30KE112
E30KE113
Black
Black
Red
Red
Red
TEST
UP
Blank
OFF
STOP
E30KE132
E30KE134
E30KE200
E30KE218
E30KE231
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
JOG REV.
LOW
LOWER
ON
OPEN
E30KE114
E30KE115
E30KE116
E30KE119
E30KE120
Green
Green
Yellow
White
Gray
Blank
START
Blank
Blank
Blank
E30KE300
E30KE330
E30KE400
E30KE500
E30KE600
Black
Black
OUT
PHASE
E30KE121
E30KE122
Brown
Orange
Blue
Blank
Blank
Blank
E30KE700
E30KE800
E30KE900
Color Marking Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Color Marking Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Lens
Application
Red
Red
Red
Red
Green
Blank
MOTOR RUN
ON
POWER ON
Blank
E30KF10
E30KF11
E30KF12
E30KF13
E30KF20
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
OFF
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
E30KF22
E30KF30
E30KF40
E30KF50
E30KF60
Green
Green
MOTOR STOP
MOTOR RUN
E30KF21
E30KF23
Type E Button for
Use with Operators
E30EA thru EM, FA
thru FM and JA thru
JM, Legend
Characters 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) High
Type F
Lens for
Use with
Operators
E30BA
thru BY,
Legend
Characters 3/16 inch
(4.8 mm) High
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-112
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-108
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-114
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-107
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
E30 Series, Components — Operator Lenses
Operator Lens Only
Standard Color Buttons and Lens Marking
BLACK LETTERING on — White, Amber, Yellow and Clear.
WHITE LETTERING on — Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray.
For lenses with special markings or with standard markings but in a different color, refer to instructions on Pages 47-109 – 47-111.
Table 47-155. Type G Lenses with Standard Markings
Table 47-156. Type J Lenses with Standard Markings
Table 47-157. Type K Lenses with Standard Markings — Sold in pairs only
Table 47-158. Type K Lenses — Blank — Sold in pairs only
Color Marking Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Color Marking Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Lens
Application
Red
Red
Red
Red
Green
Blank
MOTOR RUN
ON
POWER ON
Blank
E30KG10
E30KG11
E30KG12
E30KG13
E30KG20
Green
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
OFF
READY
Blank
Blank
Blank
E30KG22
E30KG23
E30KG30
E30KG40
E30KG50
Green
Green
MOTOR RUN
MOTOR STOP
E30KG24
E30KG21
White Blank E30KG60
Color Marking Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Color Marking Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Lens
Application
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Blank
MOTOR RUN
ON
POWER ON
MOTOR STOP
E30KJ10
E30KJ11
E30KJ12
E30KJ13
E30KJ14
Green
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
OFF
ON
Blank
Blank
Blank
E30KJ22
E30KJ24
E30KJ30
E30KJ40
E30KJ50
Green
Green
Green
Blank
MOTOR STOP
MOTOR RUN
E30KJ20
E30KJ21
E30KJ23
White Blank E30KJ60
Color Marking Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Lens
Application
Left Hand Lens Right Hand Lens Left Hand Lens Right Hand Lens
Red
Red
Green
Green
Red
Green
Green
Red
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
E30KK12
E30KK13
E30KK22
E30KK23
Color Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Color Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Left Hand
Lens
Right Hand
Lens
Left Hand
Lens
Right Hand
Lens
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
E30KK10
E30KK11
E30KK17
E30KK14
E30KK15
E30KK16
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
E30KK41
E30KK42
E30KK43
E30KK40
KE30K45
E30KK46
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
E30KK21
E30KK20
E30KK27
E30KK24
E30KK25
E30KK26
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
E30KK51
E30KK52
E30KK53
E30KK54
E30KK50
E30KK56
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
E30KK31
E30KK32
E30KK30
E30KK34
E30KK35
E30KK36
White
White
White
White
White
White
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
E30KK61
E30KK62
E30KK63
E30KK64
E30KK65
E30KK60
Type G Lens for Use with
Operators E30CA thru CM and
DA thru DM, Legend Characters
3/16 inch (4.8 mm) High Except
MOTOR RUN, POWER ON &
MOTOR STOP are 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) High
Type J Lens for Use with
Operators E30EA thru EM, FA
thru FM and GA thru GM, Legend
Characters 1/8 (3.2 mm) High
Type K Lenses for Use with
Operators E30JA thru JW,
Legend Characters 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) High
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-114
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-108
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
E30 Series, Components — Contact Blocks
Contact Blocks
Standard Contact Blocks — Molded, phenolic construction.
Enclosed silver contacts with reliability “nibs” that improve
the reliability of switching performance under dry circuit,
corrosive atmosphere and fine dust conditions. For more
extreme conditions, the Logic Level contact blocks described
below are recommended.
Table 47-159. Standard Contact Block Ratings — Maximum Amperes
Logic Level Contact Blocks — Feature palladium contacts.
Palladium, which is more inert than gold, is well suited for
voltages and currents approaching zero. When mounted in
an enclosure rated for highly corrosive environments, logic
level contact blocks can be used where exposure to chemi-
cals may cause failure to other types of materials.
Table 47-160. Maximum Ratings for Logic Level and Hostile
Atmosphere Application
Logic level contact blocks are UL A600/P500 rated per table above.
Mounting Limitations
Figure 47-83 and Table 47-161 give the contact block mount-
ing limitations for Type E30 pushbutton and combination
pushbutton and light operators. Mounting positions 1 thru 8
indicate single depth contact blocks. Each of these positions
can represent either a single circuit 600 volt block or a
2-circuit 120 volt block. The 2-circuit 600 volt block requires
two of the numbered positions shown.
Table 47-161. Mounting Positions
Except Operator E30AD, AJ or AK which will accommodate contact
blocks 1, 2, 5 and 6 only. (See figure below.)
Figure 47-83. Mounting Positions
Table 47-162. Contact Block Selection Table
Do not use with maintained operators.
Contacts must be same polarity.
Supplied with non-stacking screws. Limited to 2 contact blocks mounted in positions 1 and 5.
Individually boxed contact blocks master packed 10 per carton.
Current AC Volts A600 DC Volts P300
120 240 480 600 24/28 125 250
Make & Emergency
Inter. Capacity
Normal Load Break
60
6
30
3
15
1.5
12
1.2
5.73
5.73
1.1
1.1
0.55
0.55
Continuous Current 10
Maximum Amperes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5A
Maximum Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120V AC/DC
Catalog Number
of Operator
Contact Blocks Can Be Mounted in
Positions Listed Below
Upper Stack Lower Stack
E30AA thru E30AM
E30BA thru E30CM
E30DA thru E30DM
E30EA thru E30GM
E30JA thru E30JM
1-2-3-4
None
None
2-3-4
3-4
5-6-7-8
None
5-6-7-8
6-7-8
7-8
Contact Block
Mounting
Positions
Upper Contact
Block Stack
Upper Contact Block Stack Operating Plunger
Lower Contact Block Stack
Operating Plunger
Lower Contact
Block Stack
1
5678
234
Contact Block Type Circuit Pressure Terminals Quick Connect
Terminals
STANDARD LOGIC LEVEL STANDARD
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1NO 600 Volt AC, 250 Volt DC — Single Circuit
E30KLA1 E30KLAE1 E30KLB1
1NC E30KLA2 E30KLAE2 E30KLB2
1NO-1NC 600 Volt AC, 250 Volt DC — Two Circuit
E30KLA3 E30KLAE3 E30KLB3
2NO E30KLA4 E30KLAE4 E30KLB4
2NC E30KLA5 E30KLAE5 E30KLB5
Special Contact Operation E30KLA6 — E30KLB6
1NO-1NC
Overlapping
2NO
(One Early Closing)
E30KLA7 — E30KLB7
2NC
(One Late Opening)
E30KLA8 — E30KLB8
1NO-1NC 120 Volt AC Only — Two Circuit
E30KLA9 — E30KLB9
Screw Terminals
Quick Connect Terminals
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-109
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
E30 Series, Options — Legend Plates
Options
Markings and Legend Plates
Buttons or Lenses with Non-standard
Horizontal Markings
Markings not listed as STANDARD
MARKINGS below are considered non-
standard. If more than one marking is
required on a button or lens, order
non-standard markings.
Ordering Instructions
■Specify Catalog Number of blank
button or lens of desired color, plus
Suffix “STAMP” for Non-standard or
“STD” for Standard markings in Order
Notes. See Pages 47-105 – 47-107.
■Specify size, legend desired and loca-
tion in Order Notes by alphas as
shown in example.
■Do not exceed maximum number of
legend characters per line.
Ordering Example:
Green Type B button to be marked
with non-standard legend “ALL
ELEVATORS DOWN.”
Table 47-163. Button Markings
Figure 47-84. How to Use the Legend
Location Figure
Figure 47-85. Legend Locations
Table 47-164. Standard Markings
Catalog No.: E30KB300STAMP
Letter Size: 1/8"
Pos. A — ALL
Pos. C — ELEVATORS
Pos. F — DOWN
Description Price Each
U.S. $
Price Per
Pair U.S. $
All Types except K
Type K
Buttons Lenses
Line Position
7
9
A
C
E7
8
8
8
No. of Characters per Line
AUTO
CLOSE
DOWN
EMERG. STOP
FAST
FORWARD
HAND
HIGH
IN
INCH
JOG
JOG FOR.
JOG REV.
LOW
LOWER
MAN.
OFF
ON
OPEN
OUT
RAISE
RESET
REVERSE
RUN
SLOW
START
STOP
TEST
UP
MOTOR RUN
MOTOR STOP
POWER ON
READY
1/8"
(3 mm)
High
Char.
TYPE A BUTTONS AND TYPE F LENSES
TYPE B BUTTONS AND TYPE G LENSES
1/8"
(3 mm)
High
Char.
TYPE C BUTTONS
1/8"
(3 mm)
High
Char.
TYPE D BUTTONS
1/8"
(3 mm)
High
Char.
TYPE K BUTTONS
TYPE E BUTTONS AND TYPE J LENSES
1/8"
(3 mm)
High
Char.
9
9
9
99
9
9
9
9
D
A
B
E
G
D
E
J
G
K
N
G
K
J
M
9
9
9
9
9
9
8
8
8
88
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
99
9
9
9
B
B
D
F
E
H
F
K
J
K
9
9
9
8
8
88
8
8
8
8
8
8
A
C
L
F
J
8
8
8
8
8
1/8"
(3 mm)
High
Char.
3/16"
(5 mm)
High
Char.
TYPE F LENS ONLY
978
9
99
BAB
D
CC
FD
78
888
8
88
88
9
C
8
3/16"
(5 mm)
High
Char.
545
5
66
BAB
D
CC
ED
45
6
C
3/16"
(5 mm)
High
Char.
5
56
A
CB
6
B
3/16"
(5 mm)
High
Char.
4
4
A
C
4
B
4
E
4
4
D
F
4
E
4
B
3/16"
(5 mm)
High
Char.
7
7
A
C
8
8
99
BB
88
3/16"
(5 mm)
High
Char.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-110
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
E30 Series, Options — Legend Plates
Figure 47-86. Legend Arrangements and Legend Locations
Figure 47-87. Legend Plates E30KN76 or KN76B Figure 47-88. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 47-165. Maximum Number and Size of Permissible Legend Characters of Custom Stamped Legend Plates
LEGEND PLATES
E30KM1 OR KM11
LEGEND PLATES
E30KM4 OR KM14
LEGEND PLATES
E30KM2 OR KM12
LEGEND PLATES
E30KM5 OR KM15
LEGEND PLATES
E30KM3 OR KM13
LEGEND PLATES
E30KM6 OR KM16
B
E
F
F
A
B
B
D
C
C
D
BF
H
B
M
M
K
D
BF
A
B
H
G
KB
JA
DM
CL
BFM
G
B
A
F
E
M
L
LINE B
L
I
N
E
A
L
I
N
E
C
LEGEND PLATES
E30KN76 OR KN76B
1/8” character size only
with a maximum of six
characters.
1.44
(36.6)
0.02
(0.5)
0.78
(19.8) 0.39
(9.9)
Standard
3.06 (77.7) Two Span
0.05 (1.3)
0.08 (1.9)
One Span
4.69 (119.1) Three Span
Large
Legend Plates
Type No.
of
Lines
Size and Maximum Number of Characters Per Line
One Span Two Span Three Span
3/32"
(2.5 mm)
1/8"
(3 mm)
3/16"
(5 mm)
3/32"
(2.5 mm)
1/8"
(3 mm)
3/16"
(5 mm
3/32"
(2.5 mm)
1/8"
(3 mm)
3/16"
(5 mm)
Standard 1 13 10 10 30 22 22 47 34 34
Large 1
2
13
13
10
10
10
10
30
30
23
23
23
23
47
47
36
36
36
36
CHARACTERS AVAILABLE FOR NON-STANDARD MARKINGS
3/32 Inch (2.5 mm) — 1/8 Inch (3 mm) — 3/16 Inch (5 mm)
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z . / — , 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-111
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
E30 Series, Options — Legend Plates
Buttons or Lenses with Non-standard
Vertical Markings
Ordering Instructions
■Specify Catalog Number of blank but-
ton or lens of desired color, selected
from listings on Pages 47-105 – 47-107.
■Specify size, legend desired, loca-
tion and state “vertically marked” in
Order Notes.
Note: Specify either 1/8 or 3/16 inch (3.2 or
4.8 mm) character height. Do not exceed
maximum number of characters as outlined
in table below.
Ordering Example:
Green Type K button to be marked
with “RUN” “ON.”
Table 47-166. Maximum Number of
Characters
Legend Plates
Legend plates for Type E30 Compact
Pushbutton and Indicating Light oper-
ators hook directly onto the operator
and are clamped in place when the
operator locking nut behind the panel
is secured.
Two and three span plates are
designed for use where two or more
operators are mounted adjacent to
each other on minimum horizontal
mounting centers. These legend
plates mount in the same manner as
single span units.
Blank Legend Plates and
Legend Plates with Markings
When Ordering Legend Plates
with Markings
■Catalog Number of Blank Legend
Plate
■Insert the following in Order Notes:
❑Legends Required
❑Size of Characters — 3/32, 1/8,
3/16 inch (2.4, 3.2, 4.8 mm)
❑Positions of legends on one line
Standard and two line Large legend
plates by alphas as shown in
sketches on following page.
Ordering Example:
Three span legend plate to be marked
“MASTER CONTROL”, “STATION A”
and “STATION B.”
Table 47-167. Blank Legend Plate
Description Price Ea.
Catalog No.: E30KK20STAMP
Letter Size: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm)
Vertically Marked
Pos. B — RUN
Pos. E — ON
Description Type Maximum Number of
Characters
1/8 Inch
(3.2 mm)
3/16 Inch
(4.8 mm)
Buttons A
B
C
D
E
7
7
4
5
7
5
5
3
3
5
Lenses F
G
J
K
7
7
7
3
5
5
5
2
Standard —
One Span
Large —
One Span
Description Price Ea.
Catalog No: E30KM3STAMP
Letter Size: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
Pos. C — MASTER CONTROL
Pos. B — STATION A
Pos. F — STATION B
Type One Span
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Black
Standard
Large
E30KM1
E30KM4
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-112
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
E30 Series, Accessories
Accessories
Table 47-168. Accessories
Color coordinating collars, padlock attachments or legend plates cannot be used with operators equipped with a transparent boot.
Description Color/Type Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Collar — Snap on Mounting for assembly in the field.
Permits color coding of operator heads. Size: 1-19/32 x
1-19/32 x 9/16".
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Gray
Orange
Blue
Brown
E30KR1
E30KR2
E30KR3
E30KR4
E30KR5
E30KR6
E30KR8
E30KR9
E30KR10
Shroud — Similar to collar above except for extension
above the face of button to prevent accidental actua-
tion of button. Half shroud with an extension on only
half the collar may be positioned to protect top or
bottom button.
Full Shroud
(Gray)
Half Shroud
(Gray)
E30KT6
E30KT7
Guard — Two collars deep, removable slide prevents
accidental operation. White slide can be marked with
grease pencil.
Red with
White Slide
Red with
Clear Slide
E30KR31
E30KR32
Terminal Block — 2 terminals, each will accommodate
2 wire terminations.
E30KR30
Padlock Attachment for locking single button and
bottom button of multi-function operators in the
depressed position. Locks NC contacts open or
early closing NO contacts closed. Cannot be used in
conjunction w/collar, shroud or boot.
Short
Button
Extended
Button
E30KT1
E30KT2
Transparent Boot — Guards against ingress of foreign
material and freezing rain. Note: If this boot is used in
conjunction with operator types AD or AE, an extended
type button must be used in the top position and a
short button in the lower position.
E30KT3
Square Hole Plug —
Gray Enameled
Stainless Steel
E30KT4
E30KT5
Lamp and Lens Removal Tool — Will not fit
Cat. No. E30B Light Units listed on Page 47-102.
E30KV1
Octagonal Wrench for mounting operators to panel. E22CW
Button and Lens Removal Tool E30KV2
Full
Shroud
Half
Shroud
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-114
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-113
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
E30 Series, Accessories — Replacement Parts
Replacement Parts
Table 47-169. Replacement Light Units for E30 Components
Table 47-170. Replacement Lamps for E30 Illuminated Operators
Voltage
AC and DC
Part Numbers — Receptacles without Lamps
Single
Indicating Light
Price
U.S. $
Dual
Indicating Light
Price
U.S. $
Single Light
Single Pushbutton
Price
U.S. $
Single Light
Dual Pushbutton
Price
U.S. $
Dual Light
Dual Pushbutton
Price
U.S. $
Full Voltage Type
6V
12V
18/24V
28V
32V
48V
120V
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2568-2A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2568-2A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
—
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2567A
57-2567A
57-2567A
57-2567A
57-2567A
57-2567A
57-2567A
Transformer Type
120V
208V
240V
380V
480V
600V
42-2672A
42-2672-2A
42-2672-3A
42-2672-4A
42-2672-5A
42-2672-6A
42-2663A
42-2663-2A
42-2663-3A
42-2663-4A
42-2663-5A
42-2663-6A
42-2663A
42-2663-2A
42-2663-3A
42-2663-4A
42-2663-5A
42-2663-6A
42-2671A
42-2671-2A
42-2671-3A
42-2671-4A
42-2671-5A
42-2671-6A
42-2664A
42-2664-2A
42-2664-3A
42-2664-4A
42-2664-5A
42-2664-6A
Description and Part Numbers — Related Parts
Inner Lens
Retaining Nut
Gasket
Locking Ring
28-1008
15-1885
16-2092
52-1116
28-1010
15-1885
16-2092
52-1116
28-1010
15-1885
16-2092
52-1116
28-1010
15-1885
16-2092
52-1116
28-1010
15-1885
16-2092
52-1116
Mfg. Lamp
Type
Voltage Base Style Application Part
Number
Price
U.S. $
6PSB 6V T2 Slide E30 Transformer and Full Voltage 28-1022
12PSB
24PSB
28PSB
48PSB
60PSB
120PSB
12V
24V
28V
48V
60V
120V
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
E30 Full Voltage
E30 Full Voltage
E30 Full Voltage
E30 Full Voltage
E30 Full Voltage
E30 Full Voltage
28-1025
28-1026
28-1027
28-1028
28-1598
28-1029
#259 6.3V T3-1/4 Wedge E30 Single Transformer 28-949
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-114
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
E30 Series, Dimensions
Dimensions
Figure 47-89. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Drilling Dimensions — Minimum Spacing
Dimensions shown allow adequate
space for the addition of one or two
high legend plates and color coordi-
nating collars.
Note: Locating nib hole or notch is 0.136"
(3.5 mm) drill. Alternate to drilling mounting
holes use Greenlee Tool Co. punch (No.
730-S) to punch the hole and (No. 730-K)
to punch the notch.
1.75
(44.5)
0.53
(13.5)
0.81
(20.6)
1.72
(43.7)
1.72
(43.7)
1.47
(37.3)
Square 0.88
(22.4)
0.88
(22.4)
1.13
(28.7)
1.88
(47.8)
Panel
0.06 (1.5) Min.
0.25 (6.4) Max.
0.78 (19.8) Ext. Button
Pushbutton Operators
0.63 (16)
Std.
Button 1 Circ.
Cont. Blocks
2 Circ.
Cont. Blocks
Plunger
Extends to
0.25 (6.4)
0.88
(22.4)
0.88 (22.4) 0.88 (22.4)
Full Voltage
Types DF,
DM and DX
Plunger Extends
to 0.25 (6.4) on
Contact Blocks
Transformer
Types DA – DL
Combination Pushbutton & Indicating Light Operators
1.75
(44.5)
0.53
(13.5)
0.84
(21.3)
0.81
(20.6)
1.72
(43.7)
1.47
(37.3)
Square
1.13
(28.7)
1.88
(47.8)
Panel
0.06 (1.5) Min.
0.25 (6.4) Max.
0.88
(22.4)
Operator
Types E30JA
– E30JW
Operator
Types E30EA
– E30GM
Plungers
Extended
to 0.25 (6.4)
Transformer
or Full Voltage
Light Element
Combination Pushbutton & Indicating Light Operators
1.75
(44.5)
0.53
(13.5)
0.84
(21.3)
0.81
(20.6)
1.72
(43.7)
1.47
(37.3)
Square
1.13
(28.7)
1.88
(47.8)
Panel
0.06 (1.5) Min.
0.25 (6.4) Max.
1.75
(44.5)
0.53
(13.5)
0.84
(21.3)
0.81
(20.6)
1.72
(43.7)
1.47
(37.3)
Square
1.13
(28.7)
1.88
(47.8)
0.88
(22.4)
Panel
0.06 (1.5) Min.
0.25 (6.4) Max.
Operator
Types E30BA
– E30BM
Operator
Types E30CA
– E30CM
Indicating Light Operators
0.69
(17.5)
1.13
(28.7)
0.31 (7.9)
Dia. Hole
0.5 (12.7)
0.56
(14.2)
1.59
(40.4)
0.75
(19.1)
Padlocking Attachment Half Shroud E30KT7
1.44
(36.6)
0.11 (2.8)
Max.
1.63
(41.3)
2.25
(57) 0.6
(15)
Drill .14
(3.5)
ø 1.20 (30.5)
Drilling Dimensions – Minimum Spacing
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-115
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series
Contents
Description Page
Product Description . . . . . . . . 47-115
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-116
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-116
Contact Operation . . . . . . . . . 47-116
Standards and
Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-116
Technical Data and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-116
Point-of-Purchase
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-117
Product Selection
Non-illuminated
Momentary Pushbutton
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-118
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-119
Illuminated Momentary
Pushbutton Units. . . . . . . 47-122
Indicating Light Units . . . . 47-123
Illuminated Pushbuttons
and Indicating Lights. . . . 47-124
Push-Pull Units. . . . . . . . . . 47-125
Illuminated Push-Pull
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-126
Potentiometers. . . . . . . . . . 47-128
Push-Pulls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-129
Selector Switch Units . . . . 47-132
Selector Switch
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-133
Selector Switch
Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-135
Illuminated Selector
Switch Operators. . . . . . . 47-138
Joysticks Units . . . . . . . . . . 47-139
Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-139
Roto-Push® Units. . . . . . . . 47-142
Roto-Push Operators . . . . . 47-143
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . 47-148
Options
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . 47-151
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-153
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-155
Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-157
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-159
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-160
Ordering Complete
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-163
Catalog Number
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-164
Product Description
The 30.5 mm pushbutton line features
a zinc die cast construction with
chrome-plated housing and mounting
nut. The same durable construction is
also available with the corrosive resis-
tant E34 line of pushbuttons. See E34
section on Pages 47-166 – 47-189.
Reliability Nibs
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer® contact
blocks feature enclosed silver contacts
with pointed “reliability nibs” for reli-
able performance from logic level up
to 600V. To ensure reliable switching,
nibs bite through oxide which can form
on silver contacts, eliminating the
need for expensive logic level blocks
for most applications.
Figure 47-90. Reliability Nibs
Reliability nibs improve performance
in dry circuit, corrosive, fine dust and
other contaminated atmospheres.
Under normal environmental condi-
tions, the minimum operational voltage
is 5V and the minimum operational
current is 1 mA, AC/DC. For operation
under a wider range of environmental
conditions, logic level contact blocks
with inert palladium tipped contacts
are recommended.
Grounding Nibs
10250T line operators have “grounding
nibs” — four metal points on the oper-
ator casting designed to bite through
most paints and other coatings on
metal panels to enhance the ground
connection when the operator is
securely tightened.
Grounding Nibs
Diaphragm Seal with Drainage Holes
Liquid Drainage
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer pushbutton
operators offer front of panel drainage
via holes in the operator bushing. Hid-
den from view by the mounting nut,
these holes prevent buildup of liquid
inside the operator, which can prevent
operation in freezing environments.
The holes also provide a route for
escaping liquid in high pressure wash-
downs, effectively relieving pressure
from the internal diaphragm seal,
ensuring reliable sealing in applica-
tions even beyond NEMA 4.
Figure 47-91. Diaphragm Seal
Dry Circuit
Medium Duty
Heavy-Duty
Grounding
Nibs
Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
Drainage Hole
Drainage Hole
Flexible
Diaphragm
Stainless
Steel
Operating
Spring
Mounting Nut
Colorfast
Molded
Button
10250T Series
Mounting Nut Legend Plate Operator
Terminal Clamps Shipped
Ready to Wire
Stackable Contact
Blocks up to 12
Circuits per Operator
Color Coded Plungers
Red = NC Green = NO
January 2010
47-116
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Technical Data and Specifications
Features
■Heavy-duty zinc die cast construction
■Enclosed silver contacts with
reliability nibs
■Diaphragm seals with drainage
holes
■Grounding nibs on the operator
casing
Benefits
■Reliability nibs improve contact
reliability even under dry circuit and
fine dust conditions
■Drainage holes prevent buildup of
liquid inside the operator which
can prevent operation in freezing
environments
■Grounding nibs bit through paint
and other coatings to provide
secure ground
Contact Operation
Slow make and break. All normally
closed contacts have positive opening
operation, i.e., normally closed contacts
are forced open in the event of contact
weld or spring breakage.
Standards and Certifications
■CE EN60947-5-1
■UL 508 — File No. 131568
■CSA C22.2 No. 14 — File No. LR68551
Ingress Protection
When mounted in similarly rated
enclosure —
■Standard Indicating Lights
❑UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4,
4X, 12, 13
❑IEC IP65
■All Other Operators
❑UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X,
12, 13
❑IEC IP65
Technical Data and
Specifications
Mechanical Ratings
■Frequency of operation
❑All pushbuttons:
6000 operations/hr.
❑Key and lever selector switches:
3000 operations/hr.
❑Auto-latch devices:
1200 operations/hr.
■Life
❑Pushbuttons: 10 x 106 operations
❑Contact blocks: 10 x 106 operations
❑PresTest units: 10 x 106 operations
❑Lever and key selector switches:
0.25 x 106 operations
❑Twist to release pushbuttons:
0.3 x 106 operations
■Shock resistance
❑Duration: 20 mS ≥ 5g
Climate Conditions
■Operating Temperature: 1° to 150°F
(-17° to 66°C)
■Storage Temperature: -40° to 176°F
(-40° to 80°C)
■Altitude: 6,562 ft. (2,000m)
■Humidity: Max. 95% RH @ 60°C
Terminals
■Marking
❑NC-NO on the contact block to meet
the NEMA requirements. Dual
marking system 1 – 2 for normally
closed, 3 – 4 for normally open to
meet BS5472 (Cenelec EN50 005)
■Clamps
❑Terminals are saddle clamp type
for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14
AWG (2.5 mm2) conductors
■Torque = 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
■Degree of protection against
direct electrical contact: IP2X
with fingerproof shroud
Light Units
■Transformers: will withstand short
circuit for 1 hour per IEC 60997-5-1
■Bulbs — average life
❑Transformer type: 20,000 hrs.
❑Resistor/direct voltage type:
2500 hrs. minimum @ rated V
❑LED: 60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
Electrical Ratings
■Insulation: Ui = 660V AC or DC
■Thermal: lth = 10A
Short Circuit Coordination to
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
■Rated conditional short circuit cur-
rent: 1 kA
■Fuse type: GE Power Controls TIA
10, Red Spot Type gG, 10A,
660V AC, 460V DC, BS88-2,
IEC 60269-2-1
■UL rating: A600, P600
❑AC load life duty cycle
1200 operations/hour
– 10A: 110V pf 0.4 – 1 x 106
operations
– 5A: 250V pf 0.4 – 1 x 106
operations
– 2A: 660V pf 0.4 – 1 x 106
operations
■Switching capacity
❑AC15 rated make/break
(11 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
– 6A: 120V pf 0.3
– 4A: 240V pf 0.3
– 2A: 660V pf 0.3
❑DC13 rated make/break
(1.1 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
– 1.0A: 125V L/R ≥ 0.95 at 300 mS
– .55A: 250V L/R ≥ 0.95 at 300 mS
– .1A: 660V L/R ≥ 0.95 at 300 mS
– 10A: 110V pure resistive
■Maximum ratings for logic level
and hostile atmosphere application
❑Maximum amperes: 0.5A
❑Maximum volts: 120V AC/DC
Table 47-171. Contact Block
Fuse
Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC
Description Volts AC 50 or 60 Hz Volts DC
120 240 480 600 24/28 125 250
Make and Emerg. Interrupting Capacity (Amp)
Normal Load Break (Amp)
Thermal Current (Amp)
Voltamperes:
Make and Emerg. Interrupting Capacity
Normal Load Break
60
6
10
7200
720
30
3
10
7200
720
15
1.5
10
7200
720
12
1.2
10
7200
720
5.7
5.7
5.0
138
138
1.1
1.1
5.0
138
138
0.55
0.55
5.0
138
138
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-117
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Assembled Stations Point-of-Purchase Packaging
Point-of-Purchase Packaged
Pilot Devices
Table 47-172. 10250T Point-of-Purchase Packaged Pilot Devices
Product Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Emergency Stop Operators
Red Non-illuminated
Push-Pull
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved
legend plates: EMERG. STOP and STOP.
10250T5B62-1-POP
Red Mushroom
Pushbutton
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved
legend plates: EMERG. STOP and STOP.
10250T32R-POP
Red Jumbo
Mushroom Pushbutton
Engraved EMERG. STOP with 1NO-1NC contact block. 10250T33-POP
Momentary Pushbuttons
Black Flush
Pushbutton
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two
square engraved legend plates: START and JOG.
10250T30B-POP
Red Extended
Pushbutton
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes one square engraved
legend plate: STOP.
10250T31R-POP
Indicating Lights
Red Indicating LIght Full voltage 24V AC/DC with two extra lenses: Green and Amber.
Also includes two square engraved legend plates: RUN and JOG.
10250T206NC1N-POP
Red Indicating Light Resistor 120V AC/DC with two extra lenses: Green and Amber.
Also includes one square engraved legend plate: RUN and JOG.
10250T34R-POP
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Red Illuminating
Pushbutton
Full voltage 24V AC/DC with 1NO-1NC contact block and two extra lenses:
Green and Amber. Also includes one square engraved legend plate: POWER ON.
10250T476C21-1-POP
Red Illuminating
Pushbutton
Resistor 120V AC/DC with 1NO-1NC contact block and two extra lenses:
Green and Amber. Also includes one square engraved legend plate: POWER ON.
10250T411C21-1-POP
Selector Switches
Black Knob Two-Position
Selector Switch
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes three square engraved
legend plates: OFF/ON, HAND/AUTO and RUN/JOG.
10250T20KB-POP
Black Knob Three-
Position Selector Switch
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes 1 square engraved
legend plate: HAND/OFF/AUTO.
10250T22KB-POP
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-118
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Momentary Pushbutton Units
Product Selection
Non-illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units
■Flush, Extended, Mushroom Head or Jumbo Mushroom Head Operators
Table 47-173. Pushbutton Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
Contact
Type
Button Color Flush Button Extended Button Mushroom Button Jumbo Mushroom
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1NO Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Red — Engraved
EMERG. STOP
10250T23B
10250T23R
10250T23G
10250T23Y
—
10250T25B
10250T112-53
10250T25G
10250T25Y
—
10250T26B
10250T122-53
10250T26G
10250T26Y
—
10250T27B
10250T172-53
10250T27G
10250T27Y
10250T17213-53
1NC Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Red — Engraved
EMERG. STOP
10250T101-51
10250T102-51
10250T103-51
10250T104-51
—
10250T111-51
10250T25R
10250T113-51
10250T120-51
—
10250T121-51
10250T26R
10250T123-51
10250T124-51
—
10250T171-51
10250T27R
10250T173-51
10250T174-51
10250T29
1NO-1NC Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Red — Engraved
EMERG. STOP
10250T30B
10250T30R
10250T30G
10250T30Y
—
10250T31B
10250T31R
10250T31G
10250T31Y
—
10250T32B
10250T32R
10250T32G
10250T32Y
—
10250T33B
10250T33R
10250T33G
10250T33Y
10250T33
2NO Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Red — Engraved
EMERG. STOP
10250T101-2
10250T102-2
10250T103-2
10250T104-2
—
10250T111-2
10250T112-2
10250T113-2
10250T120-2
—
10250T121-2
10250T122-2
10250T123-2
10250T124-2
—
10250T171-2
10250T172-2
10250T173-2
10250T174-2
10250T17213-2
2NC Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Red — Engraved
EMERG. STOP
10250T101-3
10250T102-3
10250T103-3
10250T104-3
—
10250T111-3
10250T112-3
10250T113-3
10250T120-3
—
10250T121-3
10250T122-3
10250T123-3
10250T124-3
—
10250T171-3
10250T172-3
10250T173-3
10250T174-3
10250T17213-3
Flush Button — Black
Cat. No. 10250T23B
Extended Button — Red
Cat. No.10250T31R
Mushroom Button — Red
Cat. No.10250T32R
Jumbo Mushroom — Red
Cat. No.10250T17213-3
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-119
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
January 2010
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Momentary Pushbutton Components
Pushbuttons
Table 47-174. Momentary Pushbutton Operators, Non-illuminated —
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
To order operator with factory assembled Extended Retaining Nut, 10250TA12, for thick panel
applications, add Suffix Letter E to listed Catalog Number. Example: 10250T101E
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
Operating Force — Standard = 2.4 lb; Low Force = 1.6 lb.
Color Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Flush Button
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Gray
White
Blue
Orange
10250T101
10250T102
10250T103
10250T104
10250T105
10250T106
10250T108
10250T109
Extended Button
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Orange
10250T111
10250T112
10250T113
10250T120
10250T116
10250T118
10250T119
Half Shrouded Button
Vertical Horizontal
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Gray
White
Blue
Orange
10250T501
10250T502
10250T503
10250T504
10250T505
10250T506
10250T508
10250T509
10250T511
10250T512
10250T513
10250T514
10250T515
10250T516
10250T518
10250T519
Mushroom Button
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
10250T121
10250T122
10250T123
10250T124
10250T129
Jumbo Mushroom Button
Black
Red
Red (EMERG. STOP)
Green
Yellow
10250T171
10250T172
10250T17213
10250T173
10250T174
Low Operating Force — Jumbo Mushroom
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
10250ED1164-2
10250ED1164-3
10250ED1164-4
10250ED1164-5
10250ED1164
Note: To order complete assembled unit
using one composite Catalog Number, add
Contact Block and Legend Plate Suffix to the
end of Operator Catalog Number.
Example: 10250T101-1TS33
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
Operator
10250T101
Contact Block
10250T1
Legend Plate
10250TS33
January 2010
47-120
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Interlocked and Padlockable Components
Pushbuttons (Continued)
Table 47-175. Mechanically Interlocked Pushbutton Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
NC contacts must be mounted behind lock-down mushroom head operator to ensure lockout.
Lockout Pushbutton Operators with Padlock Attachments
The following pushbutton and mush-
room operators include an integral
padlock attachment for applications
requiring lockout/tagout of specific
machine functions. They are available
in styles which allow locking
of a button in the down position
(stopped position) or locking a button
in the up position (to prevent starting).
Select the “Hand” latch type which
functions as a momentary pushbutton
until the operator presses the button
and moves the padlock attachment
into position for locking, or choose the
“Spring Loaded” latch type where the
padlock attachment springs into place
when the button is pressed. Units
accept a customer supplied 1/4"
padlock.
Table 47-176. Padlockable in the Down Position — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operators can be latched down without a padlock. Padlock not included.
Jumbo mushroom heads are not recommended for use in applications where exposure to ultraviolet light exists.
Table 47-177. Padlockable in the Up Position — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operators can be latched down without a padlock. Padlock not included.
Jumbo mushroom heads are not recommended for use in applications where exposure to ultraviolet light exists.
Note: Hand Attachment must be manually
moved into place for locking. Spring
Loaded: when operator is pressed — attach-
ment springs into place. Must be moved
manually to release button.
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Minimum hole centers 1.62", maximum 250".
Mounts in extra deep enclosures only.
Black flush and green flush
Black flush and long red
Black flush and red mushroom head
Black flush and lock-down red mushroom head
10250TA66
10250TA67
10250TA68
10250TA69
Black flush and red jumbo mushroom head
Green flush and long red
Black long and long red
Green flush and red mushroom head
Green flush and black flush
10250TA76
10250TA72
10250TA73
10250TA77
10250TA75
0.89
(22.6)
Adjustable
0.88 (22.4)
for Each
Additional
Contact Block 1.07
(27.2)
1.62 (41.1)
Min.
2.5 (63.5)
Max.
Operator
Type
Color Latch Type Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Flush Head Red Hand 10250TA16
Mushroom
Head
Red
Red
Hand
Spring Loaded
10250TA42
10250TA45
Jumbo
Head
Red
Red
Red (EMERG. STOP)
Hand
Spring Loaded
Spring Loaded
10250TA52
10250TA55
10250ED952
Operator Type Color Latch Type Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Mushroom
Head
Black
Green
Hand
Hand
10250TA41
10250TA43
Jumbo
Mushroom
Head
Black
Green
Yellow
Hand
Hand
Hand
10250TA51
10250TA53
10250TA54
2.03
(51.6)
2.0
(50.8)
1.09
(27.7)
1.13
(28.7)
1.78
(45.2)
1.5
(38.1)
1.63
(41.4)
2.5 (63.5)
2.0 (50.8)
1.75
(44.5)
2.5 (63.5)
2.31
(58.7)
2.38
(60.5)
1.75
(44.5)
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-121
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Special Pushbutton Components
Pushbuttons (Continued)
Key Pushbutton Operator
These devices incorporate an integral
locking mechanism which enables
locking units in various positions
(Locked Down), locking units to pre-
vent operation (Locked Up) or setting
unit to lock when the button is pressed
(Push to Lock), requiring the key to be
inserted to return to normal operation.
With the key in the center position,
these operators function as a normal
momentary pushbutton (Free).
Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks
for Key Operators Below
Listed operators have identical locks
and keys (Key Code H661) Catalog
Number 10250ED824. For dissimilar
lock and key combinations, see listing
on Page 47-136.
Table 47-178. Replacement Keys
Table 47-179. Key Pushbutton Operator — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Horizontal mounting available on request.
Latch-In, Twist-to-Release Operator
Table 47-180. Operator Only with Button — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Replacement Keys
(Code H661)
10250ED824
Key Position and
Pushbutton Operations
Key
Removal
Positions
Vertical
Mounting
Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
3-Position
Lock Up
Lock Up
Lock Up
Free
Free
Free
Lock Down
Lock Down
Lock Down
All
L and R
C and R
10250T430
10250T431
10250T432
2-Position
Lock Up
Lock Up
—
—
—
—
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
—
—
Lock Down
Lock Down
Push to Lock
Push to Lock
L and C
L
C and R
R
C and R
R
10250T433
10250T434
10250T435
10250T436
10250T437
10250T438
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Latch-In, Twist-to-Release Operator with Red
Mushroom Head Button
10250ED1043-4
L
C
R
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
1.5
(38.1)
Key Operated
Pushbutton
1.5
(38.1)
0.86
(21.8)
0.24 (6) 1.55 (39.3)
Spring Return
2.37 (60.3)
Auto-Latch
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-122
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Pushbutton Units
Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units
■LED or Incandescent
■Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer
Type
■Plastic Lenses
Table 47-181. Illuminated Pushbutton Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
For flashing module Catalog Number 10250TFL1, add Suffix Code FM to listed Catalog Number. Example: 10250T75RFM.
24V Full Voltage
Illuminated Pushbutton — Red
Catalog Number 10250T476C21-53
Lamp Type Voltage Color Illuminated Pushbutton LED/Lamp
Number
1NO 1NO-1NC 1NC
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
LED Full
Voltage
24V
AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
White
10250T397LRD24-53
10250T397LGD24-53
10250T397LAD24-53
10250T397LYD24-53
10250T397LLD24-53
10250T397LWD24-53
10250T397LRD24-1
10250T397LGD24-1
10250T397LAD24-1
10250T397LYD24-1
10250T397LLD24-1
10250T397LWD24-1
10250T397LRD24-51
10250T397LGD24-51
10250T397LAD24-51
10250T397LYD24-51
10250T397LLD24-51
10250T397LWD24-51
Bayonet
Base
120V
AC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
White
10250T397LRD2A-53
10250T397LGD2A-53
10250T397LAD2A-53
10250T397LYD2A-53
10250T397LLD2A-53
10250T397LWD2A-53
10250T397LRD2A-1
10250T397LGD2A-1
10250T397LAD2A-1
10250T397LYD2A-2
10250T397LLD2A-1
10250T397LWD2A-1
10250T397LRD2A-51
10250T397LGD2A-51
10250T397LAD2A-51
10250T397LYD2A-51
10250T397LLD2A-51
10250T397LWD2A-51
Trans-
former
120V
AC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
White
10250T411LRD06-53
10250T411LGD06-53
10250T411LAD06-53
10250T411LYD06-53
10250T411LLD06-53
10250T411LWD06-53
10250T411LRD06-1
10250T411LGD06-1
10250T411LAD06-1
10250T411LYD06-1
10250T411LLD06-1
10250T411LWD06-1
10250T411LRD06-51
10250T411LGD06-51
10250T411LAD06-51
10250T411LYD06-51
10250T411LLD06-51
10250T411LWD06-51
Incandescent Full
Voltage
24V
AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250T476C21-53
10250T476C22-53
10250T476C43-53
10250T476C23-53
10250T476C24-53
10250T476C25-53
10250T476C26-53
10250T476C21-1
10250T476C22-1
10250T476C43-1
10250T476C23-1
10250T476C24-1
10250T476C25-1
10250T476C26-1
10250T476C21-51
10250T476C22-51
10250T476C43-51
10250T476C23-51
10250T476C24-51
10250T476C25-51
10250T476C26-51
#757
Resistor 120V
AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250T471C21-53
10250T471C22-53
10250T471C43-53
10250T471C23-53
10250T471C24-53
10250T471C25-53
10250T471C26-53
10250T471C21-1
10250T471C22-1
10250T471C43-1
10250T471C23-1
10250T471C24-1
10250T471C25-1
10250T471C26-1
10250T471C21-51
10250T471C22-51
10250T471C43-51
10250T471C23-51
10250T471C24-51
10250T471C25-51
10250T471C26-51
120MB
Trans-
former
120
AC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250T75R
10250T75G
10250T75A
10250T75Y
10250T75B
10250T75C
10250T75W
10250T76R
10250T76G
10250T76A
10250T76Y
10250T76B
10250T76C
10250T76W
10250T77R
10250T77G
10250T77A
10250T77Y
10250T77B
10250T77C
10250T77W
#755
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-123
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Indicating Light Units
Indicating Light Units
■LED or Incandescent
■Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer
Type
■Standard and PresTest Types
■Plastic Lenses
PresTest — This device incorporates a
press-to-test feature whereby depress-
ing the lens disconnects the light from
the source being monitored and con-
nects the lamp to a continuously ener-
gized circuit for immediate detection
of faulty lamps.
Table 47-182. Indicating Light Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Standard indicating lights are rated UL (NEMA) 3S as well.
For flashing lamp add letter F to listed Catalog Number. Example: 10250T34RF.
Lamp Type Voltage Color Indicating Light PresTest LED/Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
LED Full Voltage 24V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
White
10250T197LRP24
10250T197LGP24
10250T197LAP24
10250T197LYP24
10250T197LLP24
10250T197LWP24
10250T297LRP24
10250T297LGP24
10250T297LAP24
10250T297LYP24
10250T297LLP24
10250T297LWP24
Bayonet
Base
120V AC Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
White
10250T197LRP2A
10250T197LGP2A
10250T197LAP2A
10250T197LYP2A
10250T197LLP2A
10250T197LWP2A
10250T297LRP2A
10250T297LGP2A
10250T297LAP2A
10250T297LYP2A
10250T297LLP2A
10250T297LWP2A
Transformer 120V AC Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
White
10250T181LRP06
10250T181LGP06
10250T181LAP06
10250T181LYP06
10250T181LLP06
10250T181LWP06
10250T221LRP06
10250T221LGP06
10250T221LAP06
10250T221LYP06
10250T221LLP06
10250T221LWP06
Incandescent Full Voltage 24V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250T206NC1N
10250T206NC2N
10250T206NC19N
10250T206NC3N
10250T206NC4N
10250T206NC5N
10250T206NC6N
10250T235NC21
10250T235NC22
10250T235NC43
10250T235NC23
10250T235NC24
10250T235NC25
10250T235NC26
#757
Resistor 120V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250T201NC1N
10250T201NC2N
10250T201NC19N
10250T201NC3N
10250T201NC4N
10250T201NC5N
10250T201NC6N
10250T231NC21
10250T231NC22
10250T231NC43
10250T231NC23
10250T231NC24
10250T231NC25
10250T231NC26
120MB
Transformer 120V AC Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250T34R
10250T34G
10250T34A
10250T34Y
10250T34B
10250T34C
10250T34W
10250T74NR
10250T74NG
10250T74NA
10250T74NY
10250T74NB
10250T74NC
10250T74NW
#755
24V Full Voltage
Indicating Light — Red
Catalog Number 10250T206NC1N
120V AC Transformer
PresTest — Green
Catalog Number 10250T74NG
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-124
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Illuminated Components
Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
■LED or Incandescent
■Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer Type
Table 47-183. Operators without Lens
These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color. See Page 47-157 for LED Selection and Page 47-165 for Catalog
Numbering System.
Resistor units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.
For flashing lamp, add letter F to listed Catalog Number. Example: 10250T181NF.
Resistant to shock and vibration. For best illumination use amber, yellow or clear lens.
Table 47-184. Indicating and Master Test Lenses
Table 47-185. Illuminated Pushbutton Lenses
Table 47-186. PresTest Lenses
Light Unit Type Type Voltage Illuminated
Pushbutton
Indicating Light PresTest Master Test LED/Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Incandescent Full Voltage
AC/DC
6
12
24
32
48
10250T473
10250T474
10250T476
10250T477
10250T478
10250T203N
10250T204N
10250T206N
10250T207N
10250T208N
10250T232N
10250T233N
10250T235N
10250T238N
10250T239N
—
—
—
—
—
#755
#756
#757
#1828
#1835
Resistor
AC/DC
120
240
10250T471
10250T472
10250T201N
10250T202N
10250T231N
10250T240N
—
—
120MB
120MB
Transformer
AC Only
24
120
240
277
380
480
600
10250T416
10250T411
10250T422
10250T419
10250T413
10250T414
10250T415
—
10250T181N
10250T182N
10250T198N
10250T183N
10250T184N
10250T185N
—
10250T221N
10250T222N
—
10250T223N
10250T224N
10250T225N
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
#755
Neon
AC/DC
120
240
—
—
10250T226N
10250T227N
—
—
—
—
NE51H-R22
NE51H-R68
Solid-State
50/60 Hz Only
120 — — — 10250T189N 120MB
LED
(LEDs not
included)
Full Voltage — 10250T397L 10250T197L 10250T297L — Bayonet
Base
Transformer
AC Only
24
120
240
277
380
480
600
10250T416L
10250T411L
10250T412L
10250T419L
10250T413L
10250T414L
10250T415L
—
10250T181L
10250T182L
10250T198L
10250T183L
10250T184L
10250T185L
—
10250T221L
10250T222L
—
10250T223L
10250T224L
10250T225L
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Color Plastic Glass
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250TC1N
10250TC2N
10250TC19N
10250TC3N
10250TC4N
10250TC5N
10250TC6N
10250TC7N
10250TC8N
10250TC9N
—
10250TC10N
10250TC11N
10250TC12N
Color Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Red
Green
Yellow
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
10250TC21
10250TC22
10250TC23
10250TC43
10250TC24
10250TC25
10250TC26
Glass
Plastic
Color Plastic Glass
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250TC21
10250TC22
10250TC43
10250TC23
10250TC24
10250TC25
10250TC26
10250TC13N
10250TC14N
10250TC15N
—
10250TC16N
10250TC17N
10250TC18N
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
Glass
Plastic
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-125
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Push-Pull Units
Push-Pull Units
■Two- and Three-Position
■Non-illuminated
Table 47-187. 2-Position Push-Pull Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Table 47-188. 3-Position Pull-Pull Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the table below.
Example: 10250T5B64-1X.
Table 47-189. Button and Color Selection Table
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
Operator Position Button Type/Color Push-Pull Contact
Type
Mounting Location
Pull Push Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
AB
2-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
O
X
X
O
40 mm/Red 10250T5B62-1X
1NO
1NC
O
X
X
O
40 mm Engraved
EMERG. STOP/Red
10250T5B63-1X
1NO
1NC
O
X
X
O
65 mm Alum. Engraved
EMERG. STOP/Red
10250T5J63-1X
1NO
1NC
O
X
X
O
65 mm Alum. Engraved
EMERG. STOP/Red
Special Security Jumbo
Mushroom Head
10250ED1080-2
1NO
1NC
Operator Position Button Type/Color Push-Pull Contact
Type
Mounting Location
Pull Intermediate Push Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
AB
3-Position Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
X
X
O
X
O
O
40 mm/ Black 10250T9B60-3X
1NC
1NC
40 mm/Red 10250T9B62-3X
40 mm Engraved
EMERG. STOP/Red
10250T9B63-3X
3-Position Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
X
X
O
X
O
O
40 mm/Black 10250T4B60-3X 1NC
1NC
40 mm/Red 10250T4B62-3X
O
X
O
O
X
O
40 mm/Black 10250T10B60-1X 1NO
1NC
40 mm/Red 10250T10B62-1X
Standard — 40 mm Color Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Jumbo Mushroom Head
(Anodized) Aluminum —
65 mm
Color Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Red
Red (EMERG. STOP)
Green
Black
Blue
B62
B63
B61
B60
B64
10250TB62
10250TB63
10250TB61
10250TB60
10250TB64
Red
Red (EMERG. STOP)
Green
Black
Yellow
J62
J63
J61
J60
J64
10250TJ62
10250TJ63
10250TJ61
10250TJ60
10250TJ64
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-126
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
■LED or Incandescent
■Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer
Type
■Two-Position Maintained
Table 47-190. 2-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from table below. Example: 10250T579C63-1X.
For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-131.
Table 47-191. Lens and Color Selection Table
Clear anodized aluminum and colored lens.
2-Position Push-Pull Operator
with Red Button (Standard)
and Full Voltage Light Unit
Operator Position Lamp Type Voltage Red Standard Push-Pull Contact
Type
Mounting Location LED/Lamp
Number
Maintained —
Pull
Maintained —
Push
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
AB
O
X
X
O
LED Full Voltage 24V AC/DC 10250T597LRD24-1X 1NO
1NC
Bayonet
Base
120V AC/DC 10250T597LRD2A-1X
Transformer 24V AC 10250T589LRD06-1X
120V AC 10250T563LRD06-1X
O
X
X
O
Incandescent Full Voltage 24V AC/DC 10250T579C47-1X 1NO
1NC
#757
Resistor 120V AC/DC 10250T580C47-1X 120MB
Transformer 24V AC 10250T589C47-1X #755
120V AC 10250T563C47-1X
Type Lens Color Incand.
Suffix
Code
LED
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Standard – 40 mm Red
Red (EMERGENCY STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
White
Clear
C47
C53
C48
C49
C50
C51
C52
RD
ED
GD
LD
AD
WD
CD
10250TC47
10250TC53
10250TC48
10250TC49
10250TC50
10250TC51
10250TC52
Side-Lighted
Aluminum – 40 mm
Red
Red (EMERGENCY STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
Yellow
White
Clear
C57
C63
C58
C59
C64
C60
C61
C62
RS
ES
GS
LS
AS
YS
WS
CS
10250TC57
10250TC63
10250TC58
10250TC59
10250TC64
10250TC60
10250TC61
10250TC62
Aluminum Transparent
Center – 40 mm
Red
Green
Amber
C65
C66
C67
RH
GH
AH
10250TC65
10250TC66
10250TC67
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Additional Light Units . . . . Page 47-131
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-127
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
(Continued)
■LED or Incandescent
■Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer
Type
■Three-Position Momentary
Table 47-192. 3-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from table on the bottom of Page 47-126.
Example: 10250T1079C53-1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-131.
3-Position Push-Pull Operator
with Red Button (Standard)
and Transformer Light Unit
Operator Position Lamp Type Voltage Red Standard Push-Pull Contact
Type
Mounting
Location
LED/
Lamp
Number
Momentary —
Pull
Maintained —
Intermediate
Momentary —
Push
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
AB
O
X
O
O
X
O
LED Full
Voltage
24V AC/DC 10250T1097LRD24-1X
1NO
1NC
Bayonet
Base
120V AC
10250T1097LRD2A-1X
Trans-
former
24V AC 10250T1089LRD06-1X
120V AC 10250T1063LRD06-1X
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full
Voltage
24V AC/DC 10250T497LRD24-3X
1NC
1NC
Bayonet
Base
120V AC 10250T497LRD2A-3X
Trans-
former
24V AC 10250T489LRD06-3X
120V AC 10250T463LRD06-3X
O
X
O
O
X
O
Incan-
descent
Full
Voltage
24V AC/DC 10250T1079C47-1X
1NO
1NC
#757
Resistor 120V AC 10250T1080C47-1X 120MB
Trans-
former
24V AC 10250T1089C47-1X #755
120V AC 10250T1063C47-1X
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full
Voltage
24V AC/DC 10250T479C47-3X
1NC
1NC
#757
Resistor 120V AC 10250T480C47-3X 120MB
Trans-
former
24V AC 10250T489C47-3X #755
120V AC 10250T463C47-3X
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Additional Light Units . . . . Page 47-131
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-128
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units & Potentiometers
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
(Continued)
■LED or Incandescent
■Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer
Type
■Three-Position — Maintained Push,
Momentary Pull
Table 47-193. 3-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from table on the bottom of Page 47-126.
Example: 10250T979C53-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-131.
Potentiometers
Table 47-194. Potentiometer with Knob and Standard Dial Plate — Linear Type ±10% — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 12, 13
Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add suffix 36 to Catalog Number.
Example: 10250T33136. To order separately, see footnote below.
Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 inch high. For custom stamped legend plates,
order legend plate as separate item 10250TR30 and specify stamping.
For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing on Page 47-161.
3-Position Push-Pull Operator
with Red Button (Standard)
and Full Voltage Light Unit
Operator Position Lamp Type Voltage Red Standard Push-Pull Contact
Type
Mounting Location LED/
Lamp
Number
Momentary —
Pull
Maintained —
Intermediate
Maintained —
Push
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
AB
X
X
O
X
O
O
LED Full
Voltage
24V AC/DC 10250T997LRD24-3X
1NC
1NC
Bayonet
Base
120V AC 10250T997LRD2A-3X
Trans-
former
24V AC 10250T989LRD06-3X
120V AC 10250T963LRD06-3X
X
X
O
X
O
O
Incan-
descent
Full
Voltage
24V AC/DC 10250T979C47-3X
1NC
1NC
#757
Resistor 120V AC 10250T980C47-3X 120MB
Trans-
former
24V AC 10250T989C47-3X #755
120V AC 10250T963C47-3X
Vertical or Horizontal
One-Hole Mounting
Potentiometer
Ohms
2 Watt (60V Max.) Single
Potentiometer with Standard
Aluminum Dial Plate
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1000
2500
5000
10000
25000
50000
10250T331
10250T332
10250T338
10250T333
10250T334
10250T335
Operator Only 10250T330
Alternative — Black Plastic Large
Legend with Standard Markings
E34LP99
With Standard
Aluminum Dial Plate
Potentiometer
1.88
(47.8)
1.31
(33.3)
1.09
(27.7) 1.0
(25.4)
0.75
(19.1)
0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)
Std. Dial Plate
Large Dial Plate
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Additional Light Units . . . . Page 47-131
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-129
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Push-Pull Components
Push-Pull Operators
An illuminated Push-Pull pushbutton
unit, arranged for one-hole mounting,
can replace two pushbuttons and a
pilot light or the non-illuminated form
can replace two pushbuttons. These
units are available in three basic types:
■Maintained — (Two-Position).
Maintains in the pulled or pushed
position until manually actuated to
the opposite mode.
■Momentary — (Three-Position).
Spring returns to an intermediate
position when pulled or pushed and
released.
■Momentary Pull, Maintained
Push — (Three-Position). Spring
returns to intermediate position
when pulled. Maintains in pushed
position until manually returned to
intermediate (ready to reset) posi-
tion. Maintained stop holds circuit
open and will prevent other series
connected operators from starting
the system.
The Operators, Buttons, Contact
Blocks, etc., are offered as building
block components that can be inter-
mixed to satisfy many requirements.
This minimizes the need for a varied
and costly inventory.
Table 47-195. Typical Applications
Note: A and B circuits shown in the application illustrations are defined in the “Application Guide” on the following page.
2-Position Maintained Push-Pull
without Button on Lens
Catalog Number 10250T5
Control Line – Diagram Operator Circuits Operator Mode
3-Wire
3-Position
Momentary
Momentary
Push & Pull
10250T4
2NC
Contact Block
10250T3
START (Mom.) Normal Pos. (Maint.) STOP (Mom.)
Momentary
Push & Pull
10250T10
1NO-1NC
Contact Block
10250T1
2-Wire
2-Position
Maintained
Maintained
Push & Pull
10250T5
1NC
Contact Block
10250T51
START (Maint.) No
Intermediate
Position
STOP (Maint.)
3-Wire
Momentary
Pull
Maintained
Push
Maintained
Push &
Momentary
Pull
10250T9
2NC
Contact Block
10250T3
START (Mom.) Normal Pos. (Maint.) STOP (Maint.)
M
L2L1
OL
M
BCircuit
ACircuit Push-Pull
Operator
M
L2L1
OL
B Circuit
or
A
Push-Pull
Operator
M
L2L1
OL
M
BCircuit
ACircuit Push-Pull
Operator
January 2010
47-130
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Push-Pull Components
Push-Pull Operators (Continued)
Application Guide
To assist in the selection of contact
blocks, the sketch to the right shows
pictorially by symbols A and B locations
of contact circuits after assembly of
contact blocks and adapter to the oper-
ator. The chart below shows the effect
of the push and pull operations on
either NO or NC contacts. (X = contact
closed, O = contact open)
Figure 47-92. Contact Circuit Locations
Table 47-196. Push-Pull Operator Components
Special function contact blocks shown on Page 47-148 CANNOT be used with 3-position push-pull operators 10250T4, 10250T9 or 10250T10.
Locating Nib
A
B
Type of Operator Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Contact Block —
Max. of 2 Blocks,
4 Circuits
Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
Out — Pull Intermediate In — Push
Contact Block Mounting Location
ABA B AB
2-Position Operator without Lens
Maintained Push-Pull 10250T5 1NO
1NC
O
X
O
X
No Intermediate
Position
X
O
X
O
2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
Maintained Push-Pull with
Anti-Theft Jumbo Mushroom
10250ED1080 1NO
1NC
O
X
O
X
No Intermediate
Position
X
O
X
O
2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
3-Position Operator without Lens
Momentary Push-Pull
Maintained Push-Momentary Pull
10250T4
10250T9
1NO
1NC
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
Momentary Push-Pull 10250T10 1NO
1NC
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
Button or Lens . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-131
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-131
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Push-Pull Components
Push-Pull Operators (Continued)
Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons
Table 47-197. Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens
color, see Page 47-157.
Ordering example with one composite number:
Table 47-198. Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Suffix Codes should only be used for assembling composite Catalog
Numbers. To order lens above, order by Catalog Number.
Table 47-199. Buttons for Non-illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light
applications.
Legend Plates
For a complete listing of available Legend Plates see Pages
47-151 – 47-152.
Figure 47-93. Legend Plates
Light Unit
Type
Type Voltage Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
LED/Lamp
Number
LED
(LEDs not
included)
Full Voltage — 10250T97L Bayonet
Base
Transformer
AC Only
50/60 Hz
24
120
208
240
277
380
480
600
10250T89L
10250T63L
10250T64L
10250T65L
10250T82L
10250T66L
10250T67L
10250T68L
Incandescent Full Voltage
AC or DC
6
12
24/28
32
10250T69
10250T70
10250T79
10250T83
Resistor
AC or DC
120
240
10250T80
10250T81
120MB
Transformer
AC Only
50/60 Hz
24
120
208
240
277
380
480
600
10250T89
10250T63
10250T64
10250T65
10250T82
10250T66
10250T67
10250T68
#755
Non-
illuminated 10250T5 + 10250TB62 + 10250T1 =
10250T5B62-1X
Incandescent 10250T5 + 10250T79 + 10250TC47 + 10250T1 =
10250T579C47-1X
LED 10250T5 + 10250T97L + 10250TC47 +Voltage Code + 10250T1 =
10250T597LRD24-1X 06 — 6V AC/DC
12 — 12V AC/DC
24 — 24V AC/DC
48 — 48V AC/DC
60 — 60V AC/DC
2A — 120V AC
2D — 120V DC
Color Incand.
Suffix
Code
LED
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Standard
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
White
Clear
C47
C53
C48
C49
C50
C51
C52
RD
ED
GD
LD
AD
WD
—
10250TC47
10250TC53
10250TC48
10250TC49
10250TC50
10250TC51
10250TC52
Side-Lighted Anodized Aluminum Ring
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
Yellow
White
Clear
C57
C63
C58
C59
C64
C60
C61
C62
RS
ES
GS
LS
AS
YS
WS
—
10250TC57
10250TC63
10250TC58
10250TC59
10250TC64
10250TC60
10250TC61
10250TC62
Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
C65
C66
C67
C69
C68
RH
GH
AH
—
—
10250TC65
10250TC66
10250TC67
10250TC69
10250TC68
Color Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Standard
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Black
Blue
B62
B63
B61
B60
B64
10250TB62
10250TB63
10250TB61
10250TB60
10250TB64
Jumbo Mushroom Head (Anodized) Aluminum
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Black
Yellow
J62
J63
J61
J60
J64
10250TJ62
10250TJ63
10250TJ61
10250TJ60
10250TJ64
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
Standard
Jumbo
P
S
R
T
January 2010
47-132
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Selector Switch Units
Selector Switch Units
■Two-, Three- and Four-Position
Maintained
■Non-illuminated and Illuminated
Table 47-200. 2-Position Selector Switch — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table.
Example: 10250T20KG.
Table 47-201. 3-Position Selector Switch — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table.
Example: 10250T20KG.
Table 47-202. 4-Position Selector Switch — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table.
Example: 10250T20KG.
Table 47-203. Color Selection
3-Position
Maintained Switch
Catalog Number
10250T21KB
3-Position
Maintained Switch
Catalog Number
10250T22KB
Operator Position Operator
Action
Non-illuminated Illuminated — 120V Transformer Contact
Type
Mounting
Location
Black Knob Black Lever Price
U.S. $
Red Knob Red Lever Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
AB
X
O
O
X
10250T20KB 10250T20LB 10250ED1117-KR 10250ED1117-LR 1NC
1NO
Operator Position Operator
Action
Non-illuminated Illuminated — 120V Transformer Contact
Type
Mounting
Location
Black Knob Black Lever Price
U.S. $
Red Knob Red Lever Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
AB
X
O
O
O
O
X
10250T21KB 10250T21LB 10250ED1117-2KR 10250ED1117-2LR 1NO
1NO
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
10250T22KB 10250T22LB 10250ED1117-3KR 10250ED1117-3LR 1NO
2NC
(Series)
1NO
Operator Position Operator
Action
Non-illuminated Illuminated — 120V Transformer Contact
Type
Mounting
Location
Black Knob Black Lever Price
U.S. $
Red Knob Red Lever Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
AB
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
10250T46KB 10250T46LB 10250ED1117-4KR 10250ED1117-4LR 1NC
1NO
1NO
1NC
Illuminated Non-illuminated
Color Code
Letter
Color Code
Letter
Color Code
Letter
Color Code
Letter
Color Code
Letter
Color Code
Letter
Red
Green
R
G
White
Blue
W
B
Amber
Clear
A
C
Black
Red
B
R
Green
White
G
W
Blue
Orange
L
O
MM
MM
M
MM
MM
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Additional Circuit
Arrangements . . . . . . . . Pages 47-133 – 47-134
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-133
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Components — Selector Switch Selection
10250T Series
Selector Switch Selection
Cam and Contact Block Selection
Selector switches in their varied forms
(2-position, 3-position and 4-position)
are a big factor contributing to the
great flexibility of control that a well
rounded line of “pushbuttons” can
achieve. Because of their flexibility,
they tend to cause difficulty with prod-
uct selection and application. The
following systematic approach should
simplify that task.
Cam and contact block selection is
better understood if you:
■Work with each incoming and out-
going wire/circuit separately.
■Recognize the terms NO and NC
only identify the type of contact by
its mode before mounting to the
operator. The “X-O” table (Page 47-
134) shows how that contact will act
after assembly to the operator with
the selected cam shape. X = closed
circuit, O = open circuit.
■Up to six NO or NC contacts may be
mounted behind each plunger loca-
tion for a total of twelve contacts.
Single circuit contact blocks have
only one plunger with the other side
of the block “open.” Therefore, single
circuit contact blocks transmit
motion to blocks behind them only
for the position containing the circuit.
■Each cam has two separate lobes,
each of which operates one of the
two contact block plungers indepen-
dently of each other. Those are
identified as position A (locating nib
side) and position B (opposite of
locating nib). The position designa-
tions give direction in selecting and
mounting of the contact blocks (see
Figure 47-94).
Figure 47-94. Contact Circuit Locations
Systematic Approach
Application: HAND-OFF-AUTO Selector
Switch. In this circuit, one incoming
line is distributed to two other outgoing
circuits by the switch. The two circuits
can be looked at individually.
Step 1: Elementary Diagram.
Construct on paper, or in your mind, a
simple elementary diagram of the
switching scheme as follows:
Step 2: “X-O” Pattern.
From the elementary diagram, you can
construct an “X-O” diagram which
describes when the contacts are to be
closed (X) or open (O) in the various
positions of the switch. The “X-O” for
the HAND circuit looks like this:
In this circuit, you want a contact
closed on the left (HAND) but open in
the center and right.
For the AUTO circuit, the “X-O” diagram
would look like this:
Putting them together, the complete
“X-O” diagram is:
Once the “X-O” diagram has been
generated, the next step is to select the
cam and contact block, or blocks,
needed to perform the desired “X-O”
functions. The selection table on the
following page lists the various types
(shapes) of cams by number to choose
from and the type of contact and posi-
tion to achieve the function outlined in
your “X-O” diagram.
Step 3: Cam Selection.
The cam you select determines
the operation of all contact blocks
mounted to the operator. It is selected
on the basis that it provides the sim-
plest circuitry for the desired “X-O”
diagram. The selection tables of the
following page show all the “X-O”
combinations. For the purpose of this
example, the applicable portion of
those tables is shown in Table 47-204.
Table 47-204. Example Selection Table
Wired in series.
Now to make the cam selection, make
a simple worksheet such as:
It becomes immediately obvious that
cam 3 is the better choice for two rea-
sons, (1) the series combination can be
avoided making it simpler to wire, (2)
only two contacts are required, which
is less expensive than the three contacts
required by cam 2.
Step 4: Contact Block Selection.
Having selected the cam, contact block
selection is simply a matter of gather-
ing the A position and B position circuits
into pairs which make up the most con-
venient contact block arrangement. If
there is an imbalance in the number of
circuits under A or B, then single circuit
blocks must be selected for these leftover
circuits.
Back to the worksheet, having selected
cam 3 do this:
Step 5: Selector Switch Operator.
Lastly, you have to choose from the
many types of operators — knob and
lever in various colors or keyed. Also
what combinations of maintained and
spring return functions are required.
Selection of these operators can be
found on Page 47-135. For the above
example you may want a 3-position
maintained black knob, cam 3 —
Catalog Number 10250T1323.
The Complete Switch: 10250T1323 with
one 10250T2 or, for one composite
catalog number, 10250T21KB found
on Page 47-132.
Locating Nib
A
B
OFF
HAND Outgoing
Circuit
AUTO
Outgoing
Circuit
Incoming
Line
HAND OFF AUTO
XOO
HAND OFF AUTO
OOX
X O O
O O X
No. “X-O”
Pattern
Cam Code #2 Cam Code #3
Top
A
Bottom
B
Top
A
Bottom
B
1XOO
4 OOX
NO NC NO
NO NO
Cam 2 Cam 3
X O O
O O X
(A)NO – (B)NC
(B)NO
(A)NO
(B)NO
X O X
O O X
ANO
BNO 10250T2
January 2010
47-134
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Components — Selector Switch Selection
Selector Switch Selection
(Continued)
Table 47-205. 2-Position Selector Switch
Contact Block Selection
Diagrams
Circuits shown illustrate connections
to obtain a selector switch circuit com-
bination and are shown with their
appropriate line diagrams. Field wiring
of jumper connections required as
shown.
X = Closed Circuit
O = Open Circuit
Figure 47-95. Wiring of Jumper Connections
Note: 4-Position Selector Switches limited
to 4 contact blocks.
Contact Blocks
For selection and number of available
contact blocks per operator, see Page
47-148.
No. Desired Circuit
and
Operator
Position
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish
Circuit Function
Top
Plunger
A
Bottom
Plunger
B
1XO
2OX
NC NC
NO NO
Series Connection Parallel Connection
Table 47-206. 3-Position Switch — Cam and Contact Block Selection
Table 47-207. 4-Position Switch — Contact Block Selection
No. Desired Circuit
and
Operator
Position
Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function
(Jumpers must be installed where indicated)
Operator with Cam Code #2 Operator with Cam Code #3
Mounting Location Mounting Location
Top Plunger
A
Bottom Plunger
B
Top Plunger
A
Bottom Plunger
B
1 XOO
2 XXO
3 XOX
4 OOX
5 OXX
6 OXO
No. Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish
Circuit Function
Com-
bina-
tion
No.
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish
Circuit Function
Mounting
Location
Mounting
Location
Top
Plunger
A
Bottom
Plunger
B
Top
Plunger
A
Bottom
Plunger
B
1 XOOO
10 XOXO
2 OXOO
3 OOXO
11 XXXO
4 OOOX
5 XOOX
12 OXXX
6 OXXO
7 OOXX
13 XOXX
8 XXOO
9 OXOX 14 XXOX
NO NC NO
NC NC
NO NO NO
NO NO
NC NO NC
NC NC NC
NC
NC
NO
NO
NO
NC
NO NO
NC
NC NC
NO NC
NO
NO NO
NO NC
NO
NC NC
NC NO
NO
NC NC NO
NC
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-135
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Selector Switch Components
Selector Switch Operators
Selector Switch Operators with Caps
Table 47-208. Selector Switch Operators with Caps — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-133 – 47-134.
Field convertible to Horizontal Mounting or order operator only and separate operator cap.
Table 47-209. Key Operators with Cam — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-133 – 47-134.
Choose key removal position required for application from Table 47-210 on Page 47-136. Add key removal Code No. to listed Catalog Number.
Example: 10250T15112.
Positions Operator Action Black Knob Selector Switch — Vertical Mounting Black Lever Selector Switch — Vertical Mounting
Cam Code Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Cam Code Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
2-Position — 60° Throw 1 10250T1311 110250T3011
110250T1371 110250T3071
3-Position — 60° Throw 2
3
10250T1322
10250T1323
2
3
10250T3022
10250T3023
2
3
10250T1332
10250T1333
2
3
10250T3032
10250T3033
2
3
10250T1342
10250T1343
2
3
10250T3042
10250T3043
2
3
10250T1352
10250T1353
2
3
10250T3052
10250T3053
4-Position — 40° Throw 7 10250T1367 710250T3067
Positions Operator Action Cam Code Optional Key
Removal Positions
Vertical Mounting Horizontal Mounting Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2-Position — 60° Throw 1 1, 2, 3 10250T1511_ 10250T1611_
12 10250T1571_ 10250T1581_
3-Position — 60° Throw 2
3
1 – 7 10250T1522_
10250T1523_
10250T1622_
10250T1623_
2
3
1, 4, 5 10250T1532_
10250T1533_
10250T1632_
10250T1633_
2
3
410250T1542_
10250T1543_
10250T1642_
10250T1643_
2
3
2, 4, 6 10250T1652_
10250T1653_
10250T1662_
10250T1663_
4-Position — 40° Throw 7 7 10250T1677_ 10250T1687_
2-Position Maintained
Black Knob Selector
Switch — Cam 1
Cat. No. 10250T1311
3-Position Maintained Black
Lever Selector Switch —
Cam 3
Cat. No. 10250T3023
2-Position Maintained
Horizontal Mount, Key
Removal #1 Keyed
Selector Switch — Cam 1
Cat. No. 10250T16111
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-136
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Selector Switch Components
Selector Switch Operators (Continued)
Table 47-210. Key Removal Positions
Note: Key removal in “spring return from”
positions not recommended.
Figure 47-96. Key Removal Positions
Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for
Key Operators
Operators listed on Page 47-135 have
identical locks and keys (Key Code
H661) Catalog Number 10250ED824.
For dissimilar lock and key combina-
tions, see listing at right.
Table 47-211. Replacement Key
Selector Switch Operators with Dissimilar
Locks and Keys — UL (NEMA) 4, 4X and 13
The locks in all key operators listed on
Pages 47-121, 47-135 and 47-180) are
identical and use key code number
H661. Two keys are supplied with
every lock. For additional code number
H661 keys, order Catalog Number
10250ED824. For others, order
10250ED1130 and designate lock num-
ber. When dissimilar locks for each
operator or each group of operators
are required, select from the lock and
key combination listed below. When
Ordering Operator Only or a Complete
Control Unit with a substitute lock,
order from table below and add
“except Lock and Key Code No. …”
Table 47-212. “H” Series Locks without
Master Key — with Key Slot Cover
Table 47-213. “M” Series Locks with Master
Key — with Key Slot Cover
Table 47-214. Master Keys for Above Locks
Code
Suffix
Key
Removal
Positions
Code
Suffix
Key
Removal
Positions
1
2
3
4
Right Only
Left Only
Right & Left
Center Only
5
6
7
Right & Center
Left & Center
All Positions
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Replacement Keys
(Code H661)
10250ED824
L
C
R
Lock and Key Code Numbers Adder
U.S. $
H501
H620
H621
H634
H635
H639
H643
H654
H663
H675
H683
H688
Lock and Key Code Numbers Adder
U.S. $
MD1
MD2
MD3
MD4
MD5
MD7
MD9
MD10
MD11
MD13
MD14
MD15
MD16
MD19
MD20
ME2
ME3
ME5
ME6
ME7
ME8
ME11
ME16
ME17
ME18
ME19
MJ1
MJ3
MJ4
MJ5
MJ6
MJ10
MJ11
MJ13
MJ15
MJ16
MD17
Application Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
For Code:
MD1 – MD20
ME2 – ME18
MJ1 – MJ16
10250ED825-3
10250ED825-4
10250ED825-5
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-137
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
January 2010
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Selector Switch Components
Selector Switch Operators (Continued)
Selector Switch Operators without Caps
Note: Operators below can be ordered with
caps assembled to them by adding the
Code Number from Table 47-216 to the
end of Catalog Number below.
Example: 10250T4011KB
Table 47-215. Selector Switch Operators without Caps
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see
selection instructions and table on Pages 47-133 – 47-134.
Table 47-216. Operating Caps
Designed for added ingress protection. For use in maintained operators only.
2-Position
Selector Switch
Maintained,
Cam Code 1
Catalog Number
10250T4011
Positions Operator Action Cam Code Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
2-Position — 60° Throw 1 10250T4011
110250T4081
3-Position — 60° Throw 2
3
10250T4022
10250T4023
2
3
10250T4032
10250T4033
2
3
10250T4042
10250T4043
2
3
10250T4052
10250T4053
4-Position — 40° Throw 7 10250T4067
Color Knob Lever
Catalog and
Code Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog and
Code Number
Price
U.S. $
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Gray
Blue
Orange
10250TKB
10250TKR
10250TKG
10250TKY
10250TKW
10250TKA
10250TKL
10250TKO
10250TLB
10250TLR
10250TLG
10250TLY
10250TLW
10250TLA
10250TLL
10250TLO
Color Lever Coin Slot
Catalog and
Code Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog and
Code Number
Price
U.S. $
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Gray
Blue
Orange
10250TSB
10250TSR
10250TSG
10250TSY
10250TSW
10250TSA
10250TSL
10250TSO
10250TCB
10250TCR
10250TCG
10250TCY
10250TCW
10250TCA
10250TCL
10250TCO
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-138
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Selector Switch Components
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators
Illuminated Selector Switches without Caps
Table 47-217. Operator without Knob or Lever
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
For selection of the proper cam and contact block, to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection table on Pages 47-133 – 47-134.
Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page 47-157.
Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
Table 47-218. Illuminated Knobs and Levers
Amber, Clear and White lenses have a black arrow (pointer), Red,
Green and Blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).
Positions Operator Action Transformer Type — 50/60 Hz Full Voltage Type — AC or DC
6 Volt #755 Lamp Lamps: 6V — #755, 12V — #756, 24V — #757,
48V — #1835, 120/240V — 120MB
Voltage Catalog and
Code Number
Cam
Code
Price
U.S. $
Voltage Catalog and
Code Number
Cam
Code
Price
U.S. $
2-Position – 60° Throw 24
120
208
240
380
480
600
10250T5961
10250T5971
10250T6511
10250T5981
10250T5991
10250T6001
10250T6011
16
12
24
48
120
240
10250T6201
10250T6211
10250T6221
10250T6231
10250T6361
10250T6371
1
3-Position – 60° Throw 24
120
208
240
380
480
600
10250T602_
10250T603_
10250T652_
10250T604_
10250T605_
10250T606_
10250T607_
+ 2 or 3 6
12
24
48
120
240
10250T624_
10250T625_
10250T626_
10250T627_
10250T638_
10250T639_
+ 2 or 3
24
120
208
240
380
480
600
10250T654_
10250T620_
10250T655_
10250T656_
10250T657_
10250T658_
10250T659
+ 2 or 3 6
12
24
48
120
240
10250T612_
10250T632_
10250T642_
10250T672_
10250T622_
10250T682_
+ 2 or 3
24
120
208
240
380
480
600
10250T660_
10250T621_
10250T661_
10250T662_
10250T663_
10250T664_
10250T665_
+ 2 or 3 6
12
24
48
120
240
10250T613_
10250T633_
10250T643_
10250T673_
10250T623_
10250T683_
+ 2 or 3
24
120
208
240
380
480
600
10250T614_
10250T615_
10250T653_
10250T616_
10250T617_
10250T618_
10250T619_
+ 2 or 3 6
12
24
48
120
240
10250T628_
10250T629_
10250T630_
10250T631_
10250T640_
10250T641_
+ 2 or 3
4-Position – 40° Throw 24
120
208
240
380
480
600
10250T6087
10250T6097
10250T6547
10250T6107
10250T6117
10250T6127
10250T6137
76
12
24
48
120
240
10250T6327
10250T6337
10250T6347
10250T6357
10250T6427
10250T6437
7
2-Position Maintained 120V AC
Transformer Selector Switch,
Cam Code 1
Catalog Number 10250T5971
MM
MM
M
MS
M
MS
M
SS
M
MM
MM
Color Knob Lever
Cat. and Code
No.
Price
U.S. $
Cat. and Code
No.
Price
U.S. $
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
10250TER
10250TEG
10250TEA
10250TEL
10250TFR
10250TFG
10250TFA
10250TFL
Clear
White
Amber
10250TEC
10250TEW
10250TEM
10250TFC
10250TFW
10250TFM
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-139
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
January 2010
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Joystick Units and Components
Joystick Units
Table 47-219. Joystick Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
Field convertible momentary to maintained or vice versa.
Joysticks
Two-Position Joystick Operators
The device mounts in the standard
30.5 mm mounting hole. Allow suffi-
cient panel space for lever movement.
The maximum travel of the knob oper-
ator (full up to full down) is 2.2" (24°)
momentary, 2.5" (30°) maintained, but
ample space for lever operation must
be allowed. These operators are field
convertible from momentary to main-
tained operation or vice versa.
The use of NC contacts is preferred
because they provide positive drive
contact opening and a direct relation-
ship between lever movement and
affected terminal, i.e., up movement
affects the top terminals.
Table 47-220. 2-Position Joystick Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Field convertible momentary to maintained or vice versa. To expedite shipment of maintained
types, order momentary operator 10250T452 which is a stocked device.
Table 47-221. Contact Block Operation and Selection
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
See Figure 47-97 for “A” and “B” mounting location.
NO = Normally Open, NC = Normally Closed, LONC = Late Opening Normally Closed.
Four circuits in single block depth — rated 300V max.
Two-Position Operator Position Operator
Action
2-Position Assembled Unit Contact
Type
Mounting Location
Up Center Down Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
AB
X
O
O
O
O
X
10250T452-3X 1NC
1NC
M
S
S
Contact Block Limitations Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Momentary Mode
4NC Contact Blocks Max.
3NO Contact Blocks Max.
Maintained Mode
2 Contact Blocks Max.
2-Position Operator Only — AC Applications Only
Momentary Up and Down
Maintained Up — Momentary Down
Maintained Down — Momentary Up
Maintained Up and Down
10250T452
10250T4521
10250T4522
10250T4525
Handle Position Contact Block Mounting Location
Up Center Down Top Bottom
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Type AB
XOO10250T51 1NC
OOX10250T51 1NC
OXO10250T45 2LONC
(Series)
X
O
O
O
O
X
10250T3 1NC
1NC
X
O
X
X
O
X
10250T45 1LONC
1LONC
X
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
10250T44 1NC
1NO
1NC
1NO
2.06
(52.3) 2.5 (63.5)
main.
2.2 (55.9)
mom.
2.13
(54.1)
1.25
(31.8)
3.88
(98.6)
0.89
(22.6)
0.88 (22.4)
per Block
0.06 (1.5) to
0.26 (6.6)
Panel Thickness
Contact
Block
Figure 47-97. A and B Mounting Location
Application Caution
Joystick operators are not recom-
mended on certain DC applications
above 24V DC which may involve
lightly engaging the contacts (teasing)
to achieve speed control, positioning,
jogging, etc. Excessive arcing and
deterioration of the contacts will occur.
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
2-Position Joystick Operator
Up
Center
Down
Locating Nib
Top
Contacts
Bottom
Contacts
Center
All NC and NO
Contacts Are
Open (1/2 Way),
Late Opening
NC Is Closed
Down
NC Contact
at Bottom
Is Closed,
NO at Top
Is Closed
Up
NC Contact
at Top Is
Closed, NO
at Bottom
Is Closed
January 2010
47-140
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Joystick Components
Joysticks (Continued)
Four-Position Joystick Operators
The joystick operated control unit is
intended for AC application only. For
other use, see Application Caution on
preceding page.
The panel area required for the
4-position operator is equivalent to
two standard pushbutton operators.
Note: The latch holds the lever in the center
position. The trigger latch must be released
before lever can moved into any position.
Table 47-222. 4-Position Joystick Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Momentary operators — spring return to center. For maintained operators add Suffix Code from Table 47-223.
Example: 10250T45110. Operator without latch, maintained in left and right positions.
Field Conversion — Gate
The factory assembled 4-position
operator is assembled with a gate
arranged for four handle positions.
Figure 47-98. Handle Positions
Three additional gates, supplied with
every operator, allow on the job con-
version to 3- or 8-position operation as
illustrated below.
Figure 47-99. 2-, 3- or 8-Position Operation
The 8-position gate controls the four
functions shown as “Up,” “Down,”
“Left” and “Right.” The remaining
four diagonal positions each actuate
two adjacent functions (see Figure 47-
100); for example, “Left Down” actu-
ates both “Left” and “Down.” The
operator may be arranged for spring
return of handle to center position, or
maintained in up to eight positions
(see description of maintained posi-
tion operator).
Figure 47-100. Adjacent Functions
Maintained Position
For maintained position (non-spring
return), locate required maintained
position or positions of operating lever
in Table 47-223 and add appropriate
Suffix Number to the Catalog Number
selected from Table 47-222.
Table 47-223. Maintained Positions
Note: On an 8-position gate, when an
adjacent vertical and horizontal position
are both maintained, the included diagonal
position is also maintained.
4-Position Joystick
Operator with
Latch
4-Position Joystick
Operator
Contact Block Limitations Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4 Contact Blocks Max. —
2 in Each Position
Operator Only — AC Application Only
4-Position — without Latch
4-Position — with Latch
10250T451_
10250T461_
Hole Plug
To plug unused hole 10250TA7
4.0
(101.6)
1.88
(47.8)
3.75
(95.3)
1.25
(31.8)
1.19
(30.2)
0.88 (22.4)
per Unit
4-Position
Gate
or
2-Position
Gate
3-Position
Gate
8-Position
Gate
or or or
Up
Right
Up
Left
Up
Down Right
Down
RightLeft
Left
Down
Maintained Positions Suffix
Number
Up Down Left Right
X
—
—
—
X
X
X
—
—
—
X
X
X
—
X
—
X
—
—
X
—
—
X
X
—
X
X
—
X
X
—
—
X
—
—
X
—
X
—
X
X
—
X
X
X
—
—
—
X
—
—
X
—
X
X
—
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-141
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Joystick Components
Joysticks (Continued)
Four-Position Joystick Operators (Continued)
Contact Block Operation
Contact blocks mount directly to the
back of the operator. For reliable oper-
ation, the maximum number of contact
blocks that should be installed behind
each operator lever is 2 (4 total).
Figure 47-101 identifies the circuits
activated by each of the eight possible
lever positions. Contact block plungers
1, 2, 3, 4 are depressed (change state)
when handle is in the position indi-
cated by arrows below.
Figure 47-101. Circuit Activation
Note: Joystick in its resting state, center
position, does not activate contact block
plungers.
Ordering Example:
Suppose you are looking for a 4-position
momentary joystick without a latch
and the following circuit arrangements.
X = Closed Circuit, O = Open Circuit.
Table 47-224. Example Circuit Arrangements
The contact blocks and their mounting
locations would be as follows:
Figure 47-102. Example Contact Blocks and
Locations
A complete bill of material for this
example would include:
Table 47-225. Example Order
Blank Legend Plates for Joystick Operators
When ordering engraved legend
plates, order by Catalog Number and
insert the following into Order Notes:
■Legend required
■Size of characters: 3/16, 1/8, 3/32
inch (4.8, 3.2, 2.4 mm)
■Location by letter (A – N)
Locations K and M can accommodate
up to 2 lines horizontally; L and N up to
2 lines vertically.
Maximum number of characters:
■Horizontal
3/16" — 13, 1/8" — 14, 3/32" — 19
■Vertical
3/16" — 10, 1/8" — 13, 3/32" — 14
Ordering Example:
2-position legend plate to be marked
“UP” “DOWN.”
Table 47-226. 2-Position
Table 47-227. 4-Position
Up Down Left Right
1st Circuit X X X X
2nd Circuit X O O X
1
2
3
4
Qty. Catalog Number
1
2
2
10250T451
10250T2
10250T1
NO
2nd
Circuit
1st
Circuit
10250T1 10250T2
NC
NC
NO
10250T1 10250T2
NO
NO
NO
NO
Catalog No.: 10250TJ2S4STAMP
Letter Size: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm)
Pos. K — UP
Pos. M — DOWN
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Blank Plate
10250TJS3 10250TJS4
Engraved Plate
10250TJS3STAMP 10250TJS4STAMP
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Blank Plate
10250TJS1 10250TJS2
Engraved Plate
10250TJS1STAMP 10250TJS2STAMP
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
K
M
2.19
(55.6)
Sq.
NL
K
M
A
B
J
D
F
E
C
HG
A
B
J
D
F
E
C
HG
January 2010
47-142
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Roto-Push Units
Roto-Push® Units
Two-Position Momentary
Complete assembled Two-Position
Roto-Push Units are listed below.
These operators have black flush
buttons and are arranged for vertical
mounting. Order legend plates
separately. Figure 47-103. Mounting Location
Table 47-228. Roto-Push Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = Closed Circuit, O = Open Circuit.
Two-Position Latched
The Two-Position Roto-Push Latch
Unit is fully assembled and only
requires a legend plate for a great vari-
ety of applications. When the selector
collar is in the extreme left position,
the button is in the free or normal
position and can be operated as a
standard pushbutton. Rotating the
collar to the extreme right position
automatically depresses and latches
the button in the depressed position.
The white filled groove in the button
indicates the selector collar position.
The selector collar has spring return to
the left position except when in the
extreme right latched position.
Table 47-229. Rotates to a Latch-Out Mode
Locating
Nib
A
B
Typical
Applications
(Most Common
Examples)
Operator Position Roto-Push Assembled
with Contact Blocks
Contact
Type
Mounting Location
Collar
Left
Collar
Right
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
AB
Normal Depressed Normal Depressed
2-Position
FORWARD/REVERSE;
HIGH/LOW; OPEN/CLOSE;
UP/DOWN; etc.
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
10250T2411-2 1NO
1NO
JOG/RUN; MAN./AUTO;
etc. O
O
X
O
O
X
X
X
10250T24111-2 1NO
1NO
RUN/JOG; START/JOG;
etc. O
X
X
X
O
O
X
O
10250T24111-1 1NO
1NC
SAFE/RUN; etc. O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
10250T2415-2 1NO
1NO
Roto-Push — Black
Flush Button for
Vertical Mounting
Cat. No. 10250T24111-1
Color and Type
of Button
Contact
Block
Vertical Mounting
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Red Long 1NC
2NC
10250T72
10250T73
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Additional Circuit
Arrangements . . . . . . . . Pages 47-133 – 47-134
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-143
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Roto-Push Components
Roto-Push Operators
Roto-Push Components
A Roto-Push control unit combines the
function of a pushbutton and a selector
switch. The contacts are operated by
the combined action of rotating the
outer collar and pushing a button con-
tained in the collar.
In selecting the cam and contact blocks
for the listed function, the analysis
involves considering the function with
the collar rotated to the given position
with the button free (designated as “N”)
and then in that same position with the
button depressed (designated “D”).
This is done for each rotational position
of the collar.
When Ordering Specify
■Catalog Number of Operator with
Cam Code Suffix from tables below
and on following pages, Example:
10250T2411.
■Catalog Number(s) for Contact
Blocks and Legend Plates if required.
■To select the cam and contact blocks
needed for 2-position and 3-position
switches, use the tables on following
pages.
Table 47-230. Operator and Cam
Not to be used for Emergency Stop application.
Two-Position Roto-Push Operator — Rotates to a Latch-Out Mode
Special Rotor Latch
This differs from the other Roto-Push
operators in that as the collar is
rotated to the right it depresses the
button and releases the button when
rotated left. But the button in the
released position can be momentarily
pushed independent of the collar or its
position. As the button is depressed by
rotating the collar, the button also
rotates and indicates its mode by a
white line on the button face. This
button can be used as an emergency
stop or latched stop.
Table 47-231. Special Rotor Latch — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator and Cam
10250T24111
Color and
Type of
Button
Vertical
Mounting
Horizontal
Mounting
Cam Code No.
Select from
Tables
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
Catalog and
Code
Number
Catalog and
Code
Number
Black Flush
Red Flush
Green Flush
Black Long
Red Long
Green Long
10250T241_
10250T242_
10250T243_
10250T261_
10250T262_
10250T263_
10250T251_
10250T252_
10250T253_
10250T271_
10250T272_
10250T273_
+ 1 to 18
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
1.53
(38.9)
0.38 (9.7)
Long
Button
Only
Special Roto Latch —
Red Long Button
Catalog Number
10250T3213
Color and Type
of Button
Vertical Mounting Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Red Long
Black Long
10250T3213
10250T3214
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
1.53
(38.9)
0.38 (9.7)
Long
Button
Only
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-144
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Roto-Push Components
Roto-Push Operators (Continued)
Table 47-232. Cam and Contact Block Selection for Two-Position Roto-Push
N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
Figure 47-104. Series and Parallel
Connections
The connections are not made at the
factory. They are illustrated in the
selection table as requirements, but
must be made on the job.
Figure 47-105. Circuit Location
Letters “A” and “B” represent the
locations which the two circuits of a
contact block will occupy in relation
to the locating nib of the operator.
Figure 47-104 illustrates this pictorially.
Combination
Number
Collar Position Cam Code
1
Cam Code
2
Cam Code
3
Cam Code
4
Cam Code
5
Cam Code
6
Circuit Sequence
ND ND
1OOOX
—— —
2OOXO
——— —
3OOXX
————
4OXOO
———
5OXOX
———
6 OXXO——————
7OXXX
— — A or B NO —
8XOOO
— — A or B NC —
9 XOOX——————
10 XO XO
———
11 XO XX
———
12 XX OO
————
13 XX OX
——— —
14 XX XO
—— —
ANOANO ANO
BNO
ANC
BNO
ANC
BNOANO
BNO
BNO
ANC
BNO
ANC
BNO
ANO
BNO ANO
BNO
BNO
BNC BNC
BNC
ANC
BNC ANC
BNC
BNC
ANO
BNC
ANO
BNCANC
BNC
ANO
BNC
ANO
ANCANC ANC
BNC
ANOBNC
ANO
Series Connection Parallel Connection
Locating
Nib
A
B
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-145
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Roto-Push Components
Roto-Push Operators (Continued)
Table 47-232. Cam and Contact Block Selection for Two-Position Roto-Push (Continued)
N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
Figure 47-106. Series and Parallel
Connections
The connections are not made at the
factory. They are illustrated in the
selection table as requirements, but
must be made on the job.
Figure 47-107. Circuit Location
Letters “A” and “B” represent the
locations which the two circuits of a
contact block will occupy in relation
to the locating nib of the operator.
Figure 47-106 illustrates this pictorially.
Combination
Number
Collar Position Cam Code
10
Cam Code
11
Cam Code
12
Cam Code
13
Cam Code
14
Circuit Sequence
ND ND
15 OO OX
— ———
16 OO XO
— A or B NC
17 OO XX
———
18 OX OO
——
19 OX OX
———
20 OX XO
————
21 OX XX
——
22 XO OO
——
23 XO OX
————
24 XO XO
———
25 XO XX
——
26 XX OO
———
27 XX OX
— A or B NO
28 XX XO
— ———
BNO
ANO
BNO
ANC
ANC ANC
BNOBNO
ANO
BNC
ANO BNO
ANOBNO
BNO
ANC
BNO
ANO
BNO
ANO
BNO
ANC
BNC
ANC
BNC
ANC
BNC
ANO
BNC
ANO
ANCBNC
ANC
BNO
ANO BNC
BNCBNC
BNC
ANO
ANO ANO
BNC
ANC
BNC
ANOBNC
ANO
Series Connection Parallel Connection
Locating
Nib
A
B
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
January 2010
47-146
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Roto-Push Components
Roto-Push Operators (Continued)
Table 47-233. Cam and Contact Block Selection for Three-Position Roto-Push
Limited to 4 contact blocks. See Note on Page 47-148.
N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
Figure 47-108. Series and Parallel
Connections
The connections are not made at the
factory. They are illustrated in the
selection table as requirements, but
must be made on the job.
Figure 47-109. Circuit Location
Letters “A” and “B” represent the
locations which the two circuits of a
contact block will occupy in relation
to the locating nib of the operator.
Figure 47-108 illustrates this pictorially.
Combination
Number
Collar Position Cam Code
7
Cam Code
8
Cam Code
9
Cam Code
15
Cam Code
16
Cam Code
17
Cam Code
18
Circuit Sequence
ND ND ND
1OOOOOX
——
2OOOOXX
—— —— —
3 OOOXOO
—— ———
4OOOXOX
——————
5OOOXXX
—— ————
6 OOXXOO
— —————
7OOXXOX
— —————
8OOXXXO
——————
9OOXXXX ——————
10 OX OO OO
—
11 OX OO OX
—— ——
12 OX OO XX
————— —
13 OX OX OO ——————
14 OX OX OX
——————
15 OX XX OO — —————
16 OX XX OX
— —————
17 OX XX XX
——————
BNO
ANO
BNO
ANC
BNO
BNO
BNO
ANC
BNO ANO
BNC
ANO
BNO
ANO
BNO
ANO
BNO
ANO
BNO
BNO
ANC
BNO
BNC
ANO
BNC
ANO
ANO
ANOBNO
BNC
ANO
ANO
BNO
ANO
BNO
ANO
BNO
ANO
ANO
BNO
ANO
ANO
BNO
ANO
BNO
ANO
BNC
ANOBNC
ANO
Series Connection Parallel Connection
Locating
Nib
A
B
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-147
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Roto-Push Components
Roto-Push Operators (Continued)
Table 47-233. Cam and Contact Block Selection for Three-Position Roto-Push (Continued)
Limited to 4 contact blocks.
N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
Figure 47-110. Series and Parallel Connection
The connections are not made at the
factory. They are illustrated in the
selection table as requirements, but
must be made on the job.
Figure 47-111. Circuit Location
Letters “A” and “B” represent the
locations which the two circuits of a
contact block will occupy in relation
to the locating nib of the operator.
Figure 47-110 illustrates this pictorially.
Combination
Number
Collar Position Cam Code
7
Cam Code
8
Cam Code
9
Cam Code
15
Cam Code
16
Cam Code
17
Cam Code
18
Circuit Sequence
ND ND ND
18 XO OO OO
——————
19 XO OO XX — —————
20 XO OO XO
— —————
21 XO XX OO
————— —
22 XO XX XX
——
23 XO XX XO
——— ——
24 XO XO XO
——— ——
25 XO XO XX ——— ——
26 XX OO OO — ————
27 XX OO OX
——————
28 XX OO XO — —————
29 XX OO XX
— ————
30 XX XX OO —— —— —
31 XX XX XO
—— —
32 XX XO XO ——— ——
33 XX XO XX
——— ——
BNC
A
NC
ANC
BNC
ANC
BNC
A
NC
BNO
ANC
BNO
ANC
ANCBNC
BNO
ANC
ANC
BNC
ANC
BNC
ANC
BNC
ANC
ANC ANC
BNC
ANC
BNC
ANO
BNC
BNO
ANC
BNO
ANC
BNC ANC
BNC
ANC
BNC
ANO
BNC
BNC
ANO
BNC BNC
BNC
ANO
BNC
ANC
BNC
ANOBNC
ANO
Series Connection Parallel Connection
Locating
Nib
A
B
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
January 2010
47-148
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Components — Contact Blocks
Contact Blocks
Standard Contact Blocks
■UL A600/P600 rated
■Color-coded plungers – red/green
for NC/NO circuits
■Silver contact tips with “reliability
nibs”
■Gray (opaque) or amber (translu-
cent) housings
■Pressure plate or spade terminals
■Fingerproof shrouds (for pressure
terminals only)
Logic Level Contact Blocks
■UL A600/P600 rated
■Color-coded plungers
■Inert palladium knife-blade contacts
■Gray (opaque) housings
■Pressure plate or spade terminals
Special Function Contact Blocks
■UL A600/P600 rated
■Color-coded plungers
■Silver contact tips with “reliability
nibs”
■Gray (opaque) housings
■Pressure plate terminals only
Special Purpose Contact Block
■Maximum 300V rated
■Black plungers
■Silver contact tips with “reliability
nibs”
■Black (opaque) housings
■Pressure plate terminals only
■Fingerproof shrouds not available
Reliability Nibs
Reliability nibs are the hallmark of
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer contact blocks.
A pointed silver nib on the contact tip
ensures reliable switching from logic
level (5V) up to 600V applications.
Therefore standard contact blocks can
be used for most logic level applica-
tions where the contacts are not
exposed to any harsh environmental
conditions.
Palladium Contacts
Palladium, which is more inert than
gold, is well suited for voltages and
currents approaching zero and is rec-
ommended for applications where
environmental conditions are a factor.
Maximum Contact Block Mounting per Operator Type
Table 47-234. Contact Blocks
All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable
for use on standard 10250T and E34 opera-
tors. These contact blocks are not suitable for
Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34 devices.
Contact blocks with spade terminals are lim-
ited to a maximum of one contact block per
operator and minimum spacing between
devices is 2.5” (63.5 mm). Not suitable for
use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also avail-
able in amber housing. Not available with
fingerproof shrouds.
Special function contact blocks are not suit-
able for use with roto-push operators, 3-
position push-pull operators, or 4-position
selector switches.
ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use
with 2-position joysticks or when operators
are used with padlock attachments.
Special purpose 10250T44 contact blocks
are not suitable on selector switches or roto-
push operators. Okay to use with 3-position
push-pull operators only on low voltage
(30V or less) circuits. Fingerproof shrouds
not available.
Operator Max.
Stack
Operator Max.
Stack
Pushbuttons 6 2- or 3-Position
Selector Switches
6
Push-Pull
Operators
2 4-Position
Selector Switches
4
Roto-Push
Operators
4 Joysticks 4
Symbol Circuit Descriptio
n/
Notes
Standard Logic Level
Pressure
Terminals
Spade
Terminals
Pressure
Terminals
Spade
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1NC Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T51 10250T59 10250T51E 10250T59E
1NO Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T53 10250T60 10250T53E 10250T60E
NO-NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T1 10250T40 10250T1E 10250T40E
2NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T3 10250T42 10250T3E 10250T42E
2NO Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T2 10250T41 10250T2E 10250T41E
Special Function Blocks
LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to 6 blocks
(6 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T71
— 10250T71E
—
ECNO
-NC
Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to 6
blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T47
— 10250T47E
—
ECNO
-NO
Early closing NO and standard NO.
Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T57
— 10250T57E
—
2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to 6
blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T45
— 10250T45E
—
LONC-
ECNO
Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 4 blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T55
— 10250T55E
—
Special Purpose Blocks
2NO-
2NC
Four circuits in single block depth. Rated 300V
max. Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise
noted.
10250T44
—
10250T1
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-116
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-149
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Components — Contact Blocks
Contact Blocks (Continued)
Table 47-235. Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds
All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable
for use on standard 10250T and E34 opera-
tors. These contact blocks are not suitable
for Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34
devices.
To order contact blocks with translucent
amber housing, change Suffix P to CP in
Catalog Number e.g. 10250T51CP.
Special function contact blocks are not suit-
able for use with roto-push operators, 3-
position push-pull operators, or 4-position
selector switches.
ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use
with 2-position joysticks or when operators
are used with padlock attachments.
Symbol Circuit Description/
Notes
Standard Logic Level
Pressure
Terminals
Pressure
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1NC Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51P 10250T51EP
1NO Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53P 10250T53EP
NO-NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T1P 10250T1EP
2NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T3P 10250T3EP
2NO Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T2P 10250T2EP
Special Function Blocks
LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless
otherwise noted.
10250T71P 10250T71EP
ECNO-NC Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to 6 blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T47P 10250T47EP
ECNO-NO Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to 4 blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T57P 10250T57EP
2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to 6 blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T45P 10250T45EP
LONC-ECNO Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 4 blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T55P 10250T55EP
10250T1CP
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-116
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-150
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Components — Contact Blocks
Contact Blocks (Continued)
Table 47-236. Amber Contact Blocks
All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable
for use on standard 10250T and E34 opera-
tors. These contact blocks are not suitable
for Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34
devices.
To order amber contact blocks with finger-
proof shrouds, change Suffix to CP in the
Catalog Number e.g. 10250T51CP. Not avail-
able with spade terminals.
Contact blocks with spade terminals are lim-
ited to a maximum of one contact block per
operator and minimum spacing between
devices is 2.5” (63.5 mm). Not suitable for
use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also avail-
able in amber housing. Not available with
fingerproof shrouds.
Special function contact blocks are not suit-
able for use with roto-push operators, 3-
position push-pull operators, or 4-position
selector switches.
ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use
with 2-position joysticks or when operators
are used with padlock attachments.
Symbol Circuit Description/
Notes
Standard Logic Level
Pressure
Terminals
Spade
Terminals
Pressure
Terminals
Spade
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1NC Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T51C 10250T59C 10250T51EC 10250T59EC
1NO Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T53C 10250T60C 10250T53EC 10250T60EC
NO-NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T1C 10250T40C 10250T1EC 10250T40EC
2NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T3C 10250T42C 10250T3EC 10250T42EC
2NO Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T2C 10250T41C 10250T2EC 10250T41EC
Special Function Blocks
LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to 6 blocks
(6 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T71C
— 10250T71EC
—
ECNO
-NC
Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack
up to 6 blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T47C
— 10250T47EC
—
ECNO
-NO
Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack
up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T57C
— 10250T57EC
—
2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack
up to 6 blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T45C
— 10250T45EC
—
LONC-
ECNO
Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 4
blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T55C
— 10250T55EC
—
10250T1C
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-116
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-151
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Legend Plates
Options
Legend Plates
Legend Plates with Standard Markings
The legend plates listed below are sized for all standard
commercial enclosures and Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer cast
enclosures. For vertical spacing less than 1.75", replace the S
in the Catalog Number with MS, or the M with P (except Push-
Pull). No change in price. The smaller size legend plates,
“MS” or “P” size, have limited space for legend.
Table 47-237. For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights —
Standard
Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower
portion.
Table 47-238. Blank Plastic Legend Plates — Square
If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required.
Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for
most sheet metal enclosures.
Table 47-239. For Selector Switch and Roto-Push Operators —
Standard Size
Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower
portion.
Table 47-240. 45 mm and 70 mm Plastic — Round
If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required.
Table 47-241. For Push-Pull Units
All Push-Pull Legend Plates include the symbols ≠Ø in the center of the
plate.
Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower
portion.
Price Each — U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Color of
Field
Catalog Number
Square 1/2 Round
Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Table 47-243 on Page 47-152
Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16" High
CLAMP
CLOSE
DOWN
EMERG. STOP
FAST
Black
Black
Black
Red
Black
10250TS90
10250TS73
10250TS74
10250TS13
10250TS75
10250TM90
10250TM11
10250TM12
10250TM13
10250TM14
FASTER
FEEDER ON
FEEDER OFF
FORWARD
HIGH
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
10250TS87
10250TS94
10250TS95
10250TS15
10250TS16
10250TM87
10250TM94
10250TM95
10250TM15
10250TM16
IN
INCH
JOG
JOG FOR.
JOG REV.
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
10250TS17
10250TS18
10250TS19
10250TS20
10250TS21
10250TM17
10250TM18
10250TM19
10250TM20
10250TM21
LOW
LOWER
LUBE-FAIL
MOTOR RUN
MOTOR STOP
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
10250TS22
10250TS23
10250TS92
10250TS81
10250TS82
10250TM22
10250TM23
10250TM92
10250TM81
10250TM82
OFF
ON
OPEN
OUT
POWER ON
Red
Black
Black
Black
Black
10250TS24
10250TS25
10250TS26
10250TS27
10250TS80
10250TM24
10250TM25
10250TM26
10250TM27
10250TM80
RAISE
READY
RESET
REVERSE
RUN
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
10250TS28
10250TS86
10250TS29
10250TS30
10250TS31
10250TM28
10250TM86
10250TM29
10250TM30
10250TM31
SAFE
SLOW
SLOWER
START
STOP
Black
Black
Black
Black
Red
10250TS85
10250TS32
10250TS88
10250TS33
10250TS34
10250TM85
10250TM32
10250TM88
10250TM33
10250TM34
TEST
TRANSFER
TRIP
UNCLAMP
UP
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
10250TS83
10250TS93
10250TS84
10250TS91
10250TS35
10250TM83
10250TM93
10250TM84
10250TM91
10250TM35
Price Each — U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color Catalog Number
Lettering Field Standard Jumbo Extra Large
Black
White
White or
Silver
Red or
Black
10250TSP76
10250TSP77
10250TLP76
10250TLP77
10250TEP76
10250TEP77
Price Each — U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Color of
Field
Catalog Number
Square 1/2 Round
Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Table 47-243 on Page 47-152
2-Position — 5/32" High Lettering
FOR. REV.
HAND AUTO
HIGH LOW
JOG RUN
MAN. AUTO
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
10250TS38
10250TS39
10250TS40
10250TS41
10250TS67
10250TM38
10250TM39
10250TM40
10250TM41
10250TM67
OFF ON
OPEN CLOSE
RUN JOG
SAFE RUN
START JOG
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
10250TS42
10250TS43
10250TS44
10250TS45
10250TS46
10250TM42
10250TM43
10250TM44
10250TM45
10250TM46
START STOP
UP DOWN
Black
Black
10250TS47
10250TS48
10250TM47
10250TM48
3-Position — 1/8" High Lettering
AUTO OFF HAND
FOR. OFF REV.
FOR. SAFE REV.
HAND OFF AUTO
MAN. OFF AUTO
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
10250TS49
10250TS50
10250TS69
10250TS51
10250TS68
10250TM49
10250TM50
10250TM69
10250TM51
10250TM68
OPEN OFF CLOSE
RUN SAFE JOG
UP OFF DOWN
ON STOP SAFE
Black
Black
Black
Red
10250TS53
10250TS70
10250TS54
10250TS71
10250TM53
10250TM70
10250TM54
10250TM71
Color Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Lettering Field
45 mm
Blank Yellow or Red 10250TRP78
70 mm
Blank Yellow or Red 10250TRP76
Red EMERG. STOP Yellow 10250TRP79
Price Each — U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Color of
Field
Catalog Number
Square 1/2 Round
Standard Size — Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/32" High
PULL START/PUSH STOP
PUSH ON/PULL OFF
PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE
PULL UP/PUSH DOWN
Green/Red
Black
Black
Black
10250TPP2
10250TPP5
10250TPP8
10250TPP11
10250TR2
10250TR5
10250TR8
10250TR11
Jumbo Size — Letters on Legend Plates Below are 1/8" High
PULL START/PUSH STOP
PULL ON/PUSH OFF
PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE
PULL UP/PUSH DOWN
Green/Red
Black
Black
Black
10250TPP3
10250TPP6
10250TPP9
10250TPP12
10250TR3
10250TR6
10250TR9
10250TR12
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
Square
Legend Plate
Catalog Number
10250TS41
1/2 Round
Legend Plate
Catalog Number
10250TM38
70 mm Round —
Plastic
Catalog Number
10250TRP79
January 2010
47-152
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Legend Plates
Legend Plates with Non-standard Markings
When Ordering Specify
■Catalog Number of Blank Plate
Phase plus Suffix “STAMP.”
■Insert the following into Order
Notes: Legend, Letter Size and
Locations (letters A – W) — combine
letters for definitive locations as
shown.
Ordering Example:
Legend Characters Available
Legend characters on black and red
plates are white — on satin aluminum
plates, characters are black.
Blackening Kit
Solution blackens aluminum exposed
by engraving process. Must be applied
immediately after engraving. 0.3 oz.
bottle — sufficient for approximately
1100 legend plates.
Table 47-242. Blackening Kit
Figure 47-112. Legend Positions Figure 47-113. Legend Positions
Table 47-243. Blank and Custom Engraved Legend Plates
All Push-Pull Legend Plates include the symbols ≠Ø in the center of the plate.
When used to meet Ford Motor Co. specifications, specify engraved legend. Cannot be used on standard cast or sheet metal enclosures.
Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures.
Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion.
Slightly larger than standard size for legends requiring more space — fits cast enclosures.
Table 47-244. Maximum Characters per Legend Plate and Approximate Dimensions
Recommended only when mounting on minimum centers [less than 1-3/4 inch (44.5 mm) vertical centers].
Can be used on top row only of any enclosure.
When used to meet Ford Motor Co. specifications, specify engraved legend. Cannot be used on standard cast or sheet metal enclosures.
Catalog No.: 10250TS36STAMP
Letter Size: 3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
Pos. A — POWER HOUSE
Pos. B — START PUMP 1
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X
Y Z / - . , 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Catalog Number Price U.S. $
10250TBK
L
K
D
C
B
A
Extra Large Size
Cat. No. 10250TNP99
Jumbo Size
10250TL or TJ Series
Small Size
10250TMS or TP Series
A
A
C
K
D
B
Standard Size
10250TS or TM Series
AB
B
A
GF
AE
GH
A
I
AF
D4
C4B4
A4
Style Color Small Standard Jumbo Extra
Large
4-Position
Selector Switch
Push-Pull
with Symbols
Price U.S. $
Custom Standard Standard Jumbo Blank Custom
Engraved
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Square
Black
Red
Green/Red
Satin Alum.
10250TMS36
10250TMS37
—
—
10250TS36
10250TS37
—
—
10250TL36
10250TL37
—
—
—
—
—
10250TNP99
10250TS76
—
—
—
10250TS72
—
—
—
10250TPP17
—
10250TPP20
—
10250TPP18
—
10250TPP21
—
1/2
Round
Black
Red
Green/Red
Satin Alum.
10250TP36
10250TP37
—
—
10250TM36
10250TM37
—
10250TM89
10250TJ36
10250TJ37
—
10250TJ89
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10250TM72
—
—
—
10250TR17
—
10250TR20
—
10250TR18
—
10250TR21
—
Top
(Aluminum
and Plastic)
Approximate Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
Style Character Size
Width Height 3/32" High 1/8" High 3/16" High
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Small 1.59 (40.4) 1.59 (40.4) Square
1/2 Round
1
1
17
15
—
1
—
12
—
1
—
9
Standard and
Custom
1.75 (44.5) 1.75 (44.5) Square
1/2 Round
2
2
18
15
2
2
13
12
1
1
9
9
Jumbo 2.19 (55.6) 2.19 (55.6) Square
1/2 Round
5
5
23
19
3
4
18
15
2
2
12
11
Extra Large 2.44 (62) 2.44 (62) Square 6 25 3 18 3 12
Legend Plates for
Joystick Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-141
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-153
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Enclosures
Enclosures
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
Table 47-245. Enclosures (Case and Cover) — Surface Mounting
For spacing increments, see Page 47-154.
All cast enclosures can be converted to base mounting of contact blocks, with spacers 10250TA22 or 10250TA23. See listing on Page 47-156.
When used with E30 pushbuttons, only the one element enclosure can be used.
14 gauge, type 304.
When used with resistor light units, only the 2 contact block depth enclosure can be used.
Table 47-246. Approximate Dimensions
No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as
required.
Depth given is for two contact block deep
stations. One contact block deep stations
subtract 3/4 inch (19.1 mm).
Note: 2-position joystick must be used with
two contact block deep enclosures (maximum
number of contact blocks = 1). 4-position
joysticks can not be used within these
enclosures.
Figure 47-114. Enclosure Layouts
Number of
Elements
1 Contact Block Depth 2 Contact Block Depth
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Cast Enclosure — In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
2
3
4
10250TN1
10250TN2
10250TN3
10250TN4
10250TN11
10250TN12
10250TN13
10250TN14
Polyester — In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
E34N51
E34N52
E34N53
E34N54
Stainless Steel — In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
10250TN33
10250TN34
10250TN35
10250TN36
Die Cast Enclosure —
Cat. No.10250TN11
Polyester Enclosure —
Cat. No. E34N52
Stainless Steel Enclosure —
Cat. No. 10250TN35
Number
of
Elements
Element
Arrangement
Surface Mounting Conduit
Entrance
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
DE
Cast
1
2
3
4
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
4.0 (101.6)
5.88 (149.4)
7.75 (196.9)
9.63 (244.6)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
3.25 (82.6)
5.13 (130.3)
7.0 (177.8)
8.88 (225.6)
3/4
3/4
1
1
Polyester
1
2
3
4
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
6.63 (168.4)
6.63 (168.4)
8.88 (225.6)
11.13 (282.7)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
4.88 (124.0)
4.88 (124.0)
7.13 (181.1)
9.38 (238.3)
Stainless Steel
1
2
3
4
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
3.00 (76.2)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
6.75 (171.5)
9.00 (228.6)
11.25 (285.8)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
4.25 (108.0)
7.50 (190.5)
9.00 (228.6)
12.00 (304.8)
A
Surface
DC
B
E
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester
One Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
Two Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
111
Top – For Vertical Mounting
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
1
222
33
4
January 2010
47-154
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Enclosures
Die Cast and Stainless Steel — Flush Mount, Covers Only
Table 47-247. Covers Only — Flush Mounting
Not oiltight. NEMA 1 applications only.
Table 47-248. Approximate Dimensions
Depth given is for flat cover. Deep cover 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deeper.
Depth given includes pull box.
Table 47-249. Spacing Increments
Figure 47-115. Spacing Increments for
Enclosures
Figure 47-116. Enclosure Arrangement
Diagram
Number of
Elements
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Flush Cast Covers
In-Line Deep Cover In-Line Flat Cover
1
2
3
4
10250TF11
10250TF12
10250TF13
10250TF14
10250TF1
10250TF2
10250TF3
10250TF4
In-Line Stainless Steel Flush Plates
With Pullbox Without Pullbox
1
2
3
4
10250TS10
10250TS11
10250TS12
10250TS14
10250TS1
10250TS2
10250TS3
10250TS4
Deep
Cover
Flat
Cover
Number of
Elements
Flush Mounting Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
DE
Cast
1
2
3
4
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
4.0 (101.6)
5.88 (149.4)
7.75 (196.9)
9.63 (244.6)
0.25 (6.4)
0.25 (6.4)
0.25 (6.4)
0.25 (6.4)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.63 (92.2)
5.50 (139.7)
6.0 (152.4)
9.25 (235)
Stainless Steel
1
2
3
4
5.0 (127)
5.0 (127)
5.0 (127)
5.0 (127)
5.0 (127)
6.88 (174.8)
8.63 (219.2)
10.50 (266.7)
2.50 (63.5)
2.50 (63.5)
2.50 (63.5)
2.50 (63.5)
3.25 (82.6)
3.25 (82.6)
3.25 (82.6)
3.25 (82.6)
1.88 (47.8)
3.63 (92.2)
5.50 (139.7)
7.25 (184.2)
A
Surface or Pendant
DC
B
E
4 Mtg. Holes - 10-32 Screw Size
for 1-11 Element Encl, 1/4-20
Screw Size for 12 Element
and Larger
Type Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
FG H
Cast 2.44 (62) 2.5 (63.5) 1.88 (47.8)
Polyester 1.88 (47.8) Min. 2.13 (54.1) 2.25 (57.2)
Stainless Steel 1.69 (42.9) Min. 1.73 (43.9) 2.25 (57.2)
F
G
H
111
Top – For Vertical Mounting
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
1
222
33
4
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-155
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Accessories
Accessories
Padlocks not included with padlocking attachments. For operators with built-in padlock attachment, see Page 47-120.
Table 47-250. Accessories
Should not be used on flush button for STOP function.
Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure.
Cover is too thick.
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Padlock Attachments
Padlocking Attachment for Flush
Pushbutton Operators
Permits locking NC contacts in open
position with 1/4" padlock. Will not
lock NO contact.
10250TA2
Padlocking Attachment for Use
with Extended Pushbutton
Permits locking NC contacts in open
position with 1/4" padlock.
10250TA26
Padlocking Cover Guard
Cover locked over flush button
makes it unaccessible or on
extended button locks NC contacts
open. Takes 1/4" shank size padlock.
10250TA36
Padlock Hasp or Flip-Up Guard
When used with a 1/4" padlock,
makes flush and long button and
knob selector switch unaccessible,
but not locked down. Without the
padlock, it is a flip-up guard. Padlock
hasp can be removed before
assembly.
10250TA38
Padlocking Attachment for Use
with Flexible Weather Resistant
Boot
Used on long button operators.
Stainless steel. Use only for locking
NC contacts open.
10250TA63
Padlock Attachment
For use with Illuminated Push-
buttons and maintained Push-Pull
operators having standard button or
lens only. Use 1/4” padlock. Locks in
down position only.
10250TA64
Padlocking Attachment for
Non-illuminated Knob Selector
Switches
Provision for up to 5, 1/4" padlocks.
10250TA11
Shrouds and Guards
Shroud for Mushroom
Head Operator
Prevents accidental operation.
(Not for push-pull operators.)
10250TA6
Extended Retaining Nut
Replaces standard nut and
provides guard for flush head push-
button operators.
10250TA12
Guard for Illuminated
Pushbutton
10250TA15
Shroud
For jumbo mushroom head
operator.
Gray
Yellow
10250TA56
10250TA56Y
Half Shroud – Yellow
For jumbo mushroom head
operator.
10250ED1241
Fingerproof Shroud —
10 per Package
Fits new style contact blocks and
light units.
10250TA101
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Boots
Flexible Weather Resistant Boot
For use with button operators
(extended buttons preferred).
Temperature to -25°F (-32°C)
Black
Red
Green
(See Page 47-156 for 10250TA96
Tightening Tool.)
10250TA3
10250TA4
10250TA10
Transparent Boot
For regular illuminated pushbut-
ton operators and PresTest —
Temperature to -38°F (-39°C)
10250TA25
Boot for Flush Pushbutton
Clear
Black
Red
Green
10250TA46
10250TA47
10250TA48
10250TA49
Hardware and Kits
Thrust Washers —
To meet Ford Motor Co.
mounting specifications.
10250TK3
Contact Block Tape Seal —
Seals plunger openings on last
contact block. Order in multiples
of 10 pieces.
10250TK5
Selector Switch Operator
Gasket —
Seals out dust from getting in-
between the cam and contact
block plungers. Supplied as
standard with all selector
switches.
56-9337
Special Retaining Nut —
to accommodate thick panel:
Indicating lights
PresTest, pushbuttons and
selector switches
10250TA30
10250TA31
Terminal Block —
Two terminals, each will
accommodate two wire
terminations.
10250TA62
Spacer Ring —
Used when legend plate
is not required.
10250TA8
Stacking Screw —
Replaces transformer mounting
screws on indicating light so
terminal block 10250TA62 can be
mounted to light to support and
connect a series resistor. This
screw also fits all contact
blocks. Order in multiples of 10.
10250TA79
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-156
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Accessories
Table 47-250. Accessories (Continued)
Component only. Not to be used for custom built (factory assembled)
stations.
Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure.
Cover is too thick.
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Hardware and Kits (Continued)
Base Mounting
Spacers —
Equivalent to contact
block in depth —
Complete with screws,
washers, etc.
1 Block
Deep
2 Block
Deep
10250TA22
10250TA23
Grounding Kits —
Kits consist of a ring connector
and a #6 screw for mounting
connector to rear of contact
block mounting screw.
All components except Standard
Indicating Lights and PresTest
Indicating Lights
Standard Indicating Lights
PresTest Indicating Lights
10250TKG1
10250TKG2
10250TKG3
Contact Block Terminal
Jumpers —
Available in multiples of 100 only.
Term. to Term. —
within Block (short)
100 per pkg.
1000 per pkg.
Term. to Term. —
Block to Block (long)
100 per pkg.
1000 per pkg.
10250TA70
10250TA70-2
10250TA71
10250TA71-2
Special Operators and Attachments
Wobble Stick
Complete with retaining nut —
fits standard button.
10250TA5
Lever Operator
For use with two vertically
mounted flush pushbuttons.
10250TA14
Maintained Contact Attachment
Release Button Assembly
Mechanically interlocks with
another pushbutton and contact
block (not included). Provides
mode indication. Minimum hole
centers 1.62 inch (41.1 mm),
maximum 2.313 inch (58.8 mm).
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Same with Long Button — Black
10250TA17
10250TA18
10250TA19
10250TA20
10250TA39
Maintained Contact
Attachment
Mechanically interlocks two
buttons and provides position
indication for one. Use with two
pushbutton operators and one or
more contact blocks.
10250TA1
Roto-Push Lever Operator —
Used to provide lever operation
for Roto-Push operators.
10250TA13
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Special Light Modules
Master Test (Dual Input) Module
— Internal Form C relay suit-
able for either AC or DC applica-
tions. Total electrical isolation
between monitored and test cir-
cuit. Fits all illuminated 10250T,
E22, E30 and E34 devices.
48V DC 10250TMT8
Flasher Module —
Changes any AC illuminated
device to a controlled flashing
light. Fits 10250T, E30 and E34
devices.
24V
120V
10250TFL2
10250TFL1
Flashing Incandescent Lamp
— For use with 120V trans-
former type or 6V full voltage
type Indicating Lights including
PresTest and most E29 devices.
10250ED986-4
Hole Plugs
Plug —
For unused holes —
Steel, painted gray
(Stainless steel, use E30KT5,
see Page 47-112)
10250TA7
Tools
Octagonal 10250T
(notched to fit over selector
switch lever), E29 and E30
10250TA95
E22, E30, E34 and Octagonal
10250T (will not fit over selector
switch levers)
E22CW
Tool for Tightening Boots —
Used to install boot Catalog
Numbers, 10250TA3, A4,
A10 and A25.
10250TA96
10250T, E34 Allen Wrench —
Used for removal of jumbo
mushroom head.
10250TA102
Lamp Removal Tools —
For transformer type illuminated
pushbuttons, push-pull and
selector switches. Fits #12
lamp.
10250TA74
For full voltage and resistor
type illuminated pushbuttons,
push-pull and selector switches
and E30.
E30KV1
Standard indicating lights.
Fits #44, #755, #6S6 and #10S6.
E29KLT
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-157
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T/E34 Series, Renewal Parts
Renewal Parts
Table 47-251. Replacement Lamps — For 10250T Illuminated Operators
Table 47-252. Replacement LED Lamps — For 10250T, E34 and E22 Units
Mfg.
Lamp Type
Voltage Base
Style
Application Part
Number
Price
U.S. $
120MB 120V T 3-1/4 Bayonet 10250T Resistor Indicating Light 28-3044
#267
#755
#756
#757
6.3V
6.3V
12V
24V
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
10250T Flasher
10250T Transformer, PresTest and Full Voltage
10250T Full Voltage
10250T Full Voltage
10250ED986-4
28-2202
28-5184
28-5185
#1828
#1835
NE48
NE51H-R22
NE51H-R68
32V
55V
120V
120V
240V
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 4-1/2 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
10250T Full Voltage
10250T Resistor
10250T Neon
10250T Neon
10250T Neon
28-5186
28-5187
28-494
28-3754
28-3755
Voltage Color Continuous Flashing
AC/DC Price
U.S. $
AC DC Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
6V – 12V Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED612RN
E22LED612ON
E22LED612YN
E22LED612GN
E22LED612BN
E22LED612WN
E22LED006RAF
E22LED006OAF
E22LED006YAF
E22LED006GAF
E22LED006BAF
E22LED006WAF
E22LED006RDF
E22LED006ODF
E22LED006YDF
E22LED006GDF
E22LED006BDF
E22LED006WDF
24V Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED024RN
E22LED024ON
E22LED024YN
E22LED024GN
E22LED024BN
E22LED024WN
E22LED024RAF
E22LED024OAF
E22LED024YAF
E22LED024GAF
E22LED024BAF
E22LED024WAF
E22LED024RDF
E22LED024ODF
E22LED024YDF
E22LED024GDF
E22LED024BDF
E22LED024WDF
48V Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED048RN
E22LED048ON
E22LED048YN
E22LED048GN
E22LED048BN
E22LED048WN
E22LED048RAF
E22LED048OAF
E22LED048YAF
E22LED048GAF
E22LED048BAF
E22LED048WAF
E22LED048RDF
E22LED048ODF
E22LED048YDF
E22LED048GDF
E22LED048BDF
E22LED048WDF
60V Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED060RN
E22LED060ON
E22LED060YN
E22LED060GN
E22LED060BN
E22LED060WN
E22LED060RAF
E22LED060OAF
E22LED060YAF
E22LED060GAF
E22LED060BAF
E22LED060WAF
E22LED060RDF
E22LED060ODF
E22LED060YDF
E22LED060GDF
E22LED060BDF
E22LED060WDF
120V Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED120RN
E22LED120ON
E22LED120YN
E22LED120GN
E22LED120BN
E22LED120WN
E22LED120RAF
E22LED120OAF
E22LED120YAF
E22LED120GAF
E22LED120BAF
E22LED120WAF
E22LED120RDF
E22LED120ODF
E22LED120YDF
E22LED120GDF
E22LED120BDF
E22LED120WDF
Standard
LED Lamp
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-158
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Renewal Parts
Table 47-253. 10250T Style Operator Renewal Parts
2-Position
Joystick Operator
Flush Head
Pushbutton
Operator
Mushroom Head
Pushbutton
Operator
4-Position Joystick
Operator
(w/o Latch)
Illuminated Pushbutton
Operator
Full Voltage, Resistor
and Transformer Type
Illuminated Selector Switch
Transformer Type
Indicating Light
Mushroom Head
Operator with
Padlock Attachment
Jumbo Mushroom
Head Operator
Knob-Operated
Selector Switch
Operator
Potentiometers
Item
No.
Description No.
Req.
Part
Number
Price
U.S. $
1 Gasket 1 16-1548
2 Mounting Nut 1 15-1530
3 Handle 1 24-5045
4 Knob
Knob (Not Shown) for Joystick
Operator with Latch
1
1
53-3157
53-3159
5 Common Gate
(Supplied with Operator)
216-3400
6 Set Screw
(#6-32 x 0.250" Long Hollow Hex)
211-2014
7 Mushroom Head Button
(Includes (2) Item 6)
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
1
—
—
—
—
—
As Req. Below
53-1317
53-1317-2
53-1317-3
53-1317-4
53-1317-22
8 Set Screw
(#10-32 x 0.250" Long Hollow Hex)
211-544
9 Jumbo Mushroom Head Button
(Aluminum — Includes (2) Item 8)
Red
Black
Yellow
Green
1
—
—
—
—
As Req. Below
53-1317-9
53-1317-10
53-1317-11
53-1317-12
10 Jumbo Mushroom Head Button
(Aluminum — Red EMERG. STOP)
Does Not Include Item (8)
153-1349-18
11 Position Gate:
2 Position
3 Position
4 Position
8 Position
1
1
1
1
54-7278
54-7173
54-12278
54-12279
12 Mounting Screw
(#6-32 x 0.710" Long)
Washer
2
2
10250TA79
16-2038
13 Terminal Screw and Lug (Captive) Req. 80-5502
14 Gasket (Supplied with Basic Unit) 1 32-803
Item
No.
Description No.
Req.
Part
Number
Price
U.S. $
15 Round Head Screw
(#4-40 x 0.344" Long)
(Supplied with Basic Unit)
211-4553
16 Mounting Screw 2 11-1632
17 Simple Potentiometer
(Does Not Include
Items 18, 28 or 29)
1,000 Ohms
2,500 Ohms
5,000 Ohms
10,000 Ohms
25,000 Ohms
50,000 Ohms
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
As Req. Below
41-782-2
41-782-3
41-782-10
41-782-4
41-782-5
41-782-6
18 Connector
(Includes Screw and Lug)
225-1851
19 Indicating Plate
Standard Size (Without Legend)
Large Size (Specify Legend)
1
—
—
As Req. Above
30-4460
10250TR30
20 Retaining Nut 1 15-1547
21 Knob
Socket Set Screw
(#6-32 x 0.250" Long)
1
1
53-1314
11-2014
22 Coupling 1 29-3749-2
23 Set Screw (#6-32 x 0.188" Long) 1 11-1199
24 Spacer 2 56-1066-18
25 Connector
(Includes Screw and Lug)
125-1851-2
26 Mounting Nut 1 15-1938
27 4-Position Joystick Operating
Mechanism (Complete)
124-6565
28 (Not Shown) 4-Position Joystick
Operating Mechanism
(With Latch) Complete
124-6565-2
29 Spring Loaded Latch 1 52-1214-2
30 Hand Operated Latch 1 52-913-3
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-159
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Mounting Options
Mounting
Panel Thickness
■Minimum: 0.06 inch (1.6 mm)
■Maximum: 0.25 inch (8 mm) including
legend plate
■Maximum can be increased to 0.375
inch (15.9 mm) using optional
retaining nut
❑Indicating light: 10250TA30
❑Pushbutton/selector switch:
10250TA31
Table 47-254. Mounting Matrix
Legend
Plate
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
ABCD
Small 1.63
(41.3)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
1.63
(41.3)
Medium 1.75
(44.5)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
1.75
(44.5)
Large 2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
Figure 47-117. Mounting Options in Inches (mm)
Horizontal mounting means terminals
are located top and bottom of contact
block. Vertical mounting means termi-
nals are left and right of contact block.
This allows close spacing of adjacent
operators with easy access to terminals.
Note: Locating nib hole or notch is 0.14 inch
(3.6 mm) #29 drill. Figure 47-118. Drilling Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
B
Min.
C
Min.
0.6
(15.2)
A
Min. 1.22
(31)
D
Min.
Horizontal Mounting Vertical Mounting
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.
Terminals on Top
Terminals at Side
0.6
(15.2)
1.20
(30.5)
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.
January 2010
47-160
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Dimensions
Dimensions
Figure 47-119. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Flush and Long Pushbutton
Half Shroud Is Same as Long Pushbutton
with Lower Half of Guard Ring Cut Back
1.81
(46) 1.09
(27.7)
1.06
(26.9)
0.38
(9.7)
1.38
(35.1) 1.13
(28.7)
0.88 (22.4)
for Each
Additional
Contact Block
1.75
(44.5)
2.63
(66.8)
1.65
(41.9)
1.78
(45.2)
0.25
(6.4)
1.63
(41.4)
1.5
(38.1)
2.5
(63.5)
1.78
(45.2)
Long
Button
Only
1.91
(48.5)
Pushbutton with
Cylinder Lock
Mushroom and
Jumbo Head Pushbutton
Flush Pushbutton Operator
with Padlock Attachment
Push-Pull Switch Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator
with Padlock Attachment
Jumbo Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator
with Padlock Attachment
PresTest Indicating Light – Transformer Type
PresTest Indicating Light – Resistor Type
Indicating Light – Transformer Type
Indicating Light – Resistor and Neon Type Master Test Indicating Light
Illuminated Pushbutton
1.8
(45.7)
1.81
(46)
1.88
(47.8)
1.63
(41.4)
B
Spade Terminal
A
Screw Terminal
1.88
(47.8)
1.56
(39.6)
A
1.1
(27.9)
A
1.13
(28.7)
1.09
(27.7)
1.09
(27.7)
0.69
(17.5)
1.13
(28.7)
1.38
(35.1)
1.38
(35.1)
0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4)
Panel Thickness
0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4)
Panel Thickness
2.03
(51.6)
2.0
(50.8)
1.5
(38.1)
1.09
(27.7)
0.88
(22.4)
0.88
(22.4) 1.13
(28.7)
1.78
(45.2)
1.78
(45.2)
1.1
(27.9)
2.19
(55.6)
1.94
(49.3)
1.56
(39.6) 2.5
(63.5)
2.31
(58.7)
2.38
(60.5)
1.78
(45.2)
1.38
(35.1) 1.78
(45.2)
1.38
(35.1)
1.78
(45.2)
1.38
(35.1)
1.38
(35.1)
1.38
(35.1) 1.75
(44.5)
1.78
(45.2)
1.63
(41.4)
2.5
(63.5)
2.0
(50.8)
1.75
(44.5)
1.13
(28.7)
Plastic 1.38 (35.1)
Glass 1.59 (40.4)
Lens Dimension A
Plastic 1.38 (35.1)
Glass 1.56 (39.6)
Description Dim. in Inches (mm)
BC
Relay Type
Solid-State Type
4.38 (111.2)
2.94 (74.7)
4.28 (108.7)
2.88 (73.2)
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-161
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Dimensions
Figure 47-120. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
0.75
(19.1) 0.84
(21.3)
0.94
(23.9)
1.63
(41.4)
0.89
(22.6)
Adjustable
2.06
(52.3)
0.38
(9.7)
0.84
(21.3)
0.88
(22.4)
for Each
Additional
Contact
Block
1.07
(27.2)
0.97
(24.6)
1.5
(38.1)
0.25
(6.4)
1.06
(26.9)
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
A
1.09
(27.7)
1.53
(38.9)
0.38 (9.7)
Long
Button
Only
1.96
(49.8)
1.88
(47.8)
1.59
(40.4)
1.33
(33.8)
1.59
(40.4) 1.63
(41.4)
1.75
(44.5)
2.06
(52.3)
3.75
(95.3)
2.5 (63.5)
main.
2.2 (55.9)
mom.
4.0
(101.6)
1.38
(35.1)
2.13
(54.1)
1.25
(31.8)
3.88
(98.6)
0.89
(22.6)
0.88 (22.4)
per Block
0.06 (1.5) to
0.26 (6.6)
Panel Thickness
Key Operated
Selector Switch
2-Position Joystick Operator
Lever Operator
(For Use with Two Vertically
Mounted Flush Pushbuttons)
Catalog No. 10250TA14
Flexible Boot for
Protecting Flush or
Long Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA3
Typical
Transparent Flexible Boot
for Illuminated Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA25
Padlock Attachment
for Knob Selector Switch
Catalog No. 10250TA11
Maintained Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA66 Typical
Padlock Attachment
for Flush Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA2
Padlock Attachment
for Extended Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA26
Maintained Contact
Attachment
Catalog No. 10250TA17 Typical
4-Position Joystick Operator Wobble Stick
Catalog No. 10250TA5
Illuminated Selector
Switch
Roto-Push
Lever
Knob
Coin Slot
1.88
(47.8)
3.75
(95.3)
1.25
(31.8)
1.44
(36.6)
1.22
(31)
2.44
(62)
1.19
(30.2)
0.88 (22.4)
Per Unit
2.19
(55.6)
3.59
(91.2)
Cam
1.47
(37.3)
1.88
(47.8)
0.44
(11.2)
Contact
Block
0.91
(23.1)
1.63 (41.4)
Min.
2.31 (58.7)
Max.
1.62 (41.1)
Min.
2.5 (63.5)
Max.
21°
21°
1.13
(28.7)
Potentiometer Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
ABC
2 Watt Single 1.31
(33.3)
0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)
25 Watt —
Up to 25M Ohms
2.38
(60.5)
1.19
(30.2)
0.81
(20.6)
50M Ohms 2.56
(65)
1.69
(42.9)
1.25
(31.8)
Cat. No.
Operator
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
AB
10250T330 0.38 (9.7) Dia. x
0.38 (9.7) Long
0.25 (6.4) Dia. x
0.63 (16) Long
10250TH3872 0.38 (9.7) Dia. x
0.38 (9.7) Long
0.25 (6.4) Dia. x
0.88 (22.4) Long
Potentiometer
1.88
(47.8)
1.31
(33.3)
1.09
(27.7) 1.0
(25.4)
0.75
(19.1)
0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)
Std. Dial Plate
Large Dial Plate
Shaft Dimensions of Potentiometer
That C-H Operator Will Accept
A
B
Shaft
Threaded
Bushing
Operator Dim. A
Knob 1.38 (35.1)
Lever 1.50 (38.1)
Coin Slot 1.38 (35.1)
January 2010
47-162
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Dimensions
Figure 47-121. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1.75
(44.5)
1.50
(38.1)
0.44
(11.2)
0.84
(21.3)
0.38
(9.7)
Protecting Shroud for
Illuminated Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA15
Protecting Shroud for
Mushroom Head Button
Catalog No. 10250TA6
Padlock Cover Gaurd
for Flush Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA36
Padlock Hasp or
Flip-Up Guard
Catalog No. 10250TA38
Lever for Roto-Push Operator
Catalog No. 10250TA13
Extended Retaining Nut
Catalog No. 10250TA12
1.53
(38.9) 1.50
(38.1)
1.16
(29.5)
1.0
(25.4)
1.75
(44.5)
1.81
(46)
1.69
(42.9)
1.91
(48.5)
1.38
(35.1)
2.19
(55.6)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
1.65
(41.9)
Protecting Shroud for
Jumbo Mushroom Head Button
Catalog No. 10250TA56
3.25
(82.6)
0.91
(23.1)
Padlock Attachment
for Maintained Push-Pull Operator
Catalog No. 10250TA64
2.19
(55.6)
1.47
(37.3)
1.25
(31.8)
0.38
(9.7)
0.94
(23.9)
1.25
(31.8)
1.63
(41.4)
1.14
(29)
6 Mounting Holes
1.78
(45.2) A
1.31
(33.3)
Master Test Module,
Flasher Module
Legend Plate
B
B
Min.
A
Min.
0.6
(15.2)
A
Min. 1.22
(31)
B
Min.
Horizontal Rows Vertical Rows
Terminals on Top
Terminals at
Side 2.16
(54.9)
1.31
(33.3)
1.88
(47.8)
0.75
(19.1)
Multiple Button Guard
A
A C
D
Chain Hook Bracket
BE
0.38 (9.7)
Dia. Hole
Panel Drilling and Minimum Spacing
If Jumbo plates are to be placed one
above the other vertically, add 0.13 (3.3)
to minimum dimensions listed.
Note: Locating nib hole or notch is
1.36" – 1.4" (34.5 – 35.6 mm) #29 drill.
Legend
Plate
Dim. in Inches (mm)
A Min. B Min.
1 or 2 Circuit Contact Blocks
Small or None
Standard
Jumbo
Extra Large
1.63 (41.4)
1.75 (44.5)
2.25 (57.2)
2.50 (63.5)
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
2.60 (66)
4 Circuit Contact Block 10250T44
Small or None
Standard
Jumbo
Extra Large
1.88 (47.8)
1.88 (47.8)
2.25 (57.2)
2.50 (63.5)
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
2.60 (66)
Enclosure Size
(No. of
Elements)
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
DE
2, 3, & 4 3.75 (95.3) 1.94 (49.3) 0.13 (3.3) 2.69 (68.3) 1.38 (35.1)
6 & 7 4.0 (101.6) 2.19 (55.6) 0.13 (3.3) 2.88 (73.2) 1.63 (41.4)
For plastic legend plate, Dimension B is
1.12 (28.4).
Legend
Plate
Dim. in Inches (mm)
AB
1/2 Round Legend Plates
Small
Standard
Jumbo
1.56 (39.6)
1.59 (40.4)
2.06 (52.3)
0.91 (23.1)
1.07 (27.2)
1.53 (38.9)
Square Legend Plates
Small
Standard
Jumbo
Extra Large
1.59 (40.4) Sq.
1.75 (44.5) Sq.
2.19 (55.6) Sq.
2.44 (62.0) Sq.
0.90 (22.9)
1.06 (26.9)
1.50 (38.1)
1.63 (41.4)
Number of
Elements
Dimension
A
2
3
4
7
4.0 (101.6)
5.88 (149.4)
7.88 (200.2)
13.38 (339.9)
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-163
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Ordering Example
Ordering Complete Devices
Complete 10250T Pushbuttons, Indi-
cating Lights and/or Selector Switch
operators including contact block(s)
and legend plate can be ordered using
a single composite catalog number.
The individually packaged compo-
nents will be shipped unassembled in
a single overpack carton marked with
the composite Catalog Number. Con-
struct Catalog Number as follows.
Ordering Example
Example: Illuminated Pushbutton
Device — Catalog Number
10250T411C21-153S33
Table 47-255. Catalog Numbering System
For a complete Catalog Number breakdown, see Pages 47-164 – 47-165.
Insert
Hyphen
Before
Contact
Block(s)
Contact
Blocks
10250T1 &
10250T53
Operator
Lens
10250TC21
Legend
Plate
10250TS33
1 0 2 5 0 T 4 1 1 C 2 1 – 1 5 3 S 3 3
January 2010
47-164
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Catalog Number Structure
Catalog Number Structure
Table 47-256. Non-illuminated Pushbuttons Catalog Numbering System
Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory.
Table 47-257. Illuminated and Non-illuminated Push-Pulls Catalog Numbering System
Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory.
1 0 2 5 0 T 1 0 1 –1
Operator
10 =
11 =
12 =
17 =
50 =
51 =
Flush
Extended
40 mm Mushroom
65 mm Mushroom
1/2 Shroud Vertical Mount
1/2 Shroud Horizontal Mount
Button Color
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
8 =
9 =
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Gray
White
Blue
Orange
Circuit
Blank =
1 =
2 =
3 =
51 =
53 =
Operator Only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO
1 0 2 5 0 T 5 6 3 C 4 7 –1
Operator
5 =
4 =
9 =
10 =
2-Position Maintained
3-Position Mom Push-Mom Pull
3-Position MT Push-Mom-Pull
3-Position Mom Push-Mom Pull
Circuit
Blank =
1 =
2 =
3 =
51 =
53 =
Operator Only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO
Incandescent
Light Unit
LED
Light Unit
Blank =
89 =
63 =
64 =
65 =
82 =
66 =
67 =
68 =
69 =
70 =
79 =
83 =
80 =
81 =
Non-ill.
24V/XFR
120V/XFR
208V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
Blank =
89L =
63L =
64L =
65L =
82L =
66L =
67L =
68L =
97L =
Non-ill.
24V/XFR
120V/XFR
208V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full Voltage
LED Voltage
Blank =
Blank =
06 =
12 =
24 =
48 =
60 =
2A =
2D =
Non-ill.
Incand.
6V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
48V AC/DC
60V AC/DC
120V AC
120V DC
Non-illuminated Illuminated
Button Incandescent LED Lens Type
B60 =
B62 =
B63 =
B61 =
B64 =
J60 =
J62 =
J63 =
J61 =
J64 =
Black 40 mm
Red 40 mm
Red 40 mm – “E” STOP
Green 40 mm
Blue 40 mm
Black 65 mm
Red 65 mm
Red 65 mm – “E” STOP
Green 65 mm
Yellow 65 mm
C47 =
C53 =
C48 =
C49 =
C50 =
C51 =
C52 =
C57 =
C63 =
C58 =
C59 =
C64 =
C60 =
C61 =
C62 =
C65 =
C66 =
C67 =
RD =
ED =
GD =
LD =
AD =
WD =
– =
RS =
ES =
GS =
LS =
AS =
YS =
WS =
– =
RH =
GH =
AH =
Red 40 mm
Red 40 mm – “E” STOP
Green 40 mm
Blue 40 mm
Amber 40 mm
White 40 mm
Clear 40 mm
Red Side Light
Red Side Lt. – “E” STOP
Green Side Light
Blue Side Light
Amber Side Light
Yellow Side Light
White Side Light
Clear Side Light
Red Heavy-Duty
Green Heavy-Duty
Amber Heavy-Duty
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-165
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
10250T Series, Catalog Number Structure
Table 47-258. Illuminated Pushbuttons Catalog Numbering System
Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory.
Table 47-259. Standard Indicating Lights, PresTest and Master Test Catalog Numbering System
Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory.
1 0 2 5 0 T 4 1 6 C 2 1 –1
Circuit
Blank =
1 =
2 =
3 =
51 =
53 =
Operator Only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO
Incandescent Light Unit LED Light Unit
416 =
412 =
412 =
419 =
413 =
414 =
415 =
473 =
474 =
476 =
477 =
478 =
471 =
472 =
24V/XFR
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
48V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
416L =
411L =
412L =
419L =
413L =
414L =
415L =
397L =
24V/XFR
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full Voltage
LED Voltage
Blank =
06 =
12 =
24 =
48 =
60 =
2A =
2D =
Incand.
6V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
48V AC/DC
60V AC/DC
120V AC
120V DC
Incandescent Lens Color LED Lens Color
C21 =
C22 =
C23 =
C26 =
C24 =
C43 =
C25 =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
RD =
GD =
YD =
WD =
LD =
AD =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
1 0 2 5 0 T 2 0 3 N C 1 N
Light Unit Type
Standard – Incandescent Standard – LED
181N =
182N =
198N =
183N =
184N =
185N =
203N =
204N =
206N =
207N =
208N =
201N =
202N =
226N =
227N =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
48V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
120V/Neon
240V/Neon
181L =
182L =
198L =
183L =
184L =
185L =
197L =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full Voltage
PresTest – LED
221L =
222L =
223L =
224L =
225L =
297L =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full Voltage
PresTest – Incandescent
221N =
222N =
223N =
224N =
225N =
232N =
233N =
235N =
238N =
239N =
231N =
240N =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
48V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
Master Test – Incandescent
187N =
189N =
120V/XFR
240V AC – SS
LED Voltage
Blank =
06 =
12 =
24 =
48 =
60 =
2A =
2D =
Incand.
6V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
48V AC/DC
60V AC/DC
120V AC
120V DC
Plastic Glass Lens Color Plastic Glass Lens Color
Standard/Master – Incandescent Standard/Master/PresTest – LED
C1N =
C2N =
C3N =
C6N =
C4N =
C19N =
C5N =
C7N =
C8N =
– =
C12N =
C10N =
C9N =
C11N =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
RP =
GP =
YP =
WP =
LP =
AP =
RG =
GG =
– =
WG =
LG =
AG =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
PresTest – Incandescent
C21 =
C22 =
C23 =
C26 =
C24 =
C43 =
C25 =
C13N =
C14N =
– =
C18N =
C16N =
C15N =
C17N =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
January 2010
47-166
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series
Contents
Description Page
Product Description . . . . . . . . . 47-166
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-166
Standards and
Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-167
Technical Data and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-167
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton
Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-168
Indicating Light Units . . . . . 47-168
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-169
Illuminated Pushbuttons
and Indicating Lights . . . . 47-170
Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . 47-171
Illuminated Push-Pull
Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-172
Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . . 47-174
Push-Pulls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-175
Selector Switch Units . . . . . 47-177
Selector Switch Selection. . . 47-178
Selector Switch Operators . . 47-180
Illuminated Selector
Switch Operators . . . . . . . 47-181
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . 47-182
Options
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . 47-184
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-185
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-187
Renewal Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-189
Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-190
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-191
Ordering Complete
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-192
Catalog Number
Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-193
Product Description
Operator
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer® E34 Series
30.5 mm pushbutton line features the
same rugged die cast construction of
our 10250T line with an additional two-
layer 100% solid thermosetting
cathodic epoxy coating. This coating
provides a flat black smooth, consis-
tent, corrosion resistant surface that
has passed a demanding 600 hour salt
spray test. (The industry standard for
this 4X test requires only 200 hours.)
Ultraviolet Light
E34 cathodic coating is not recom-
mended for use in applications where
exposure to ultraviolet light exists —
use NEMA 4X 10250T operators.
Reliability Nibs
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer contact blocks
feature enclosed silver contacts with
pointed “reliability nibs” for reliable
performance from logic level up to
600V. To ensure reliable switching,
nibs bite through oxide which can form
on silver contacts, eliminating the
need for expensive logic level blocks
for most applications.
Figure 47-122. Reliability Nibs
Liquid Drainage
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer pushbutton
operators offer front of panel drainage
via holes in the operator bushing. Hid-
den from view by the mounting nut,
these holes prevent buildup of liquid
inside the operator, which can prevent
operation in freezing environments.
The holes also provide a route for
escaping liquid in high pressure wash-
downs, effectively relieving pressure
from the internal diaphragm seal,
ensuring reliable sealing in applica-
tions even beyond NEMA 4.
Figure 47-123. Diaphragm Seal
Features
■Epoxy-coated metal operators
■Corrosion resistant
■Integral ground screw terminal on
operators
■FDA approved for sanitary chemical
resistance requirements
Heavy-Duty
Dry Circuit
Medium Duty
Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
Drainage Hole
Drainage Hole
Flexible
Diaphragm
Stainless
Steel
Operating
Spring
Mounting Nut
Colorfast
Molded
Button
E34 Series
Octagonal Mounting Nut Self-Adjusts to
Panel Thickness — Eliminates Spacer Washers
and Set Screws Internal Sealing Diaphragm
for Excellent Sealing
Terminal Clamps Shipped
Open Ready to Wire
3 Styles of Legend Plates
in 4 Sizes Wide Variety of Operator
Types and Colors
Die Cast Construction with Thick,
Tough Corrosion Resistant Coating Stackable Contact Blocks up
to 12 Circuits per Operator
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-167
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Technical Data and Specifications
Standards and Certifications
■CE EN60947-5-1
■UL 508 — File No. E131568
■CSA C22.2 No. 14 — File No. LR68551
■FDA 3-A Sanitary Standards
Ingress Protection
When mounted in similarly rated
enclosure —
■Standard Indicating Lights
❑UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4,
4X, 12, 13
❑IEC IP65
■All Other Operators
❑UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X,
12, 13
❑IEC IP65
Technical Data and
Specifications
Mechanical Ratings
■Frequency of operation
❑All pushbuttons:
6000 operations/hr.
❑Key and lever selector switches:
3000 operations/hr.
❑Auto-latch devices:
1200 operations/hr.
■Life
❑Pushbuttons: 10 x 106 operations
❑Contact blocks: 10 x 106 operations
❑PresTest units: 10 x 106 operations
❑Lever and key selector switches:
0.25 x 106 operations
❑Twist to release pushbuttons:
0.3 x 106 operations
■Shock resistance
❑Duration: 210 mS ≥ 5g
Climate Conditions
■Operating Temperature: 1° to 150°F
(-17° to 66°C)
■Storage Temperature: -40° to 176°F
(-40° to 80°C)
■Altitude: 6,562 ft. (2,000m)
■Humidity: Max. 95% RH @ 60°C
Electrical Ratings
Table 47-260. Contact Block
■Insulation: Ui = 660V AC or DC
■Thermal: lth = 10A
Short Circuit Coordination to
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
■Rated conditional short circuit cur-
rent: 1 kA
■Fuse type: GE Power Controls TIA
10, Red Spot Type gG, 10A,
660V AC, 460V DC, BS88-2,
IEC 60269-2-1
■UL rating: A600, P600
❑AC load life duty cycle
1200 operations/hour
– 10A: 110V pf 0.4 – 1 x 106
operations
– 5A: 250V pf 0.4 – 1 x 106
operations
– 2A: 660V pf 0.4 – 1 x 106
operations
■Switching capacity
❑AC15 rated make/break
(11 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
– 6A: 120V pf 0.3
– 4A: 240V pf 0.3
– 2A: 660V pf 0.3
❑DC13 rated make/break
(1.1 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
– 1.0A: 125V L/R ≥ 0.95 at 300 mS
– 0.55A: 250V L/R ≥ 0.95 at 300 mS
– 0.1A: 660V L/R ≥ 0.95 at 300 mS
– 10A: 110V pure resistive
■Maximum ratings for logic level
and hostile atmosphere application
❑Maximum amperes: 0.5A
❑Maximum volts: 120V AC/DC
■Low voltage switching: Conical
shaped points or “reliability nibs”
improve performance in dry circuit,
corrosive, fine dust and other con-
taminated atmospheres. Under
normal environmental conditions,
the minimum operational voltage is
5V and the minimum operational
current is 1 mA, AC/DC.
■Contact operation: Slow make and
break. All normally closed contacts
have positive opening operation,
i.e., normally closed contacts are
forced open in the event of contact
weld or spring breakage.
Light Units
■Transformers: will withstand short
circuit for 1 hour per IEC 60947-5-1
■Bulbs — average life:
❑Transformer type: 20,000 hrs.
❑Resistor/direct voltage type:
2500 hrs. minimum @ rated V
❑LED: 60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
Terminals
■Marking: NC-NO on the contact block
to meet the NEMA requirements.
Dual marking system 1 – 2 for nor-
mally closed, 3 – 4 for normally open
to meet BS5472 (Cenelec EN50 005).
■Clamps: Terminals are saddle clamp
type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to
2 x 14 AWG (2.5 mm2) conductors.
■Torque = 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
■Degree of protection against direct
electrical contact: IP2X with finger-
proof shroud
Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC
Description Volts AC 50 or 60 Hz Volts DC
120 240 480 600 24/28 125 250
Make and Emergency
Interrupting Capacity (Amp)
Normal Load Break (Amp)
Thermal Current (Amp)
Voltamperes:
Make and Emergency
Interrupting Capacity
Normal Load Break
60
6
10
7200
720
30
3
10
7200
720
15
1.5
10
7200
720
12
1.2
10
7200
720
5.7
5.7
5.0
138
138
1.1
1.1
5.0
138
138
0.55
0.55
5.0
138
138
Fuse
January 2010
47-168
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Momentary Pushbutton and Indicating Light Units
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units
■Non-illuminated
Table 47-261. Pushbutton Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Anodized aluminum head — may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.
Indicating Light Units
■Plastic Lenses
Table 47-262. Indicating Light Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Anodized aluminum head — may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators
where exposed to ultraviolet light, see
Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Contact
Type
Button Color Flush Button Extended Button Mushroom Button Jumbo Mushroom
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1NO Black
Red
Green
Red — Engraved
EMERG. STOP
E34PB1-53X
E34PB2-53X
E34PB3-53X
—
E34EB1-53X
E34EB2-53X
E34EB3-53X
—
E34LB1-53X
E34LB2-53X
E34LB3-53X
—
E34JB1-53X
E34JB2-53X
E34JB3-53X
E34JB2N8-53X
1NC Black
Red
Green
Red — Engraved
EMERG. STOP
E34PB1-51X
E34PB2-51X
E34PB3-51X
—
E34EB1-51X
E34EB2-51X
E34EB3-51X
—
E34LB1-51X
E34LB2-51X
E34LB3-51X
—
E34JB1-51X
E34JB2-51X
E34JB3-51X
E34JB2N8-51X
1NO-1NC Black
Red
Green
Red — Engraved
EMERG. STOP
E34PB1-1X
E34PB2-1X
E34PB3-1X
—
E34EB1-1X
E34EB2-1X
E34EB3-1X
—
E34LB1-1X
E34LB2-1X
E34LB3-1X
—
E34JB1-1X
E34JB2-1X
E34JB3-1X
E34JB2N8-1X
24V Full Voltage
Indicating Light — Red
Catalog Number
E34FB24H2X
Lamp Type Voltage Color Indicating Light LED/Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
LED Full Voltage 24V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
E34FB197LRP24
E34FB197LGP24
E34FB197LAP24
Bayonet Base
120V AC Red
Green
Amber
E34FB197LRP2A
E34FB197LGP2A
E34FB197LAP2A
Incandescent Full Voltage 24V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
E34FB24H2X
E34FB24H3X
E34FB24H9X
#757
Resistor 120V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
E34RB120H2X
E34RB120H3X
E34RB120H9X
120MB
Transformer 120V AC
50/60 Hz
Red
Green
Amber
E34TB120H2X
E34TB120H3X
E34TB120H9X
#755
Additional Light Units . . . . . Page 47-170
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-169
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Momentary Pushbutton Components
Pushbuttons
Table 47-263. Momentary Pushbutton Operators, Non-illuminated — UL
(NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Anodized aluminum head — may not be suitable for some corrosive
environments.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet
light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Contact Blocks
See Page 47-182 for additional contact blocks, fingerproof
shrouds and Transparent Amber colored blocks.
Contact Block
Table 47-264. Contact Blocks
Color Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Flush Button
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
E34PB1
E34PB2
E34PB3
E34PB4
E34PB5
E34PB6
E34PB7
E34PB8
Extended Button
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
E34EB1
E34EB2
E34EB3
E34EB4
E34EB5
E34EB6
E34EB7
E34EB8
Half Shrouded Button
Vertical Horizontal
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
E34EVB1
E34EVB2
E34EVB3
E34EVB4
E34EVB5
E34EVB6
E34EVB7
E34EVB8
E34EHB1
E34EHB2
E34EHB3
E34EHB4
E34EHB5
E34EHB6
E34EHB7
E34EHB8
Mushroom Button
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
E34LB1
E34LB2
E34LB3
E34LB4
E34LB6
Anodized Aluminum Jumbo Mushroom Button
Black
Red
Red
(Engraved EMER. STOP)
Green
Yellow
E34JB1
E34JB2
E34JB2N8
E34JB3
E34JB4
Symbol Circuit Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
NC 10250T51
NO 10250T53
NO-NC 10250T1
2NC 10250T3
2NO 10250T2
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-187 – 47-188
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
January 2010
47-170
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Illuminated Components
Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Table 47-265. Operators without Lens
These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color, see Page 47-157 for LED Selection and Pages 47-193 – 47-194 for Catalog
Numbering Structure.
Resistor units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Table 47-266. Indicating Light Lens
Glass lens has black anodized aluminum bezel.
Table 47-267. Illuminated Pushbutton Lens
Table 47-268. PresTest Lens
Glass lens has black anodized aluminum bezel.
Light Unit Type Type Voltage Illuminated
Pushbutton
Indicating
Light
PresTest Lamp Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
LED
(LEDs not included)
Full Voltage — E34CB497L E34FB197L E34FPB297L Bayonet
Base
Transformer
AC Only
24
120
240
277
380
480
600
E34XB024L
E34XB120L
E34XB240L
E34XB277L
E34XB380L
E34XB480L
E34XB600L
—
E34TB120L
E34TB240L
E34TB277L
E34TB380L
E34TB480L
E34TB600L
—
E34TPB120L
E34TPB240L
—
E34TPB380L
E34TPB480L
E34TPB600L
Incandescent Full Voltage
AC/DC
6
12
24
32
48
E34CB06
E34CB12
E34CB24
E34CB32
E34CB48
E34FB06
E34FB12
E34FB24
E34FB32
E34FB48
E34FPB06
E34FPB12
E34FPB24
E34FPB32
E34FPB48
#755
#756
#757
#1828
#1835
Resistor
AC/DC
120
240
E34SB120
E34SB240
E34RB120
E34RB240
E34RPB120
E34RPB240
120MB
120MB
Transformer
AC Only
24
120
240
277
380
480
600
E34XB024
E34XB120
E34XB240
E34XB277
E34XB380
E34XB480
E34XB600
—
E34TB120
E34TB240
E34TB277
E34TB380
E34TB480
E34TB600
—
E34TPB120
E34TPB240
—
E34TPB380
E34TPB480
E34TPB600
#755
Neon
AC/DC
120
240
—
—
E34NB120
E34NB240
—
—
NE51H-R-22
NE51H-4-68
Color Plastic Glass
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E34H2
E34H3
E34H4
E34H5
E34H6
E34H9
E34H0
E34G2
E34G3
E34G4
E34G5
E34G6
E34G9
E34G0
Color Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E34V2
E34V3
E34V4
E34V5
E34V6
E34V9
E34V0
Glass
Plastic
Color Plastic Glass
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E34V2
E34V3
E34V4
E34V5
E34V6
E34V9
E34V0
E34P2
E34P3
E34P4
E34P5
E34P6
E34P9
E34P0
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
Glass
Plastic
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-171
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Push-Pull Units
Push-Pull Units
■Two- and Three-Position
■Non-illuminated
Table 47-269. 2-Position Push-Pull Units Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the table below.
Example: E34GDBC6-1X.
Table 47-270. 3-Position Push-Pull Units Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Button and Color Selection Table
below. Example: E34GDBC6-1X.
Table 47-271. Button and Color Selection Table
Anodized aluminum may not be suitable for use on some corrosive applications.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Operator Position Button Type/Color Push-Pull Contact Type Mounting Location
Pull Push Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
AB
Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
O
X
X
O
40 mm/Red
40 mm Engraved
EMERGENCY STOP/Red
65 mm Alum. Engraved
EMERGENCY STOP/Red
E34GDBC2-1X
E34GDBC2N8-1X
E34GDBJ2N8-1X
1NO
1NC
Operator Position Button Type/Color Push-Pull Contact Type Mounting Location
Pull Intermediate Push Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
AB
Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
X
X
O
X
O
O
40 mm/ Black
40 mm/Red
40 mm Engraved
EMERGENCY STOP/Red
E34GFBC1-3X
E34GFBC2-3X
E34GFBC2N8-3X
1NC
1NC
Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
X
X
O
X
O
O
40 mm/Black
40 mm/Red
E34GEBC1-3X
E34GEBC2-3X
1NC
1NC
O
X
O
O
X
O
40 mm/Black
40 mm/Red
E34GHBC1-1X
E34GHBC2-1X
1NO
1NC
Standard — 40 mm Color Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Jumbo Mushroom Head
(Anodized) Aluminum — 65 mm
Color Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Black
Red
Red (EMERG. STOP)
Green
Blue
C1
C2
C2N8
C3
C6
E34C1
E34C2
E34C2N8
E34C3
E34C6
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
J2
J2N8
E34J2
E34J2N8
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-187 – 47-188
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-172
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
■Two-Position Maintained
■Illuminated
Table 47-272. 2-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from Lens and Color Selection Table below.
Example: E34GDB79 M3-1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-176.
Table 47-273. Lens and Color Selection Table
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see
Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Illuminated
Push-Pull Unit
Operator Position Lamp Type Voltage Red Standard Push-Pull Contact
Type
Mounting Location LED/Lamp
Number
Maintained — Pull Maintained — Push Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
AB
O
X
X
O
LED Full Voltage 24V AC/DC E34GDB97LRD24-1X
1NO
1NC
Bayonet
Base
120V AC/DC E34GDB97LRD2A-1X
Transformer 24V AC E34GDB89LRD06-1X
120V AC E34GDB63LRD06-1X
O
X
X
O
Incan-
descent
Full Voltage 24V AC/DC E34GDB79M2-1X
1NO
1NC
#757
Resistor 120V AC/DC E34GDB80M2-1X 120MB
Transformer 24V AC E34GDB89M2-1X #755
120V AC E34GDB63M2-1X
Type Color Incand.
Suffix Code
LED
Suffix Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Standard Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
White
Clear
M2
M2N8
M3
M6
M9
M5
M0
RD
ED
GD
LD
AD
WD
CD
E34M2
E34M2N8
E34M3
E34M6
E34M9
E34M5
E34M0
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-187 – 47-188
Additional Light Units . . . . Page 47-176
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-173
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
(Continued)
■Three-Position Momentary
■Illuminated
Table 47-274. 3-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from Lens and Color Selection Table on the bottom
of Page 47-172. Example: E34GEB79M3-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-176.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Illuminated
Push-Pull Unit
Operator Position Lamp Type Voltage Red Standard
Push-Pull
Contact
Type
Mounting
Location
LED/Lamp
Number
Momentary —
Pull
Maintained —
Intermediate
Momentary —
Push
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
AB
O
X
O
O
X
O
LED Full
Voltage
24V AC/DC E34GHB97LRD24-1X
1NO
1NC
Bayonet
Base
120V AC E34GHB97LRD2A-1X
Trans-
former
24V AC E34GHB89LRD06-1X
120V AC E34GHB63LRD06-1X
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full
Voltage
24V AC/DC E34GEB97LRD24-3X
1NC
1NC
Bayonet
Base
120V AC E34GEB97LRD2A-3X
Trans-
former
24V AC E34GEB89LRD06-3X
120V AC E34GEB63LRD06-3X
O
X
O
O
X
O
Incan-
descent
Full
Voltage
24V AC/DC E34GHB79M2-1X
1NO
1NC
#757
Resistor 120V AC E34GHB80M2-1X 120MB
Trans-
former
24V AC E34GHB89M2-1X #755
120V AC E34GHB63M2-1X
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full
Voltage
24V AC/DC E34GEB79M2-3X
1NC
1NC
#757
Resistor 120V AC E34GEB80M2-3X 120MB
Trans-
former
24V AC E34GEB89M2-3X #755
120V AC E34GEB63M2-3X
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-187 – 47-188
Additional Light Units . . . . . Page 47-176
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-174
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units and Potentiometers
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
(Continued)
■Three-Position — Maintained Push,
Momentary Pull
■Illuminated
Table 47-275. 3-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from table on the bottom of Page 47-172.
Example: E34GFB79M3-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-176.
Potentiometers
Table 47-276. Potentiometer with Knob and Standard Dial Plate — Linear Type ±10% — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add Suffix 36 to Catalog Number. Example: E34PDB1F136. To order separately,
see footnote below.
Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 inch high. For custom stamped legend plates, order legend plate as separate item 10250TR30 and
specify stamping.
For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing on Page 47-161.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Illuminated
Push-Pull Unit
Operator Position Lamp Type Voltage Red Standard
Push-Pull
Contact
Type
Mounting Location LED/Lamp
Number
Momentary —
Pull
Maintained —
Intermediate
Maintained —
Push
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
AB
X
X
O
X
O
O
LED Full
Voltage
24V AC/DC E34GFB97LRD24-3X
1NC
1NC
Bayonet
Base
120V AC E34GFB97LRD2A-3X
Trans-
former
24V AC E34GFB89LRD06-3X
120V AC E34GFB63LRD06-3X
X
X
O
X
O
O
Incan-
descent
Full
Voltage
24V AC/DC E34GFB79M2-3X
1NC
1NC
#757
Resistor 120V AC E34GFB80M2-3X 120MB
Trans-
former
24V AC E34GFB89M2-3X #755
120V AC E34GFB63M2-3X
Vertical or Horizontal
One-Hole Mounting
Potentiometer
Ohms
2 Watt (60V Max.) Single
Potentiometer with Standard
Aluminum Dial Plate
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1000
2500
5000
10000
25000
50000
E34PDB1F1
E34PDB1F2
E34PDB1F5
E34PDB1F10
E34PDB1F25
E34PDB1F50
Operator Only E34PDB1A0
Alternative – Black Plastic Large
Legend with Standard Markings
E34LP99
With Standard
Aluminum Dial Plate
Potentiometer
1.88
(47.8)
1.31
(33.3)
1.09
(27.7) 1.0
(25.4)
0.75
(19.1)
0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)
Std. Dial Plate
Large Dial Plate
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-187 – 47-188
Additional Light Units . . . . Page 47-176
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-175
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Push-Pull Components
Push-Pull Operators
An illuminated Push-Pull pushbutton
unit, arranged for one-hole mounting,
can replace two pushbuttons and a
pilot light or the non-illuminated form
can replace two pushbuttons. These
units are available in three basic types:
■Maintained — (Two-Position).
Maintains in the pulled or pushed
position until manually actuated to
the opposite mode.
■Momentary — (Three-Position).
Spring returns to an intermediate
position when pulled or pushed and
released.
■Momentary Pull, Maintained Push
— (Three-Position). Spring returns
to intermediate position when pulled.
Maintains in pushed position until
manually returned to intermediate
(ready to reset) position. Maintained
stop holds circuit open and will
prevent other series connected
operators from starting the system.
The Operators, Buttons, Contact
Blocks, etc., are offered as building
block components that can be inter-
mixed to satisfy many requirements.
This minimizes the need for a varied
and costly inventory.
Application Guide
To assist in the selection of contact
blocks, the sketch to the right shows
pictorially by symbols A and B locations
of contact circuits after assembly of
contact blocks and adapter to the oper-
ator. The chart below shows the effect
of the push and pull operations on
either NO or NC contacts. (X = contact
closed, O = contact open)
Figure 47-124. Contact Circuit Locations
Table 47-277. Push-Pull Operator Components
Special function contact blocks shown on Page 47-182 CANNOT be used with 3-position push-pull operators E34GEB, E34GFB or E34GHB.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Note: See Typical Applications on Page 47-129.
2-Position Maintained
Push-Pull without
Button on Lens
Catalog Number
E34GDB
Locating Nib
A
B
Type of Operator Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Contact Block —
Max. of 2 Blocks,
4 Circuits
Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
Out — Pull Intermediate In — Push
Contact Block Mounting Location
AB A B AB
2-Position Operator without Lens
Maintained Push-Pull E34GDB 1NO
1NC
O
X
O
X
No Intermediate
Position
X
O
X
O
2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
3-Position Operator without Lens
Momentary Push-Pull
Maintained Push-Momentary Pull
E34GEB
E34GFB
1NO
1NC
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
Momentary Push-Pull E34GHB 1NO
1NC
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
Button or Lens . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-176
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-182
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-176
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Push-Pull Components
Push-Pull Operators (Continued)
Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons
Table 47-278. Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens
color from chart at right.
Table 47-279. Buttons for Non-illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Anodized aluminum may not be suitable for use on some corrosive
applications.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet
light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Table 47-280. Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Suffix Codes should only be used for assembling composite Catalog
Numbers. To order lens, order by Catalog Number.
Table 47-281. LED Selection Table
Note: For a complete listing of all LEDs available, see Page 47-165.
Ordering example with one composite number:
Light Unit Type Type Voltage Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
LED/Lamp
Number
LED
(LEDs not
included)
Full Voltage — 10250T97L Bayonet
Base
Transformer
AC Only
50/60 Hz
24
120
208
240
277
380
480
600
10250T89L
10250T63L
10250T64L
10250T65L
10250T82L
10250T66L
10250T67L
10250T68L
Incandescent Full Voltage
AC or DC
6
12
24/28
32
10250T69
10250T70
10250T79
10250T83
#755
#756
#757
#1828
Resistor
AC or DC
120
240
10250T80
10250T81
120MB
Transformer
AC Only
50/60 Hz
24
120
208
240
277
380
480
600
10250T89
10250T63
10250T64
10250T65
10250T82
10250T66
10250T67
10250T68
#755
Color Incand.
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Black
Red
Red (EMERG. STOP)
Green
Blue
C1
C2
C2N8
C3
C6
E34C1
E34C2
E34C2N8
E34C3
E34C6
Jumbo — Red
Jumbo — Red
(EMERGENCY STOP)
J2
J2N8
E34J2
E34J2N8
Color Incand.
Suffix
Code
LED
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Red
Red (EMERG. STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
M2
M2N8
M3
M6
M9
RD
ED
GD
LD
AD
E34M2
E34M2N8
E34M3
E34M6
E34M9
White
Clear
M5
M0
WD
—
E34M5
E34M0
Voltage Color Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
6V AC/DC
Suitable for
Use with
Transformers
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED006RN
E22LED006ON
E22LED006YN
E22LED006GN
E22LED006BN
E22LED006WN
12V AC/DC Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED012RN
E22LED012ON
E22LED012YN
E22LED012GN
E22LED012BN
E22LED012WN
24V AC/DC Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED024RN
E22LED024ON
E22LED024YN
E22LED024GN
E22LED024BN
E22LED024WN
48V AC/DC Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED048RN
E22LED048ON
E22LED048YN
E22LED048GN
E22LED048BN
E22LED048WN
60V AC/DC Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED060RN
E22LED060ON
E22LED060YN
E22LED060GN
E22LED060BN
E22LED060WN
120V AC Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED120RA
E22LED120OA
E22LED120YA
E22LED120GA
E22LED120BA
E22LED120WA
120V DC Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED120RD
E22LED120OD
E22LED120YD
E22LED120GD
E22LED120BD
E22LED120WD
Non-illuminated E34GDB + E34C2 + 10250T1 =
E34GDBC2-1X
Incandescent E34GDB + 10250T79 + E34M2 + 10250T1 =
E34GDB79M2-1X
LED E34GDB + 10250T97L + E34M2 +Voltage Code + 10250T1 =
E34GDB97LRD24-1X 06 — 6V AC/DC
12 — 12V AC/DC
24 — 24V AC/DC
48 — 48V AC/DC
60 — 60V AC/DC
2A — 120V AC
2D — 120V DC
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-182
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-177
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Selector Switch Units
Selector Switch Units
■Two-, Three- and Four-Position —
Maintained
■Non-illuminated and Illuminated
Table 47-282. 2-Position Selector Switch — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained.
To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table.
Example: E34VFBK2-X1.
Table 47-283. 3-Position Selector Switch — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained.
To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table.
Example: E34VFBK2-X1.
Table 47-284. 4-Position Selector Switch — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained.
To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table.
Example: E34VFBK2-X1.
Table 47-285. Color Selection, Non-illuminated Note: For Light Unit Voltage Suffix and
Knobs, Levers tables, see Page 47-181.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators
where exposed to ultraviolet light, see
Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
2-Position
Maintained
Switch Knob
4-Position
Maintained
Switch Lever
Operator
Position
Operator
Action
Non-illuminated Price
U.S. $
Illuminated — 120V Transformer Price
U.S. $
Contact
Type
Mounting
Location
Cam
Code
Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
AB
X
O
O
X
E34VFBK1-1X
E34VFBL1-1X
E34VFB120ER-1X E34VFB120FR-1X 1NC
1NO
1
Operator
Position
Operator
Action
Non-illuminated Price
U.S. $
Illuminated — 120V Transformer Price
U.S. $
Contact
Type
Mounting
Location
Cam
Code
Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
AB
X
O
O
O
O
X
E34VHBK1-2X E34VHBL1-2X
E34VHB120TER-2X
E34VHB120TFR-2X
1NO
1NO
3
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
E34VHBK1-23X E34VHBL1-23X
E34VHB120TER-23X
E34VHB120TFR-23X
1NO
2NC
(Series)
1NO
3
Operator Position Operator
Action
Non-illuminated Price
U.S. $
Illuminated — 120V Transformer Price
U.S. $
Contact
Type
Mounting
Location
Cam
Code
Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
AB
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
E34VTBK1-23X E34VTBL1-23X E34VRB120TER-23X E34VRB120TFR-23X
1NC
1NO
1NO
1NC
7
MM
MM
M
MM
MM
Color Code Letter
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-187 – 47-188
Additional Circuit
Arrangements . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-178 – 47-179
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-178
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Selector Switch Selection
E34 Series
Selector Switch Selection
Cam and Contact Block Selection
Selector switches in their varied forms
(2-position, 3-position and 4-position)
are a big factor contributing to the
great flexibility of control that a well
rounded line of “pushbuttons” can
achieve. Because of their flexibility,
they tend to cause difficulty with prod-
uct selection and application. The
following systematic approach should
simplify that task.
Cam and contact block selection is
better understood if you:
■Work with each incoming and out-
going wire/circuit separately.
■Recognize the terms NO and NC only
identify the type of contact by its mode
before mounting to the operator.
The “X-O” chart (Page 47-179)
shows how that contact will act after
assembly to the operator with the
selected cam shape. X = closed circuit,
O = open circuit.
■Up to six NO or NC contacts may be
mounted behind each plunger loca-
tion for a total of twelve contacts.
Single circuit contact blocks have
only one plunger with the other side
of the block “open.” Therefore, single
circuit contact blocks transmit motion
to blocks behind them only for the
position containing the circuit.
■Each cam has two separate lobes,
each of which operates one of the
two contact block plungers indepen-
dently of each other. Those are
identified as position A (locating nib
side) and position B (opposite of
locating nib). The position designa-
tions give direction in selecting and
mounting of the contact blocks (see
Illustration below).
Figure 47-125. Contact Circuit Locations
Systematic Approach
Application: HAND-OFF-AUTO Selector
Switch. In this circuit, one incoming
line is distributed to two other outgoing
circuits by the switch. The two circuits
can be looked at individually.
Step 1: Elementary Diagram.
Construct on paper, or in your mind, a
simple elementary diagram of the
switching scheme as follows:
Step 2: “X-O” Pattern.
From the elementary diagram, you can
construct an “X-O” diagram which
describes when the contacts are to be
closed (X) or open (O) in the various
positions of the switch. The “X-O” for
the HAND circuit looks like this:
In this circuit, you want a contact
closed on the left (HAND) but open in
the center and right.
For the AUTO circuit, the “X-O” diagram
would look like this:
Putting them together, the complete
“X-O” diagram is:
Once the “X-O” diagram has been
generated, the next step is to select the
cam and contact block, or blocks,
needed to perform the desired “X-O”
functions. The selection table on the
following page lists the various types
(shapes) of cams by number to choose
from and the type of contact and posi-
tion to achieve the function outlined in
your “X-O” diagram.
Step 3: Cam Selection.
The cam you select determines the
operation of all contact blocks mounted
to the operator. It is selected on the
basis that it provides the simplest cir-
cuitry for the desired “X-O” diagram.
The selection tables of the following
page show all the “X-O” combinations.
For the purpose of this example, the
applicable portion of those charts is
shown in Table 47-286.
Table 47-286. Example Selection Table
Wired in series.
Now to make the cam selection, make
a simple worksheet such as:
It becomes immediately obvious that
cam 3 is the better choice for two rea-
sons, (1) the series combination can be
avoided making it simpler to wire, (2)
only two contacts are required, which
is less expensive than the three contacts
required by cam 2.
Step 4: Contact Block Selection.
Having selected the cam, contact block
selection is simply a matter of gather-
ing the A position and B position circuits
into pairs which make up the most con-
venient contact block arrangement. If
there is an imbalance in the number of
circuits under A or B, then single circuit
blocks must be selected for these leftover
circuits.
Back to the worksheet, having selected
cam 3 do this:
Step 5: Selector Switch Operator.
Lastly, you have to choose from the
many types of operators — knob and
lever in various colors or keyed. Also
what combinations of maintained and
spring return functions are required.
Selection of these operators can be
found on Page 47-180. For the above
example you may want a 3-position
maintained black knob, cam 3 —
Catalog Number E34VHBK1.
The Complete Switch: E34VHBK1 with
one 10250T2 or, for one composite
catalog number, E34VHBK1-Y1 found
on Page 47-177.
Locating Nib
A
B
OFF
HAND Outgoing
Circuit
AUTO
Outgoing
Circuit
Incoming
Line
HAND OFF AUTO
XOO
HAND OFF AUTO
OOX
X O O
O O X
No. “X-O”
Pattern
Cam Code #2 Cam Code #3
Top
A
Bottom
B
Top
A
Bottom
B
1XOO
4 OOX
NO NC NO
NO NO
Cam 2 Cam 3
X O O
O O X
(A)NO – (B)NC
(B)NO
(A)NO
(B)NO
X O X
O O X
ANO
BNO 10250T2
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-179
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Selector Switch Selection
Selector Switch Selection
(Continued)
Table 47-287. 2-Position Selector Switch
Contact Block Selection
Diagrams
Circuits shown illustrate connections
to obtain a selector switch circuit com-
bination and are shown with their
appropriate line diagrams. Field wiring
of jumper connections required as
shown.
X = Closed Circuit
O = Open Circuit
Figure 47-126. Wiring of Jumper Connections
Note: 4-Position Selector Switches limited
to 4 contact blocks.
Contact Blocks
For selection and number of available
contact blocks per operator, see Page
47-182.
No. Desired Circuit
and
Operator
Position
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish
Circuit Function
Top
Plunger
A
Bottom
Plunger
B
1XO
2OX
or
or
NC NC
NO NO
Series Connection Parallel Connection
Table 47-288. 3-Position Switch — Cam and Contact Block Selection
Table 47-289. 4-Position Switch — Contact Block Selection
No. Desired Circuit
and
Operator
Position
Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function
(Jumpers must be installed where indicated)
Operator with Cam Code #2 Operator with Cam Code #3
Mounting Location Mounting Location
Top Plunger
A
Bottom Plunger
B
Top Plunger
A
Bottom Plunger
B
1 XOO
2 XXO
3 XOX
4 OOX
5 OXX
6 OXO
No. Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish
Circuit Function
Com-
bina-
tion
No.
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish
Circuit Function
Mounting
Location
Mounting
Location
Top
Plunger
A
Bottom
Plunger
B
Top
Plunger
A
Bottom
Plunger
B
1 XOOO
10 XOXO
2 OXOO
3 OOXO
11 XXXO
4 OOOX
5 XOOX
12 OXXX
6 OXXO
7 OOXX
13 XOXX
8 XXOO
9 OXOX 14 XXOX
NO NC NO
NC NC
NO NO NO
NO NO
NC NO NC
NC NC NC
NC
NC
NO
NO
NO
NC
NO NO
NC
NC NC
NO NC
NO
NO NO
NO NC
NO
NC NC
NC NO
NO
NC NC NO
NC
January 2010
47-180
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Selector Switch Components
Selector Switch Operators
Table 47-290. Operators with Knob Assembled — UL (NEMA)
Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper
circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-178 –
47-179.
Field convertible to Horizontal Mounting.
For other colors of either the knob or lever, replace the underlined char-
acters of the Catalog Number with the appropriate Suffix Code from
Alternate Knob and Lever Table below. Example: E34VFBL2.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet
light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Table 47-291. Key Operators with Cam and Cap — UL (NEMA)
Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper
circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-178 –
47-179.
Choose key removal position required for application from Table 47-292.
Add key removal Code No. to listed Catalog Number. Example: E34KFB2.
Table 47-292. Key Removal Positions
Note: Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.
Dissimilar Locks and Keys
Listed operators have identical locks and
keys (Key Code H661), Catalog Number
10250ED824. For dissimilar lock and key
combinations, see Page 47-136.
Table 47-293. Alternate Knobs and Levers for Operators Above
For use on maintained operators only.
Positions Operator
Action
Black Knob Selector Switch —
Vertical Mounting
Cam
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
2-Position —
60° Throw
1E34VFBK1
1E34VEBK1
3-Position —
60° Throw
2
3
E34VGBK1
E34VHBK1
2
3
E34VJBK1
E34VKBK1
2
3
E34VLBK1
E34VMBK1
2
3
E34VNBK1
E34VPBK1
4-Position —
40° Throw
7E34VTBK1
2-Position Maintained Black
Knob Selector Switch — Cam 1
Catalog Number E34VFBK1
3-Position Maintained
Keyed Selector Switch
Catalog Number E34KGHB1
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
Positions Operator
Action
Cam
Code
Key
Removal
Positions
Vertical
Mounting
Horiz.
Mounting
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2-Position —
60° Throw
1 1, 2, 3 E34KFB_ E34KFHB_
12 E34KEB_ E34KEHB_
3-Position —
60° Throw
2
3
1 – 7 E34KGB_
E34KHB_
E34KGHB_
E34KHHB_
2
3
1, 4, 5 E34KJB_
E34KKB_
E34KJHB_
E34KKHB_
2
3
4E34KLB_
E34KMB_
E34KLHB_
E34KMHB_
2
3
2, 4, 6 E34KNB_
E34KPB_
E34KNHB_
E34KPHB_
4-Position —
40° Throw
77 E34KTB_ E34KTHB_
Code
Suffix
Key
Removal
Positions
Code
Suffix
Key
Removal
Positions
1
2
3
4
Right Only
Left Only
Right & Left
Center Only
5
6
7
Right & Center
Left & Center
All Positions
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
L
C
R
Figure 47-127. Key
Removal Positions
Color Knob Lever Lever Designed
for Added Ingress
Protection
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
E34K1
E34K2
E34K3
E34K4
E34K5
E34K6
E34K7
E34K8
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
E34L1
E34L2
E34L3
E34L4
E34L5
E34L6
E34L7
E34L8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
E34A1
E34A2
E34A3
E34A4
E34A5
E34A6
E34A7
E34A8
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-187 – 47-188
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-181
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Selector Switch Components
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators
Table 47-294. Operator without Knob or Lever
Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
For selection of the proper cam and contact block required to obtain a specific circuit sequence, see selection table on Pages 47-178 – 47-179.
Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed in Page 47-157.
120MB lamps are used on both 120V and 240V operators.
Add Code Suffix for Light Unit Voltage to listed Catalog Number from Light Unit Voltage Suffix Table at bottom of page.
Example: For 24V transformer type light unit, order E34VFB024.
120 and 240V transformer only.
120 full voltage only.
Table 47-295. Light Unit Voltage Suffix — Add to operator Catalog
Number listed in table above.
Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by
changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed in Page 47-157.
Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
Table 47-296. Knobs, Levers
Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer). Red, green
and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet
light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Positions Operator Action Transformer Type — 50/60 Hz Full Voltage Type — AC or DC
6 Volt #755 Lamp Lamps — #755, #757, #1835, 120MB
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Cam Code 1 Cam Code 1
2-Position — 60° Throw E34VFB_ E34SFB_
Cam Code 2 Cam Code 3 Cam Code 2 Cam Code 3
3-Position — 60° Throw E34VGB_ E34VHB_ E34SGB_ E34SHB_
E34VNB_ E34VPB_ E34SNB_ E34SPB_
E34VJB_ E34VKB_ E34SJB_ E34SKB_
E34VLB_ E34VMB_ E34SLB_ E34SMB_
4-Position — 40° Throw E34VRB_ — E34SRB_ —
2-Position Maintained
120V AC Transformer
Selector Switch, Cam 1
Catalog Number E34VFB120
MM
MM
M
MS
M
MS
M
SS
M
MM
MM
Type of Light Unit
Transformer Type
50/60 Hz
Full Voltage Type
AC or DC
Voltage Suffix
Code
Adder
U.S. $
Voltage Suffix
Code
Adder
U.S. $
24
120
208
240
380
024
120
208
240
380
6
12
24
48
120
06
12
24
48
120
480
600
480
600
240 240
Color Knob Lever Price
U.S. $
Catalog Number
and Code Number
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
Amber
10250TER
10250TEG
10250TEA
10250TEL
10250TEC
10250TEW
10250TEM
10250TFR
10250TFG
10250TFA
10250TFL
10250TFC
10250TFW
10250TFM
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-182
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-182
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Components — Contact Blocks
Contact Blocks
Standard Contact Blocks
■UL A600/P600 rated
■Color-coded plungers – red/green
for NC/NO circuits
■Silver contact tips with “reliability
nibs”
■Black (opaque) or amber (translu-
cent) housings
■Pressure plate or spade terminals
■Fingerproof shrouds (for pressure
terminals only)
Logic Level Contact Blocks
■UL A600/P600 rated
■Black plungers
■Inert palladium knife-blade contacts
■Black (opaque) housings
■Pressure plate or spade terminals
■Fingerproof shrouds not available
Special Function Contact Blocks
■UL A600/P600 rated
■Black plungers
■Silver contact tips with “reliability
nibs”
■Black (opaque) housings
■Pressure plate terminals only
■Fingerproof shrouds not available
Special Purpose Contact Block
■Maximum 300V rated
■Black plungers
■Silver contact tips with “reliability
nibs”
■Black (opaque) housings
■Pressure plate terminals only
■Fingerproof shrouds not available
Reliability Nibs
Reliability nibs are the hallmark of
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer contact blocks.
A pointed silver nib on the contact tip
ensures reliable switching from logic
level (5V) up to 600V applications.
Therefore standard contact blocks can
be used for most logic level applica-
tions where the contacts are not
exposed to any harsh environmental
conditions.
Palladium Contacts
Palladium, which is more inert than
gold, is well suited for voltages and
currents approaching zero and is rec-
ommended for applications where
environmental conditions are a factor.
Maximum Contact Block Mounting per Operator Type
Table 47-297. Contact Blocks
All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable
for use on standard 10250T and E34 opera-
tors. These contact blocks are not suitable for
Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34 devices.
Contact blocks with spade terminals are lim-
ited to a maximum of one contact block per
operator and minimum spacing between
devices is 2.5” (63.5 mm). Not suitable for
use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also avail-
able in amber housing. Not available with
fingerproof shrouds.
Special function contact blocks are not suit-
able for use with roto-push operators, 3-
position push-pull operators, or 4-position
selector switches.
ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use
with 2-position joysticks or when operators
are used with padlock attachments.
Special purpose 10250T44 contact blocks
are not suitable on selector switches or roto-
push operators. Okay to use with 3-position
push-pull operators only on low voltage
(30V or less) circuits.
Operator Max.
Stack
Operator Max.
Stack
Pushbuttons 6 2- or 3-Position
Selector Switches
6
Push-Pull
Operators
2 4-Position
Selector Switches
4
Roto-Push
Operators
4 Joysticks 4
Symbol Circuit Description/
Notes
Standard Logic Level
Pressure
Terminals
Spade
Terminals
Pressure
Terminals
Spade
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1NC Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T51 10250T59 10250T51E 10250T59E
1NO Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T53 10250T60 10250T53E 10250T60E
NO-NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T1 10250T40 10250T1E 10250T40E
2NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T3 10250T42 10250T3E 10250T42E
2NO Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T2 10250T41 10250T2E 10250T41E
Special Function Blocks
LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to 6 blocks
(6 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T71
— 10250T71E
—
ECNO
-NC
Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to 6
blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T47
— 10250T47E
—
ECNO
-NO
Early closing NO and standard NO.
Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T57
— 10250T57E
—
2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to 6
blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T45
— 10250T45E
—
LONC-
ECNO
Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 4 blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T55
— 10250T55E
—
Special Purpose Blocks
2NO-
2NC
Four circuits in single block depth. Rated 300V
max. Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T44
—
10250T1
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-116
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-183
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Components — Contact Blocks
Contact Blocks (Continued)
Table 47-298. Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds
All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable
for use on standard 10250T and E34 opera-
tors. These contact blocks are not suitable
for Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34
devices.
To order contact blocks with translucent
amber housing, change Suffix P to CP in
Catalog Number e.g. 10250T51CP.
Special function contact blocks are not suit-
able for use with roto-push operators, 3-
position push-pull operators, or 4-position
selector switches.
ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use
with 2-position joysticks or when operators
are used with padlock attachments.
Symbol Circuit Description/
Notes
Standard Logic Level
Pressure
Terminals
Pressure
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1NC Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51P 10250T51EP
1NO Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53P 10250T53EP
NO-NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T1P 10250T1EP
2NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T3P 10250T3EP
2NO Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T2P 10250T2EP
Special Function Blocks
LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless
otherwise noted.
10250T71P 10250T71EP
ECNO-NC Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to 6 blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T47P 10250T47EP
ECNO-NO Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to 4 blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T57P 10250T57EP
2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to 6 blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T45P 10250T45EP
LONC-ECNO Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 4 blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T55P 10250T55EP
10250T1CP
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-167
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-184
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Legend Plates
Options
Legend Plates
Field Color
Legend plates can be supplied printed
on black, red, silver or white field. To
order legend printed on a color other
than indicated — add Suffix Code to the
end of the Catalog Number as follows:
“R” for Red field;
“W” for White field; or
“S” for Silver field.
Example: E34SP26R — Standard plate
with red field marked OPEN.
Table 47-299. For Pushbutton Operators and
Indicating Lights
3/32" high lettering.
Price Each — U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Color
of
Field
Catalog Number
Standard
Jumbo
Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16" High
CLAMP
CLOSE
DOWN
EMERG. STOP
FAST
Black
Black
Black
Red
Black
E34SP90
E34SP73
E34SP74
E34SP13
E34SP75
E34LP90
E34LP73
E34LP74
E34LP13
E34LP75
FASTER
FEEDER ON
FEEDER OFF
FORWARD
HIGH
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP87
E34SP94
E34SP95
E34SP15
E34SP16
E34LP87
E34LP94
E34LP95
E34LP15
E34LP16
IN
INCH
JOG
JOG FOR.
JOG REV.
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP17
E34SP18
E34SP19
E34SP20
E34SP21
E34LP17
E34LP18
E34LP19
E34LP20
E34LP21
LOW
LOWER
LUBE-FAIL
MOTOR RUN
MOTOR STOP
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP22
E34SP23
E34SP92
E34SP81
E34SP82
E34LP22
E34LP23
E34LP92
E34LP81
E34LP82
OFF
ON
OPEN
OUT
POWER ON
Red
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP24
E34SP25
E34SP26
E34SP27
E34SP80
E34LP24
E34LP25
E34LP26
E34LP27
E34LP80
RAISE
READY
RESET
REVERSE
RUN
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP28
E34SP86
E34SP29
E34SP30
E34SP31
E34LP28
E34LP86
E34LP29
E34LP30
E34LP31
SAFE
SLOW
SLOWER
START
STOP
Black
Black
Black
Black
Red
E34SP85
E34SP32
E34SP88
E34SP33
E34SP34
E34LP85
E34LP32
E34LP88
E34LP33
E34LP34
TEST
TRANSFER
TRIP
UNCLAMP
UP
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP83
E34SP93
E34SP84
E34SP91
E34SP35
E34LP83
E34LP93
E34LP84
E34LP91
E34LP35
Table 47-300. For Selector Switch Operators Table 47-301. For Push-Pull Units
3/32 inch (2.4 mm) high lettering.
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) high lettering.
Figure 47-128. Approximate Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
Table 47-302. Blank Plastic Legend Plates — Square
Legend Plates with Non-standard Markings or Aluminum Legend Plates
See 10250T listing on Page 47-152.
Price Each — U.S. $. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Color
of
Field
Catalog Number
Standard Jumbo
2 Position — 3/16" High Lettering
FOR. REV.
HAND AUTO
HIGH LOW
JOG RUN
MAN. AUTO
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP38
E34SP39
E34SP40
E34SP41
E34SP67
E34LP38
E34LP39
E34LP40
E34LP41
E34LP67
OFF ON
OPEN CLOSE
RUN JOG
SAFE RUN
START JOG
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP42
E34SP43
E34SP44
E34SP45
E34SP46
E34LP42
E34LP43
E34LP44
E34LP45
E34LP46
START STOP
UP DOWN
Black
Black
E34SP47
E34SP48
E34LP47
E34LP48
3 Position — 3/16" High Lettering
AUTO OFF HAND
FOR. OFF REV.
FOR. SAFE REV.
HAND OFF AUTO
MAN. OFF AUTO
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP49
E34SP50
E34SP69
E34SP51
E34SP68
E34LP49
E34LP50
E34LP69
E34LP51
E34LP68
OPEN OFF CLOSE
RUN SAFE JOG
UP OFF DOWN
ON STOP SAFE
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP53
E34SP70
E34SP54
E34SP71
E34LP53
E34LP70
E34LP54
E34LP71
Standard
Price Each — U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Color
of
Field
Catalog Number
Standard
Jumbo
PULL ON/
PUSH OFF
PULL OPEN/
PUSH CLOSE
PULL UP/
PUSH DOWN
Black
Black
Black
E34PP5
E34PP8
E34PP11
E34R5
E34R8
E34R11
Jumbo
2.19
(55.6)
Jumbo
1.77
(45)
Standard
2.19
(55.6)
1.77
(45)
Price Each — U.S. $. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Colors Catalog Number
Lettering Field Standard Jumbo Extra Large
Side 1 Side 2
Black
White
White
Red
Silver
Black
10250TSP76
10250TSP77
10250TLP76
10250TLP77
10250TEP76
10250TEP77
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-185
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Enclosures
Enclosures
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
Table 47-303. Enclosures (Case and Cover) — Surface Mounting
For spacing increments, see Page 47-186.
All cast enclosures can be converted to base mounting of contact blocks, with spacers 10250TA22 or 10250TA23. See listing on Page 47-156.
When used with E30 pushbuttons, only the one element enclosure can be used.
14 gauge, type 304.
Table 47-304. Approximate Dimensions
No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as
required.
Depth given is for two contact block deep
stations. One contact block deep stations
subtract 3/4 inch (19.1 mm).
Note: These E34 Die Cast Enclosures feature
a corrosion resistant coating identical to
finish on the E34 operators except gray in
color. Not for use in ultraviolet light
applications.
Figure 47-129. Enclosure Layouts
Number of
Elements
1 Contact Block Depth 2 Contact Block Depth
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Cast Enclosure — In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
2
3
4
E34N1
E34N2
E34N3
E34N4
E34N11
E34N12
E34N13
E34N14
Polyester — In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
E34N51
E34N52
E34N53
E34N54
Stainless Steel — In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
10250TN33
10250TN34
10250TN35
10250TN36
Number
of
Elements
Element
Arrange-
ment
Surface Mounting Conduit
Entrance
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
DE
Cast
1
2
3
4
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
4.0 (101.6)
5.88 (149.4)
7.75 (196.9)
9.63 (244.6)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
3.25 (82.6)
5.13 (130.3)
7.0 (177.8)
8.88 (225.6)
3/4
3/4
1
1
Polyester
1
2
3
4
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
6.63 (168.4)
6.63 (168.4)
8.88 (225.6)
11.13 (282.7)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
4.88 (124.0)
4.88 (124.0)
7.13 (181.1)
9.38 (238.3)
Stainless Steel
1
2
3
4
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
3.00 (76.2)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
6.75 (171.5)
9.00 (228.6)
11.25 (285.8)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
4.25 (108.0)
7.50 (190.5)
9.00 (228.6)
12.00 (304.8)
Die Cast Enclosure —
Cat. No. E34N11
Polyester Enclosure —
Cat. No. E34N52
Stainless Steel Enclosure —
Cat. No. 10250TN35
A
Surface
DC
B
E
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester
One Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
Two Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
111
Top – For Vertical Mounting
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
1
222
33
4
January 2010
47-186
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Enclosures
Enclosures (Continued)
Die Cast and Stainless Steel — Flush Mount, Covers Only
These E34 Die Cast Covers feature a corrosion resistant coating identical to the finish on the E34 operators except gray in color.
Table 47-305. Covers Only — Flush Mounting
Not oiltight. NEMA 1 applications only.
Table 47-306. Approximate Dimensions
Depth given is for flat cover. Deep cover 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deeper.
Depth given includes pull box.
Table 47-307. Spacing Increments
Figure 47-130. Spacing Increments for
Enclosures
Figure 47-131. Enclosure Layouts
Number of
Elements
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Flush Cast Covers
In-Line Deep Cover In-Line Flat Cover
1
2
3
4
E34F11
E34F12
E34F13
E34F14
E34F1
E34F2
E34F3
E34F4
In-Line Stainless Steel Flush Plates
With Pullbox Without Pullbox
1
2
3
4
10250TS10
10250TS11
10250TS12
10250TS14
10250TS1
10250TS2
10250TS3
10250TS4
Number of
Elements
Flush Mounting Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
DE
Cast
1
2
3
4
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
4.0 (101.6)
5.88 (149.4)
7.75 (196.9)
9.63 (244.6)
0.25 (6.4)
0.25 (6.4)
0.25 (6.4)
0.25 (6.4)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.63 (92.2)
5.50 (139.7)
6.0 (152.4)
9.25 (235)
Stainless Steel
1
2
3
4
5.0 (127)
5.0 (127)
5.0 (127)
5.0 (127)
5.0 (127)
6.88 (174.8)
8.63 (219.2)
10.50 (266.7)
2.50 (63.5)
2.50 (63.5)
2.50 (63.5)
2.50 (63.5)
3.25 (82.6)
3.25 (82.6)
3.25 (82.6)
3.25 (82.6)
1.88 (47.8)
3.63 (92.2)
5.50 (139.7)
7.25 (184.2)
Type Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
FGH
Cast 2.44 (62) 2.5 (63.5) 1.88 (47.8)
Polyester 1.88 (47.8) Min. 2.13 (54.1) 2.25 (57.2)
Stainless Steel 1.69 (42.9) Min. 1.73 (43.9) 2.25 (57.2)
Deep
Cover
Flat
Cover
A
Surface or Pendant
DC
B
E
S
crew
S
ize
f
or 12 Element
and Larger
F
G
H111
Top – For Vertical Mounting
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
1
222
33
4
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-187
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Accessories
Accessories
Table 47-308. Accessories
Should not be used on flush button for STOP function.
Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
Padlocking Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Operators.
Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4"
padlock. Will not lock NO contact.
E34TA2
Flexible Weather Resistant Boot for use with flush
pushbutton operators.
Clear
Black
Red
Green
10250TA46
10250TA47
10250TA48
10250TA49
Flexible Weather Resistant Boot for use with button
operators (extended buttons preferred).
Black
Red
Green
Clear
10250TA3
10250TA4
10250TA10
10250TA85
Transparent Boot for regular, illuminated pushbutton
operators and PresTest.
10250TA25
Special Retaining Nut — to accommodate thick panel.
Indicating light
PresTest, pushbuttons and selector switches
E34TA30
E34TA31
Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator — prevents
accidental operation. (Not for Push-Pull operators.)
E34TA6
Extended Retaining Nut — Replaces standard nut and
provides guard for flush type pushbutton operators.
E34TA12
Guard for Illuminated Pushbutton E34TA15
Padlocking Attachment for non-illuminated knob selector
switches — accommodates up to 5, 1/4" padlocks.
E34TA11
0.75
(19.1)
0.84
(21.3) 0.94
(23.9)
1.63
(41.4)
0.25
(6.4)
1.47
(37.3)
1.59
(40.4)
1.92
(48.8)
1.59
(40.4)
1.53
(38.9)
1.50
(38.1)
1.25
(31.8)
1.31
(33.3)
1.38
(35.1)
1.63
(41.4)
1.50
(38.1)
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-188
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Accessories
Table 47-308. Accessories (Continued)
Table 47-309. Replacement Lamps — For E34 Illuminated Operators
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
Thrust Washer — To meet Ford Motor Company
mounting specifications.
E34TK3
Contact Block Terminal Jumps — Available in multiples
of 100 only. Term. to Term. — Within Block (short):
100 per package
1000 per package
Terminal to Terminal — Block to Block (long):
100 per package
1000 per package
10250TA70
10250TA70-2
10250TA71
10250TA71-2
Master Test (Dual Input) Module — Internal Form C
relay suitable for either AC or DC applications. Total electrical
isolation between monitored and test circuit. Fits all illuminated
10250T, E22, E30 and E34 devices.
48V DC 10250TMT8
Flasher Module — Internal Form C relay suitable for AC
applications. One unit required for each operator in master
test circuit.
24V AC
120V AC
10250TFL2
10250TFL1
Panel Mounting Nut Wrench — E22, E30, E34 and
Octagonal 10250T.
E22CW
Fingerproof Shroud — 10 per Package
Fits new style contact blocks and light units.
10250TA101
Mfg.
Lamp Type
Voltage Base
Style
Application Part
Number
Price
U.S. $
120MB 120V T 3-1/4 Bayonet 10250T Resistor Indicating Light 28-3044
#267
#755
#756
#757
6.3V
6.3V
12V
24V
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
10250T Flasher
10250T Transformer, PresTest and Full Voltage
10250T Full Voltage
10250T Full Voltage
10250ED986-4
28-2202
28-5184
28-5185
#1828
#1835
NE48
NE51H-R22
NE51H-R68
32V
55V
120V
120V
240V
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 4-1/2 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
10250T Full Voltage
10250T Resistor
10250T Neon
10250T Neon
10250T Neon
28-5186
28-5187
28-494
28-3754
28-3755
0.25
(6.4)
0.25
(6.4)
0.86
(21.8)
0.45
(11.4)
1.63
(41.4)
1.14
(29)
6 Mounting Holes
1.78
(45.2)
1.31
(33.3)
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-189
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Renewal Parts
Renewal Parts
Table 47-310. Numbers Listed Are for E34 Style Operators
Flush Head
Pushbutton Operator
Mushroom Head
Pushbutton Operator
Jumbo Mushroom
Head Operator
Illuminated
Pushbutton Operator
Transformer Type
Indicating Light
Knob-Operated
Selector Switch
Operator
Full Voltage, Resistor
and Transformer Type
Illuminated Selector Switch
Potentiometers
Item
No.
Description No.
Req.
Part
Number
Price
U.S. $
1 Gasket 1 16-1548
2 Mounting Nut 1 15-1530-4
3 Set Screw (#6-32 x 0.250" Long
Hollow Hex)
211-2014
4 Mushroom Head Button
(Includes (2) Item 5)
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
1
—
—
—
—
—
As Req. Below
53-1317
53-1317-2
53-1317-3
53-1317-4
53-1317-22
5 Set Screw (#10-32 x 0.250" Long
Hollow Hex)
211-544
6 Jumbo Mushroom Head Button
(Aluminum — Includes (2) Item 5)
Red
Black
Yellow
Green
1
—
—
—
—
As Req. Below
53-1317-9
53-1317-10
53-1317-11
53-1317-12
7 Jumbo Mushroom Head Button
(Aluminum — Red EMERG. STOP)
Does Not Include Item 5
153-1349-18
8 Mounting Screw
(#6-32 x 0.710" Long)
Washer
2
2
10250TA79
16-2038
9 Terminal Screw and Lug (Captive) Req. 80-5502
10 Gasket (Supplied with Basic Unit) 1 32-803
11 Round Head Screw
(#4-40 x 0.344" Long)
(Supplied with Basic Unit)
211-4553
Item
No.
Description No.
Req.
Part
Number
Price
U.S. $
12 Mounting Screw 2 11-1632
13 Simple Potentiometer (Does Not
Include Items 18, 28 or 29)
1,000 Ohms
2,500 Ohms
5,000 Ohms
10,000 Ohms
25,000 Ohms
50,000 Ohms
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
As Req. Below
41-782-2
41-782-3
41-782-10
41-782-4
41-782-5
41-782-6
14 Connector (Includes Screw
and Lug)
225-1851
15 Indicating Plate
Standard Size (Without Legend)
Large Size (Specify Legend)
1
—
—
As Req. Above
30-4460
10250TR30
16 Retaining Nut 1 15-1547-3
17 Knob
Socket Set Screw
(#6-32 x 0.250" Long)
1
1
53-1314
11-2014
18 Coupling 1
1
11-2014
29-3749-2
19 Set Screw (#6-32 x 0.188" Long) 1 11-1199
20 Spacer 2 56-1066-18
21 Connector (Includes Screw
and Lug)
125-1851-2
22 Mounting Nut 1 15-1938-2
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-190
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Mounting Options
Mounting
Panel Thickness
■Minimum: 0.06 inch (1.6 mm)
■Maximum: 0.25 inch (8 mm) includ-
ing legend plate
■Maximum can be increased to
0.375 inch (15.9 mm) using optional
retaining nut
❑Indicating light: E34TA30
❑Pushbutton/selector switch:
E34TA31
Table 47-311. Mounting Matrix
Legend
Plate
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
ABCD
Small 1.63
(41.3)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
1.63
(41.3)
Medium 1.75
(44.5)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
1.75
(44.5)
Large 2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
Figure 47-132. Mounting Options in Inches (mm)
Horizontal mounting means terminals
are located top and bottom of contact
block. Vertical mounting means termi-
nals are left and right of contact block.
This allows close spacing of adjacent
operators with easy access to terminals.
Note: Locating nib hole or notch is 0.14 inch
(3.6 mm)
Figure 47-133. Drilling Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
B
Min.
C
Min.
0.6
(15.2)
A
Min. 1.22
(31)
D
Min.
Horizontal Mounting Vertical Mounting
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.
Terminals on Top
Terminals at Side
0.6
(15.2)
1.20
(30.5)
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-191
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Dimensions
Dimensions
Figure 47-134. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
0.88
(22.4)
1.09
(27.7)
1.06
(26.9)
1.78
(45.2)
1.38
(35.1)
Contact
Blk.
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
0.88
(22.4)
1.09
(27.7)
1.44
(36.6)
1.78
(45.2)
1.38
(35.1)
Contact
Blk.
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
0.88
(22.4)
1.09
(27.7)
1.44
(36.6)
1.78
(45.2) 1.38
(35.1)
Contact
Blk.
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
0.88
(22.4)
1.09
(27.7)
1.63
(41.4)
1.78
(45.2)
1.50
(38.1)
Contact
Blk.
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
0.88
(22.4)
1.09
(27.7)
1.75
(44.5)
1.78
(45.2)
2.50
(63.5)
Contact
Blk.
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
2.63
(66.8)
1.65
(41.9)
1.78
(45.2)
0.25
(6.4)
0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4)
Panel Thickness
0.88
(22.4)
0.88
(22.4)
1.13
(28.7)
Light
Unit
Contact
Block
Push-Pull Switch
Flush Pushbutton
1.38
(35.1)
1.1
(27.9)
1.78
(45.2) 1.38
(35.1)
1.9
(48.3)
1.09
(27.7)
0.69
(17.5)
1.78
(45.2)
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
PresTest Indicating Light
Contact
Blk.
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
1.09
(27.7)
1.09
(27.7)
0.69
(17.5)
1.78
(45.2)
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
Light
Unit
1.58
(40.1)
Knob
1.58
(40.1)
Lever
1.09
(27.7)
0.88
(22.4)
Contact
Block
Each Additional
Contact Block
1.5
(38.1)
1.58 (40.1)
to Remove
Key
1.09
(27.7)
0.88
(22.4)
Contact
Block
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
1.58
(40.1)
Knob
1.58
(40.1)
Lever
1.09
(27.7)
0.88
(22.4)
Light
Unit
Each Additional
Contact Block
Extended Pushbutton Half Shroud Pushbutton Mushroom Pushbutton
Selector Switch Keyed Selector Switch Illuminated Selector Switch
Illuminated Pushbutton
Indicating LightJumbo Mushroom Pushbutton
January 2010
47-192
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Ordering Example
Ordering Complete Devices
Complete E34 Pushbuttons, Indicating Lights and/or Selector
Switch operators including contact block(s) and legend plate
can be ordered using a single composite catalog number.
The individually packaged components will be shipped
unassembled in a single overpack carton marked with the
composite Catalog Number.
Ordering Example
Illuminated Pushbutton Device —
Catalog Number E34XB120V2-153SP90
Table 47-312. Catalog Numbering System
For a complete Catalog Number breakdown, see
Pages 47-193 – 47-194.
E 3 4 X B 1 2 0 V 2 – 1 5 3 S P 9 0
Operator
Lens
E34V2
Insert
Hyphen
Before
Contact
Block(s)
Contact
Blocks
10250T1 &
10250T53
Legend
Plate
E34SP90
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-193
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Catalog Number Structure
Catalog Number Structure
Table 47-313. Non-illuminated Pushbuttons Catalog Numbering System
Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory.
Table 47-314. Illuminated and Non-illuminated Push-Pulls Catalog Numbering System
Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory.
E 3 4 P B 1 –1
Operator
PB =
EB =
LB =
JB =
EVB =
EHB =
Flush
Extended
40 mm Mushroom
65 mm Mushroom
1/2 Shroud Vertical Mount
1/2 Shroud Horizontal Mount
Button Color
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
7 =
5 =
6 =
8 =
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Gray
White
Blue
Orange
Circuit
Blank =
1 =
2 =
3 =
51 =
53 =
Operator Only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO
E 3 4 G D B 6 3 M 2 –1
Operator
GDB =
GEB =
GFB =
GHB =
2-Position Maintained
3-Position Mom Push-Mom Pull
3-Position MT Push-Mom-Pull
3-Position Mom Push-Mom Pull
Circuit
Blank =
1 =
2 =
3 =
51 =
53 =
Operator Only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO
Incandescent
Light Unit
LED
Light Unit
Blank =
89 =
63 =
64 =
65 =
82 =
66 =
67 =
68 =
69 =
70 =
79 =
83 =
80 =
81 =
Non-ill.
24V/XFR
120V/XFR
208V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
Blank =
89L =
63L =
64L =
65L =
82L =
66L =
67L =
68L =
97L =
Non-ill.
24V/XFR
120V/XFR
208V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full Voltage
LED Voltage
Blank =
Blank =
06 =
12 =
24 =
48 =
60 =
2A =
2D =
Non-ill.
Incand.
6V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
48V AC/DC
60V AC/DC
120V AC
120V DC
Non-illuminated Illuminated
Button Incandescent LED Lens Type
C1 =
C2 =
C2N8 =
C3 =
C6 =
– =
J2 =
J2N8 =
– =
– =
Black 40 mm
Red 40 mm
Red 40 mm – “E” STOP
Green 40 mm
Blue 40 mm
Black 65 mm
Red 65 mm
Red 65 mm – “E” STOP
Green 65 mm
Yellow 65 mm
M2 =
M2N8 =
M3 =
M6 =
M9 =
M5 =
M0 =
RD =
ED =
GD =
LD =
AD =
WD =
– =
Red 40 mm
Red 40 mm – “E” STOP
Green 40 mm
Blue 40 mm
Amber 40 mm
White 40 mm
Clear 40 mm
January 2010
47-194
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
E34 Series, Catalog Number Structure
Table 47-315. Illuminated Pushbuttons Catalog Numbering System
Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory.
Table 47-316. Standard Indicating Lights, PresTest and Master Test Catalog Numbering System
Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory.
E 3 4 X B 2 4 V 2 –1
Circuit
Blank =
1 =
2 =
3 =
51 =
53 =
Operator Only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO
Incandescent Light Unit LED Light Unit
024 =
120 =
240 =
277 =
380 =
480 =
600 =
06 =
12 =
24 =
32 =
48 =
120 =
240 =
24V/XFR
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
48V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
024L =
120L =
240L =
277L =
380L =
480L =
600L =
497L =
24V/XFR
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full Voltage
LED Voltage
Blank =
06 =
12 =
24 =
Incand.
6V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
48 =
60 =
2A =
2D =
48V AC/DC
60V AC/DC
120V AC
120V DC
Incandescent Lens Color LED Lens Color
V2 =
V3 =
V4 =
V5 =
V6 =
V9 =
V0 =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
RD =
GD =
YD =
WD =
LD =
AD =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Light Unit Type
XB =
CB =
SB =
Transformer
Full Voltage
Resistor
E 3 4 F B 0 6 H 2
Light Unit Type
Standard –
Incandescent
Standard –
LED
TB120 =
TB240 =
TB277 =
TB380 =
TB480 =
TB600 =
FB06 =
FB12 =
FB24 =
FB32 =
FB48 =
RB120 =
RB240 =
NB120 =
NB240 =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
48V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
120V/Neon
240V/Neon
TB120L =
TB240L =
TB277L =
TB380L =
TB480L =
TB600L =
FB197L =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full Voltage
PresTest – LED
TPB120L =
TPB240L =
TPB380L =
TPB480L =
TPB600L =
FPB297L =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full Voltage
PresTest – Incandescent
TPB120 =
TPB240 =
TPB380 =
TPB480 =
TPB600 =
FPB06 =
FPB12 =
FPB24 =
FPB32 =
FPB48 =
RPB120 =
RPB240 =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
48V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
LED Voltage
Blank =
06 =
12 =
24 =
48 =
60 =
2A =
2D =
Incand.
6V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
48V AC/DC
60V AC/DC
120V AC
120V DC
Plastic Glass Lens Color Plastic Glass Lens Color
Standard/Master – Incandescent Standard/Master/PresTest – LED
H2 =
H3 =
H4 =
H5 =
H6 =
H9 =
H0 =
G2 =
G3 =
G4 =
G5 =
G6 =
G9 =
G0 =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
RP =
GP =
YP =
WP =
LP =
AP =
RG =
GG =
YG =
WG =
LG =
AG =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
PresTest – Incandescent
V2 =
V3 =
V4 =
V5 =
V6 =
V9 =
V0 =
P2 =
P3 =
P4 =
P5 =
P6 =
P9 =
P0 =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-195
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series
Contents
Description Page
Product Description . . . . . . . . . 47-195
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-195
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-195
Standards and
Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-195
Technical Data and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-196
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-197
Illuminated
Pushbutton Units. . . . . . . . 47-198
Indicating Light Units . . . . . 47-200
Push-Pull Units. . . . . . . . . . . 47-201
Selector Switch Units . . . . . 47-203
Selector Switch Contact
Block Selection . . . . . . . . . 47-205
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . 47-205
Options
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-206
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-208
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-210
Catalog Number
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-214
Product Description
The Cutler-Hammer® HT800 Series
from Eaton’s electrical business is a
family of 30.5 mm pushbutton devices
which includes momentary, illumi-
nated and mushroomhead pushbut-
tons, selector switches, indicating
lights and push-pull switches. The
HT800 devices have a familiar appear-
ance found in most industrial applica-
tions and are suitable for replacement
of several other manufacturers’ 30.5
mm pushbutton devices.
Features
■Anodized aluminum mounting rings
■Watertight double V-gasket seals
■Extended height bulbs
■Transparent housing contact blocks
■Color-coded contact blocks
■Gold-plated contacts (on low
voltage contact block)
■Reliability ridge on movable contact
■Stackable screw-mounted contact
blocks
■Contact blocks can be mounted in
left/right or top/bottom positions
■Standard NC contact opens before
NO contact closes (break before
make operation)
■Bright and long lasting LED indicat-
ing lights in six colors
■Field convertible maintained selector
switches — from two- to three-
position and vice versa
■Field selectable knob/lever
mounting positions — at any
22.5° increment
Benefits
■Corrosion resistant NEMA 4X finish
■Watertight and oiltight NEMA 4, 13
ingress protection
■Increased side illumination of
indicating lights and illuminated
pushbuttons
■Easy visual inspection of contact
conditions
■Easily identifiable NO (white) or
NC (black) contact blocks
■Gold-plated contacts suitable for
logic level circuits
■Reliability ridge penetrates contami-
nation buildup on stationary
contacts
■Left/right or top/bottom mounted
contact blocks allow correct posi-
tioning in retrofit applications
■All-purpose selector switches are
convertible and can rotate in 22.5°
increments to suit panel layouts
Standards and Certifications
■UL508 per File No. E131568
■CSA C22.2 No. 14 per File No.
LR68551
Ingress Protection
■UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12
and 13 when mounted in similarly
rated enclosures
HT800 Series
January 2010
47-196
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Technical Data and Specifications
Technical Data and Specifications
Table 47-317. HT800 — Specifications
Table 47-318. Electrical Ratings — HT800 Standard Contact Blocks, UL Rating
Heavy duty.
Standard duty.
Table 47-319. UL A600 and P600 Ratings
DC ratings do not apply to NOEM (Normally Open Early Make) and NCLB (Normal Closed Late
Break) contact blocks HT8C and HT8D.
Maximum make or break volt-amperes at 300V or less.
Description Specification
Mechanical Ratings
Frequency of Operation
Pushbuttons
Selector Switches
Push-Pull Operators
6,000 Operations per hour
3,000 Operations per hour
3,000 Operations per hour
Mechanical Endurance/Life
Pushbuttons
Selector Switches
Push-Pull Operators
10 x 10
6
Operations 6K Ops/Hr with 6 NO on left and 6 NC on right
250 x 10
3
Operations 3K Ops/Hr with 2 NO on left and 2 NC on right
250 x 10
3
Operations 3K Ops/Hr with 6 NO on left and 6 NC on right
Climatic Conditions
Operating Temperature 10° to 140°F (-12° to 60°C)
Storage Temperature -40° to 176°F (-40° to 80°C)
Altitude 6,562 ft. (2,000m)
Humidity 95% RH @ 60°C
Terminals
Contact Blocks #6-32 posi-drive saddle clamp type, 1 x 16 AWG to 2 x 14 AWG,
12 in-lbs max.
Light Units #6-32 posi-drive saddle clamp type, 1 x 22 AWG to 2 x 14 AWG,
7 in-lbs max.
Electrical Ratings
Standard Contact Blocks
UL (NEMA) Rating See Table 47-318.
Logic Level Contact Block
Power Rating
5V 1 mA (minimum)
28V 500 mA (maximum)
Description/Function Contact
Type
Catalog
Number
AC DC
Standard Normally Open contact NO HT8A A600 P600
Standard Normally Closed contact NC HT8B A600 P600
Normally Open Early Make Contact will make
circuit before standard NO contact. DC ratings
do not apply.
NOEM HT8C A600 —
Normally Closed Late Break contact will open
after standard NC contact. DC ratings do not
apply.
NCLB HT8D A600 —
Logic level, low voltage NO contact.
Gold plated contacts.
NO HT8E 5V 1 mA (minimum)
28V 500 mA (maximum)
Description Volts AC 50 or 60 Hz Volts DC
120 240 480 600 125 250 600
Make and Emerg. Interrupting Capacity (Amp)
Normal Load Break (Amp)
Thermal Current (Amp)
Voltamperes:
Make and Emerg. Interrupting Capacity
Normal Load Break
60
6
10
7200
720
30
3
10
7200
720
15
1.5
10
7200
720
12
1.2
10
7200
720
1.1
1.1
5
138
138
0.55
0.55
5
138
138
0.2
0.2
5
138
138
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-197
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Momentary Pushbutton Units
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units, Non-illuminated
■Flush, Extended or 40 mm Mushroom Head Operators
Table 47-320. Momentary Contact Pushbutton Units, Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Table 47-321. Contact Blocks
Maximum of (4) contact blocks per side or a total of (8) contact blocks
recommended.
Contact Type Button Color Flush Head Extended Head Mushroom Head (40 mm)
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
No Contact Black
Red
Green
HT8AAH
HT8AAR
HT8AAG
HT8ABH
HT8ABR
HT8ABG
HT8AEH
HT8AER
HT8AEG
1NO Black
Red
Green
HT8AAHA
HT8AARA
HT8AAGA
HT8ABHA
HT8ABRA
HT8ABGA
HT8AEHA
HT8AERA
HT8AEGA
1NC Black
Red
Green
HT8AAHB
HT8AARB
HT8AAGB
HT8ABHB
HT8ABRB
HT8ABGB
HT8AEHB
HT8AERB
HT8AEGB
1NO-1NC Black
Red
Green
HT8AAHAB
HT8AARAB
HT8AAGAB
HT8ABHAB
HT8ABRAB
HT8ABGAB
HT8AEHAB
HT8AERAB
HT8AEGAB
2NO-2NC Black
Red
Green
HT8AAHF1Q1
HT8AARF1Q1
HT8AAGF1Q1
HT8ABHF1Q1
HT8ABRF1Q1
HT8ABGF1Q1
HT8AEHF1Q1
HT8AERF1Q1
HT8AEGF1Q1
Extended Head Operator
Cat. No. HT8ABH
Flush Head Operator
Cat. No. HT8AAH
40 mm Mushroom Head Operator
Cat. No. HT8AEH
Description/Function Contact
Type
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Standard Normally Open contact NO HT8A
Standard Normally Closed contact NC HT8B
Normally Open Early Make contact will
make circuit before standard NO contact.
DC ratings do not apply.
NOEM HT8C
Normally Closed Late Break contact will
open after standard NC contact. DC ratings
do not apply.
NCLB HT8D
Logic level, low voltage NO contact.
Gold plated contacts.
NO HT8E
NO Contact Block NC Contact Block
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-208
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-210
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-206
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-198
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Illuminated Pushbutton Units
Illuminated Pushbutton Units
■Incandescent or LED
■Full Voltage or Transformer Type
■24V and 120V
Table 47-322. Illuminated Pushbuttons — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
Illuminated Pushbutton Operator
Cat. No. HT8GBRV7
Type Volts Lens
Color
Operator Only 1NO 1NC 1NO-1NC 2NO-2NC
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Incandescent Lamp
Full
Voltage
120V
AC/DC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GBFV
HT8GBRV7
HT8GBGV7
HT8GBAV7
HT8GBCV7
HT8GBWV7
HT8GBYV7
HT8GBBV7
—
HT8GBRAV7
HT8GBGAV7
HT8GBAAV7
HT8GBCAV7
HT8GBWAV7
HT8GBYAV7
HT8GBBAV7
—
HT8GBRBV7
HT8GBGBV7
HT8GBABV7
HT8GBCBV7
HT8GBWBV7
HT8GBYBV7
HT8GBBBV7
—
HT8GBRABV7
HT8GBGABV7
HT8GBAABV7
HT8GBCABV7
HT8GBWABV7
HT8GBYABV7
HT8GBBABV7
—
HT8GBRF1Q1V7
HT8GBGF1Q1V7
HT8GBAF1Q1V7
HT8GBCF1Q1V7
HT8GBWF1Q1V7
HT8GBYF1Q1V7
HT8GBBF1Q1V7
24V
AC/DC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GBFV
HT8GBRV3
HT8GBGV3
HT8GBAV3
HT8GBCV3
HT8GBWV3
HT8GBYV3
HT8GBBV3
—
HT8GBRAV3
HT8GBGAV3
HT8GBAAV3
HT8GBCAV3
HT8GBWAV3
HT8GBYAV3
HT8GBBAV3
—
HT8GBRBV3
HT8GBGBV3
HT8GBABV3
HT8GBCBV3
HT8GBWBV3
HT8GBYBV3
HT8GBBBV3
—
HT8GBRABV3
HT8GBGABV3
HT8GBAABV3
HT8GBCABV3
HT8GBWABV3
HT8GBYABV3
HT8GBBABV3
—
HT8GBRF1Q1V3
HT8GBGF1Q1V3
HT8GBAF1Q1V3
HT8GBCF1Q1V3
HT8GBWF1Q1V3
HT8GBYF1Q1V3
HT8GBBF1Q1V3
Trans-
former
120V
AC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GBT1
HT8GBRT1
HT8GBGT1
HT8GBAT1
HT8GBCT1
HT8GBWT1
HT8GBYT1
HT8GBBT1
—
HT8GBRAT1
HT8GBGAT1
HT8GBAAT1
HT8GBCAT1
HT8GBWAT1
HT8GBYAT1
HT8GBBAT1
—
HT8GBRBT1
HT8GBGBT1
HT8GBABT1
HT8GBCBT1
HT8GBWBT1
HT8GBYBT1
HT8GBBBT1
—
HT8GBRABT1
HT8GBGABT1
HT8GBAABT1
HT8GBCABT1
HT8GBWABT1
HT8GBYABT1
HT8GBBABT1
—
HT8GBRF1Q1T1
HT8GBGF1Q1T1
HT8GBAF1Q1T1
HT8GBCF1Q1T1
HT8GBWF1Q1T1
HT8GBYF1Q1T1
HT8GBBF1Q1T1
LED
Full
Voltage
120V
AC/DC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GBFV
HT8GBRF7
HT8GBGF7
HT8GBAF7
HT8GBCF7
HT8GBWF7
HT8GBYF7
HT8GBBF7
—
HT8GBRAF7
HT8GBGAF7
HT8GBAAF7
HT8GBCAF7
HT8GBWAF7
HT8GBYAF7
HT8GBBAF7
—
HT8GBRBF7
HT8GBGBF7
HT8GBABF7
HT8GBCBF7
HT8GBWBF7
HT8GBYBF7
HT8GBBBF7
—
HT8GBRABF7
HT8GBGABF7
HT8GBAABF7
HT8GBCABF7
HT8GBWABF7
HT8GBYABF7
HT8GBBABF7
—
HT8GBRF1Q1F7
HT8GBGF1Q1F7
HT8GBAF1Q1F7
HT8GBCF1Q1F7
HT8GBWF1Q1F7
HT8GBYF1Q1F7
HT8GBBF1Q1F7
24V
AC/DC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GBFV
HT8GBRF3
HT8GBGF3
HT8GBAF3
HT8GBCF3
HT8GBWF3
HT8GBYF3
HT8GBBF3
—
HT8GBRAF3
HT8GBGAF3
HT8GBAAF3
HT8GBCAF3
HT8GBWAF3
HT8GBYAF3
HT8GBBAF3
—
HT8GBRBF3
HT8GBGBF3
HT8GBABF3
HT8GBCBF3
HT8GBWBF3
HT8GBYBF3
HT8GBBBF3
—
HT8GBRABF3
HT8GBGABF3
HT8GBAABF3
HT8GBCABF3
HT8GBWABF3
HT8GBYABF3
HT8GBBABF3
—
HT8GBRF1Q1F3
HT8GBGF1Q1F3
HT8GBAF1Q1F3
HT8GBCF1Q1F3
HT8GBWF1Q1F3
HT8GBYF1Q1F3
HT8GBBF1Q1F3
Trans-
former
120V
AC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GBT1
HT8GBRL1
HT8GBGL1
HT8GBAL1
HT8GBCL1
HT8GBWL1
HT8GBYL1
HT8GBBL1
—
HT8GBRAL1
HT8GBGAL1
HT8GBAAL1
HT8GBCAL1
HT8GBWAL1
HT8GBYAL1
HT8GBBAL1
—
HT8GBRBL1
HT8GBGBL1
HT8GBABL1
HT8GBCBL1
HT8GBWBL1
HT8GBYBL1
HT8GBBBL1
—
HT8GBRABL1
HT8GBGABL1
HT8GBAABL1
HT8GBCABL1
HT8GBWABL1
HT8GBYABL1
HT8GBBABL1
—
HT8GBRF1Q1L1
HT8GBGF1Q1L1
HT8GBAF1Q1L1
HT8GBCF1Q1L1
HT8GBWF1Q1L1
HT8GBYF1Q1L1
HT8GBBF1Q1L1
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-208
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-210
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-206
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-199
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units
Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton
Units
■Incandescent or LED
■Full Voltage or Transformer Type
■24V and 120V
Table 47-323. Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Operator
Cat. No. HT8GDRV7
Type Volts Lens
Color
Operator Only 1NO 1NC 1NO-1NC 2NO-2NC
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Incandescent Lamp
Full
Voltage
120V
AC/DC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GDFV
HT8GDRV7
HT8GDGV7
HT8GDAV7
HT8GDCV7
HT8GDWV7
HT8GDYV7
HT8GDBV7
—
HT8GDRAV7
HT8GDGAV7
HT8GDAAV7
HT8GDVAV7
HT8GDWAV7
HT8GDYAV7
HT8GDBAV7
—
HT8GDRBV7
HT8GDGBV7
HT8GDABV7
HT8GDCBV7
HT8GDWBV7
HT8GDYBV7
HT8GDBBV7
—
HT8GDRABV7
HT8GDGABV7
HT8GDAABV7
HT8GDCABV7
HT8GDWABV7
HT8GDYABV7
HT8GDBABV7
—
HT8GDRF1Q1V7
HT8GDGF1Q1V7
HT8GDAF1Q1V7
HT8GDCF1Q1V7
HT8GDWF1Q1V7
HT8GDYF1Q1V7
HT8GDBF1Q1V7
24V
AC/DC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GDFV
HT8GDRV3
HT8GDGV3
HT8GDAV3
HT8GDCV3
HT8GDWV3
HT8GDYV3
HT8GDBV3
—
HT8GDRAV3
HT8GDGAV3
HT8GDAAV3
HT8GDVAV3
HT8GDWAV3
HT8GDYAV3
HT8GDBAV3
—
HT8GDRBV3
HT8GDGBV3
HT8GDABV3
HT8GDCBV3
HT8GDWBV3
HT8GDYBV3
HT8GDBBV3
—
HT8GDRABV3
HT8GDGABV3
HT8GDAABV3
HT8GDCABV3
HT8GDWABV3
HT8GDYABV3
HT8GDBABV3
—
HT8GDRF1Q1V3
HT8GDGF1Q1V3
HT8GDAF1Q1V3
HT8GDCF1Q1V3
HT8GDWF1Q1V3
HT8GDYF1Q1V3
HT8GDBF1Q1V3
Trans-
former
120V
AC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GDT1
HT8GDRT1
HT8GDGT1
HT8GDAT1
HT8GDCT1
HT8GDWT1
HT8GDYT1
HT8GDBT1
—
HT8GDRAT1
HT8GDGAT1
HT8GDAAT1
HT8GDCAT1
HT8GDWAT1
HT8GDYAT1
HT8GDBAT1
—
HT8GDRBT1
HT8GDGBT1
HT8GDABT1
HT8GDCBT1
HT8GDWBT1
HT8GDYBT1
HT8GDBBT1
—
HT8GDRABT1
HT8GDGABT1
HT8GDAABT1
HT8GDCABT1
HT8GDWABT1
HT8GDYABT1
HT8GDBABT1
—
HT8GDRF1Q1T1
HT8GDGF1Q1T1
HT8GDAF1Q1T1
HT8GDCF1Q1T1
HT8GDWF1Q1T1
HT8GDYF1Q1T1
HT8GDBF1Q1T1
LED
Full
Voltage
120V
AC/DC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GDFV
HT8GDRF7
HT8GDGF7
HT8GDAF7
HT8GDCF7
HT8GDWF7
HT8GDYF7
HT8GDBF7
—
HT8GDRAF7
HT8GDGAF7
HT8GDAAF7
HT8GDCAF7
HT8GDWAF7
HT8GDYAF7
HT8GDBAF7
—
HT8GDRBF7
HT8GDGBF7
HT8GDABF7
HT8GDCBF7
HT8GDWBF7
HT8GDYBF7
HT8GDBBF7
—
HT8GDRABF7
HT8GDGABF7
HT8GDAABF7
HT8GDCABF7
HT8GDWABF7
HT8GDYABF7
HT8GDBABF7
—
HT8GDRF1Q1F7
HT8GDGF1Q1F7
HT8GDAF1Q1F7
HT8GDCF1Q1F7
HT8GDWF1Q1F7
HT8GDYF1Q1F7
HT8GDBF1Q1F7
24V
AC/DC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GDFV
HT8GDRF3
HT8GDGF3
HT8GDAF3
HT8GDCF3
HT8GDWF3
HT8GDYF3
HT8GDBF3
—
HT8GDRAF3
HT8GDGAF3
HT8GDAAF3
HT8GDCAF3
HT8GDWAF3
HT8GDYAF3
HT8GDBAF3
—
HT8GDRBF3
HT8GDGBF3
HT8GDABF3
HT8GDCBF3
HT8GDWBF3
HT8GDYBF3
HT8GDBBF3
—
HT8GDRABF3
HT8GDGABF3
HT8GDAABF3
HT8GDCABF3
HT8GDWABF3
HT8GDYABF3
HT8GDBABF3
—
HT8GDRF1Q1F3
HT8GDGF1Q1F3
HT8GDAF1Q1F3
HT8GDCF1Q1F3
HT8GDWF1Q1F3
HT8GDYF1Q1F3
HT8GDBF1Q1F3
Trans-
former
120V
AC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GDT1
HT8GDRL1
HT8GDGL1
HT8GDAL1
HT8GDCL1
HT8GDWL1
HT8GDYL1
HT8GDBL1
—
HT8GDRAL1
HT8GDGAL1
HT8GDAAL1
HT8GDCAL1
HT8GDWAL1
HT8GDYAL1
HT8GDBAL1
—
HT8GDRBL1
HT8GDGBL1
HT8GDABL1
HT8GDCBL1
HT8GDWBL1
HT8GDYBL1
HT8GDBBL1
—
HT8GDRABL1
HT8GDGABL1
HT8GDAABL1
HT8GDCABL1
HT8GDWABL1
HT8GDYABL1
HT8GDBABL1
—
HT8GDRF1Q1L1
HT8GDGF1Q1L1
HT8GDAF1Q1L1
HT8GDCF1Q1L1
HT8GDWF1Q1L1
HT8GDYF1Q1L1
HT8GDBF1Q1L1
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-208
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-210
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-206
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-200
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Indicating Light Units
Indicating Light Units
■Incandescent or LED
■Full Voltage or Transformer Type
■Standard and PresTest Types
■24V and 120V
PresTest — This device incorporates a
press-to-test feature whereby depress-
ing the lens disconnects the light from
the source being monitored and con-
nects the lamp to a continuously ener-
gized circuit for immediate detection
of faulty lamps. Table 47-324. Indicating Light Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
Indicating Light Unit
Cat. No. HT8HFRV7
PresTest Light Unit
Cat. No. HT8GTRV7
Type Volts Lens
Color
Indicating Light PresTest
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Incandescent
Full
Voltage
120V
AC/DC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8HFFV
HT8HFRV7
HT8HFGV7
HT8HFAV7
HT8HFCV7
HT8HFWV7
HT8HFYV7
HT8HFBV7
HT8GTFV
HT8GTRV7
HT8GTGV7
HT8GTAV7
HT8GTCV7
HT8GTWV7
HT8GTYV7
HT8GTBV7
24V
AC/DC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8HFFV
HT8HFRV3
HT8HFGV3
HT8HFAV3
HT8HFCV3
HT8HFWV3
HT8HFYV3
HT8HFBV3
HT8GTFV
HT8GTRV3
HT8GTGV3
HT8GTAV3
HT8GTCV3
HT8GTWV3
HT8GTYV3
HT8GTBV3
Transformer 120V AC
50/60 Hz
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8HBT1
HT8HBRT1
HT8HBGT1
HT8HBAT1
HT8HBCT1
HT8HBWT1
HT8HBYT1
HT8HBBT1
HT8GTT1
HT8GTRT1
HT8GTGT1
HT8GTAT1
HT8GTCT1
HT8GTWT1
HT8GTYT1
HT8GTBT1
LED
Full
Voltage
120V
AC/DC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8HFFV
HT8HFRF7
HT8HFGF7
HT8HFAF7
HT8HFCF7
HT8HFWF7
HT8HFYF7
HT8HFBF7
HT8GTFV
HT8GTRF7
HT8GTGF7
HT8GTAF7
HT8GTCF7
HT8GTWF7
HT8GTYF7
HT8GTBF7
24V
AC/DC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8HFFV
HT8HFRF3
HT8HFGF3
HT8HFAF3
HT8HFCF3
HT8HFWF3
HT8HFYF3
HT8HFBF3
HT8GTFV
HT8GTRF3
HT8GTGF3
HT8GTAF3
HT8GTCF3
HT8GTWF3
HT8GTYF3
HT8GTBF3
Transformer 120V AC
50/60 Hz
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8HBT1
HT8HBRL1
HT8HBGL1
HT8HBAL1
HT8HBCL1
HT8HBWL1
HT8HBYL1
HT8HBBL1
HT8GTT1
HT8GTRL1
HT8GTGL1
HT8GTAL1
HT8GTCL1
HT8GTWL1
HT8GTYL1
HT8GTBL1
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-208
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-210
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-206
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-201
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
January 2010
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Push-Pull Units
Push-Pull Units
■40 mm Mushroom Head
■Two-Position Maintained
■Non-illuminated
Table 47-325. 2-Position Push-Pull, Maintained, Non-illuminated —
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
NCLB = Normally Closed Late Break.
Table 47-326. Contact Blocks
Maximum of (4) contact blocks per side or a total of (8) contact blocks recommended.
Contact
Type
Operator Position Button
Color
2-Position Maintained
Push-Pull
Round Head
Mushroomhead Button
Flat Head
Mushroomhead Button
Out In Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
No Contact
——
Black
Red
Green
HT8CBH
HT8CBR
HT8CBG
HT8DBH
HT8DBR
HT8DBG
NO
OX
Black
Red
Green
HT8CBHA
HT8CBRA
HT8CBGA
HT8DBHA
HT8DBRA
HT8DBGA
NC
XO
Black
Red
Green
HT8CBHB
HT8CBRB
HT8CBGB
HT8DBHB
HT8DBRB
HT8DBGB
NO-NC O
X
X
O
Black
Red
Green
HT8CBHAB
HT8CBRAB
HT8CBGAB
HT8DBHAB
HT8DBRAB
HT8DBGAB
NCLB
NC X
X
O
O
Black
Red
Green
HT8CBHD1B
HT8CBRD1B
HT8CBGD1B
HT8DBHD1B
HT8DBRD1B
HT8DBGD1B
NCLB
NCLB X
X
O
O
Black
Red
Green
HT8CBHD1D
HT8CBRD1D
HT8CBGD1D
HT8DBHD1D
HT8DBRD1D
HT8DBGD1D
Maintained Maintained
NO Contact Block NC Contact Block
Description/Function Contact
Type
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Standard Normally Open contact NO HT8A
Standard Normally Closed contact NC HT8B
Normally Open Early Make contact will make circuit
before standard NO contact. DC ratings do not apply.
NOEM HT8C
Normally Closed Late Break contact will open after
standard NC contact. DC ratings do not apply.
NCLB HT8D
Logic level, low voltage NO contact. Gold plated
contacts.
NO HT8E
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-208
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-210
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-206
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
Round Head
2-Position Push-Pull Unit
Cat. No. HT8CBR
Flat Head
2-Position Push-Pull Unit
Cat. No. HT8DBH
January 2010
47-202
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
■Incandescent or LED
■Full Voltage or Transformer Type
■24V and 120V
Table 47-327. Illuminated Push-Pull Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Complete illuminated push-pull switches will not fit in a standard 3" deep enclosure.
Illuminated Push-Pull Unit
Cat. No. HT8FBRABV7
Type Volts Lens
Color
Operator Only 1NO 1NC 1NO-1NC 2NCLB
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Incandescent Lamp
Full
Voltage
120V
AC/DC
Red
Green
HT8FBRV7
HT8FBGV7
HT8FBRAV7
HT8FBGAV7
HT8FBRBV7
HT8FBGBV7
HT8FBRABV7
HT8FBGABV7
HT8FBRD1DV7
HT8FBGD1DV7
24V
AC/DC
Red
Green
HT8FBRV3
HT8FBGV3
HT8FBRAV3
HT8FBGAV3
HT8FBRBV3
HT8FBGBV3
HT8FBRABV3
HT8FBGABV3
HT8FBRD1DV3
HT8FBGD1DV3
Trans-
former
120V
AC
Red
Green
HT8FBRT1
HT8FBGT1
HT8FBRAT1
HT8FBGAT1
HT8FBRBT1
HT8FBGBT1
HT8FBRABT1
HT8FBGABT1
HT8FBRD1DT1
HT8FBGD1DT1
LED
Full
Voltage
120V
AC/DC
Red
Green
HT8FBRF7
HT8FBGF7
HT8FBRAF7
HT8FBGAF7
HT8FBRBF7
HT8FBGBF7
HT8FBRABF7
HT8FBGABF7
HT8FBRD1DF7
HT8FBGD1DF7
24V
AC/DC
Red
Green
HT8FBRF3
HT8FBGF3
HT8FBRAF3
HT8FBGAF3
HT8FBRBF3
HT8FBGBF3
HT8FBRABF3
HT8FBGABF3
HT8FBRD1DF3
HT8FBGD1DF3
Trans-
former
120V
AC
Red
Green
HT8FBRL1
HT8FBGL1
HT8FBRAL1
HT8FBGAL1 .
HT8FBRBL1
HT8FBGBL1
HT8FBRABL1
HT8FBGABL1
HT8FBRD1DL1
HT8FBGD1DL1
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-208
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-197
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-210
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-206
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-203
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Selector Switch Units
Selector Switch Units
■Two-, Three- and Four-Position
■Non-illuminated
Table 47-328. 2-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
Contact
Type
Operator Position Operating Mode
M = Maintained
S = Momentary
Standard Black Knob Standard Black Lever
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
No Contacts
——
M
S
M
M
M
S
HT8JAH3A
HT8JKH3A
HT8JNH3A
HT8JDH3A
HT8JLH3A
HT8JPH3A
1NO
OX
M
S
M
M
M
S
HT8JAH3AA5
HT8JKH3AA5
HT8JNH3AA5
HT8JDH3AA5
HT8JLH3AA5
HT8JPH3AA5
2NO X
O
O
X
M
S
M
M
M
S
HT8JAH3AAA5
HT8JKH3AAA5
HT8JNH3AAA5
HT8JDH3AAA5
HT8JLH3AAA5
HT8JPH3AAA5
2NO-2NC X
O
X
O
O
X
O
X
M
S
M
M
M
S
HT8JAH3AF1Q1
HT8JKH3AF1Q1
HT8JNH3AF1Q1
HT8JDH3AF1Q1
HT8JLH3AF1Q1
HT8JPH3AF1Q1
Standard Knob
Operator
Cat. No.
HT8JAH3A
Standard Lever
Operator
Cat. No.
HT8JDH3A
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-208
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-205
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-210
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-206
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-204
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Selector Switch Units
Table 47-329. 3-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
For OXO, NC contacts must be wired in series — see Table 47-332 on Page 47-205.
Table 47-330. 4-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
Contact
Type
Operator Position Operating Mode
M = Maintained
S = Momentary
Standard Black Knob Standard Black Lever
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
No Contacts
———
M
S
M
S
M
M
M
M
M
M
S
S
HT8JBH1D
HT8JRH1D
HT8JUH1D
HT8JXH1D
HT8JEH1D
HT8JSH1D
HT8JVH1D
HT8JYH1D
2NO
X
O
O
O
O
X
M
S
M
S
M
M
M
M
M
M
S
S
HT8JBH1DAA5
HT8JRH1DAA5
HT8JUH1DAA5
HT8JXH1DAA5
HT8JEH1DAA5
HT8JSH1DAA5
HT8JVH1DAA5
HT8JYH1DAA5
2NO-2NC X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
M
S
M
S
M
M
M
M
M
M
S
S
HT8JBH1DF1Q1
HT8JRH1DF1Q1
HT8JUH1DF1Q1
HT8JXH1DF1Q1
HT8JEH1DF1Q1
HT8JSH1DF1Q1
HT8JVH1DF1Q1
HT8JYH1DF1Q1
2NO-2NC X
O
O
X
O
X
O
X
O
X
X
O
M
S
M
S
M
M
M
M
M
M
S
S
HT8JBH1DF1Q1
HT8JRH1DF1Q1
HT8JUH1DF1Q1
HT8JXH1DF1Q1
HT8JEH1DF1Q1
HT8JSH1DF1Q1
HT8JVH1DF1Q1
HT8JYH1DF1Q1
Contact
Type
Operator Position Operating Mode
M = Maintained
S = Momentary
Standard Black Knob Standard Black Lever
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
No Contacts
————
M
S
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
S
HT8JCH8E
HT8LNH8E
HT8LRH8E
HT8JFH8E
HT8LPH8E
HT8LSH8E
2NO-2NC X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
M
S
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
S
HT8JCH8EF1Q1
HT8LNH8EF1Q1
HT8LRH8EF1Q1
HT8JFH8EF1Q1
HT8LPH8EF1Q1
HT8LSH8EF1Q1
Standard Knob
Operator
Cat. No.
HT8JBH1D
Standard Lever
Operator
Cat. No.
HT8JEH1D
Standard Knob
Operator
Cat. No.
HT8JCH8E
Standard Lever
Operator
Cat. No.
HT8JFH8E
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-208
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-205
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-210
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-206
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-205
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Selector Switch Selection, Contact Blocks
Selector Switch Contact Block Selection
For 2-, 3- and 4-Position Selector Switches
Table 47-331. 2-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 3A)
Table 47-332. 3-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 1D)
Table 47-333. 4-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 8E)
Contact Blocks
Table 47-334. Contact Blocks
See Page 47-196 for contact block electrical ratings.
Table 47-335. Contact Block Location (Viewed from Rear) Suffix Codes
Maximum of (2) contact blocks per side or a total of (4) contact blocks
recommended.
Operator Position Left Right
XO
OX
Operator Position Left Right
XOO
OXO
OOX
OXX
XXO
Operator Position Left Right
XOOO
OXOO
OOXO
OOOX
NO or NC
NC or NO
NO
NC NC
NO
NC
NC
NO
NC
NO
NC
Description/Function Contact
Type
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Standard Normally Open contact NO HT8A
Standard Normally Closed contact NC HT8B
Normally Open Early Make contact will
make circuit before standard NO contact.
DC ratings do not apply.
NOEM HT8C
Normally Closed Late Break contact will
open after standard NC contact. DC
ratings do not apply.
NCLB HT8D
Logic level, low voltage NO contact.
Gold plated contacts.
NO HT8E
Left Side Right Side
A
A2
B1
B2
C
C2
D1
D2
E1
F1
F4
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NO
2NO
NC
2NC
NOEM
2 NOEM
NCLB
2 NCLB
NOEM-NCLB
NO & NC
1NO-1NC
A5
A6
B
B6
C5
C6
D
D6
E5
Q1
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NO
2NO
NC
2NC
NOEM
2 NOEM
NCLB
2 NCLB
NOEM-NCLB
NO & NC
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
NO Contact Block NC Contact Block
January 2010
47-206
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Legend Plates
Options
Legend Plates
Table 47-336. For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights Table 47-337. For Selector Switch Operators
Table 47-338. For Push-Pull Units
3/32" high lettering.
1/8" high lettering.
Table 47-339. Blank Plastic Legend Plates — Square
Standard Jumbo
Legend Color of
Field
Catalog
Number
(Standard)
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
(Jumbo)
Price
U.S. $
Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16" High
CLAMP Black HT8SP90 HT8LP90
CLOSE Black HT8SP73 HT8LP73
DOWN Black HT8SP74 HT8LP74
EMERG. STOP Red HT8SP13 HT8LP13
FAST Black HT8SP75 HT8LP75
FASTER Black HT8SP87 HT8LP87
FEEDER ON Black HT8SP94 HT8LP94
FEEDER OFF Black HT8SP95 HT8LP95
FORWARD Black HT8SP15 HT8LP15
HIGH Black HT8SP16 HT8LP16
IN Black HT8SP17 HT8LP17
INCH Black HT8SP18 HT8LP18
JOG Black HT8SP19 HT8LP19
JOG FOR. Black HT8SP20 HT8LP20
JOG REV. Black HT8SP21 HT8LP21
LOW Black HT8SP22 HT8LP22
LOWER Black HT8SP23 HT8LP23
LUBE-FAIL Black HT8SP92 HT8LP92
MOTOR RUN Black HT8SP81 HT8LP81
MOTOR STOP Black HT8SP82 HT8LP82
OFF Red HT8SP24 HT8LP24
ON Black HT8SP25 HT8LP25
OPEN Black HT8SP26 HT8LP26
OUT Black HT8SP27 HT8LP27
POWER ON Black HT8SP80 HT8LP80
RAISE Black HT8SP28 HT8LP28
READY Black HT8SP86 HT8LP86
RESET Black HT8SP29 HT8LP29
REVERSE Black HT8SP30 HT8LP30
RUN Black HT8SP31 HT8LP31
SAFE Black HT8SP85 HT8LP85
SLOW Black HT8SP32 HT8LP32
SLOWER Black HT8SP88 HT8LP88
START Black HT8SP33 HT8LP33
STOP Red HT8SP34 HT8LP34
TEST Black HT8SP83 HT8LP83
TRANSFER Black HT8SP93 HT8LP93
TRIP Black HT8SP84 HT8LP84
UNCLAMP Black HT8SP91 HT8LP91
UP Black HT8SP35 HT8LP35
Legend Color of
Field
Catalog
Number
(Standard)
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
(Jumbo)
Price
U.S. $
2-Position — 3/16" High Lettering
FOR. REV. Black HT8SP38 HT8LP38
HAND AUTO Black HT8SP39 HT8LP39
HIGH LOW Black HT8SP40 HT8LP40
JOG RUN Black HT8SP41 HT8LP41
MAN. AUTO Black HT8SP67 HT8LP67
OFF ON Black HT8SP42 HT8LP42
OPEN CLOSE Black HT8SP43 HT8LP43
RUN JOG Black HT8SP44 HT8LP44
SAFE RUN Black HT8SP45 HT8LP45
START JOG Black HT8SP46 HT8LP46
START STOP Black HT8SP47 HT8LP47
UP DOWN Black HT8SP48 HT8LP48
3-Position — 3/16" High Lettering
AUTO OFF HAND
Black HT8SP49 HT8LP49
FOR. OFF REV.
Black HT8SP50 HT8LP50
FOR. SAFE REV.
Black HT8SP69 HT8LP69
HAND OFF AUTO
Black HT8SP51 HT8LP51
MAN. OFF AUTO
Black HT8SP68 HT8LP68
OPEN OFF CLOSE
Black HT8SP53 HT8LP53
RUN SAFE JOG
Black HT8SP70 HT8LP70
UP OFF DOWN
Black HT8SP54 HT8LP54
ON STOP SAFE
Black HT8SP71 HT8LP71
Legend Color of
Field
Catalog
Number
(Standard)
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
(Jumbo)
Price
U.S. $
ON / OFF Black HT8PP5 HT8R5
OPEN / CLOSE Black HT8PP8 HT8R8
UP / DOWN Black HT8PP11 HT8R11
Legend Color of
Field
Catalog
Number
(Standard)
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
(Jumbo)
Price
U.S. $
Black White/Silver HT8SP76 HT8LP76
White Red/ Black HT8SP77 HT8LP77
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-213
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-207
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Legend Plates
Legend Plates with Non-standard Markings
When Ordering Specify
■Catalog Number of Blank Plate per
Table 47-340.
■Insert the following into Order
Notes: Legend, Letter Size per
Table 47-341 and Locations per
Figure 47-135.
Ordering Example:
Legend Characters Available
Figure 47-135. Legend Positions
Table 47-340. Blank Plastic Legend Plates for Non-standard Markings — Plastic
Table 47-341. Maximum Characters per Legend Plate and Approximate Dimensions
Can be used on top row only of any enclosure.
Catalog No.: HT85P76STAMP
Letter Size: 3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
Pos. A — POWER HOUSE
Pos. B — START PUMP 1
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X
Y Z / - . , 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Jumbo Size
HT8LP Series
A
C
K
D
B
Standard Size
HT8SP Series
AB
B
A
GF
AE
GH
A
I
AF
D4
C4B4
A4
Legend Color of
Field
Standard Jumbo
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Black
White
White/Silver
Red/Black
HT8SP76STAMP
HT8SP77STAMP
HT8LP76STAMP
HT8LP77STAMP
Top
(Aluminum
and Plastic)
Approximate Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
Style Character Size
Width Height 3/32" High 1/8" High 3/16" High
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Standard 1.75 (44.5) 1.75 (44.5) Square 2 18 2 13 1 9
Jumbo 2.19 (55.6) 2.19 (55.6) Square 5 23 3 18 2 12
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-208
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Accessories
Accessories
Table 47-342. HT800 Accessories
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Illuminated Pushbutton Guard HT8A15
Wrench Tool HT8WRENCH
Lamp/Bulb Removal Tool HT8LAMPTOOL
Thrust Washer (Anti-rotation)
(Included with every operator)
HT8X1
Trim Ring
(Included with every operator)
HT8X2
Sealing/Spacer Washer
(Five included with every operator)
HT8X3
Grounding Kit for Pushbuttons and Selector Switches
(Included with every operator)
HT8GR1
Grounding Kit for Indicating Lights
(Included with indicating lights)
HT8GR2
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-209
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Accessories
Incandescent
Bulb
LED
Bulb
Light Unit
Table 47-343. Light Units
Table 47-344. Replacement Bulbs and LEDs
Table 47-345. Replacement Lenses
Type Voltage Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Full Voltage 24V AC/DC
120V AC/DC
HT8F3V3
HT8F7V8
Transformer 120V AC HT8L1T1
Voltage Color Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Incandescent
6V
24V
120V
—
—
—
HT8BULBV1
HT8BULBV3
HT8BULBV7
LED
6 – 12V
(For use with transformers
with 6V secondary winding)
Red
Green
Amber/Orange
HT8LEDRF1
HT8LEDGF1
HT8LEDAF1
White/Clear
Yellow
Blue
HT8LEDWF1
HT8LEDYF1
HT8LEDBF1
24V Red
Green
Amber/Orange
HT8LEDRF3
HT8LEDGF3
HT8LEDAF3
White/Clear
Yellow
Blue
HT8LEDWF3
HT8LEDYF3
HT8LEDBF3
120V Red
Green
Amber/Orange
HT8LEDRF7
HT8LEDGF7
HT8LEDAF7
White/Clear
Yellow
Blue
HT8LEDWF7
HT8LEDYF7
HT8LEDBF7
Color Indicating Lights Price
U.S. $
PresTest Lights
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Price
U.S. $
Amber
Blue
Clear
Green
HT8LA
HT8LB
HT8LC
HT8LG
HT8BA
HT8BB
HT8BC
HT8BG
Red
White
Yellow
HT8LR
HT8LW
HT8LY
HT8BR
HT8BW
HT8BY
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-210
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Dimensions
Dimensions
Figure 47-136. Momentary Pushbuttons — Non-illuminated — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 47-137. Illuminated Pushbuttons — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4.60 (116.8)
Side View
Back View
Bottom View
1.40
(35.6)
Panel
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
3.70 (94.0)
2.90 (73.7) 0.90 (22.9)
Extended
0.75 (19.1)
Flush
2.00 (50.8)
1.00
(25.4)
2.00 (50.8)
Recommended 4 Stacks
(8 Contact Blocks Total)
Optional
2 Stacks
Back, Side and Bottom Views of Pushbutton Operator with Attached Contact Blocks
Recommended maximum of 4 tandem
stacks of contact blocks behind operator.
At users’ discretion, two additional tandem
stacks may be added.
Panel
Light Unit #6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
7 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
Contact Block
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
5.15 (130.8)
1.40
(35.6)
Side View
4.35 (110.5)
3.55 (90.2) 1.50
(38.1)
2.75 (69.9)
Back View
1.00
(25.4)
2.00 (50.8)
Bottom View
Recommended 4 Stacks
(8 Contact Blocks Total)
Optional
2 Stacks
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Back, Side and Bottom Views of Pushbutton Operator with Attached Contact Blocks
Recommended maximum of 4 tandem
stacks of contact blocks behind operator.
At users’ discretion, two additional tandem
stacks may be added.
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-211
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Dimensions
Figure 47-138. Mushroom Head Pushbuttons and Round Head MRH Push-Pull Operators — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 47-139. Illuminated and Non-illuminated Flat Head MRH Push-Pull Operators — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
4.60 (116.8)
Side View
1.40
(35.6)
Panel
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
3.70 (94.0)
2.90 (73.7)
1.50
(38.1)
2.00 (50.8)
Back View
1.00
(25.4)
2.00 (50.8)
Bottom View
Recommended 4 Stacks
(8 Contact Blocks Total)
Optional
2 Stacks
Back, Side and Bottom Views of Mushroom Head Operator with Attached Contact Blocks
Recommended maximum of 4 tandem
stacks of contact blocks behind operator.
At users’ discretion, two additional tandem
stacks may be added.
4.35 (110.5)
Side View
Back View
Bottom View
1.40
(35.6)
Panel
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Contact Block
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
Light Unit
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x22 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
7 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
3.55 (90.2)
2.75 (69.9)
1.30
(33.0)
1.00
(25.4)
2.00 (50.8)
Recommended 4 Stacks
(8 Contact Blocks Total)
Optional
2 Stacks
5.15 (130.8)
Back, Side and Bottom Views of Push-Pull Operator with Attached Contact Blocks
Recommended maximum of 4 tandem
stacks of contact blocks behind operator.
At users’ discretion, two additional tan-
dem stacks may be added.
Contact blocks mount directly to operator
adaptor in non-illuminated version.
January 2010
47-212
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Dimensions
Figure 47-140. Indicating Lights — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 47-141. Selector Switches— Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Back, Side and Bottom Views of Indicating Light Operator with Attached Contact Blocks
Side View
Back View
Bottom View
1.30
(33.0)
Panel
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x22 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
7 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
1.67
(42.4)
Light Unit
Assembly
1.26
(32.0)
1.68
(42.7)
Back, Side and Bottom Views of Selector Switch Operator with Attached Contact Blocks
Side View
Back View
Bottom View
1.40
(35.6)
Panel
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
2.90 (73.7) 1.20
(38.1)
2.00 (50.8)
1.00
(25.4)
2.00 (50.8)
Recommended
2 Stacks
(4 Contact Blocks Total)
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-213
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Dimensions
Figure 47-142. Mounting Matrix and Minimum Panel Spacing
Requirements in Inches (mm)
Figure 47-143. Legend Plates — Approximate Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
0.68
(17.3)
Optional Notch
Locations
1.20 (30.5)
Diameter
2.50
(63.5)
2.50 (63.5)
0.18 (4.6)
2.19
(55.6)
Jumbo
1.77
(45)
Standard
2.19
(55.6)
1.77
(45)
January 2010
47-214
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
HT800 Series, Catalog Number Structure
Catalog Number Structure
For deciphering Catalog Numbers. Not all combinations are suitable for ordering.
Table 47-346. HT800 Catalog Numbering System for Pushbuttons, Push-Pulls and Indicating Lights
Maximum of (4) contact blocks per side or a total of (8) contact blocks recommended.
Table 47-347. HT800 Selector Switch Catalog Numbering System
Maximum of (2) contact blocks per side or a total of (4) contacts blocks recommended.
H T 8 G B R A B T 1
Contact Block Location
(viewed from rear)
Left Side Right Side
A
A2
B1
B2
C
C2
D1
D2
E1
F1
F4
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NO
2NO
NC
2NC
NOEM
2 NOEM
NCLB
2 NCLB
NOEM-NCLB
NO & NC
1NO-1NC
A5
A6
B
B6
C5
C6
D
D6
E5
Q1
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NO
2NO
NC
2NC
NOEM
2 NOEM
NCLB
2 NCLB
NOEM-NCLB
NO & NC
Button Color
G= Green
H= Black
R= Red
Lens Color
A= Amber/Orange
B= Blue
C= Clear
G= Green
R= Red
W= White
Y= Yellow
Style
Pushbuttons
AA = Flush
AB = Extended
AE = Mushroomhead
Illuminated Pushbuttons
GB = Illuminated PB
Push-Pull Operators
CB = 2-Position, Maintained
Indicating Lights
HF = Full Voltage/Resistor Type
HB = Transformer Type
Push-to-Test Operators
GT = All Types
Light Unit Type/Voltage
F3 = 24V FV, LED
F7 = 120V FV, LED
L1 = 120V Transformer, LED
T1 = 120V Transformer, Incand.
V3 = 24V FV, Incand.
V7 = 120V Res., Incand.
H T 8 J A H 3A F 1 Q 1
Switch Color
H= Black
Style
Selector Switches
JA = 2-Pos., Knob, Maint.
JB = 3-Pos., Knob, Maint.
JC = 4-Pos., Knob, Maint.
JD = 2-Pos., Lever, Maint.
JE = 3-Pos., Lever, Maint.
JF = 4-Pos., Lever, Maint.
JK = 2-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Left
JL = 2-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Left
JN = 2-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Right
JP = 2-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Right
JR = 3-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Left
JS = 3-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Left
JU = 3-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Right
JV = 3-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Right
JX = 3-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Both
JY = 3-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Both
LN = 4-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Pos 1 to 2
LP = 4-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Pos 1 to 2
LR = 4-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Pos 4 to 3
LS = 4-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Pos 4 to 3
Contact Block Location
(viewed from rear)
Left Side Right Side
A
A2
B1
B2
C
C2
D1
D2
E1
F1
F4
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NO
2NO
NC
2NC
NOEM
2 NOEM
NCLB
2 NCLB
NOEM-NCLB
NO & NC
1NO-1NC
A5
A6
B
B6
C5
C6
D
D6
E5
Q1
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NO
2NO
NC
2NC
NOEM
2 NOEM
NCLB
2 NCLB
NOEM-NCLB
NO & NC
Cam Location/Type
1D – For all 3-Pos.
3A – For all 2-Pos.
8E – For all 4-Pos.
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-215
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T Heavy-Duty Oiltight and E34 Corrosion Resistant
Contents
Description Page
Product Description . . . . . . . . 47-215
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-216
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-216
Standards and
Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-216
Technical Data and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-217
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-218
Non-illuminated
Pushbuttons. . . . . . . . . . . 47-220
Illuminated Pushbutton
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-221
Indicating Light Units . . . . 47-223
Illuminated Pushbuttons
and Indicating Lights. . . . 47-224
Push-Pull Units. . . . . . . . . . 47-225
Illuminated Push-Pull
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-226
Push-Pulls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-229
Selector Switch Units . . . . 47-231
Selector Switch Selection . . 47-233
Selector Switch Operators . 47-235
Illuminated Selector
Switch Operators. . . . . . . 47-237
Description Page
Options
Contact Block and
Mounting Adapters . . . . . 47-239
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-240
Mounting and Assembly . . . . 47-241
Catalog Number
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-242
Product Description
All the Industry-Proven Quality of
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer® 10250T
and E34 Series of Logic Devices,
plus Class I Division 2 Certification
The 10250T1H consists of a normally
open-normally closed factory sealed
contact block that is UL Listed for use
in Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C and
D (NEC 500 – 503) — Class I, Zone 2, IIB
+ H2 (NEC 505) hazardous locations
and is rated for both NEMA A600 and
NEMA Q300. 10250T and E34 illumi-
nated components have also been UL
Listed for use in Class I, Division 2,
Groups B, C and D (NEC 500 – 503) —
Class I, Zone 2, IIB + H2 (NEC 505).
This, combined with the industry-
proven Cutler-Hammer 10250T
30.5 mm pushbutton line, offers a
complete solution to Division 2 hazard-
ous location requirements.
Single composite catalog numbers
for complete assembled stations and
operators for use in Division 2 hazardous
locations are featured throughout this
section.
Operator
The 30.5 mm 10250T pushbutton line
features a zinc die cast construction
with chrome-plated housing and
mounting nut.
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer E34 Series
30.5 mm pushbutton line features the
same rugged die cast construction of
our 10250T line with an additional two-
layer 100% solid thermosetting
cathodic epoxy coating. This coating
provides a flat black smooth, consis-
tent, corrosion resistant surface that
has passed a demanding 600 hour salt
spray test. (The industry standard for
this 4X test requires only 200 hours.)
Ultraviolet Light
E34 epoxy coating is not recom-
mended for use in applications where
exposure to ultraviolet light exists —
use NEMA 4X 10250T operators.
Ratings
Our Class I Division 2 line of pushbuttons
are UL Listed (NEMA type) 1, 2, 3, 3R,
4, 4X, 12 and 13. Our Class I Division 2
E34 line meets IEC 947-1 IP66 standards
and the cathodic coating meets FDA
3A sanitary chemical resistance
requirements. For a complete listing of
all applicable ratings see Page 47-217.
Class I Division 2
January 2010
47-216
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T Heavy-Duty Oiltight and E34 Corrosion Resistant
Liquid Drainage
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer pushbutton
operators offer front of panel drainage
via holes in the operator bushing. Hid-
den from view by the mounting nut,
these holes prevent buildup of liquid
inside the operator, which can prevent
operation in freezing environments.
The holes also provide a route for
escaping liquid in high pressure wash-
downs, effectively relieving pressure
from the internal diaphragm seal,
ensuring reliable sealing in applica-
tions even beyond NEMA 4.
Figure 47-144. Diaphragm Seal
10250T Grounding
10250T line operators have “grounding
nibs” — four metal points on the oper-
ator casting designed to bite through
most paints and other coatings on
metal panels to enhance the grounding
connection when the operator is
securely tightened.
10250T Grounding Nibs
E34 Grounding
E34 line of operators is equipped with
a ground screw terminal as part of its
die cast construction. This earthing
terminal provides an easily accessible
point for grounding operators when
used in a painted or nonmetallic enclo-
sure and eliminates the need for extra
kits when daisy chain grounding is
required.
E34 Grounding Nibs
Features
■Factory sealed contact blocks
■Heavy-duty zinc die cast construction
■NEMA rated 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
■Front-of-panel drainage holes
■Grounding nibs on the operator casing
■Solid thermosetting cathodic epoxy
coating on E34
■Corrosion resistance in E34
Benefits
■Pushbutton for hazardous locations
■Drainage holes prevent buildup of
liquid inside the operator which
can prevent operation in freezing
environments
■Grounding nibs bite through paint
and other coatings to provide
secure ground
■Suitable for corrosive environments
(E34 only)
■Earth terminal provides additional
grounding point and allows for
daisy chain grounding (E34 line)
Standards and Certifications
■UL 508 — File No. E131568
■UL 1604 — File No. E10323
■CSA Certified C22.2 No.14 —
File No. LR 68551
■CSA Certified C22.2 No. 213-M1987
— File No. LR 20713
Ingress Protection
■Standard Indicating Lights
❑UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X,
12, 13
❑IEC IP65
■All Other Operators
❑UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X,
12, 13
❑IEC IP65
Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
Drainage Hole
Drainage Hole
Flexible
Diaphragm
Stainless
Steel
Operating
Spring
Mounting Nut
Colorfast
Molded
Button
Nib
Earth
Terminal
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-217
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T Heavy-Duty Oiltight and E34 Corrosion Resistant
Technical Data and
Specifications
Mechanical Ratings
■Frequency of Operation
❑All pushbuttons: 6000 operations/hr.
❑Key and lever selector switches:
3000 operations/hr.
■Life
❑Pushbuttons: 10 x 106 operations
❑Contact block: 10 x 106 operations
❑Key and lever selector switches:
0.25 x 106 operations
■Shock Resistance
❑Duration/force: 20 mS ≥5g
Climatic Conditions
■Operating: 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
■Storage: -40° to 176°F (-40° to 80°C)
■Altitude: 6,562 ft. (2,000m)
■Humidity: Max. 95% RH @ 60°C
Terminals
Light Units
■Terminals are saddle clamp type
for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 sq. mm) to 2 x
14 AWG (4.0 sq. mm) conductors
■Torque = 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
■Degree of protection against direct
electrical contact: IP2X with finger-
proof shroud
Contact Blocks
■Terminals are Stainless Steel saddle
clamp type for 1 x 18 – 14 AWG
(0.75 – 2.5 sq. mm) solid or stranded
copper conductor
■Torque = 9 lb-in (1.0 Nm) with size 2
Phillips screwdriver
■Degree of protection against direct
electrical contact: IP2X with finger-
proof shroud
Electrical Ratings
Table 47-348. Contact Block
Light Units
■Bulbs — Average Life
❑Transformer type: 20,000 hrs.
❑Resistor/direct voltage type:
2,500 hrs. min. @ rated voltage
❑LED: 60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
Note: For additional technical information,
see Pub. TD.7.4.T.E.04.
All illuminated devices have operating
temperatures below 100°C except for
the following Catalog Numbers with
temperature codes per NEC table
500-5(d) and UL 1604:
Table 47-349. Temperature Codes
Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designations A600 and Q300
Description A600 (AC) Q300 (DC)
120V 240V 480V 600V 125V 250V
Make and Emergency
Interrupting Capacity (Amps)
60 30 15 12 0.55 0.27
Normal Load Break (Amps) 6 3 1.5 1.2 0.55 0.27
Thermal Current (Amps) 10 10 10 10 2.5 2.5
Voltamperes
Max. Make
Max. Break
7200
720
7200
720
7200
720
7200
720
69
69
69
69
10250T E34 Temp.
Code
10250T201H E34RB120H T3C
10250T202H E34RB240H T3A
10250T471H E34SB120H TC3
10250T472H E34SB240H T3B
10250T80H — T3C
10250T81H — T3B
All Selector Switches w/120MB Lamp T3C
All Illuminated Devices with
Lamp 1835
T4A
Mounting and Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-241
January 2010
47-218
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Momentary Pushbutton Units
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units
Table 47-350. Non-illuminated Flush and Extended Pushbuttons — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Color Selection
Table below. Example: 10250T706Y
Table 47-351. Non-illuminated Mushroom and Jumbo Mushroom Pushbuttons — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2,
Groups B, C and D
To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Color Selection
Table below. Example: 10250T710Y
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet applications.
Table 47-352. Color Selection Table Blue not available on Jumbo Mushroom
Pushbutton.
Orange is only available on Flush or
Extended Pushbuttons.
Red with EMERG. STOP engraved on button
head for Jumbo Mushroom Pushbutton
only.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators
where exposed to ultraviolet light.
Contact Type Button
Color
Flush Button Extended Button
10250T E34 10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1NO-1NC Black
Red
Green
10250T706B
10250T706R
10250T706G
E34EX706B
E34EX706R
E34EX706G
10250T708B
10250T708R
10250T708G
E34EX708B
E34EX708R
E34EX708G
2NO-2NC Black
Red
Green
10250T707B
10250T707R
10250T707G
E34EX707B
E34EX707R
E34EX707G
10250T709B
10250T709R
10250T709G
E34EX709B
E34EX709R
E34EX709G
Contact Type Button
Color
Mushroom Button Jumbo Mushroom Button
10250T E34 10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1NO-1NC Black
Red
Green
10250T710B
10250T710R
10250T710G
E34EX710B
E34EX710R
E34EX710G
10250T712B
10250T712R
10250T712G
E34EX712B
E34EX712R
E34EX712G
2NO-2NC Black
Red
Green
10250T711B
10250T711R
10250T711G
E34EX711B
E34EX711R
E34EX711G
10250T713B
10250T713R
10250T713G
E34EX713B
E34EX713R
E34EX713G
Color Suffix Code
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Orange
Red (EMERG. STOP)
B
R
G
Y
W
L
N
E
Accessories . . . . . Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Dimensions . . . . . . Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates. . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Discount Symbol. . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-219
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Momentary Pushbutton Units
Momentary Pushbutton Units (Continued)
■Momentary Contact
■Non-illuminated
■Booted or Guarded
Table 47-353. 10250T Pushbuttons Booted and Guarded — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Red Booted Flush Pushbutton is not recommended for STOP function.
To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Color Selection
Table below. Example: 10250T706YG
Table 47-354. E34 Pushbuttons Booted and Guarded — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Red Booted Flush Pushbutton is not recommended for STOP function.
To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Color Selection
Table below. Example: 10250T706YG
Table 47-355. Color Selection Table
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators
where exposed to ultraviolet light.
Contact Type Button Color Booted Flush Button Booted Extended Button Guarded Extended Button
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1NO-1NC Black
Red
Green
10250T706BB
10250T706RB
10250T706GB
10250T708BB
10250T708RB
10250T708GB
10250T706BG
10250T706RG
10250T706GG
2NO-2NC Black
Red
Green
10250T707BB
10250T707RB
10250T707GB
10250T709BB
10250T709RB
10250T709GB
10250T707BG
10250T707RG
10250T707GG
Contact Type Button Color Booted Flush Button Booted Extended Button Guarded Extended Button
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1NO-1NC Black
Red
Green
E34EX706BB
E34EX706RB
E34EX706GB
E34EX708BB
E34EX708RB
E34EX708GB
E34EX706BG
E34EX706RG
E34EX706GG
2NO-2NC Black
Red
Green
E34EX707BB
E34EX707RB
E34EX707GB
E34EX709BB
E34EX709RB
E34EX709GB
E34EX707BG
E34EX707RG
E34EX707GG
Color Suffix Code
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Orange
B
R
G
Y
W
L
N
Accessories . . . . . Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Dimensions. . . . . . Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Discount Symbol . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-220
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Momentary Pushbutton Components
Pushbuttons
Table 47-356. Non-illuminated Pushbuttons, Momentary Contact — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
To order operator with factory assembled Extended Retaining Nut, 10250TA12, for thick panel applications, add Suffix letter E to listed Catalog Number.
Table 47-357. Mushroom Head Non-illuminated Pushbuttons, Momentary Contact — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
Anodized aluminum head may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
Color Flush Button Extended Button Half Shrouded Button
10250T E34 10250T E34 10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Vertical Horizontal Price
U.S. $
Vertical Horizontal Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Gray
White
Blue
Orange
10250T101
10250T102
10250T103
10250T104
10250T105
10250T106
10250T108
10250T109
E34PB1
E34PB2
E34PB3
E34PB4
E34PB5
E34PB6
E34PB7
E34PB8
10250T111
10250T112
10250T113
10250T120
—
10250T116
10250T118
10250T119
E34EB1
E34EB2
E34EB3
E34EB4
E34EB5
E34EB6
E34EB7
E34EB8
10250T501
10250T502
10250T503
10250T504
10250T505
10250T506
10250T508
10250T509
10250T511
10250T512
10250T513
10250T514
10250T515
10250T516
10250T518
10250T519
E34EVB1
E34EVB2
E34EVB3
E34EVB4
E34EVB5
E34EVB6
E34EVB7
E34EVB8
E34EHB1
E34EHB2
E34EHB3
E34EHB4
E34EHB5
E34EHB6
E34EHB7
E34EHB8
Color Mushroom Button Anodized Aluminum Jumbo Mushroom Button
10250T E34 10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Black
Red
Red (EMERG. STOP)
Green
Yellow
Blue
10250T121
10250T122
—
10250T123
10250T124
10250T129
E34LB1
E34LB2
—
E34LB3
E34LB4
E34LB6
10250T171
10250T172
10250T17213
10250T173
10250T174
—
E34JB1
E34JB2
E34JB2N8
E34JB3
E34JB4
—
Accessories . . . . . Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Contact Blocks. . . Page 47-239
Dimensions . . . . . . Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates. . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Discount Symbol. . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-221
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Pushbutton Units
Illuminated Pushbutton Units
■Momentary Contact
■Illuminated
■Plastic Lenses
Table 47-358. Illuminated Pushbuttons — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined character in the Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Lenses Selection
Table below. Example: 10250T828YD24
Table 47-359. Lenses Selection Table
Lamp Type Voltage Color Contact 10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
LED/Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
LED/Lamp
Number
LED Full Voltage 24V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC 10250T828RD24
10250T828GD24
10250T828AD24
Bayonet
Base
E34EX828RD24
E34EX828GD24
E34EX828AD24
Bayonet
Base
120V AC Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC 10250T828RD2A
10250T828GD2A
10250T828AD2A
E34EX828RD2A
E34EX828GD2A
E34EX828AD2A
Transformer 120V AC Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC 10250T802RD06
10250T802GD06
10250T802AD06
E34EX802RD06
E34EX802GD06
E34EX802AD06
Bayonet
Base
6V AC
Incandescent Full Voltage 24V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC 10250T818RD
10250T818GD
10250T818AD
#757 E34EX818RD
E34EX818GD
E34EX818AD
#757
Resistor 120V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC 10250T824RD
10250T824GD
10250T824AD
120MB E34EX824RD
E34EX824GD
E34EX824AD
120MB
Transformer 120V AC Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC 10250T802RD
10250T802GD
10250T802AD
#755 E34EX802RD
E34EX802GD
E34EX802AD
#755
6V AC
10250T Color Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E34 Color Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Red
Green
Yellow
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
R
G
Y
A
L
C
W
10250TC21
10250TC22
10250TC23
10250TC43
10250TC24
10250TC25
10250TC26
Red
Green
Yellow
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
R
G
Y
A
L
C
W
E34V2
E34V3
E34V4
E34V9
E34V6
E34V0
E34V5
Additional Light
Units . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-224
Dimensions. . . . . . . Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates . . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-222
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Pushbutton Units
Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units
■Momentary Contact
■Guarded Illuminated
■Plastic Lenses
Table 47-360. Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined character in the Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Lenses Selection
Table below. Example: 10250T828YG24
Table 47-361. Lenses Selection Table
Lamp Type Voltage Color Contact 10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
LED/Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
LED/Lamp
Number
LED Full Voltage 24V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC 10250T828RG24
10250T828GG24
10250T828AG24
Bayonet
Base
E34EX828RG24
E34EX828GG24
E34EX828AG24
Bayonet
Base
120V AC Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC 10250T828RG2A
10250T828GG2A
10250T828AG2A
E34EX828RG2A
E34EX828GG2A
E34EX828AG2A
Transformer 120V AC Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC 10250T802RG06
10250T802GG06
10250T802AG06
E34EX802RG06
E34EX802GG06
E34EX802AG06
Incandescent Full Voltage 24V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC 10250T818RG
10250T818GG
10250T818AG
#757 E34EX818RG
E34EX818GG
E34EX818AG
#757
Resistor 120V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC 10250T824RG
10250T824GG
10250T824AG
120MB E34EX824RG
E34EX824GG
E34EX824AG
120MB
Transformer 120V AC Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC 10250T802RG
10250T802GG
10250T802AG
#755 E34EX802RG
E34EX802GG
E34EX802AG
#755
6V AC
10250T Color Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E34 Color Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Red
Green
Yellow
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
R
G
Y
A
L
C
W
10250TC21
10250TC22
10250TC23
10250TC43
10250TC24
10250TC25
10250TC26
Red
Green
Yellow
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
R
G
Y
A
L
C
W
E34V2
E34V3
E34V4
E34V9
E34V6
E34V0
E34V5
Additional Light
Units. . . . . . . . . . Page 47-224
Dimensions . . . . . . Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates. . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol. . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-223
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Indicating Light Units
Indicating Light Units
■Standard
■Plastic Lens
Table 47-362. Indicating Lights — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters in the Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from the Lenses Selection
Table below. Example: 10250T201HYP
Table 47-363. Lenses Selection Table
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
Lamp Type Voltage Color 10250T E34 LED/Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
LED Full Voltage 24V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
10250T197HLRP24
10250T197HLGP24
10250T197HLAP24
E34FB197HLRP24
E34FB197HLGP24
E34FB197HLAP24
Bayonet
Base
120V AC Red
Green
Amber
10250T197HLRP2A
10250T197HLGP2A
10250T197HLAP2A
E34FB197HLRP2A
E34FB197HLGP2A
E34FB197HLAP2A
Transformer 120V AC Red
Green
Amber
10250T181HLRP06
10250T181HLGP06
10250T181HLAP06
E34TB120HLRP06
E34TB120HLGP06
E34TB120HLAP06
Incandescent Full Voltage 24V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
10250T206HRP
10250T206HGP
10250T206HAP
E34FB24HRP
E34FB24HGP
E34FB24HAP
#757
Resistor 120V AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
10250T201HRP
10250T201HGP
10250T201HAP
E34RB120HRP
E34RB120HGP
E34RB120HAP
120MB
Transformer 120V AC Red
Green
Amber
10250T181HRP
10250T181HGP
10250T181HAP
E34HB120HRP
E34HB120HGP
E34HB120HAP
#755
Color 10250T E34
Plastic Glass Plastic Glass
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
RP
GP
AP
YP
LP
CP
WP
10250TC1N
10250TC2N
10250TC19N
10250TC3N
10250TC4N
10250TC5N
10250TC6N
RG
GG
AG
—
LG
CG
WG
10250TC7N
10250TC8N
10250TC9N
—
10250TC10N
10250TC11N
10250TC12N
RP
GP
AP
YP
LP
CP
WP
E34H2
E34H3
E34H9
E34H4
E34H6
E34H0
E34H5
RG
GG
AG
YG
LG
CG
WG
E34G2
E34G3
E34G9
E34G4
E34G6
E34G0
E34G5
Glass
Plastic
Additional Light
Units . . . . . . . . . Page 47-224
Dimensions. . . . . . Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-224
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Illuminated Pushbutton and Indicating Light Components
Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Table 47-364. Operators without Lens — NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color from the LED Selection Table on Page 47-230.
Resister units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
Table 47-365. Indicating Light Lens
Table 47-366. Illuminated Pushbutton Lenses
Light Unit
Type
Type Voltage Illuminated Pushbutton Indicating Light LED/Lamp
Number
10250T E34 10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
LED
(LEDs not
included)
Full Voltage — 10250T397HL E34CB497HL 10250T197HL E34FB197HL Bayonet
Base
Transformer
AC Only
24
120
240
277
380
480
600
10250T416HL
10250T411HL
10250T412HL
10250T419HL
10250T413HL
10250T414HL
10250T415HL
E34XB024HL
E34XB120HL
E34XB240HL
E34XB277HL
E34XB380HL
E34XB480HL
E34XB600HL
—
10250T181HL
10250T182HL
10250T198HL
10250T183HL
10250T184HL
10250T185HL
—
E34TB120HL
E34TB240HL
E34TB277HL
E34TB380HL
E34TB480HL
E34TB600HL
Incandescent Full Voltage
AC/DC
6
12
24
32
48
10250T473H
10250T474H
10250T476H
10250T477H
10250T478H
E34CB06H
E34CB12H
E34CB24H
E34CB32H
E34CB48H
10250T203H
10250T204H
10250T206H
10250T207H
10250T208H
E34FB06H
E34FB12H
E34FB24H
E34FB32H
E34FB48H
#755
#756
#757
#1828
#1835
Resistor
AC/DC
120
240
10250T471H
10250T472H
E34SB120H
E34SB240H
10250T201H
10250T202H
E34RB120H
E34RB240H
120MB
120MB
Transformer
AC Only
24
120
240
277
380
480
600
10250T416H
10250T411H
10250T412H
10250T419H
10250T413H
10250T414H
10250T415H
E34XB024H
E34XB120H
E34XB240H
E34XB277H
E34XB380H
E34XB480H
E34XB600H
—
10250T181H
10250T182H
10250T198H
10250T183H
10250T184H
10250T185H
—
E34TB120H
E34TB240H
E34TB277H
E34TB380H
E34TB480H
E34TB600H
#755
Neon
AC/DC
120
240
—
—
—
—
10250T226H
10250T227H
E34NB120H
E34NB240H
NE51H-R-22
NE51H-4-68
Plastic Color 10250T E34 Glass Color 10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250TC1N
10250TC2N
10250TC19N
10250TC3N
10250TC4N
10250TC5N
10250TC6N
E34H2
E34H3
E34H9
E34H4
E34H6
E34H0
E34H5
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250TC7N
10250TC8N
10250TC9N
—
10250TC10N
10250TC11N
10250TC12N
E34G2
E34G3
E34G9
E34G4
E34G6
E34G0
E34G5
E34
10250T
E34
10250T
Color 10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Red
Green
Yellow
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
10250TC21
10250TC22
10250TC23
10250TC43
10250TC24
10250TC25
10250TC26
E34V2
E34V3
E34V4
E34V9
E34V6
E34V0
E34V5
E34
10250T
Accessories . . . . . Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Contact Blocks . . . Page 47-239
Dimensions . . . . . . Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures. . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates . . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol. . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-225
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Push-Pull Units
Push-Pull Units
■Two- and Three-Position
■Non-illuminated
Table 47-367. 2-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Button and Color Selection Table
below. Example: 10250T714G
Table 47-368. 3-Position Maintained Push, Momentary Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Button and Color Selection Table
below. Example: 10250T716G
Table 47-369. 3-Position Momentary Push, Momentary Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Button and Color Selection Table
below. Example: 10250T718G
Table 47-370. Button and Color Selection Table
Operator Function (Position) Red Standard Push-Pull Contact
Type
Mounting Location
Maintained
(Pull)
Maintained
(Push)
10250T E34 1 2
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
O
X
X
O
10250T714R E34EX714R 1NO
1NC
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
10250T715R E34EX715R
2NO
2NC
Operator Function (Position) Red Standard Push-Pull Contact
Type
Mounting Location
Momentary
(Pull)
Maintained
(Intermediate)
Maintained
(Push)
10250T E34 1 2
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
O
X
O
O
X
O
10250T716R E34EX716R 1NO
1NC
X
X
O
X
O
O
10250T717R E34EX717R 1NC
1NC
Operator Function (Position) Red Standard Push-Pull Contact
Type
Mounting Location
Momentary
(Pull)
Maintained
(Intermediate)
Momentary
(Push)
10250T E34 1 2
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
O
X
O
O
X
O
10250T718R E34EX718R 1NO
1NC
X
X
O
X
O
O
10250T721R E34EX721R 1NC
1NC
Standard Color Suffix
Code
Catalog Number Price
U.S. $
Jumbo Mushroom Head
(Anodized) Aluminum
Color Suffix
Code
Catalog Number Price
U.S. $
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Black
Blue
R
E
G
B
L
10250TB62
10250TB63
10250TB61
10250TB60
10250TB64
E34C2
E34C2N8
E34C3
E34C1
E34C6
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Black
Yellow
RJ
EJ
GJ
BJ
YJ
10250TJ62
10250TJ63
10250TJ61
10250TJ60
10250TJ64
E34J2
E34J2N8
—
—
—
Accessories . . . . . . Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Dimensions. . . . . . . Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates . . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Discount Symbol . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-226
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
■Two-Position Maintained
■Illuminated
Table 47-371. 2-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2,
Groups B, C and D
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Lens and Color Selection Table
below. Example: 10250T851GS
Table 47-372. Lens and Color Selection Table
Operator Position Lamp Type Voltage Red Standard Push-Pull Contact
Type
Mounting Location
Maintained
— Pull
Maintained
— Push
10250T E34 1 2
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
O
X
X
O
LED Full Voltage 24V AC/DC 10250T853RD24 E34EX853RD24
1NO
1NC
120V AC 10250T853RD2A E34EX853RD2A
Transformer 24V AC 10250T843RD06 E34EX843RD06
120V AC 10250T844RD06 E34EX844RD06
O
X
X
O
Incan-
descent
Full Voltage 24V AC/DC 10250T849RD E34EX849RD
1NO
1NC
Resistor 120V AC/DC 10250T851RD E34EX851RD
Transformer 24V AC 10250T843RD E34EX843RD
120V AC 10250T844RD E34EX844RD
Color 10250T E34
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Standard
Red
Red
(EMER. STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
White
Clear
RD
ED
GD
LD
AD
WD
CD
10250TC47
10250TC53
10250TC48
10250TC49
10250TC50
10250TC51
10250TC52
RD
ED
GD
LD
AD
WD
CD
E34M2
E34M2N8
E34M3
E34M6
E34M9
E34M5
E34M0
Standard Side-Lighted
(Anodized)
Aluminum
HD Alum. with
Transparent Center
Color 10250T
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Side-Lighted (Anodized) Aluminum
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
Yellow
White
Clear
RS
ES
GS
LS
AS
YS
WS
CS
10250TC57
10250TC63
10250TC58
10250TC59
10250TC64
10250TC60
10250TC61
10250TC62
HD Alum. with Transparent Center
Red
Green
Amber
RH
GH
AH
10250TC65
10250TC66
10250TC67
Accessories . . . . . . Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Additional Light
Units. . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-224
Dimensions . . . . . . . Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures. . . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates. . . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol. . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-227
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Illuminated Push-Pull Units (Continued)
■Three-Position — Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
■Illuminated
Table 47-373. 3-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2,
Groups B, C and D
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Lens and Color Selection Table
on the bottom of Page 47-226. Example: 10250T862AS
Operator Position Lamp Type Voltage Red Standard Push-Pull Contact
Type
Mounting
Location
Momentary
— Pull
Maintained —
Intermediate
Maintained
— Push
10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
12
O
X
O
O
X
O
LED Full
Voltage
24V
AC/DC
10250T864RD24 E34EX864RD24
1NO
1NC
120V
AC
10250T864RD2A E34EX864RD2A
Trans-
former
24V
AC
10250T854RD06 E34EX854RD06
120V
AC
10250T855RD06 E34EX855RD06
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full
Voltage
24V
AC/DC
10250T875RD24 E34EX875RD24
1NC
1NC
120V
AC
10250T875RD2A E34EX875RD2A
Trans-
former
24V
AC
10250T865RD06 E34EX865RD06
120V
AC
10250T866RD06 E34EX866RD06
O
X
O
O
X
O
Incan-
descent
Full
Voltage
24V
AC/DC
10250T860RD E34EX860RD
1NO
1NC
Resistor 120V
AC
10250T862RD E34EX862RD
Trans-
former
24V
AC
10250T854RD E34EX854RD
120V
AC
10250T855RD E34EX855RD
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full
Voltage
24V
AC/DC
10250T871RD E34EX871RD
1NC
1NC
Resistor 120V
AC
10250T873RD E34EX873RD
Trans-
former
24V
AC
10250T865RD E34EX865RD
120V
AC
10250T866RD E34EX866RD
Accessories . . . . . Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Additional Light
Units . . . . . . . . . Page 47-224
Dimensions. . . . . . Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-228
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Illuminated Push-Pull Units (Continued)
■Three-Position Momentary
■Illuminated
Table 47-374. 3-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2,
Groups B, C and D
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Lens and Color Selection Table
on the bottom of Page 47-226. Example: 10250T884GD
Operator Position Lamp Type Voltage Red Standard Push-Pull Contact
Type
Mounting
Location
Momentary
— Pull
Maintained —
Intermediate
Maintained
— Push
10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
12
O
X
O
O
X
O
LED Full
Voltage
24V
AC/DC
10250T886RD24 E34EX886RD24
1NO
1NC
120V
AC
10250T886RD2A E34EX886RD2A
Trans-
former
24V
AC
10250T876RD06 E34EX876RD06
120V
AC
10250T877RD06 E34EX877RD06
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full
Voltage
24V
AC/DC
10250T897RD24 E34EX897RD24
1NC
1NC
120V
AC
10250T897RD2A E34EX897RD2A
Trans-
former
24V
AC
10250T887RD06 E34EX887RD06
120V
AC
10250T888RD06 E34EX888RD06
O
X
O
O
X
O
Incan-
descent
Full
Voltage
24V
AC/DC
10250T882RD E34EX882RD
1NO
1NC
Resistor 120V
AC
10250T884RD E34EX884RD
Trans-
former
24V
AC
10250T876RD E34EX876RD
120V
AC
10250T877RD E34EX877RD
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full
Voltage
24V
AC/DC
10250T893RD E34EX893RD
1NC
1NC
Resistor 120V
AC
10250T895RD E34EX895RD
Trans-
former
24V
AC
10250T887RD E34EX887RD
120V
AC
10250T888RD E34EX888RD
Accessories . . . . . Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Additional Light
Units. . . . . . . . . . Page 47-224
Dimensions . . . . . . Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates. . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol. . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-229
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Push-Pull Components
Push-Pull Operators
An illuminated Push-Pull pushbutton
unit, arranged for one-hole mounting,
can replace two pushbuttons and a
pilot light or the non-illuminated form
can replace two pushbuttons. These
units are available in three basic types:
■Maintained — (Two-Position). Main-
tains in the pulled or pushed position
until manually actuated to the oppo-
site mode.
■Momentary — (Three-Position).
Spring returns to an intermediate
position when pulled or pushed and
released.
■Momentary Pull, Maintained Push
— (Three-Position). Spring returns to
intermediate position when pulled.
Maintains in pushed position until
manually returned to intermediate
(ready to reset) position. Maintained
stop holds circuit open and will pre-
vent other series connected operators
from starting the system.
The Operators, Buttons, Contact Blocks,
etc., are offered as building block
components that can be intermixed to
satisfy many requirements. This mini-
mizes the need for a varied and costly
inventory.
Application Guide
To assist in the selection of contact
blocks, the sketch to the right shows
pictorially by symbols 1 and 2 loca-
tions of contact circuits after assembly
of contact blocks and adapter to the
operator. The chart below shows the
effect of the push and pull operations
on either NO or NC contacts.
(X = contact closed, O = contact open)
Figure 47-145. Locating Nibs
Table 47-375. Push-Pull Operator Components
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
2-Position Maintained Push-Pull
without Button on Lens
Catalog Number 10250T5
2-Position Maintained Push-Pull
without Button on Lens
Catalog Number E34GDB
Locating Nib
12
Type of Operator 10250T E34 Contact
Block
Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
Out — Pull Intermediate In — Push
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Contact Block Mounting Location
121212
2-Position Operator without Lens
Maintained Push-Pull 10250T5 E34GDB 1NO
1NC
O
X
O
X
No Intermediate
Position
X
O
X
O
2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
3-Position Operator without Lens
Momentary Push-Pull
Maintained Push-Momentary Pull
10250T4
10250T9
E34GEB
E34GFB
1NO
1NC
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
Momentary Push-Pull 10250T10 E34GHB 1NO
1NC
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
Button or Lens . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-230
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . Page 47-239
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-230
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Push-Pull Components
Push-Pull Operators (Continued)
Push-Pull Light Units, Lens and Buttons
Table 47-376. Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices —
NEC Class I Division 2 Groups B, C and D
These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens
color from Table 47-379.
Table 47-377. Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Table 47-378. Buttons for Non-illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Table 47-378. Buttons for Non-illuminated Push-Pull Devices
(Continued)
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use with ultraviolet light
applications.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet
light.
Table 47-379. LED Selection Table
For a complete listing of all LEDs available, see Page 47-157.
Light Unit
Type
Type Voltage Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
LED/Lamp
Number
LED
(LEDs not
included)
Full Voltage — 10250T97HL Bayonet
Base
Transformer
AC Only
50/60 Hz
24
120
208
240
277
380
480
600
10250T89HL
10250T63HL
10250T64HL
10250T65HL
10250T82HL
10250T66HL
10250T67HL
10250T68HL
Incandescent Full Voltage
AC or DC
6
12
24/28
32
10250T69H
10250T70H
10250T79H
10250T83H
#755
#756
#757
#1828
Resistor
AC or DC
120
240
10250T80H
10250T81H
120MB
Transformer
AC Only
50/60 Hz
24
120
208
240
277
380
480
600
10250T89H
10250T63H
10250T64H
10250T65H
10250T82H
10250T66H
10250T67H
10250T68H
#755
Color 10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Standard
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
White
Clear
10250TC47
10250TC53
10250TC48
10250TC49
10250TC50
10250TC51
10250TC52
E34M2
E34M2N8
E34M3
E34M6
E34M9
E34M5
E34M0
Side-Lighted Anodized Aluminum Ring
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
Yellow
White
Clear
10250TC57
10250TC63
10250TC58
10250TC59
10250TC64
10250TC60
10250TC61
10250TC62
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center
Red
Green
Amber
10250TC65
10250TC66
10250TC67
—
—
—
Color 10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Standard
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Black
Blue
10250TB62
10250TB63
10250TB61
10250TB60
10250TB64
E34C2
E34C2N8
E34C3
E34C1
E34C6
Color 10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Jumbo Mushroom Head (Anodized) Aluminum
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Black
Yellow
10250TJ62
10250TJ63
10250TJ61
10250TJ60
10250TJ64
E34J2
E34J2N8
—
—
—
Voltage Color Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
6V AC/DC
Suitable for
Use with
Transformers
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED006RN
E22LED006ON
E22LED006YN
E22LED006GN
E22LED006BN
E22LED006WN
12V AC/DC Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED012RN
E22LED012ON
E22LED012YN
E22LED012GN
E22LED012BN
E22LED012WN
24V AC/DC Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED024RN
E22LED024ON
E22LED024YN
E22LED024GN
E22LED024BN
E22LED024WN
48V AC/DC Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED048RN
E22LED048ON
E22LED048YN
E22LED048GN
E22LED048BN
E22LED048WN
60V AC/DC Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED060RN
E22LED060ON
E22LED060YN
E22LED060GN
E22LED060BN
E22LED060WN
120V AC Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED120RA
E22LED120OA
E22LED120YA
E22LED120GA
E22LED120BA
E22LED120WA
120V DC Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED120RD
E22LED120OD
E22LED120YD
E22LED120GD
E22LED120BD
E22LED120WD
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-239
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-231
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Selector Switch Units
Selector Switch Units
■Two- and Three-Position
■Non-illuminated
Table 47-380. 2-Position Selector Switch — Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the table on Page 47-232.
Example: 10250T722LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with T_ (cam)+_ (key removal position). Example: 10250T722T13
Table 47-381. 3-Position Selector Switch — Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Switch and Color Selection
Table on Page 47-232. Example: 10250T726LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with T_ (cam)+_ (key removal position).
Example: 10250T726T13
Operator Position Operator Action Black Knob — Selector Switch Contact
Type
Mounting Location Cam
Code
10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
12
X
O
O
X
10250T722BK E34EX722BK
1NC
1NO
1
10250T724BK E34EX724BK
X
O
X
O
O
X
O
X
10250T723BK E34EX723BK 1NC
1NO
1NC
1NO
1
10250T725BK E34EX725BK
Operator Position Operator Action Black Knob — Selector Switch Contact
Type
Mounting Location Cam
Code
10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
12
X
O
O
O
O
X
10250T726BK E34EX726BK
1NO
1NO
3
10250T728BK E34EX728BK
10250T730BK E34EX730BK
10250T732BK E34EX732BK
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
10250T727BK E34EX727BK
1NO
1NC-1NC
(Series)
1NO
3
10250T729BK E34EX729BK
10250T731BK E34EX731BK
10250T733BK E34EX733BK
MM
MS
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
Accessories . . . . . Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Additional Circuit
Arrangements . Pages 47-233 – 47-234
Dimensions. . . . . . Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Discount Symbol . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-232
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Selector Switch Units
Selector Switch Units (Continued)
■Four-Position Maintained
■Non-illuminated
Table 47-382. 4-Position Selector Switch — Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained.
To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Switch and Color
Selection Table below.
Example: 10250T743LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with T_ (cam) + _ (key removal position). Example: 10250T743T77
Table 47-383. Switch and Color Selection Table
Designed for added ingress protection. For use in maintained operators only.
10250T only.
Table 47-384. Key Operated Selection Table
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction
of arrow ().
Table 47-385. Key Removal Positions
Note: Key removal in “spring return from”
positions not recommended.
Figure 47-146. Key Removal Positions
Operator Position Operator Action Black Knob — Selector Switch Contact
Type
Mounting
Location
Cam
Code
10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
12
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
10250T743BK E34EX743BK 1NC
1NO
1NO
1NC
7
Color Knob Lever Lever
Coin Slot
Suffix
Code
Adder
U.S. $
Suffix
Code
Adder
U.S. $
Suffix
Code
Adder
U.S. $
Suffix
Code
Adder
U.S. $
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Gray
Blue
Orange
BK
RK
GK
YK
WK
AK
LK
NK
BL
RL
GL
YL
WL
AL
LL
NL
BA
RA
GA
YA
WA
AA
LA
NA
BC
RC
GC
YC
WC
AC
LC
NC
MM
MM
Number of
Position
Operator
Action
Suffix and Removal
Positions
2M M
M S
T1 + 1, 2, 3
T1 + 2
3M MM
S M M
S M S
M M S
T3 + 1 – 7
T3 + 1, 4, 5
T3 + 4
T3 + 2, 4, 6
4 MMMM T7 + 7
Code
Suffix
Key
Removal
Positions
Code
Suffix
Key
Removal
Positions
1
2
3
4
Right Only
Left Only
Right & Left
Center Only
5
6
7
Right & Center
Left & Center
All Positions
Accessories . . . . . Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Additional Circuit
Arrangements . Pages 47-233 – 47-234
Dimensions . . . . . . Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates. . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Discount Symbol. . 1CD1C
L
C
R
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-233
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Selector Switch Selection
Selector Switch Selection
Cam and Contact Block Selection
Selector switches in their varied forms
(2-position, 3-position, and 4-position)
are a big factor contributing to the
great flexibility of control that a well
rounded line of “pushbuttons” can
achieve. Because of their flexibility, they
tend to cause difficulty with product
selection and application. The following
systematic approach should simplify
that task.
Cam and contact block selection is
better understood if you:
■Work with each incoming and out-
going wire/circuit separately.
■Recognize the terms NO and NC
only identify the type of contact by
its mode before mounting to the
operator. The “X-O” table (Page 47-
234) shows how that contact will act
after assembly to the operator with
the selected cam shape.
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
■One NO-NC contact block may be
mounted behind each plunger of the
mounting adapter for a total of four
circuits.
■Each cam has two separate lobes,
each of which operates one of the
two contact block plungers indepen-
dently of each other. Those are
identified as position 1 (locating nib
side) and position 2 (opposite of
locating nib). The position designa-
tions give direction in selecting and
mounting of the contact blocks (see
Figure 47-147).
Figure 47-147. Contact Circuit Locations
Systematic Approach
Application: HAND-OFF-AUTO Selector
Switch. In this circuit, one incoming
line is distributed to two other outgoing
circuits by the switch. The two circuits
can be looked at individually.
Step 1: Elementary Diagram.
Construct on paper, or in your mind, a
simple elementary diagram of the
switching scheme as follows:
Step 2: “X-O” Pattern.
From the elementary diagram, you can
construct an “X-O” diagram which
describes when the contacts are to be
closed (X) or open (O) in the various
positions of the switch. The “X-O” for
the HAND circuit looks like this:
In this circuit, you want a contact
closed on the left (HAND) but open in
the center and right.
For the AUTO circuit, the “X-O” diagram
would look like this:
Putting them together, the complete
“X-O” diagram is:
Once the “X-O” diagram has been
generated, the next step is to select the
cam and contact block, or blocks,
needed to perform the desired “X-O”
functions. The selection table on the
following page lists the various types
(shapes) of cams by number to choose
from and the type of contact and posi-
tion to achieve the function outlined in
your “X-O” diagram.
Step 3: Cam Selection.
The cam you select determines the
operation of all contact blocks mounted
to the operator. It is selected on the
basis that it provides the simplest cir-
cuitry for the desired “X-O” diagram.
The selection tables of the following
page show all the “X-O” combinations.
For the purpose of this example, the
applicable portion of those tables is
shown in Table 47-386.
Table 47-386. Example Selection Table
Wired in series.
Now to make the cam selection, make
a simple worksheet such as below.
(1) or (2) = mounting location from chart
above:
It becomes obvious that cam 3 is the
better choice because the series con-
nection can be avoided, making it
simpler to wire.
Step 4: Contact Block Selection.
Having selected the cam, contact block
selection is simply a matter of deter-
mining if you require one NO-NC contact
block (Cat. No 10250T1H) or two. Given
the limitations of the factory sealed
contact block and the desired “X-O”
application, you may have circuits that
will not be needed — as seen here
with the two additional NC circuits.
(1) or (2) = mounting location from chart
above.
Step 5: Selector Switch Operator.
Lastly, you have to choose from the
many types of operators — knob and
lever in various colors or keyed. Also
what combinations of maintained and
spring return functions are required.
Selection of these operators can be
found on Page 47-235. For the above
example you may want a 3-position
maintained black knob, cam 3 —
Catalog Number 10250T1323 (or
34VHBK1).
The Complete Switch: 10250T1323 (or
34VHBK1) with two 10250T1H or for
one composite catalog number —
10250T726BK (or E34EX726BK) found
on Page 47-231.
10250T E34
Locating Nib
12
OFF
HAND Outgoing
Circuit
AUTO
Outgoing
Circuit
Incoming
Line
HAND OFF AUTO
XOO
HAND OFF AUTO
OOX
X O O
O O X
No. Desired
Circuit &
Operator
Position
Cam Code #2 Cam Code #3
Contact
Blocks &
Mounting
Location
Contact
Blocks &
Mounting
Location
1212
1XOO
4OOX
NO NC NO
NO NO
Cam 2 Cam 3
X O O
O O X
(1)NO – (2)NC
(2)NC
(1)NO
(2)NO
Qty Catalog No. Cam 3
2 10250TIH (1)NO (2)NC
(1)NC (2)NO
January 2010
47-234
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Selector Switch Selection
Selector Switch Selection (Continued)
Circuits shown illustrate connections to obtain a selector
circuit combination and are shown with their appropriate
line diagrams in BOLD. Field wiring of jumper connections
required as shown.
X = Closed Circuit, O = Open Circuit
Table 47-387. 2-Position Selector Switch
Table 47-388. 3-Position Selector Switch
Table 47-389. 4-Position Selector Switch
Number Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Cam Code #1
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
12
1XO
2OX
No. Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Cam Code #2 Cam Code #3
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
1212
1XOO
2XXO
3 XOX
4OOX
5OXX
6 OXO
or
or
NC NC
NO NO
NO (Series) NC NO
NC NC
NO NO (Parallel) NO
NO NO
NC (Parallel) NO NC
NC NC (Series) NC
Number Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Cam Code #7
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
12
1 XOOO
2 OXOO
3 OOXO
4 OOOX
5XOOX
6OXXO
7OOXX
8XXOO
9 OXOX
10 XOXO
NC
NO
NO
NC
NC (Parallel) NC
NO (Parallel) NO
NO (Parallel) NC
NC (Parallel) NO
NO/NC
(Parallel)
NO/NC
(Parallel)
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-235
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
January 2010
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T Series, Selector Switch Components
Selector Switch Operators
10250T Selector Switch Operators with Caps
Table 47-390. 10250T Selector Switch Operators with Caps — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see
selection instructions and table on Pages 47-233 – 47-234.
Field convertible to Horizontal Mounting or order operator only and separate operator cap.
Table 47-391. 10250T Key Operators with Cam — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see
selection instructions and table on Pages 47-233 – 47-234.
Choose key removal position required for application from Table 47-392. Add key removal Code
No. to listed Catalog Number. Example: 10250T15112.
Positions Operator Action Black Knob Selector Switch
— Vertical Mounting
Black Lever Selector Switch
— Vertical Mounting
Cam
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Cam
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
2-Position —
60° Throw
110250T1311 110250T3011
110250T1371 110250T3071
3-Position —
60° Throw
2
3
10250T1322
10250T1323
2
3
10250T3022
10250T3023
2
3
10250T1332
10250T1333
2
3
10250T3032
10250T3033
2
3
10250T1342
10250T1343
2
3
10250T3042
10250T3043
2
3
10250T1352
10250T1353
2
3
10250T3052
10250T3053
4-Position —
40° Throw
710250T1367 710250T3067
Positions Operator
Action
Cam
Code
Optional
Key Removal
Positions
Vertical Mounting Horizontal Mounting Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2-Position —
60° Throw
1 1, 2, 3 10250T1511_ 10250T1611_
12 10250T1571_ 10250T1581_
3-Position —
60° Throw
2
3
1 – 7 10250T1522_
10250T1523_
10250T1622_
10250T1623_
2
3
1, 4, 5 10250T1532_
10250T1533_
10250T1632_
10250T1633_
2
3
410250T1542_
10250T1543_
10250T1642_
10250T1643_
2
3
2, 4, 6 10250T1652_
10250T1653_
10250T1662_
10250T1663_
4-Position —
40° Throw
77 10250T1677_ 10250T1687_
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
Table 47-392. Key Removal Positions
Note: Key removal in “spring return from”
positions not recommended.
Figure 47-148. Key Removal Positions
Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for
Above Key Operators
Listed operators have identical locks
and keys (Key Code H661) Catalog
Number 10250ED824.
Table 47-393. Replacement Keys
Code
Suffix
Key
Removal
Positions
Code
Suffix
Key
Removal
Positions
1
2
3
4
Right Only
Left Only
Right & Left
Center Only
5
6
7
Right & Center
Left & Center
All Positions
Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Replacement Keys
(Code H661)
10250ED824
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-239
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
L
C
R
January 2010
47-236
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
E34 Series, Selector Switch Components
Selector Switch Operators (Continued)
Table 47-394. E34 Selector Switch Operators with Knob Assembled —
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper
circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-233 –
47-234.
Field convertible to Horizontal Mounting.
For other colors of either knob or lever, replace the underlined charac-
ters of the Catalog Number with the appropriate Suffix Code from
Alternate Knob and Lever Table below. Example: E34VFBL2
Table 47-395. E34 Key Operators with Cam and Cap —
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper
circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-233 –
47-234.
Choose key removal position required for application from Table 47-396.
Add key removal Code No. to listed Catalog Number. Example: E34KFB2
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet
light, see Page 47-235.
Table 47-396. Key Removal Positions
Note: Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.
Figure 47-149. Key Removal Positions
Table 47-397. Alternate Knobs and Levers for Operators Above
For use on maintained operators only.
Positions Operator
Action
Black Knob Selector Switch —
Vertical Mounting
Cam Code Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
2-Position
— 60° Throw
1E34VFBK1
1E34VEBK1
3-Position
— 60° Throw
2
3
E34VGBK1
E34VHBK1
2
3
E34VJBK1
E34VKBK1
2
3
E34VLBK1
E34VMBK1
2
3
E34VNBK1
E34VPBK1
4-Position
— 40° Throw
7E34VTBK1
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
Positions Operator
Action
Cam
Code
Key
Removal
Positions
Vertical
Mounting
Horizontal
Mounting
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2-Position
— 60°
Throw
1 1, 2, 3 E34KFB_ E34KFHB_
12 E34KEB_ E34KEHB_
3-Position
— 60°
Throw
2
3
1 – 7 E34KGB_
E34KHB_
E34KGHB_
E34KHHB_
2
3
1, 4, 5 E34KJB_
E34KKB_
E34KJHB_
E34KKHB_
2
3
4E34KLB_
E34KMB_
E34KLHB_
E34KMHB_
2
3
2, 4, 6 E34KNB_
E34KPB_
E34KNHB_
E34KPHB_
4-Position
— 40°
Throw
77 E34KTB_ E34KTHB_
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Positions
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Positions
1
2
3
4
Right Only
Left Only
Right & Left
Center Only
5
6
7
Right & Center
Left & Center
All Positions
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
L
C
R
Color Knob Lever Lever Designed
for Added Ingress
Protection
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
E34K1
E34K2
E34K3
E34K4
E34K5
E34K6
E34K7
E34K8
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
E34L1
E34L2
E34L3
E34L4
E34L5
E34L6
E34L7
E34L8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
E34A1
E34A2
E34A3
E34A4
E34A5
E34A6
E34A7
E34A8
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-239
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-237
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T Series, Selector Switch Components
Illuminated Selector Switch
Operators
Table 47-398. 10250T Illuminated Selector Switch Operator Only without Knob or Lever
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
For selection of the proper cam and contact block, to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection table on Page 47-234.
Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page 47-157.
Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
Table 47-399. Knobs, Levers
Amber, Clear and White lenses have a black
arrow (pointer), Red, Green and Blue lenses
have a white arrow (pointer).
2-Position Maintained
120V AC Transformer
Selector Switch,
Cam Code 1
Catalog Number
10250T5971
Positions Operator Action Transformer Type — 50/60 Hz Full Voltage Type — AC or DC
6 Volt #755 Lamp Lamps: 6V — #755, 12V — #756, 24V — #757,
48V — #1835, 120/240V — 120MB
Voltage Cam
Code
Catalog and
Code Number
Price
U.S. $
Voltage Cam
Code
Catalog and
Code Number
Price
U.S. $
2-Position – 60° Throw 24
120
208
240
380
480
600
110250T5961H
10250T5971H
10250T6511H
10250T5981H
10250T5991H
10250T6001H
10250T6011H
6
12
24
48
120
240
110250T6201H
10250T6211H
10250T6221H
10250T6231H
10250T6361H
10250T6371H
3-Position – 60° Throw 24
120
208
240
380
480
600
+ 2 or 3 10250T602_H
10250T603_H
10250T652_H
10250T604_H
10250T605_H
10250T606_H
10250T607_H
6
12
24
48
120
240
+ 2 or 3 10250T624_H
10250T625_H
10250T626_H
10250T627_H
10250T638_H
10250T639_H
120
240
+ 2 or 3 10250T620_H
10250T656_H
120 + 2 or 3 10250T622_H
120
240
+ 2 or 3 10250T621_H
10250T662_H
120 + 2 or 3 10250T623_H
24
120
208
240
380
480
600
+ 2 or 3 10250T614_H
10250T615_H
10250T653_H
10250T616_H
10250T617_H
10250T618_H
10250T619_H
6
12
24
48
120
240
+ 2 or 3 10250T628_H
10250T629_H
10250T630_H
10250T631_H
10250T640_H
10250T641_H
4-Position – 40° Throw 24
120
208
240
380
480
600
710250T6087H
10250T6097H
10250T6547H
10250T6107H
10250T6117H
10250T6127H
10250T6137H
6
12
24
48
120
240
710250T6327H
10250T6337H
10250T6347H
10250T6357H
10250T6427H
10250T6437H
MM
MM
M
MS
M
MS
M
SS
M
MM
MM
Color Catalog and Code Number Price
U.S. $
Knob Lever
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
Amber
10250TER
10250TEG
10250TEA
10250TEL
10250TEC
10250TEW
10250TEM
10250TFR
10250TFG
10250TFA
10250TFL
10250TFC
10250TFW
10250TFM
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-239
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
47-238
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
E34 Series, Selector Switch Components
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators (Continued)
Table 47-400. E34 Illuminated Selector Switch Operator Only without Knob or Lever
Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
For selection of the proper cam and contact block required to obtain a specific circuit sequence, see selection table on Page 47-234.
Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page 47-157.
120MB lamps are used on both 120V and 240V operators.
Replace underscore with proper voltage Suffix Code from Light Unit Voltage Suffix Table below. Example: 3-position maintained with 120V trans-
former type light unit: E34VGB120H
120 and 240V transformer only.
120 full voltage only.
Table 47-401. Light Unit Voltage Suffix — Add to operator Catalog
Number listed in table above.
Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by
changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page 47-157.
Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
Table 47-402. Knobs, Levers
Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer). Red, green
and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet
light, see Page 47-237.
Positions Operator Action Transformer Type — 50/60 Hz Full Voltage Type — AC or DC
6 Volt #755 Lamp Lamps — #755, #757, #1835, 120MB
Catalog Number Price
U.S. $
Catalog Number Price
U.S. $
2-Position — 60° Throw Cam Code 1 Cam Code 1
E34VFB_H E34SFB_H
3-Position — 60° Throw Cam Code 2 Cam Code 3 Cam Code 2 Cam Code 3
E34VGB_H E34VHB_H E34SGB_H E34SHB_H
E34VNB_H E34VPB_H E34SNB_H E34SPB_H
E34VJB_H E34VKB_H E34SJB_H E34SKB_H
E34VLB_H E34VMB_H E34SLB_H E34SMB_H
4-Position — 40° Throw E34VRB_H — E34SRB_H —
2-Position Maintained 120V AC
Transformer Selector Switch, Cam 1
Catalog Number E34VFB120
MM
MM
M
MS
M
MS
M
SS
M
MM
MM
Type of Light Unit
Transformer Type
50/60 Hz
Full Voltage Type
AC or DC
Voltage Suffix Code Voltage Suffix Code
24
120
208
240
380
024
120
208
240
380
6
12
24
48
120
06
12
24
48
120
480
600
480
600
240 240
Color Catalog Number
and Code Number
Price
U.S. $
Knob Lever
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
Amber
10250TER
10250TEG
10250TEA
10250TEL
10250TEC
10250TEW
10250TEM
10250TFR
10250TFG
10250TFA
10250TFL
10250TFC
10250TFW
10250TFM
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-239
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-239
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Contact Blocks and Mounting Adapters
Options
Contact Blocks and Mounting Adapters
Table 47-403. Contact Block — NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Table 47-404. Mounting Adapter
Table 47-405. Mounting Adapters with Contact Block(s) — Overpacked — NEC Class I Division 2 Groups B, C and D
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions in Inches (mm). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.
Figure 47-150. Contact Block Figure 47-151. Mounting Adapter
Units Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1NO-1NC Class I Div. 2 Factory Sealed Contact Block 10250T1H
Units Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Mounting Adapter for Pushbuttons 10250TD2
Mounting Adapter for Selector Switches 10250TD3
Units Description Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Pushbutton Adapter with 1NO-1NC 10250TD21H
Pushbutton Adapter with 2 (1NO-1NC) 10250TD21H1H
Selector Switch Adapter with 1NO-1NC 10250TD31H
Selector Switch Adapter with 2 (1NO-1NC) 10250TD31H1H
Contact Block
Catalog Number 10250T1H
Mounting Adapter
Catalog Number 10250TD2
1.43
(36.3)
1.70
(43.2)
1.02
(25.9)
1.72
(43.7)
0.84
(21.3)
Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-217
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
0.44
(11.2)
1.23
(31.2)
1.85
(47.0)
1.86
(47.2)
1.88
(47.8) 0.25
(6.4)
2.57
(65.3)
January 2010
47-240
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Enclosures
Enclosures
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
Table 47-406. Enclosures (Case and Cover) — Surface Mounting
For spacing increments, see Page 47-154.
14 gauge, type 304.
Table 47-407. Approximate Dimensions
No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.
Application Notes:
1. Operators need to be mounted in
their horizontal orientation for all
enclosures. For die cast enclosures
remove locating nib on operators
and use thrust washer (Catalog
Number 10250TK3).
2. Polyester enclosures must be
used when mounting illuminated
operators.
Figure 47-152. Enclosure Layouts
Number of
Elements
10250T E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Cast Enclosure — Deep Cover — In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13
1
2
3
4
10250TN11
10250TN12
10250TN13
10250TN14
E34N11
E34N12
E34N13
E34N14
Polyester — In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
E34N51
E34N52
E34N53
E34N54
Stainless Steel — In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
10250TN33
10250TN34
10250TN35
10250TN36
Number
of
Elements
Element
Arrange-
ment
Surface Mounting Conduit
Entrance
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
DE
Cast
1
2
3
4
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
4.0 (101.6)
5.88 (149.4)
7.75 (196.9)
9.63 (244.6)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
3.25 (82.6)
5.13 (130.3)
7.0 (177.8)
8.88 (225.6)
3/4
3/4
1
1
Polyester
1
2
3
4
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
6.63 (168.4)
6.63 (168.4)
8.88 (225.6)
11.13 (282.7)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
4.88 (124.0)
4.88 (124.0)
7.13 (181.1)
9.38 (238.3)
Stainless Steel
1
2
3
4
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
3.00 (76.2)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
6.75 (171.5)
9.00 (228.6)
11.25 (285.8)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
4.25 (108.0)
7.50 (190.5)
9.00 (228.6)
12.00 (304.8)
Die Cast
Enclosure
Catalog Number 10250TN11
Polyester
Enclosure
Catalog Number E34N52
Stainless Steel
Enclosure
Catalog Number 10250TN35
A
Surface
DC
B
E
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester
111
Top – For Vertical Mounting
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
1
222
33
4
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-241
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Mounting Options
Mounting and Assembly
Panel Thickness
■Minimum: 0.06 inch (1.6 mm)
■Maximum: 0.25 inch (8 mm) including legend plate
■Maximum can be increased to 0.375" (15.9 mm) using
optional retaining nut
❑Indicating Light: 10250TA30/E34TA30
❑Pushbutton/Selector Switch: 10250TA31/E34TA31
Table 47-408. Mounting Matrix
Figure 47-153. Panel Spacing and Drilling Drawings
Figure 47-154. Operator Assembly
Legend
Plate
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
ABCD
Small 2.87 (72.6) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.87 (72.6)
Jumbo 2.87 (72.6) 2.32 (58.6) 2.32 (58.6) 2.87 (72.6)
Extra Large 2.87 (72.6) 2.56 (65.2) 2.52 (64.1) 2.87 (72.6)
Notch for
Locating Nib
Notch for
Locating Nib
.60
(15.2)
ø.14
(ø3.4)
ø1.2
(ø30.5)
“B” Min.
“A” Min.
Terminals for
Light Unit
Drilling for One Hole Mounting
and Dimensions for Minimum
Spacing in Vertical Rows.
“D” Min.
“C” Min.
Terminals for
Light Unit
Drilling for One Hole Mounting
and Dimensions for Minimum
Spacing in Horizontal Rows.
.19
(5.0)
.67
(17.0) ø1.2
(ø30.5)
NOTE: Suitable for Use
in This Alternate
Mounting Hole.
Nameplate
Retaining Nut
5 lb-ft (6.8 Nm)
Panel
0.06" – 0.25"
(1.6 – 8 mm)
with Optional
Retaining Nut
Up to 0.375"
(15.9 mm)
Thrust
Washer
(Optional)
Lens
Washer
Illuminated
Pushbutton
Indicator
Light
Push/Pull
Light Unit
Lamp
E34 Earth
Terminal
Operator
Gasket
Operator
Terminal Clamp:
One or Two Copper Conductors
22 – 12 AWG (0.34 – 4.0 mm2)
7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Contact Block
Mounting Adapter
RATINGS ARE STAMPED
ON LIGHT UNIT
AND CONTACT BLOCK
Terminal Clamp:
Single Copper Conductor
18 – 14 AWG (0.75 – 2.5 mm2)
9 lb-in (1.0 Nm)
Contact Block
January 2010
47-242
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
10250T/E34 Series, Catalog Number Structure
Catalog Number Structure
10250T/E34 Series
Table 47-409. Non-illuminated Assembled Operators — Class I Division 2 Catalog Numbering System
Contact
Blocks
2
1
Adapter
Locating
Nib
Mounting Nut
Legend Plate
Gasket Operator
1 0 2 5 0 T 7 1 8 E J
Button Color
B =
R =
G =
Y =
W =
L =
N =
E =
T =
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Orange
Red EMERG STOP
Keyed-SS
Operator Type
10250T =
E34EX =
Heavy-Duty Oiltight
Corrosion Resistant Oiltight
ACC/SS Type
Blank =
J =
B =
G =
K =
L =
A =
C =
__ __
None
JMB Push-Pull
Booted-FL/EXT
Guarded-FL
Knob-SS
Lever-SS
Lever W/IP-SS
Coin-SS
Keyed-SS
Cam
1
2
3
7
Operator and Contact Block
706 =
707 =
708 =
709 =
710 =
711 =
712 =
713 =
714 =
715 =
716 =
717 =
718 =
721 =
722 =
723 =
724 =
725 =
726 =
727 =
728 =
729 =
730 =
731 =
732 =
733 =
743 =
Flush 1NO-1NC
Flush 2NO-2NC
Extended 1NO-1NC
Extended 2NO-2NC
Mushroom 1NO-1NC
Mushroom 2NO-2NC
JMB Mushroom 1NO-1NC
JMB Mushroom 2NO-2NC
2P MT Push-Pull 1NO-1NC
2P MT Push-Pull 2NO-2NC
3P MT Push-Mom Pull 1NO-1NC
3P MT Push-Mom Pull 2NO-2NC
3P Mom Push-Pull 1NO-1NC
3P Mom Push-Pull 2NO-2NC
2P SS MT XO,OX-CAM1
2P SS MT XO,OX,XO,OX-CAM1
2P SS SPR-R XO,OX-CAM1
2P SS SPR-R XO,OX,XO,OX-CAM1
3P SS MT XOO,OOX-CAM3
3P SS MT XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
3P SS SPR-L XOO,OOX-CAM3
3P SS SPR-L XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
3P SS SPR-L&R XOO,OOX-CAM3
3P SS SPR-L&R XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
3P SS SPR-R XOO,OOX-CAM3
3P SS SPR-R XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
4P SS MT XOOO,OXOO,OOXO,OOOX-CAM7
Key Removal
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
RT Only
LT Only
RT & LT
CT Only
RT & CT
LT & CT
All
January 2010
CA08102001E For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-243
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Ratings
NEC 500 – 505, Class I Division 2
Summary of NEC Article 500
The NEC Article 500 explains in great
detail the requirements for the installa-
tion of wiring and electrical equipment
in hazardous locations. The purpose of
this summary is for general reference
only, the National Electric Code along
with other applicable authorities having
jurisdiction over the site should be the
installer’s guidelines when wiring or
installing electrical equipment in any
hazardous or potentially hazardous
location.
Class I, Division 2 Definition
Class I, Division 2 covers hazardous
locations where flammable gases,
vapors or volatile liquids are handled
either in a closed system, or confined
within suitable enclosures, or where
hazardous concentrations are normally
prevented by positive mechanical ven-
tilation. Areas adjacent to Division 1
locations, into which gases might
occasionally flow, would also belong
to Division 2 (NEC (500-5[b])).
Hazardous Location
Any area where there is the possibility
of explosion and fire resulting from
the presence of flammable vapors,
liquids or gas, or combustible dust or
fibers.
Summary of NEC Article 505
The NEC also classifies hazardous
locations for flammable gases and
vapors into zones under NEC 505. This
system is more in line with the Euro-
pean Standards, CENELEC and IEC,
with the major difference being that
NEC 505 only classifies gases and
vapors while CENELEC and IEC also
include dusts.
Summary of Classifications — NEC 500 – 503
Note: For additional information on grouping of compounds, see NFPA 497M-1991 and
NFPA 325-1994.
Summary of Classifications — NEC 505
Class Division Group
I. Gas 1. Hazard may exist —
May exist in atmosphere
under normal operating
conditions
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and manufactured gases containing
30% hydrogen by volume (e.g. butadiene,
ethylene oxide, propylene oxide)
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. carbon monoxide, ether,
ethylene, hydrogen sulfide, morpholine,
cyclopropane)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. gasoline, benzene, butane,
propane, acetone, ammonia, vinyl chloride)
2. Potential hazard —
May be present in
atmosphere only under
abnormal circumstances
OR location adjacent
to Class I, Division 1
location
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and manufactured gases containing
30% hydrogen by volume (e.g. butadiene,
ethylene oxide, propylene oxide)
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. carbon monoxide, ether,
ethylene, hydrogen sulfide, morpholine,
cyclopropane)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. gasoline, benzene, butane,
propane, acetone, ammonia, vinyl chloride)
II. Dust 1. Hazard may exist —
May exist in atmosphere
under normal operating
conditions
E. Conductive and combustible dust (resistivity
<105 ohm/cm) (metal dusts)
F. Carbonaceous dusts (resistivity >102 ohms/cm
but ≤108 ohms/cm) (e.g. carbon black, coke dust,
coal)
G. Non-conductive combustible dust (resistivity
≥105 ohms/cm) (e.g. grain dust, flour, starch,
sugar, plastics)
2. Potential hazard —
May be present in
atmosphere only under
abnormal circumstances
F. Carbonaceous dusts (resistivity >102 ohms/cm
but ≤108 ohms/cm) (e.g. carbon black, coke dust,
coal)
G. Non-conductive combustible dust (resistivity
≥105 ohms/cm) (e.g. grain dust, flour, starch,
sugar, plastics)
III. Fibers 1. Production areas Easily ignitable fibers or flyings
2. Handling and storage
areas
Easily ignitable fibers or flyings
Class Zone Group
I. Gas 0. Continuously present or
present for long periods
of time
IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard
IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard
IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline,
methane, propane or equivalent hazard
IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard1. Likely to exist under
normal operating or
maintenance conditions
or adjacent to Zone 0
IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard
IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline,
methane, propane or equivalent hazard
2. Not likely to occur in
normal operation and if
they do occur will only
exist for short period or
adjacent to Zone 1
IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard
IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard
IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline,
methane, propane or equivalent hazard
January 2010
47-244
For more information visit: www.eaton.com CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47
Ratings
Class I Division 2
Summary of Basic Methods Available for Class I, Division 2 Locations
Figure 47-155. Factory Sealed Contact Blocks Figure 47-156. Hermetically Sealed Reed Contact Block
Figure 47-157. Explosion Proof Enclosure
Method Features
Configuration Advantages Disadvantages
Factory Sealed Contact Block Closed-ended labyrinth contact
block with an incendive circuit
incapable of external ignition
• Higher continuous carrying amperages —
up to 10A
• Direct drive contacts — contacts can be
forced open
• Suitable for use in all enclosures
• Best suited for motor control applications
• May not be suitable for logic level
circuits
Hermetically Sealed Block Reed switch sealed against an
external atmosphere
• Suitable for low energy level circuits
• Suitable for use in all enclosures
• Lower continuous carrying amperages
are not suitable for motor control applica-
tions (typically 3A to 5A rated)
• Contacts cannot be forced open
• Permanent magnet attracts metallic dust
and filings that can reduce the electrical
creepage distance between live terminals
Explosion Proof Enclosures
(Class I, Division 1 and 2)
Enclosures capable of with-
standing an internal explosion
while preventing external igni-
tion. Enclosures designed for
Class I, Div. 1 can safely be used
in Class I, Div. 2
• Higher level of protection than required
for Class I Division 2
• Higher material and installation costs
• Conduit sealing is still required
• Time consuming maintenance
Direct Drive Contacts
Contacts can be
mechanically forced
apart if subject to an
arch/fault current.
Cooled
Escaping
Gas
Internal
Ignition
•
Hermetically sealed
reed does not allow
external atmosphere to
enter switching chamber.
Depression of plunger
rotates magnet and either
opens/closes contacts.
Contacts can not be
forced apart if subject to
arch/fault current, because no
mechanical connection exists.
Cooled
Escaping
Gas
Threaded Joint Flat Joint
Internal
Ignition Internal
Ignition Cooled
Escaping
Gas
